You are on page 1of 476

PC-PRO+® Advanced

System

User's Manual
Proprietary Rights Information
This document contains the trade secrets and confidential information of Itron, Inc., which are not to be
divulged to third parties and may not be reproduced or transmitted in whole or part, in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical for any purpose, without the express written permission of Itron, Inc. All
rights to designs or inventions disclosed herein, including the right to manufacture, are reserved to Itron,
Inc.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Itron, Inc. reserves the
right to change the product specifications at any time without incurring any obligations.
• PC-PRO+, CENTRON, QUANTUM, SENTINEL, VECTRON, MV-90, and Itron are registered
trademarks of Itron, Inc.
• Field-Pro, Shop-Pro, HH-Pro, EnergyAudit, MeterKey, Protocol Editor, and SiteScan are trademarks
of Itron, Inc.
• Abacus Electrics is a trademark of Abacus Electrics.
• Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• GE is a registered trademark and Smartcoupler is a trademark of General Electric Company.
• Lantronix is a registered trademark and XPort is a trademark of Lantronix, Inc.
• Olectra Chart and ComponentOne Chart are trademarks of ComponentOne LLC.
• Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• Windows, Microsoft, and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Other brands or product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
PC-PRO+® Advanced System User's Manual
Part Number: TDC-1062-002
Itron, Inc. Itron, Inc.
Corporate Headquarters Electricity Metering – U.S.
2111 North Molter Road 313-B North Highway 11
Liberty Lake, WA 99019 West Union, SC 29696
U.S.A. U.S.A.
Tel: (509) 924-9900 Tel: (864) 638-8300
Fax: (509) 891-3355 Fax: (864) 638-4950
www.itron.com Copyright© 1995 - 2009
Itron, Inc.
All rights reserved.

Itron Contact Information


You can reach Systems Support for Itron Electricity Metering products as shown in the following table.
Location E-mail Phone Fax
US and Global meter.support@itron.com 877.487.6602 864.638.4950

Canada meter.support@itron.com 800.218.9633 905.812.5028

Mexico soporte.mxca@itron.com 52 (55) 5292.6240 52 (55) 5292.6239


Table of Contents

Proprietary Rights Information ............................................................................................................. ii


Itron Contact Information ..................................................................................................................... ii

Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System ........................................................... 1


System Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 1
Devices Supported ............................................................................................................................. 1
General System Overview .................................................................................................................. 2
Client Systems .................................................................................................................................... 3
PC-PRO+ Advanced Documentation Set ........................................................................................... 4
User Manuals ........................................................................................................................... 4
Using PC-PRO+ Advanced Help ............................................................................................. 5
Help for Metering Devices ........................................................................................................ 5
Help File and User's Manual Locations .................................................................................... 5
Itron Secure Website ................................................................................................................ 6
About This Manual .............................................................................................................................. 6
Using this Manual ..................................................................................................................... 8

Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults ..................................... 9


What is the System Manager? ........................................................................................................... 9
Starting the System Manager................................................................................................. 10
System Logon ........................................................................................................................ 10
Using the System Manager User Interface ...................................................................................... 11
Using the System Manager Navigation Tree ......................................................................... 12
Entering a New Value in the System Manager ...................................................................... 12
Using the System Manager Menus ........................................................................................ 12
System Manager File Menu ......................................................................................... 12
System Manager Edit Menu ........................................................................................ 12
System Manager Help Menu ....................................................................................... 12
Using the System Manager Toolbar ...................................................................................... 13
Defining System Default Values ....................................................................................................... 13
To Define Settings and Defaults ............................................................................................ 13
Defining Default Kh Values .................................................................................................... 14
Defining Standard Kh Values ................................................................................................. 15
Defining Default P/DR Values (200-Series) ........................................................................... 16
Defining Default Pulse Weight Values ................................................................................... 17
Defining Default Phone Home Numbers ................................................................................ 19
Defining Default CT Ratios ..................................................................................................... 20
Defining Default VT Ratios ..................................................................................................... 21
Defining Default Display Format ............................................................................................ 22
Defining Default Device Security Codes .......................................................................................... 23
How Device Security Codes Are Used .................................................................................. 23
Overriding Security Codes ..................................................................................................... 24
CENTRON Device Security Codes ........................................................................................ 24
CENTRON (C12.19) Device Security Codes ......................................................................... 26
CSH-SysMgr-CENTRON II C12.19 Device Security Codes .................................................. 27
CENTRON (V&I) Device Security Codes ............................................................................... 28
DATA STAR Device Security Codes ..................................................................................... 30
200 Series Device Security Codes ........................................................................................ 31
FULCRUM Device Security Codes ........................................................................................ 32
Q1000 Device Security Codes ............................................................................................... 33
User's Manual iii
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

QUANTUM Device Security Codes........................................................................................ 34


SENTINEL Device Security Codes ........................................................................................ 35
VECTRON Device Security Codes ........................................................................................ 37
Defining Programming Options ........................................................................................................ 38
CENTRON Programming Options ......................................................................................... 38
CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options .......................................................................... 40
CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options ................................................................................ 43
DATA STAR Programming Options ....................................................................................... 46
200 Series Programming Options .......................................................................................... 47
FULCRUM Programming Options.......................................................................................... 50
Q1000 Programming Options ............................................................................................... 51
QUANTUM Programming Options ......................................................................................... 54
SENTINEL Programming Options.......................................................................................... 56
VECTRON Programming Options......................................................................................... 58
Configuring DST Change Dates ...................................................................................................... 61
To Define DST Change Dates ............................................................................................... 61
Avoiding DST Clock Reset Problems .................................................................................... 61
DST Dialog ............................................................................................................................. 63
Defining Field-Pro Settings ............................................................................................................... 64
Field-Pro Setup Overview ...................................................................................................... 65
Setting Up the Master Station File Upload Directory ................................................... 65
To Define Field-Pro Settings ........................................................................................ 65
Field-Pro Settings - All Devices.............................................................................................. 66
Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options ........................................................................................ 68
Customizable User Interface .................................................................................................. 69
Defining System Security ................................................................................................................. 71
Security Features ................................................................................................................... 72
To Authorize Features for Each User Access Group .................................................. 73
Security for Access Groups .................................................................................................... 73
To Edit Access Group Information ............................................................................... 74
Security for Users ................................................................................................................... 75
To Add a New User ...................................................................................................... 76
To Modify User Information ......................................................................................... 76
Using System Replication................................................................................................................. 77
Replica File Compatibility ....................................................................................................... 77
Replication Process Overview ............................................................................................... 77
Replica File Contents ............................................................................................................. 78
Replica File Settings .............................................................................................................. 79
Select Programs ..................................................................................................................... 81
Creating a Replica File ........................................................................................................... 81
To Create a Replica File .............................................................................................. 82
Loading a Replica File ............................................................................................................ 82
To Load a Replica File ................................................................................................. 83
Automatically Creating Replica Files ..................................................................................... 83
Loading a Replica File from a Command Line ....................................................................... 84
Defining Meter Change Out Settings ................................................................................................ 84
To Define Meter Change Out Settings ................................................................................... 84
Meter Change Out Settings .................................................................................................... 85
Defining HH-Pro Settings ................................................................................................................. 86
Meter Specific Installation and Maintenance Operations ................................................................. 87
HH-Pro Settings Dialog .......................................................................................................... 87
Devices Supported by HH-Pro ............................................................................................... 91

Data Manager ............................................................................................................... 93


Defining Programs Using the Data Manager.................................................................................... 94
Starting the Data Manager ..................................................................................................... 94
User's Manual iv
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

System Logon .............................................................................................................. 95


Using the Itron Button .................................................................................................. 95
Customizing the Data Manager ................................................................................... 96
Navigating Data Manager ............................................................................................ 97
Meter Programs...................................................................................................................... 97
Creating a New Program ............................................................................................. 99
New Program ............................................................................................................... 99
Opening an Existing Program .................................................................................... 100
Deleting a Program .................................................................................................... 100
Delete Program .......................................................................................................... 100
Comparing Programs ................................................................................................. 101
Meter Program Comparison ...................................................................................... 102
Importing a Program .................................................................................................. 102
Import Programs ........................................................................................................ 104
Exporting a Program .................................................................................................. 105
Export Program .......................................................................................................... 106
View Dependencies ................................................................................................... 106
Program Dependencies ............................................................................................. 107
Meter Programs (CENTRON II C12.19) .............................................................................. 108
Data File Viewer (CENTRON II C12.19) .............................................................................. 109
Device Status (CENTRON II C12.19) ........................................................................ 110
Configuration Data ..................................................................................................... 111
Register Data (CENTRON II C12.19) ........................................................................ 111
Load Profile Data (CENTRON II C12.19) .................................................................. 112
Voltage Monitoring Data (CENTRON II C12.19) ....................................................... 113
Event Data (CENTRON II C12.19) ............................................................................ 116
Service Switch (CENTRON II C12.19) ...................................................................... 119
Field Descriptions ...................................................................................................... 120
Service Limiting Failsafe ...................................................................................................... 120
Field Descriptions ...................................................................................................... 120
Site Scan Toolbox Data ............................................................................................. 121
Firmware Download Log ............................................................................................ 122
Meter Data Files (CENTRON II C12.19) .............................................................................. 122
Moving files ................................................................................................................ 122
Deleting files .............................................................................................................. 122
Change Data Directory .............................................................................................. 123
Create Report for EDL Files ...................................................................................... 123
Create MV-90 HHF from EDL Files ........................................................................... 124
Reverse Engineer Program ....................................................................................... 125
TOU Schedules .................................................................................................................... 125
Creating a New Schedule .......................................................................................... 127
Opening a Schedule .................................................................................................. 127
Import TOU Schedule ................................................................................................ 128
Export TOU Schedule ................................................................................................ 128
Deleting a TOU Schedule .......................................................................................... 129
Confirm Deletion ........................................................................................................ 130
Comparing TOU Schedules ....................................................................................... 130
TOU Schedule Comparison ....................................................................................... 131
Opening a Default TOU Schedule ............................................................................. 131
View TOU Dependencies .......................................................................................... 132
Time of Use Dependencies ....................................................................................... 132
Editing Holiday Lists................................................................................................... 133
Firmware Files (CENTRON II C12.19) ................................................................................. 133
Import Firmware ......................................................................................................... 134
Custom Schedules ............................................................................................................... 134
Creating a New Custom Schedule ............................................................................. 136

User's Manual v
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Opening a Custom Schedule ..................................................................................... 136


Deleting a Custom Schedule ..................................................................................... 136
Confirm Custom Schedule Deletion........................................................................... 137
Comparing Custom Schedules .................................................................................. 137
Custom Schedule Comparison .................................................................................. 138
View Custom Schedule Dependencies...................................................................... 139
Custom Schedule Dependencies .............................................................................. 139
Display Files ......................................................................................................................... 140
New Display ............................................................................................................... 141
Open Display ............................................................................................................. 142
Deleting Displays ....................................................................................................... 142
Delete Display ............................................................................................................ 142
Viewing Display Dependencies ................................................................................. 143
View Display Dependencies ...................................................................................... 143
Service Points ...................................................................................................................... 144
Creating New Service Points ..................................................................................... 146
Creating a Service Point Dialog ................................................................................. 146
Creating New Networks ............................................................................................. 148
Creating a New Network Dialog ................................................................................. 148
Editing an Existing Network ....................................................................................... 149
Edit Network Dialog ................................................................................................... 150
Edit Service Point....................................................................................................... 151
Edit Service Point Dialog ........................................................................................... 151
Deleting Service Points .............................................................................................. 153
Delete Service Points Dialog ..................................................................................... 153
Connect to Service Point ........................................................................................... 154
Protocol Files........................................................................................................................ 154
Opening Protocol Editor ............................................................................................. 156
Managing Metering Data Using Reports ........................................................................................ 156
Report Specifications ........................................................................................................... 157
Creating a New Specification ..................................................................................... 158
Opening a Specification ............................................................................................. 158
Deleting a Specification ............................................................................................. 158
Meter Image Files ................................................................................................................ 159
Open MIF ................................................................................................................... 162
Moving MIF files ......................................................................................................... 162
Move MIF ................................................................................................................... 162
Deleting MIF files ....................................................................................................... 163
Delete MIF ................................................................................................................. 163
Create Report for MIF Files ....................................................................................... 164
Create MV-90 HHF from MIF Files ............................................................................ 165
Reverse Engineer Program ....................................................................................... 166
Join Files .................................................................................................................... 168
Totalization ................................................................................................................. 170
MV-90 HHF Files .................................................................................................................. 178
MV-90 HHF Filters ..................................................................................................... 180
HHF Filter Selection ................................................................................................... 181
Moving files ................................................................................................................ 181
Move Files .................................................................................................................. 181
Deleting files .............................................................................................................. 182
Delete MV-90 HHF..................................................................................................... 182
Create Report for MV-90 HHF Files .......................................................................... 183
Reports ................................................................................................................................. 184
Opening a Report....................................................................................................... 186
Moving Reports .......................................................................................................... 187
Moving a Report......................................................................................................... 187
Deleting Reports ........................................................................................................ 188

User's Manual vi
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Deleting a Report ....................................................................................................... 188


Sending an E-mail...................................................................................................... 189

Meter Configuration Editor ....................................................................................... 190


Configuration Overview .................................................................................................................. 190
Time ................................................................................................................................................ 190
TOU ................................................................................................................................................ 190
Energy Quantities and Demand Quantities .................................................................................... 191
Demand Quantities ......................................................................................................................... 192
Register Operations ........................................................................................................................ 193
General ................................................................................................................................. 194
Demand Thresholds ............................................................................................................. 195
Self Read.............................................................................................................................. 196
Billing Schedule .................................................................................................................... 196
Test Mode ............................................................................................................................ 197
Device Multipliers ........................................................................................................................... 197
Load Profile .................................................................................................................................... 198
General ................................................................................................................................. 198
Channels .............................................................................................................................. 199
Voltage Monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 200
Operation ................................................................................................................... 200
User Data........................................................................................................................................ 201
Meter Display .................................................................................................................................. 202
Display Items ........................................................................................................................ 202
Normal Display Mode................................................................................................. 203
Alternate Display Mode .............................................................................................. 203
Test Display Mode ..................................................................................................... 203
Adding and Removing Display Items ................................................................................... 203
Display Options .................................................................................................................... 204
Events ............................................................................................................................................. 206
Communications ............................................................................................................................. 206
SiteScan ......................................................................................................................................... 207
General Settings .................................................................................................................. 207
Diagnostic 1 (Cross-Phase, Polarity, Energy Flow Error) .................................................... 208
Diagnostic 2 (Phase Voltage Deviation Error) ..................................................................... 208
Diagnostic 3 (Inactive Phase Current Error) ........................................................................ 208
Diagnostic 4 (Phase Angle Displacement Error).................................................................. 208
SiteScan Service Type ......................................................................................................... 209
SiteScan Service Sensing Delay.......................................................................................... 210
Service Switch and Service Limiting .............................................................................................. 210
LED ................................................................................................................................................. 212

Creating and Using Program Files ........................................................................... 215


PC-PRO+ Advanced System Overview ......................................................................................... 215
PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Group .................................................................................. 215
Starting the Program Editor .................................................................................................. 216
Using the Program Editor Main Window .............................................................................. 217
Supported Meter Device Types............................................................................................ 219
Calculated Quantities ........................................................................................................... 219
Using the Program Editor Menus ................................................................................................... 220
File Menu.............................................................................................................................. 220
Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................. 221
Program Menu...................................................................................................................... 221
Help Menu ............................................................................................................................ 221
User's Manual vii
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Programming Support for Metering Devices .................................................................................. 221


Working with Program Files............................................................................................................ 222
Select Device Type .............................................................................................................. 222
Select a Program File ........................................................................................................... 223
Saving a Program File to a New Name ................................................................................ 223
Deleting a Program File ....................................................................................................... 224
Creating a New Program File ......................................................................................................... 224
To Create a Program File ..................................................................................................... 225
Creating a Default Program File ..................................................................................................... 227
To Open and Display an Existing Program File ............................................................................. 227
Browse Programs ................................................................................................................. 228
Viewing Program Components ....................................................................................................... 229
Modifying and Saving Program Files .............................................................................................. 230
Copying Information to the Clipboard ............................................................................................. 230
Printing............................................................................................................................................ 230
Printing Program Content or Meter Data ............................................................................. 231
Printing Dialog ...................................................................................................................... 232
Selecting Printers and Options............................................................................................. 232
System Replication and Backup ..................................................................................................... 232
Setting Up an Additional PC-PRO+ Advanced System ....................................................... 233
Quitting PC-PRO+ Advanced ......................................................................................................... 233

Using the TOU Calendar Editor ................................................................................ 234


Implementing Time of Use.............................................................................................................. 234
To Implement TOU ............................................................................................................... 234
Calendar Years .................................................................................................................... 235
TOU Schedule Features for Device Types .......................................................................... 235
Menus and Options ........................................................................................................................ 236
TOU File Menu ..................................................................................................................... 236
TOU Options Menu .............................................................................................................. 237
Time of Use Color Selections .................................................................................... 237
Meter Selections ........................................................................................................ 237
TOU Edit Menu..................................................................................................................... 238
TOU Help Menu ................................................................................................................... 238
Using a TOU Schedule ................................................................................................................... 239
Creating and Editing TOU Schedules .................................................................................. 239
Using Existing Custom Schedules ............................................................................. 240
New Schedule ............................................................................................................ 241
Open TOU Schedule.................................................................................................. 243
Schedule Description ................................................................................................. 243
TOU Schedule Properties .......................................................................................... 244
Adding Rates and Outputs ................................................................................................... 244
Rates and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 244
Creating Day Types ............................................................................................................. 246
Available Day Types .................................................................................................. 246
Using the Day Viewer ........................................................................................................... 247
Day Viewer ................................................................................................................. 247
Adding Daily Patterns ........................................................................................................... 248
Daily Patterns ............................................................................................................. 248
Daily Pattern .............................................................................................................. 249
Add Switchpoint ......................................................................................................... 251
Creating a New Season ....................................................................................................... 251
Season Definitions ..................................................................................................... 252
Insert Season ............................................................................................................. 252
Edit Season ................................................................................................................ 253
Edit the Season Start Date ........................................................................................ 254
User's Manual viii
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Rolling off Years ................................................................................................................... 255


Roll Off Years ............................................................................................................. 255
Adding a Holiday List ........................................................................................................... 256
Apply Holiday List ...................................................................................................... 257
Insert Holiday ............................................................................................................. 257
Extending a TOU Calendar .................................................................................................. 258
Extend Calendar ........................................................................................................ 258
Saving a TOU Schedule ....................................................................................................... 259
Save As ...................................................................................................................... 259
Save a TOU Schedule for FCS ............................................................................................ 260
Deleting a TOU Schedule .................................................................................................... 260
Delete TOU Schedule ................................................................................................ 260
Printing TOU Schedule Reports ........................................................................................... 261
Creating a Default Schedule........................................................................................................... 261
Editing Default Schedule Parameters .................................................................................. 261
To Edit the Default Schedule .......................................................................................................... 262
Creating Holiday Lists in Holiday List Editor................................................................................... 262
Creating a New Holiday List ................................................................................................. 263
Add New Holiday List or Rename Holiday List .................................................................... 264
Inserting a Holiday ............................................................................................................... 265
Deleting a Holiday ................................................................................................................ 265
Deleting a Holiday List ......................................................................................................... 265
TOU Calendar Editor Internal Errors .............................................................................................. 266

Using the Display Editor ........................................................................................... 268


Basic Tasks .................................................................................................................................... 268
Starting the Display Editor.................................................................................................... 268
Creating a Display File ......................................................................................................... 269
Editing a Display File ............................................................................................................ 273
Opening a Display File ......................................................................................................... 273
Saving a Display File As ...................................................................................................... 274
Setting Display Editor Options ........................................................................................................ 274
Defining Default Display Formats......................................................................................... 274
Default Display Formats............................................................................................. 276
Defining the Default Date Format......................................................................................... 277
Date Formats ............................................................................................................. 277
Display Editor Functions ................................................................................................................. 277
Display Description .............................................................................................................. 278
Adding an Item to a Display List........................................................................................... 278
Add Display Item (Register) ................................................................................................. 279
Add Display Item (Non-Register) ......................................................................................... 280
Add Coincident Register ...................................................................................................... 281
Add Time of Occurrence Item .............................................................................................. 281
Add Peak Register ............................................................................................................... 281
Select Quantity (Register Item) ............................................................................................ 282
Select Quantity ..................................................................................................................... 283
Select Display Type ............................................................................................................. 283
Selecting a Display File ........................................................................................................ 283
Editing Display Files ............................................................................................................. 284
Edit Display Item (Non-Register).......................................................................................... 286
Editing a Register ................................................................................................................. 286
Deleting Display Files ........................................................................................................... 287
Printing and Viewing Reports ......................................................................................................... 287
Printing Reports ................................................................................................................... 288
Report Options ..................................................................................................................... 289
User's Manual ix
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Print Format.......................................................................................................................... 289


Menus and Options ........................................................................................................................ 289
File Menu.............................................................................................................................. 290
Display Menu........................................................................................................................ 291
Options Menu ....................................................................................................................... 291
View Menu............................................................................................................................ 292
Help Menu ............................................................................................................................ 292

Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor .............................................. 293


Custom Schedules Overview ......................................................................................................... 293
Schedule Description ........................................................................................................... 293
Repeating Schedules ..................................................................................................................... 294
Insert Repeating Pattern ...................................................................................................... 294
Non-Repeating Schedules.............................................................................................................. 295
Creating a Non-Repeating Schedule ................................................................................... 295
Editing an Existing Custom Schedule Dialog ................................................................................. 296
Saving a Custom Schedule ............................................................................................................ 296
Printing Schedule Reports .............................................................................................................. 297
Closing a Custom Schedule ........................................................................................................... 297
Initializing a Meter to Use a Custom Schedule............................................................................... 297

Using the Report Designer ....................................................................................... 299


Opening the Report Designer ......................................................................................................... 299
Report Designer Options ................................................................................................................ 300
Ribbon Control ..................................................................................................................... 300
Application Menu .................................................................................................................. 300
New ............................................................................................................................ 300
Open .......................................................................................................................... 300
Save ........................................................................................................................... 300
Save As ...................................................................................................................... 300
Close .......................................................................................................................... 301
Delete ......................................................................................................................... 301
About .......................................................................................................................... 301
Exit ............................................................................................................................. 301
Page Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 301
Data Selection ................................................................................................................................ 302
Channels .............................................................................................................................. 302
Calculated Channels ............................................................................................................ 304
Demand Calculations ........................................................................................................... 305
Display Scale........................................................................................................................ 308
Display Digits........................................................................................................................ 308
Display Increments ............................................................................................................... 308
Report Contents ............................................................................................................................. 308
Profile Summary ................................................................................................................... 309
Peak Data............................................................................................................................. 309
Daily Summaries .................................................................................................................. 309
TOU Summary ..................................................................................................................... 309
Interval Data Listing ............................................................................................................. 310

Using the Communication Manager......................................................................... 311


Introduction to the Communication Manager ................................................................................. 311
Opening a Program File ....................................................................................................... 311
File Menu.............................................................................................................................. 311

User's Manual x
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................. 312


Program Menu...................................................................................................................... 312
Communications Menu ........................................................................................................ 312
Options Menu ....................................................................................................................... 313
Help Menu ............................................................................................................................ 313
Setup Requirements for Your Computer ........................................................................................ 313
Configuring COM Ports and Modems .................................................................................. 313
Configuring New PCs................................................................................................. 313
Port Configuration ...................................................................................................... 313
Selecting a COM Port ................................................................................................ 315
Selecting a Modem .................................................................................................... 317
Editing Port Configuration Properties ........................................................................ 319
Removing a COM Port or Modem ............................................................................. 320
Channel Properties: COM Channel Tab .................................................................... 320
Modem Properties: TAPI Channel Tab ...................................................................... 321
Channel Properties: General Tab .............................................................................. 322
Channel Properties: Raw Properties Tab .................................................................. 323
Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog ................................................................................ 323
Transformer Options Dialog ................................................................................................. 324
System Manager Application ............................................................................................... 326
Communicating With Meters .......................................................................................................... 326
Communication Functions for Devices ................................................................................ 326
Connecting the PC and Meter ................................................................................... 327
Logging on to a Device .............................................................................................. 328
Logon Dialog - Manual Connection ........................................................................... 329
To Log On Using a Manual Connection..................................................................... 332
Logon Dialog - Manual Connection, Ethernet ............................................................ 333
To Log on Using an Ethernet Manual Connection ..................................................... 335
Logon Dialog - Address Book Tab ............................................................................. 336
To Log On Using the Address Book .......................................................................... 337
Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing ................................ 338
Connect to Next Dialog .............................................................................................. 339
QDIP Logon Settings Dialog ...................................................................................... 340
Creating the Logon Address Book ....................................................................................... 340
Saving Connection Settings in the Address Book ..................................................... 340
Edit Service Point Dialog ........................................................................................... 340
Edit Standalone Service Point ................................................................................... 341
Edit Network Service Point ........................................................................................ 342
Edit Ethernet Service Point ........................................................................................ 343
Edit Network ............................................................................................................... 346
Multiple Custom Schedules Dialog ............................................................................ 347
Importing and Exporting an Address Book ................................................................ 347
Backing Up the Address Book ................................................................................... 347
Connecting to Multi-Drop Network Meters ................................................................. 347
Loop Multi-Drop Configurations ................................................................................. 348
Additional Multi-drop Network Configuration Diagrams ............................................. 349
Creating a Service Point ............................................................................................ 350
Selecting the Network ................................................................................................ 352
To Create a Standalone Service Point ...................................................................... 352
Create Service Point Dialog ....................................................................................... 353
Add Standalone Dialog .............................................................................................. 356
To Create an Ethernet Service Point ......................................................................... 358
Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet ...................................................................... 359
To Create a Multi-drop Network Service Point .......................................................... 362
Select Network (Multi-drop) Dialog ............................................................................ 363
Create New Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog .................................................................. 364

User's Manual xi
Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

To Create a Phone Line Sharing Service Point ......................................................... 366


Communication Parameters (PLS Network) Dialog .................................................. 366
Select PLS Network ................................................................................................... 368
Controlling Metering Device Information ........................................................................................ 369
Initializing a Device .............................................................................................................. 369
To Initialize a Single Meter ........................................................................................ 370
To Use Batch Initialization ......................................................................................... 371
Batch Initialization Dialog ........................................................................................... 373
Select a Program for Initialization .............................................................................. 374
To Use Meter Change Out ......................................................................................... 375
Meter Change Out Logon Dialog ............................................................................... 376
Initialization Prompt For Dialogs ................................................................................ 377
Initializing Phone Line Sharing Devices..................................................................... 378
Reconfiguring a Device ........................................................................................................ 378
Controlling Meter Operation ................................................................................................. 378
Validating a Program ................................................................................................. 379
To Validate a Program ............................................................................................... 379
Validation Results Dialog ........................................................................................... 379
To correct an inconsistency in your program ............................................................. 380
Changing Display Modes ........................................................................................... 381
To Change Display Modes ........................................................................................ 381
Change Display Modes Dialog .................................................................................. 381
Setting the Device Clock ............................................................................................ 382
To Set the Device Clock ............................................................................................ 383
Set Device Clock Dialog ............................................................................................ 383
Resetting Device Values ............................................................................................ 384
Resetting Demand ..................................................................................................... 385
Resetting Billing Registers ......................................................................................... 385
Using Batch Billing Register Reset ............................................................................ 387
Resetting Activity Status ............................................................................................ 388
Reset Activity Counters Dialog .................................................................................. 388
Editing Register Values.............................................................................................. 390
Edit Registers Dialog ................................................................................................. 390
Clearing Meter Data ................................................................................................... 391
Using the Canadian Event Log .................................................................................. 391
Creating the Event Log .............................................................................................. 392
Updating the Event Log Pointer ................................................................................. 392
To Update the Event Log Pointer .............................................................................. 393
Upgrading Metering Device Firmware ....................................................................... 393
Firmware Upgrade Overview ..................................................................................... 393
To Install Meter Firmware on Your Computer ........................................................... 394
To Upgrade Firmware in the Meter ............................................................................ 396
To Resolve an Unsuccessful Firmware Upgrade ...................................................... 397
Viewing and Saving Meter Device Information............................................................................... 398
To View Device Data ............................................................................................................ 399
To View Meter Image File Data............................................................................................ 400
To Print or Save Device Data............................................................................................... 400
To Refresh the Data Summary ............................................................................................ 401
Viewing Device Status ......................................................................................................... 401
Viewing Register Data .......................................................................................................... 401
Select Registers Dialog ........................................................................................................ 402
Viewing Load Profile Data .................................................................................................... 403
To View Load Profile Data ......................................................................................... 404
Load Profile View Selection Dialog ............................................................................ 405
Calculated Load Profile Quantities ............................................................................ 406
Load Profile Options Dialog ....................................................................................... 407
Using the Load Profile Data Graph ............................................................................ 408

User's Manual xii


Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Using the Load Profile Data Spreadsheet ................................................................. 409


Using the SiteScan Diagnostic Toolbox and Power Circle .................................................. 410
Automatic Refresh of Toolbox and Power Circle Data .............................................. 411
To View the Toolbox Dialog ....................................................................................... 412
Toolbox and Power Circle Dialog .............................................................................. 412
To View the Device Status Toolbox Summary .......................................................... 416
SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots ............................................................................... 416
To View SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data ............................................................ 417
SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots Dialog.................................................................... 417
To Clear SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data ........................................................... 417
Viewing Toolbox and Power Circle Data ................................................................... 418
To View the Power Circle Dialog ............................................................................... 418
To View the Device Status Power Circle Summary................................................... 418
Viewing Voltage Quality Data (Q1000, SENTINEL, SQ400 Meters) ................................... 419
SENTINEL Voltage Quality Data ............................................................................... 419
Q1000 Voltage Quality Data ...................................................................................... 421
Voltage Sag and Swell Selection Dialog (Q1000) ..................................................... 422
Voltage Imbalance Selection Dialog (Q1000) ............................................................ 423
Voltage Interruption Selection Dialog (Q1000) .......................................................... 424
Viewing Harmonic Data ........................................................................................................ 425
SENTINEL Meter Harmonic Data .............................................................................. 425
Q1000 Meter Harmonic Data ..................................................................................... 426
Harmonics View Selection Dialog (Q1000)................................................................ 427
Exporting MV-90 HHF Load Profile Data ............................................................................. 428
MV-90 HHF Export Files ............................................................................................ 428
To Create an MV-90 HHF Export File........................................................................ 429
Creating a Meter Image File................................................................................................. 429
Exporting to HTML ............................................................................................................... 430

PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization ................................................. 432


PC-PRO+ Advanced Master Station and Clients Diagram ............................................................ 432
Field-Pro Client ............................................................................................................................... 433
Field-Pro Settings ................................................................................................................. 433
Exporting Program Files for Field-Pro .................................................................................. 433
Loading a Replica File for Field-Pro ..................................................................................... 434
Shop-Pro Client .............................................................................................................................. 434
Settings for Shop-Pro ........................................................................................................... 434
Replica File Settings ............................................................................................................ 435
Loading a Replica File for Shop-Pro .................................................................................... 435
HH-Pro Client ................................................................................................................................. 435
HH-Pro Settings ................................................................................................................... 435
HH-Pro Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 435
PC-PRO+ Views Client ................................................................................................................... 436

Status Codes .............................................................................................................. 437


Load Profile Status Codes .............................................................................................................. 437
Extended Load Profile Status Codes ............................................................................................. 438
Voltage Quality Status Codes ........................................................................................................ 440
Harmonic Status Codes .................................................................................................................. 441

User's Manual xiii


Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Contents

Glossary of Terms ..................................................................................................... 442

Index ........................................................................................................................... 453

User's Manual xiv


Proprietary and Confidential
Table of Figures

Figure 1: System Overview ........................................................................................................... 3


Figure 2: System Logon Dialog ................................................................................................... 10
Figure 3: System Manager Window User Interface .................................................................... 11
Figure 4: Kh Values Window ....................................................................................................... 14
Figure 5: Standard Kh Values ..................................................................................................... 15
Figure 6: P/DR Values Window ................................................................................................... 17
Figure 7: Pulse Weight Values Window ...................................................................................... 18
Figure 8: Default Phone Home Numbers Window ...................................................................... 19
Figure 9: CT Ratios Window ....................................................................................................... 20
Figure 10: VT Ratios Window...................................................................................................... 21
Figure 11: Display Format Window ............................................................................................. 22
Figure 12: Device Security Codes - CENTRON Window ............................................................ 25
Figure 13: CENTRON (C12.19) Device Security Codes ............................................................. 26
Figure 14: CENTRON (V&I) Device Security Codes ................................................................... 29
Figure 15: DATASTAR Device Security Codes .......................................................................... 30
Figure 16: 200 Series Device Security Codes ............................................................................ 31
Figure 17: FULCRUM Device Security Codes ............................................................................ 32
Figure 18: Device Security Codes - Q1000 Window ................................................................... 33
Figure 19: QUANTUM Device Security Codes ........................................................................... 35
Figure 20: Device Security Codes - SENTINEL Window ............................................................ 36
Figure 21: Device Security Codes - VECTRON Window ............................................................ 37
Figure 22: CENTRON Programming Options ............................................................................. 39
Figure 23: CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options .............................................................. 41
Figure 24: CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options .................................................................... 44
Figure 25: DATASTAR Programming Options ............................................................................ 47
Figure 26: 200 Series Programming Options .............................................................................. 48
Figure 27: FULCRUM Programming Options ............................................................................. 50
Figure 28: Q1000 Programming Options .................................................................................... 52
Figure 29: QUANTUM Programming Options ............................................................................. 54
Figure 30: SENTINEL Programming Options ............................................................................. 56
Figure 31: VECTRON Programming Options ............................................................................. 59
Figure 32: Example: Changing To DST ...................................................................................... 62
Figure 33: Example: Changing From DST .................................................................................. 63
Figure 34: Daylight Savings Time Window ................................................................................. 64
Figure 35: Field-Pro Settings - All Devices Window.................................................................... 66
Figure 36: Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options ............................................................................ 68
Figure 37: Field-Pro Options - Customizable User Interface ...................................................... 70
Figure 38: Security - Features ..................................................................................................... 72
Figure 39: Security - Access Groups........................................................................................... 74
Figure 40: Security - Users .......................................................................................................... 75
Figure 41: Replica File Settings .................................................................................................. 79
Figure 42: Meter Change Out Settings........................................................................................ 85
Figure 43: HH-Pro Settings ......................................................................................................... 88
Figure 44: Data Manager Main Interface .................................................................................... 93
Figure 45: Itron Button Menu....................................................................................................... 95
Figure 46: Customization Menu .................................................................................................. 96
Figure 47: Add or Remove Buttons ............................................................................................. 96
Figure 48: Navigational Panel Options ........................................................................................ 96
Figure 49: Meter Programs Screen ............................................................................................. 98
Figure 50: Select Device Type Dialog ....................................................................................... 100
Figure 51: Confirm Program Deletion Dialog ............................................................................ 101
Figure 52: Meter Program Comparison Dialog ......................................................................... 102
User's Manual xv
Proprietary and Confidential
Figure 53: Program Import Status ............................................................................................. 103
Figure 54: Duplicate Programs.................................................................................................. 104
Figure 55: Import Programs Dialog ........................................................................................... 105
Figure 56: Program Export Status ............................................................................................. 106
Figure 57: Program Dependencies Dialog - TOU Tab .............................................................. 108
Figure 58: Data Manager Main Interface .................................................................................. 109
Figure 59: TOU Schedules Screen ........................................................................................... 126
Figure 60: TOU Confirm Deletions Dialog ................................................................................. 130
Figure 61: TOU Schedule Comparison ..................................................................................... 131
Figure 62: Time of Use Dependencies Dialog .......................................................................... 133
Figure 63: Custom Schedules Screen....................................................................................... 135
Figure 64: Confirm Custom Schedule Deletion Dialog.............................................................. 137
Figure 65: Custom Schedule Comparison ................................................................................ 138
Figure 66: Custom Schedule Dependencies Dialog ................................................................. 139
Figure 67: Display Files Screen ................................................................................................ 140
Figure 68: Delete Display Confirmation Dialog ......................................................................... 143
Figure 69: Display Dependencies Dialog .................................................................................. 144
Figure 70: Service Points Screen .............................................................................................. 145
Figure 71: New Service Point Dialog......................................................................................... 146
Figure 72: Creating a New Network Dialog ............................................................................... 148
Figure 73: Edit Network Dialog .................................................................................................. 150
Figure 74: Edit Service Point Dialog.......................................................................................... 152
Figure 75: Service Point Deletion .............................................................................................. 154
Figure 76: Protocol Files Screen ............................................................................................... 155
Figure 77: Report Specification Process ................................................................................... 157
Figure 78: Creating the Report Specification ............................................................................ 157
Figure 79: Report Specifications Screen ................................................................................... 158
Figure 80: Delete Report Specification Dialog .......................................................................... 159
Figure 81: Load Profile Data (MIF or MV-90 HHF) ................................................................... 159
Figure 82: Meter Image Files Screen ........................................................................................ 161
Figure 83: Move MIF Dialog ...................................................................................................... 163
Figure 84: Confirm MIF File Deletion ........................................................................................ 164
Figure 85: Create Report Dialog ............................................................................................... 165
Figure 86: Create MV-90 HHF Dialog ....................................................................................... 166
Figure 87: Reverse Enginner Program Dialog .......................................................................... 167
Figure 88: Join Files .................................................................................................................. 169
Figure 89: Join Files with Overlap ............................................................................................. 169
Figure 90: Join Data Files Dialog .............................................................................................. 170
Figure 91: Totalization Data Diagram........................................................................................ 172
Figure 92: Totalization withing a meter's hardware ................................................................... 172
Figure 93: Totalization within PC-PRO+ Advanced 9.50 .......................................................... 173
Figure 94: PC-PRO+ Advanced Totalization Activation ............................................................ 174
Figure 95: Totalization Activate Manually ................................................................................. 175
Figure 96: Totalization Dialog .................................................................................................... 176
Figure 97: Load Profile Data (MIF or MV-90 HHF) ................................................................... 178
Figure 98: MV-90 HHF Files Screen ......................................................................................... 179
Figure 99: MV-90 HHF Files with Filter Option ......................................................................... 180
Figure 100: HHF Filter Selection Dialog .................................................................................... 181
Figure 101: Move MV-90 HHF Files Dialog .............................................................................. 182
Figure 102: Confirm Delete MV-90 HHF Files Dialog ............................................................... 183
Figure 103: Create Report Dialog ............................................................................................. 184
Figure 104: Creating Report Files ............................................................................................. 185
Figure 105: Reports Screen ...................................................................................................... 186
Figure 106: Move Files Dialog ................................................................................................... 187
Figure 107: Confirm Report Deletions Dialog ........................................................................... 189
Figure 108: System Logon Dialog ............................................................................................. 217
Figure 109: Program Editor User Interface ............................................................................... 218

User's Manual xvi


Proprietary and Confidential
Figure 110: System Logon Dialog ............................................................................................. 225
Figure 111: Select Device Type ................................................................................................ 225
Figure 112: Select Measurement Level..................................................................................... 226
Figure 113: Program Editor Main Window - SENTINEL Example ............................................ 226
Figure 114: Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................... 227
Figure 115: Browse Programs................................................................................................... 228
Figure 116: Program Editor Main Window - SENTINEL Example ............................................ 229
Figure 117: Print Dialog ............................................................................................................. 231
Figure 118: TOU Calendar Editor .............................................................................................. 236
Figure 119: Meter Selection Dialog ........................................................................................... 238
Figure 120: Sample TOU Calendar Editor Screen .................................................................... 239
Figure 121: New Schedule Dialog ............................................................................................. 242
Figure 122: Open TOU Schedule Dialog................................................................................... 243
Figure 123: Schedule Description Dialog .................................................................................. 243
Figure 124: Rates and Outputs ................................................................................................. 245
Figure 125: Available Day Types Dialog ................................................................................... 246
Figure 126: Day Viewer Dialog .................................................................................................. 248
Figure 127: Daily Patterns Dialog.............................................................................................. 249
Figure 128: Add Switchpoint dialog ........................................................................................... 251
Figure 129: Insert Season Dialog .............................................................................................. 253
Figure 130: Edit Season Dialog................................................................................................. 254
Figure 131: Edit Season Start Date........................................................................................... 255
Figure 132: Roll Off Years Dialog.............................................................................................. 256
Figure 133: Apply Holiday List Dialog ....................................................................................... 257
Figure 134: Insert Holiday Dialog .............................................................................................. 258
Figure 135: Extend Calendar Dialog ......................................................................................... 259
Figure 136: Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................... 260
Figure 137: Delete TOU Schedule Dialog ................................................................................. 261
Figure 138: Holiday List ............................................................................................................. 263
Figure 139: New Holiday List .................................................................................................... 264
Figure 140: Add New Holiday List Dialog .................................................................................. 265
Figure 141: Delete Holiday List ................................................................................................. 266
Figure 142: Display Editor Main Window .................................................................................. 269
Figure 143: Select Display Type ............................................................................................... 270
Figure 144: Display Editor Example .......................................................................................... 270
Figure 145: Select Quantity ....................................................................................................... 271
Figure 146: Add Display Item .................................................................................................... 272
Figure 147: Default Display Formats ......................................................................................... 275
Figure 148: Select Date Format ................................................................................................ 277
Figure 149: Select Display File .................................................................................................. 284
Figure 150: Edit Display Item .................................................................................................... 285
Figure 151: Schedule Description Dialog .................................................................................. 294
Figure 152: Insert Repeating Pattern Dialog ............................................................................. 294
Figure 153: Schedule Editor - Select Dates Window ................................................................ 296
Figure 154: Data Selection Tab in Report Designer ................................................................. 302
Figure 155: Channel Data Dialog .............................................................................................. 303
Figure 156: Report Contents Tab in Report Designer............................................................... 309
Figure 157: Port Configuration Dialog ....................................................................................... 314
Figure 158: Select Type - COM Port ......................................................................................... 316
Figure 159: Add COM Port ........................................................................................................ 316
Figure 160: COM 1 Properties: COM Channel Tab .................................................................. 317
Figure 161: Select Type - TAPI Channel .................................................................................. 318
Figure 162: Add TAPI Device .................................................................................................... 318
Figure 163: Modem Properties - TAPI Channel Tab ................................................................. 319
Figure 164: COM 1 Properties: COM Channel Tab .................................................................. 321
Figure 165: Modem Properties - TAPI Channel Tab ................................................................. 322
Figure 166: Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog .................................................................. 324
User's Manual xvii
Proprietary and Confidential
Figure 167: Transformer Options Dialog ................................................................................... 325
Figure 168: Logon Manual Connection Tab .............................................................................. 329
Figure 169: Logon Manual Tab - Ethernet ................................................................................ 333
Figure 170: Address Book Tab.................................................................................................. 337
Figure 171: Connect to Next Dialog .......................................................................................... 339
Figure 172: Edit Service Point Dialog........................................................................................ 344
Figure 173: Radical Multi-Drop Configuration ........................................................................... 348
Figure 174: Standalone Connection .......................................................................................... 348
Figure 175: Fiber Optic Loop Network Configuration ................................................................ 349
Figure 176: Direct Connection - Loop With Echo ...................................................................... 349
Figure 177: Direct Connection - Star Configuration .................................................................. 350
Figure 178: Modem Connection - Multiple Meters .................................................................... 350
Figure 179: Creating a Service Point ........................................................................................ 351
Figure 180: Create Service Point Dialog ................................................................................... 354
Figure 181: Add Standalone Dialog .......................................................................................... 357
Figure 182: Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet .................................................................. 360
Figure 183: Select Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog ........................................................................ 363
Figure 184: Create New Multi-Drop Network Dialog ................................................................. 364
Figure 185: Communication Parameters (PLS Network) Dialog ............................................... 367
Figure 186: Select PLS Network Dialog .................................................................................... 368
Figure 187: Example Prompt-For Dialog ................................................................................... 371
Figure 188: Initialization Progress Window ............................................................................... 371
Figure 189: Batch Initialization - Continue ................................................................................ 373
Figure 190: Batch Initialization .................................................................................................. 373
Figure 191: Select a Program for Initialization Dialog ............................................................... 374
Figure 192: Meter Change Out - Continue ................................................................................ 376
Figure 193: Meter Change Out - Logon .................................................................................... 377
Figure 194: Validation Results Dialog ....................................................................................... 380
Figure 195: Change Display Modes Dialog ............................................................................... 381
Figure 196: Set Device Clock .................................................................................................... 384
Figure 197: Billing Register Reset ............................................................................................. 388
Figure 198: Reset Activity Counters Dialog .............................................................................. 389
Figure 199: Edit Registers ......................................................................................................... 390
Figure 200: Update Event Log Pointer ...................................................................................... 393
Figure 201: Firmware Installer Welcome................................................................................... 395
Figure 202: Ready to Install Firmware ...................................................................................... 395
Figure 203: Firmware Installation Complete ............................................................................. 396
Figure 204: About to Change Firmware .................................................................................... 397
Figure 205: Firmware Has Been Changed ................................................................................ 397
Figure 206: Meter Has No Firmware ......................................................................................... 398
Figure 207: Device Status Values (SENTINEL Meter).............................................................. 399
Figure 208: Open Meter Image File .......................................................................................... 400
Figure 209: Device Status Values (SENTINEL Meter).............................................................. 401
Figure 210: Register Data Summary (SENTINEL Meter) ......................................................... 402
Figure 211: Select Registers ..................................................................................................... 403
Figure 212: Load Profile View Selection Dialog ........................................................................ 405
Figure 213: Load Profile Options Dialog ................................................................................... 407
Figure 214: Load Profile Data - Graph View ............................................................................. 408
Figure 215: Load Profile Data - Spreadsheet View ................................................................... 410
Figure 216: Toolbox Dialog ....................................................................................................... 413
Figure 217: Power Circle Dialog................................................................................................ 415
Figure 218: SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Dialog ................................................................... 417
Figure 219: Voltage Quality Sags (SENTINEL) ........................................................................ 419
Figure 220: Voltage Quality Swells (SENTINEL) ...................................................................... 420
Figure 221: Voltage Quality Voltage Imbalances (SENTINEL) ................................................. 420
Figure 222: Voltage Quality Current Imbalances (SENTINEL) ................................................. 421
Figure 223: Voltage Quality Data Display - Swells Example (Q1000) ...................................... 422

User's Manual xviii


Proprietary and Confidential
Figure 224: Voltage Quality Data Display - Interruptions (Q1000) ............................................ 422
Figure 225: Voltage Sag Selection (Q1000) ............................................................................. 423
Figure 226: Voltage Swell Selection (Q1000) ........................................................................... 423
Figure 227: Voltage Imbalance Selection Dialog (Q1000) ........................................................ 424
Figure 228: Voltage Interruption Selection Dialog (Q1000) ...................................................... 424
Figure 229: Harmonic Data in Toolbox (SENTINEL) ................................................................ 426
Figure 230: Harmonics Data Summary (Q1000) ....................................................................... 427
Figure 231: Harmonics View Selection Dialog (Q1000) ............................................................ 428
Figure 232: Create Meter Image File ........................................................................................ 430
Figure 233: PC-PRO+ Advanced and Client Systems .............................................................. 432

User's Manual xix


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 1

Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Welcome to the PC-PRO+® Advanced system, a complete system for managing the Itron smart electricity
metering devices and meter data. PC-PRO+ Advanced can be used to design programs for metering devices,
program and maintain meters, and retrieve and analyze meter data. PC-PRO+ Advanced is designed to help
you work more efficiently–whether you program one meter a month or several hundred meters each day. PC-
PRO+ Advanced provides the metering industry with the Tools for Running Business Better – Every Day!

System Requirements
The following operating system software and hardware are required for PC-PRO+ Advanced:

• Microsoft® Windows® operating system:


• Windows XP Professional 32-bit or 64-bit (minimum of Service Pack 2)
• Windows Vista® Enterprise 32-bit or 64-bit (SP 2)
• Windows 7 Professional 32-bit or 64-bit
• Microsoft Internet Explorer® (version 6.0 minimum)
• A minimum of 300 MHz or greater processor
• RAM (Random Access Memory) should comply with Microsoft's recommendations for your operating
system and service pack. Itron recommends a minimum of 128 megabytes of RAM.
To determine how much RAM your computer has, choose Start | Settings | Control Panel | System.
The General tab of the System Properties dialog shows the amount of memory in your system.
• A hard disk with at least 150 megabytes of free space. To determine how much space is available on your
hard disk, double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop. The program group shows all devices in
your computer. Point to the hard drive and right-click. Choose Properties from the menu. The General tab
of the Properties dialog shows how much disk space is used on the drive and how much is free.
• A CD-ROM drive
• An optical probe assembly or a direct connect RS-232 cable (for communication with the metering device)
• At least one free serial port (for communication with the metering device)

Devices Supported
PC-PRO+ Advanced supports program files, device control, and data viewing as shown in the following table:
Program File Initialization Data Viewing
Program
Device Type Short Name Creation and and and
File Import
Modification Reconfigure Data Export
CENTRON® CENTRON
CENTRON II C12.19 CENTRON II C12.19
Yes Yes Yes Yes
CENTRON (C12.19) CENTRON (C12.19)
CENTRON (V&I) CENTRON (V&I)
200 Series Registers 200 Series No Yes Yes Yes

User's Manual 1
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Program File Initialization Data Viewing


Program
Device Type Short Name Creation and and and
File Import
Modification Reconfigure Data Export
FULCRUM® (SL300) FULCRUM No Yes Yes Yes
FULCRUM SQ400 SQ400 No No No Yes
QUANTUM® QUANTUM No No No Yes
QUANTUM Q1000 Q1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes
SENTINEL® SENTINEL Yes Yes Yes Yes
VECTRON® VECTRON Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC-PRO+ Advanced supports logging on, viewing meter data, and exporting data to a Meter Image File, MV-
90 HHF export, and export to an HTML file.

The short name for each device is used throughout the PC-PRO+ Advanced documentation.

General System Overview


The PC-PRO+ Advanced System includes three basic parts:

• System Manager
• Data Manager (including reporting capability)
• Communication Manager
The System Manager will control all the settings files used by all of the applications within the system. This
consists of default values, device security codes, programming options, DST dates, Field-Pro™ settings,
security, replica file settings, meter change out settings, and HH-Pro® settings. These settings are transferred
through the system via either synchronization (HH-Pro only) or replica files (all other applications).

The Data Manager provides access to all program and schedule information under one shell. You are able to
create and edit programs, custom schedules, TOU schedules, and displays.

The Data Manager also contains a report package that provide a better means of generating customer billing
data. This includes TOU analysis of load profile data, TOU usage graphs, user customizable reports,
additional data export options, and rolling interval support.

The Communication Manager is how you communicate with the meter. It is distributed with PC-PRO+
Advanced and Shop-Pro applications. It provides all of the functionality and operations used when
communicating with a meter.

User's Manual 2
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Figure 1: System Overview

Client Systems
Itron offers several specialized client systems that can be used with PC-PRO+ Advanced. The client systems
offer simplified user interfaces providing functionality similar to PC-PRO+ Advanced for specific purposes.

A summary of the client systems is discussed in Appendix A of this user's manual. For more information see
PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization (on page 432).

User's Manual 3
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

PC-PRO+ Advanced Documentation Set


The PC-PRO+ Advanced documentation consists of an installation guide, extensive online help, and user’s
manuals.

PC-PRO+ Advanced user’s manuals are included on the installation CD as well as on the Itron Metering
secure website (www.itronmeters.com).

User Manuals are designed for online viewing and are formatted for printing with a complete table of
contents, index, and chapter headers and footers.

Also refer to the Technical Reference Guide for each meter type for information about
meter specifications, hardware, and firmware.

User Manuals
The following table describes the User Manuals for PC-PRO+ Advanced.
Manual Description
PC-PRO+ Advanced Describes the PC-PRO+ Advanced Data Manager, Program Editor, System Manager, TOU Calendar
System User's Manual Editor, and Display Editor applications. Provides information about system-wide options and defaults,
gives instructions for creating and maintaining program files, and describes meter communication and
meter management operations.
PC-PRO+ Advanced Provides detailed information about program file components for the CENTRON devices. Includes
CENTRON Device User’s instructions for configuring each program file component.
Manuals A separate manual is provided for each type of CENTRON meter:
• CENTRON
• CENTRON (C12.19)
• CENTRON (V&I)
PC-PRO+ Advanced Provides detailed information about program file components for the QUANTUM Q1000 device type.
QUANTUM Q1000 Includes instructions for configuring each program file component.
Device User’s Manual
Protocol Editor™ for Gives a general overview of the Protocol Editor for QUANTUM Q1000 application and describes each
Q1000 User’s Manual dialog.

PC-PRO+ Advanced Provides detailed information about program file components for the SENTINEL device type. Includes
SENTINEL Device User’s instructions for configuring each program file component.
Manual
PC-PRO+ Advanced Provides detailed information about program file components for the VECTRON device type. Includes
VECTRON Device User’s instructions for configuring each program file component.
Manual
Field-Pro™ User's Manual Provides instructions for using the Field-Pro application to program Itron electricity meters in the field.
Using Field-Pro, you can also view meter data, retrieve meter data, and perform meter diagnostics for
supported devices.
Shop-Pro™ User's Manual Provides instructions for using the Shop-Pro application to program Itron electricity meters in the field.

User's Manual 4
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Manual Description
PC-PRO+ Views User's Describes the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor, System Manager, TOU Calendar Editor, and
Manual Display Editor applications. Provides information about system-wide options and defaults, gives
instructions for creating and maintaining program files, and describes meter communication and meter
management operations.
MeterKey™ User’s Provides instructions for using the MeterKey application to upgrade or downgrade SENTINEL and
Manual VECTRON meters and to upgrade Q1000 meters.

HH-Pro® User’s Manual Provides detailed information about setting up and using the HH-Pro application to perform meter
installation and maintenance functions. HH-Pro functions include reconfiguring the Custom Schedule
currently configured a CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), or SENTINEL device. The HH-Pro
application runs on an Itron FC200 or FC200R handheld computer as a client of the PC-PRO+
Advanced system.

Using PC-PRO+ Advanced Help


The PC-PRO+ Advanced online help consists of help files for the Program Editor, System Manager, device
program components, and other applications within PC-PRO+ Advanced such as the TOU Calendar Editor
and the MeterKey application. The title bar of each help topic indicates which help file you are using.

You can display help for a dialog by clicking the Help button on the dialog or by pressing F1. You can display
help for the application by selecting Help Topics from the Help menu on the menu bar. For information about
using online help, choose the Using Help option on the Help menu.

In the help window, use the Contents, Index, and Search tabs in the Help topics to find the information you
need quickly and easily. The Contents tab contains overview information, general information on how to
perform basic tasks, and information about each menu and the options available on those menus. Some
applications may have additional information.

Help for Metering Devices


To get help for a specific device type, create or open a program file. In the Program File components list,
double-click on a component to display the dialog for the component. Click the Help button. Use the
Contents, Index, and Search tabs to locate the information you need.

Help File and User's Manual Locations


The help files and user's manuals are installed to the following locations when you install PC-PRO+
Advanced:

Help Files C:\Program Files\Itron\PC-PRO+ Advanced\PCPROP

Shared Help Files C:\Program Files\Common Files\Itron\Metering (files used by other Itron
applications)

User's Manuals located on the installation CD

User's Manual 5
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Itron Secure Website


The Itron Electricity Metering secure web site (www.itronmeters.com) provides customers, sales
representatives, and distributors with a convenient way to purchase products, track orders, and view account
information. You can also use the Document Search feature to obtain product literature and order specification
forms.The PIL Search feature provides a quick link to view Product Information Letters. The individual user
manuals are also available on the secure website.

The secure web site provides real-time access to ordering and tracking products and obtaining account reports
and order status. The benefit of using the secure web site to conduct business transactions is two-fold. It
increases the efficiency and effectiveness of actual transactions, and it provides convenient access.

If you have never logged in to the Electricity Metering secure web site, you need to set up your own user
account. When you set up an account, you are authorized by Itron to perform specific functions on the secure
web site based on your login ID. Contact your Customer Service representative if you have any additional
questions.

To access the individual user manual files on the Secure Website:

1. Log into the Secure Website (www.itronmeters.com). Click Secure Logon in the upper left hand corner.
2. Under "Menu Selections", select Software Download. The submenu allows you download the software
only, manuals only, or software and manuals.
When downloading the software from the secure website, users now need to download two items:
the zip file containing the software upgrade and a zip file containing all the user documentation.

The entire set of user documentation, including all the User Manuals, is zipped up in one file for your
convenience. The User Manual zip file contains the following:
CENTRON C12.19 Device Manual PC-PRO+ Advanced Canadian Installation Guide
CENTRON Device Manual PC-PRO+ Advanced System Installation Guide
CENTRON V&I Device Manual PC-PRO+ Views Installation Guide
Field-Pro User’s Manual SENTINEL Device Manual
HH-Pro User’s Manual Protocol Editor User’s Manual
MeterKey User’s Manual Q1000 Device Manual
Shop-Pro User’s Manual VECTRON Device Manual
System User’s Manual PC-PRO+ Views User’s Manual

About This Manual


This manual provides information about the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor, System Manager, and TOU
Calendar Editor, Display Editor, and Schedule Editor applications. It is intended for use by individuals
responsible for programming and configuring electricity metering devices.

This manual includes basic system information that is common to all metering device types. For specific
information about program files for each metering device type, refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced user’s manual
for each device type.

User's Manual 6
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

You do not need to have an expert level of industry or computer knowledge to use PC-PRO+ Advanced. This
manual does assume that you are familiar with the terminology of your industry and basic procedures for
using the Microsoft Windows operating system. It also assumes that you have set up the Windows operating
environment and have enabled your mouse, printer, and any other peripheral equipment you expect to use
with the PC-PRO+ Advanced system.

This manual is organized as follows:

Chapter Title Description


1 Introducing the PC-PRO+ Provides introductory information about the
Advanced System PC-PRO+ Advanced system and this manual. Explains how to start the software, use
the main window and the menus, how to backup the databases, and how to quit the
software.
2 Using the System Manager to Describes how to define system-wide options and settings. Explains how to set up
Define Settings and Defaults system security for users, configure device programming options, define system default
values, define DST dates, define Field-Pro settings, use the System Replication features,
and define HH-Pro settings.
3 Data Manager Provides an introduction to the Data Manager. Explains how to access the tools used to
create and modify programs and schedules.
4 Meter Configuration Editor Provides an introduction to the Meter Configuration Editor. Explains how to access the
tools used to create and modify configuration files.
5 Creating and Using Program Describes how to create new program files and open and modify existing program files.
Files Explains how to display, copy, or print the contents of a program file. Describes how to
import and export program files for use on another PC-PRO+ Advanced system.
6 Using the TOU Calendar Discusses the PC-PRO+ Advanced TOU Calendar Editor application including how to
Editor create Time of Use (TOU) schedules for supported metering devices that have a Time
of Use capability. TOU metering allows the energy provider to assign different rates to
different times of the day.
7 Using the Display Editor Discusses the PC-PRO+ Advanced Display Editor application which is used to create
meter display schedules for CENTRON and VECTRON meters.
8 Defining Custom Schedules Provides information for defining custom schedules for use by the Self Read or Billing
in the Schedule Editor (Demand Reset) program component for a CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I),
or SENTINEL metering device.
9 Using the Report Designer Discusses how to utilize the meter data to provide a better means of generating customer
billing data. This includes TOU analysis of load profile data, TOU usage graphs, user
customizable reports, additional data export options, and rolling interval support.

User's Manual 7
Proprietary and Confidential
Introducing the PC-PRO+® Advanced System

Chapter Title Description


10 Using the Communication Provides an introduction to the Communication Manager. Explains how to use the
Manager tools to communicate with individual meters.
Describes how to identify your PC COM ports for PC-PRO+ Advanced and define the
optical probe model you use.
Describes the procedures for logging on to metering devices using manual or Address
Book connections as well as communicating with a Meter Image File.
Discusses the functions that control the operation of the device including initializing
meters, reconfiguring meters, and performing the various reset and other meter control
functions.
Discusses the process of viewing device data such as register, load profile, voltage
quality, and harmonic data as well as device status information. Also describes how to
save data to Meter Image Files, MV-90 HHF files, and HTML files.

There are two appendices in the manual:

Appendix Title Description


A PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients Discusses methods for transferring system settings from one system to another.
and Synchronization
B Status Codes Provides information on Load Profile Status Codes, Extended Load Profile Status
Codes, Voltage Quality Status Codes, and Harmonic Status Codes.

Using this Manual


The PC-PRO+ Advanced System User’s Manual is intended for PC-PRO+ Advanced users of all proficiency
levels. Topics are oriented toward setting up the system and the appropriate PC-PRO+ Advanced procedures
to use. Step-by-step procedures are given for installing and setting up the system. For step-by-step procedures
for programming a specific device type, refer to the online help or the online manual for the specific device.
An index is provided to help locate the information you need.

Notes provide additional information about using PC-PRO+ Advanced. This information
usually is not contained in regular body text.

Warnings provide special, must-read information. If you ignore a warning, you may omit
essential data or make a critical error. Warnings are in the format shown in this example.

User's Manual 8
Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 2

Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

This section provides information about the system-wide parameters that should be defined before you begin
creating program files and communicating with meters.

Use the System Manager application to define system-wide parameters for PC-PRO+ Advanced and Shop-Pro
systems.

You must have Administrative security authorization to be able to log on to the System Manager application.
For more information about security authorization, see Defining System Security (on page 71).

Settings that are user-specific or site-specific are defined within the Program Editor
application. For more information see the following topics in the PC-PRO+ Advanced System
User's Manual:

• Configuring COM Ports and Modems (on page 313) for PC-PRO+ Advanced
• Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog (on page 323)
• Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324)
• Saving Connection Settings in the Address Book (on page 340)

What is the System Manager?


The System Manager was developed for PC-PRO+ Advanced to allow you to setup default values, device
security codes, programming options, daylight savings time settings, Field-Pro settings, security, replica file
settings, meter change out settings, and HH-Pro settings.

The System Manager was developed to improve efficiency. It allows users to have a central location to view
and change Program Editor settings that are not user specific. A replica file can also be created in the System
Manager that contains desired System Files and Settings. This file can then be loaded on a separate system
load a Replica file in order to set up a new or existing PC-PRO+ Advanced system.

The System Manager controls the following:

• Default Values
• Device Security Codes
• Programming Options
• Daylight Savings Time
• Field-Pro Settings
• Meter Change Out Settings
• HH-Pro Settings

User's Manual 9
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Starting the System Manager


To start the System Manager, you must enter a password with administrative-level security authorization. A
user must have administrative privileges to modify system security information. The PC-PRO+ Advanced
software is shipped with a default administrator’s password. The system administrator should change this
password to a locally controlled password to ensure system security.

When you enter a password with administrator authorization, you can access all System Manager functions.
1. To start the System Manager, from the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced
|Advanced Tools | System Manager.
The system Logon dialog is displayed. An example is shown below.

Figure 2: System Logon Dialog

If the Data Manager is already running, the Logon dialog box will not be displayed. You will
not be required to enter in a User ID and Password.
2. Enter an administrator’s user ID and password. (The default password is provided with the software when
the system is shipped.)
You must have administrative authorization to log in to the System Manager application.
3. The System Manager application window is displayed.
4. To update System Manager information, select an item from the navigation tree on the left.
The information for the item selected is displayed in the right frame of the window. Click in a field to
change information as desired.
5. When you have finished changing information and settings, click Save All Changes on the toolbar or from
the menu bar select Edit | Save All Changes.

System Logon
Enter your user ID and password to log on to the system. You must have a valid user ID and password to be
able to start the software. Consult your system administrator as needed.

User ID and Password information is established in the System Manager. Refer to Security
for Users (on page 75).

When you click OK:

User's Manual 10
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• If your entry is valid, the application is started and you can perform the system functions allowed for your
User ID and Password.
• If the information you enter is not valid, a message box displays indicating that the system does not
recognize the User ID and Password you entered.

Using the System Manager User Interface


The left pane of the System Manager window contains a navigation tree listing each configuration item. The
right pane shows the information for the item selected and is used for data entry. The Data Entry window
serves the same purpose as the data entry dialogs in the Program Editor.

Figure 3: System Manager Window User Interface


1 Menu bar
2 Tool bar
3 Navigation tree
4 Node
5 Item
6 Scroll bars
7 Data Summary/Data entry window
8 Field name
9 Data entry field and value
10 Field Information

User's Manual 11
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Using the System Manager Navigation Tree


When you select an item in the navigation tree (left pane), the properties and values for that item are listed in
the right pane. For example, if you select CENTRON under Programming Options in the navigation tree, the
CENTRON Programming Options properties and values are listed in the right pane.

Entering a New Value in the System Manager


To define a new value for an item do one of the following:

• Click on a value in the right pane and type the new value, or
• Click the down arrow and select the value from the drop-down list.

Using the System Manager Menus


The System Manager window provides access to the File, Edit, and Help menus. The menus are described in
the following sections.

System Manager File Menu


The File menu provides functions to manage the system settings and defaults for the PC-PRO+ Advanced
system.
Menu Item Description
Create Replica File After you have defined the Replica File Settings, use this item to create a replica file. The Replica File can be
used to set up another PC-PRO+ Advanced system or a Shop-Pro system using this system’s defaults,
settings, and program files. For more information see Using System Replication (on page 77).
Exit Select this item to close the System Manager application.

System Manager Edit Menu


Use the Edit menu to access the Save All Changes and Undo All Changes functions.
Menu Item Description
Undo All Changes Select this item to undo all changes made since the last Save. Alternatively you can click the Undo All
Changes button on the System Manager Toolbar. For more information see Using the System Manager
Toolbar (on page 13).
Save All Changes Select this item to save all changes made within the System Manager. Alternatively you can click the Save
All Changes button on the System Manager Toolbar.

System Manager Help Menu


The Help Menu provides instructions for using the System Manager application and gives information about
the software.
Menu Item Description
Contents Select this item to display help for the System Manager. You can also display help for any window in the
System Manager by pressing the F1 key.
User's Manual 12
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Menu Item Description


About System Select this item to display System Manager software version and copyright information.
Manager...

Displaying System Manager Help


You can display help for the System Manager application by pressing F1 while any System Manager window
is displayed. You can also display help by selecting Help | Contents from the System Manager menu bar.

Using the System Manager Toolbar


The buttons on the System Manager Toolbar provide quick Access to frequently used system functions. For
more information about each item, click the links below.
Create Replica File
Create a copy of System Manager settings from this system for use as a backup or for installation on another PC-PRO+
Advanced system. For more information see Creating a Replica File (on page 81).
Undo All Changes
If you make changes in error, you can use the Undo All Changes button on the Toolbar to reset values as they were at the
time of the last Save. Alternatively you can select Edit | Undo All Changes.
Save All Changes
Changes made in the System manager application are saved when you click the Save All Changes button in the toolbar
or when you select Edit | Save All Changes. Changes are automatically saved to the correct location for use by
PC-PRO+ Advanced and for use when creating a System Replica File or a Field-Pro Export File.

Defining System Default Values


The System Manager allows you to specify default metering values and programming options which will be
available when creating program files in the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor. Default values consist of a
user-specified range of acceptable values related to a device meter site, such as meter Kh for electricity
meters.

Specifying these default values in the System Manager is part of setting up the PC-PRO+ Advanced system.
You define the default values and options for your system when the software is installed. You can modify the
options and values for individual devices when you initialize the devices.

For detailed information about a meter’s default configuration, refer


to the Technical Reference Guide for each meter.

The default values that you define in the System Manager are pre-filled in many Program Editor dialogs as
you define the components of a program file. You can change values as needed within each program file.

To Define Settings and Defaults


Select each Default Values item to define the metering values used most often for your system.
1. Start the System Manager application. For more information see Starting the System Manager (on page
10).

User's Manual 13
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the node.


3. Select an item.
4. The window for the item is displayed.
5. Choose the option for the value you are defining:
• Click in a field and enter the desired value.
• Click the arrow button for the field and select the value from the drop-down list.
6. When you have finished, click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

Defining Default Kh Values


Choose this item to create the list of valid watthour constant (Kh) values to be used as the default system
values. This list will be automatically displayed when selecting Kh (or Kt) values.

The Kh value can be changed at program time if you select Kh Value using the
Programming Options command.

Figure 4: Kh Values Window

Kh Values Field Descriptions


Valid Kh Values
This area displays the currently defined Kh values for your system. To add a value, click the Add button. The
range for each device type is as follows:

User's Manual 14
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• CENTRON–The Kh is set to 1.00 for CENTRON meters.


• CENTRON (C12.19)–0.025 - 1638.375 increments of .025
• CENTRON II (C12.19)–0.025 - 1638.375 increments of .025.
• CENTRON (V&I)–0.025 - 1638.375 increments of .025
• SENTINEL–0.025 - 1638.375 increments of .025
• VECTRON–0.03 through 600.0
• Q1000–Q1000 meters do not use this default Kh values list. Values are entered individually in each
Q1000 program file and on the initialization prompt-for dialogs.

Defining Standard Kh Values


For CENTRON (V&I) devices and for SENTINEL devices with firmware version 5.00 and higher, use this
option to define a Standard Kh value for each meter form. The Standard Kh value is used by the LED
configuration component when you select Standard Kh instead of a numeric Kh value. For more information
about LED configuration, refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced SENTINEL Device User’s Manual.

If you select Standard for the LED Kh value in a program file, during an initialization or reconfigure, PC-
PRO+ Advanced will detect the meter form and then select the standard Kh value based on the Standard Kh
values defined for each meter form in the System Manager. An example of the Standard Kh Values window is
shown below.

Figure 5: Standard Kh Values

User's Manual 15
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Standard Kh Values Field Descriptions


Standard Kh Values
For each meter form listed, select the Kh value to be used for that form when "Standard Kh" is selected in the
LED configuration program component. When Standard Kh is used for LED configuration, PC-PRO+
Advanced will automatically detect the meter form and use the value defined in this table.

The default Kh values are listed in the table below.

Meter Form Default Kh Value

2 (Class 200) 7.200


2 (Class 320) 7.200

3 0.600

4 0.600

9(8) 1.800

9(36) 1.800

10(9) 1.800

12 (Class 200) 14.400

12 (Class 320) 14.400

16(14, 15, 16) (Class 200) 21.600

16(14, 15, 16) (Class 320) 21.600

45(5) 1.200

46(6) 1.800

48 1.800

56(26) 1.200

66(26) 1.200

Other Forms 1.800

If the value is not found for the class 320 Kh, it will use that forms
class 200 setting until a new setting is setup in System Manager.

Defining Default P/DR Values (200-Series)


For 200-Series devices, use this option to create the list of valid P/DR values to be used as the default system
values. As you create a program, this list will automatically be displayed when selecting the P/DR value.

The P/DR value can be changed when you initialize a 200-Series register, if P/DR Value is selected as a
Programming Option for the 200 Series. The Initialization Prompt-For dialog will display the list of valid
P/DR values defined here.

User's Manual 16
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 6: P/DR Values Window

P/DR Field Descriptions


Valid P/DR Values
This area displays the currently defined P/DR values. Enter additional P/DR values as desired. Valid entries
are 0.000 through 9,999,999.

Defining Default Pulse Weight Values


Choose this item to create the list of valid pulse weight values to be used as the system default values for load
profile and pulse inputs and outputs. The values configured here are displayed as Pulse Weight selection
options when you configure the Load Profile or I/O program component.

The range of valid entries is based on the increment range allowed for each device type. The
low value in the range represents the smallest increment the meter can store. When defining
pulse weights, round up your calculated, desired pulse weight to an increment of the valid
increments shown.

For detailed information about calculating pulse weight and examples, refer to the device
user's manual for the device type.

The pulse weight value for an individual meter can be changed when you initialize it, if you have selected
Pulse Weights on the Programming Options dialog for the device.

User's Manual 17
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 7: Pulse Weight Values Window

Pulse Weight Values Field Descriptions


Valid Pulse Weight Values
This area displays the currently defined Pulse Weight values. Valid entries for each device type are given
below.

CENTRON meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.02 to 999,999 unit-hours per pulse in 0.02 increments.
CENTRON II (C12.19) meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.01 to 1000.00 unit-hours per pulse in 0.01 increments.
CENTRON (V&I) meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.01 to 655.00 unit-hours per pulse in 0.01 increments.
• Input/Output pulse weights: 0.01 to 655.00 unit-hours per pulse in 0.01 increments.
CENTRON (C12.19) meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.01 to 1000.00 unit-hours per pulse in 0.01 increments.
Q1000 meters:

User's Manual 18
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.00005 to 999,999 unit hours per pulse in 0.00001 increments. The value of
1.00000 is always present.
• Input/Output pulse weights: 0.00001 through 100,000 in 0.00001 increments.
SENTINEL meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.025 to 800.000 unit-hours per pulse in 0.025 increments.
• Input/Output pulse weights: 0.025 through 1638.375 in 0.025 increments.
VECTRON meters:

• Load Profile pulse weights: 0.02 to 999,999 unit-hours per pulse in 0.02 increments.
• Input/Output pulse weights: 0.001 through 999,999 in 0.001 increments.

Defining Default Phone Home Numbers


You can create the list of valid phone home phone numbers to be used as the system default values. As you
create a program, this list will automatically be displayed when selecting the Phone Home Configuration.

For SENTINEL meters that will phone home to pagers, put an uppercase X as the first
character of the pager phone number. For pagers, only one dial attempt is made.

Figure 8: Default Phone Home Numbers Window

Default Phone Home Numbers Field Descriptions


Valid Phone Home Phone Numbers

User's Manual 19
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

This area displays the currently defined Phone Home numbers. Enter additional phone numbers as desired. A
blank line is provided at the bottom of the list for you to enter a new value. Enter a maximum of 65 characters
including the following symbols:
* (asterisk)
, (comma)
. (period)
# (number symbol)
- (dash, hyphen)
<blank>

Defining Default CT Ratios


For CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL meters, use the CT Default Ratios dialog to
add, edit, and delete the valid current transformer ratios. The CT Ratios that you define here determine the
values that are available on the Device Multiplier dialog when you configure a program file.

The CT ratios that you define here are not used for the QUANTUM Q1000 meter program
files. For the Q1000 meter, you define the CT ratios on the Device Multiplier dialog.

Figure 9: CT Ratios Window

User's Manual 20
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

CT Ratios Field Descriptions


Valid CT Values
This area lists the currently defined CT ratios for your system. Enter additional values as desired. A blank line
is provided at the bottom of the list for you to enter a new value. Valid entries are 1.0 to 800.0.

Defining Default VT Ratios


For CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL meters, use the VT Default Ratios dialog to
add, edit, and delete the valid voltage transformer ratios. The VT Ratios that you define here determine the
values that are available on the Device Multiplier dialog when you configure a program file.

The VT ratios that you define here are not used for the QUANTUM Q1000 meter program
files. For the Q1000 meter, you define the VT ratios on the Device Multiplier dialog.

Figure 10: VT Ratios Window

VT Ratios Field Descriptions


Valid VT Values
This area lists the currently defined VT ratios for your system. Enter additional values as desired. A blank line
is provided at the bottom of the list for you to enter a new value. Valid entries are 1.0 to 1024.0.

User's Manual 21
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Defining Default Display Format


For CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL meters, use the Default Display Formats dialog
to define the default format for displaying values on the meter display. You can define the number of digits,
the units, leading zeros, the display annunciator, and floating point decimal.

Before you begin creating display files, define the default display format for energy, demand, cumulative
demand, and instantaneous values as well as for power factor items. The default display formats are used
when you add new items to a display file.

Not all display formats are used by all device types. For more information, refer to the
Technical Reference Guide for the meter.

Figure 11: Display Format Window

Display Format Field Descriptions


Total # Digits
For each format item, select the number of digits to use as the default display for this quantity. For example,
000 to 000000.
# Decimal Digits
For each format item, select the number of decimal digits to use as the default display for this quantity. For
example .00 or .000.
Display Units
For each format item, select the display units to use as the default display for this quantity. Select Units, Kilo,
or Mega.

User's Manual 22
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Leading Zeros
For each format item, if you want to use leading zeros for the quantity, check this box. For example, if you
select leading zeros and the total number of digits to be displayed is 6, a value of 123.4 will be displayed as
00123.4.
Display Annunciator
For each format item, if you want to use the display annunciator (such as Wh, PF, or VA) for the quantity,
check this box. The display annunciator is not available for all quantities and items.
Floating Decimal
For each format item, if you want to use a floating point decimal for the quantity, check this box. For example
using a floating point decimal, when the register increments from the value 9999.99 to the value 10000.0 only
one decimal place is displayed, therefore showing the most significant digits.

Defining Default Device Security Codes


Device security codes restrict access to online meter functions including the ability to program the meter
(write the meter configuration to the meter) and the ability to read the data in the meter. Use of security codes
is optional. To access the security codes dialogs, from the System Manager navigation tree, choose Device
Security Codes and then select the device type.

If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. For example, if you leave
the Primary Security code blank for Default Values Device Security codes, then all users will have primary
access.

The device security codes that are listed on the security codes dialog at the time you initialize a device are
written to the device when it is programmed. The device then expects those security codes when a user logs
on to the meter. Access to meter information is granted to users based on the security code used at logon.

• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields on the Security Codes
dialog blank. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the
meter.
• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• Enter a unique code for each security code level that you define for a device type.
• To enter a site-specific security code when you initialize a meter, select Security Codes as
a programming option for the device type. For more information see Defining
Programming Options (on page 38).

How Device Security Codes Are Used


The system always tries to log on to a device with a Primary security code first. Therefore, if you leave the
Primary security code blank and enter only a Secondary security code, anyone trying to log on to the device
will have Primary access, regardless of the Secondary security code.

PC-PRO+ Advanced attempts to log on to a device using security codes in the following order:

User's Manual 23
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Primary security code in PC-PRO+ Advanced for this device type


• Previous security code used to log on to the specific meter
• A security code of all nulls
If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Overriding Security Codes


You can enable the Override Security Code option for a device on the device Logon dialog (Program Editor |
Communications | Logon). If you select the Override Security Code option, the Override Security Codes
field and the Use Null Code field on the Logon dialog are enabled allowing a user to log on to a device by
entering an override security code or a null code.

If you enter an override security code at logon, the system attempts to log on to the meter using security codes
in the following order:

• Security code entered by a user on the Logon dialog


• Previous security code used to log on to the specific meter
• A security code of all nulls
• For more information see Logging On Using a Manual Connection in the Program
Editor help.
• The Override Security Code option is not available for the Batch Initialization feature. For
more information see To Use Batch Initialization in the Program Editor help.

CENTRON Device Security Codes


The CENTRON device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
CENTRON meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. During
programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

User's Manual 24
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 12: Device Security Codes - CENTRON Window

CENTRON Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the ability to download
new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be programmed into the meter using the level of access
provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes to the meter is allowed.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

User's Manual 25
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

CENTRON (C12.19) Device Security Codes


The CENTRON (C12.19) device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access
to data in CENTRON (C12.19) meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access
to the meter. During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 13: CENTRON (C12.19) Device Security Codes

CENTRON (C12.19) Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary/Firmware Download
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Primary/Firmware Download security code. This
security code provides full read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the
ability to download new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be programmed into the meter using
the level of access provided by this security code.
Limited Reconfigure
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Limited Reconfigure security code. The Limited
Reconfigure security code provides read and limited write access including the ability to reset demand, change
the time in the device, and reconfigure the device. You cannot clear billing data, reconfigure custom
schedules, change display modes, or change security codes.

User's Manual 26
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Secondary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security
code provides read-only access with demand reset and time change. No operation that writes to the meter is
allowed.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes information to the meter is available. This
code can be used by other applications that communicate with the meter.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

CSH-SysMgr-CENTRON II C12.19 Device Security Codes


The CENTRON II (C12.19) device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting
access to data in CENTRON II (C12.19) meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level
of access to the meter. During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the
meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

User's Manual 27
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

CENTRON II (C12.19) Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary/Firmware Download
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Primary/Firmware Download security code. This
security code provides full read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the
ability to download new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be programmed into the meter using
the level of access provided by this security code.
Limited Reconfigure
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Limited Reconfigure security code. The Limited
Reconfigure security code provides read and limited write access including the ability to reset demand, change
the time in the device, and reconfigure the device. You cannot clear billing data, reconfigure custom
schedules, change display modes, or change security codes.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security
code provides read-only access with demand reset and time change. No operation that writes to the meter is
allowed.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes information to the meter is available. This
code can be used by other applications that communicate with the meter.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

CENTRON (V&I) Device Security Codes


The CENTRON (V&I) device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to
data in CENTRON (V&I) meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the
meter. During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

User's Manual 28
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 14: CENTRON (V&I) Device Security Codes

CENTRON (V&I) Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary/Firmware Download
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Primary/Firmware Download security code. This
security code provides full read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the
ability to download new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be programmed into the meter using
the level of access provided by this security code.
Limited Reconfigure
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Limited Reconfigure security code. The Limited
Reconfigure security code provides read and limited write access including the ability to reset demand, change
the time in the device, and reconfigure the device. You cannot clear billing data, reconfigure custom
schedules, change display modes, or change security codes.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security
code provides read-only access with demand reset and time change. No operation that writes to the meter is
allowed.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes information to the meter is available. This
code can be used by other applications that communicate with the meter.

User's Manual 29
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Previous Security Code


Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

DATA STAR Device Security Codes


The DATA STAR device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data
in DATA STAR Recorders. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the
meter. During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 15: DATASTAR Device Security Codes

DATA STAR Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options. New security codes can be
programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.

User's Manual 30
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Previous Security Code


Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

200 Series Device Security Codes


The 200 Series device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
200 Series Registers. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.
During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 16: 200 Series Device Security Codes

200 Series Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options. New security codes can be
programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.
User's Manual 31
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Previous Security Code


Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

FULCRUM Device Security Codes


The FULCRUM device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
FULCRUM meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. During
programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 17: FULCRUM Device Security Codes

FULCRUM Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options. New security codes can be
programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.

User's Manual 32
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes to the meter is allowed.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

Q1000 Device Security Codes


The Q1000 device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
Q1000 meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. During
programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 18: Device Security Codes - Q1000 Window

User's Manual 33
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Q1000 Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options. The only function not available to
this permission level is the ability to download new firmware to the meter. New security codes can be
programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security
code provides read-only access plus reset capabilities including the following: the ability to Reset Demand
Registers, reconfigure communications, and change the meter's Display Mode to Alternate.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes to the meter is allowed.
Firmware Download Access
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the security code for firmware download. This security
code provides unrestricted access to the meter that includes the ability to download new firmware to the meter
and upgrade MeterKey features for the meter.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

QUANTUM Device Security Codes


The QUANTUM device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
QUANTUM meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.
During programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

User's Manual 34
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 19: QUANTUM Device Security Codes

QUANTUM Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options. New security codes can be
programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

SENTINEL Device Security Codes


The SENTINEL device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
SENTINEL meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. During
programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter. Refer to Setting Default
Device Security Codes for more information about security codes.

User's Manual 35
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 20: Device Security Codes - SENTINEL Window

SENTINEL Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary/Firmware Download
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Primary/Firmware Download security code. This
security code provides full read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the
ability to download new firmware to the meter and upgrade or downgrade MeterKey features for the meter.
New security codes can be programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by this security
code.
Limited Reconfigure
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Limited Reconfigure security code. The Limited
Reconfigure security code provides read and limited write access including the ability to reset demand, change
the time in the device, and reconfigure the device. You cannot clear billing data, change display modes, or
change security codes.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security
code provides read-only access with demand reset and time change. No operation that writes to the meter is
allowed.

User's Manual 36
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes information to the meter is available. This
code can be used by other applications that communicate with the meter.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

VECTRON Device Security Codes


The VECTRON device security codes are used for logging on, programming, and restricting access to data in
VECTRON meters. If a field is blank, no security code is required for that level of access to the meter. During
programming, the security codes entered into these fields are written to the meter. Refer to Setting Default
Device Security Codes for more information about security codes.

• If you only want to use one security code, enter only a Primary security code.
• If you do not want to use device security codes, leave all fields blank. If a field is blank,
no security code is required for that level of access to the meter.

Figure 21: Device Security Codes - VECTRON Window

User's Manual 37
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

VECTRON Device Security Codes Field Descriptions


Primary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Primary security code. The Primary security code
provides read/write access to the meter including all programming options as well as the ability to download
new firmware to the meter and upgrade or downgrade MeterKey features for the meter. New security codes
can be programmed into the meter using the level of access provided by the primary security code.
Secondary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Secondary security code. The Secondary security code
provides read-only access plus reset capabilities and the ability to Reset Demand Registers and change the
meter's Display Mode to Alternate.
Tertiary
Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters for the Tertiary security code. The Tertiary security code
provides read-only access to the meter. No operation that writes to the meter is allowed.
Previous Security Code
Enter the security code previously used to log on to the device. If you are changing the security codes, enter
the primary security code for the device type here.

Defining Programming Options


The Programing Options allow you identify items that you want to be able to change for individual devices
when you initialize (program) each meter. The programming options that you select determine the
initialization prompt-for options that will be displayed each time you initialize a meter.

To include the meter Unit ID, Meter ID, or meter serial number in the meter data that is returned from the
device, the ID numbers must be entered on the prompt-for dialogs when the meter is initialized. Select the
required ID items on the Programming Options dialog for each device type.

The meter serial number and the Unit ID can be the same. For device types that use a Meter ID, the Meter ID
is the first nine characters of the serial number, Meter ID2 is the last nine characters (if applicable) of the
serial number.

For the CENTRON, Q1000, and VECTRON meters, the Unit ID Source can be user ID (entered at
initialization), a Load Research ID, or the Meter Serial Number. Additionally, if the Source ID is longer than
the required Unit ID, you can specify where in the Source ID string to begin validating the ID. For more
information click the help buttons on the Initialization Prompt For Dialogs in the Program Editor help.

CENTRON Programming Options


Use the CENTRON Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that you want
to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a CENTRON meter.

User's Manual 38
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 22: CENTRON Programming Options

CENTRON Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Reset Time on Battery
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Note: Also refer to the options for the Employee ID field later in this section. If you choose to use the
Employee ID for a User Data field, the corresponding User Data field is not available on this dialog.
Unit ID
Choose an option:

User's Manual 39
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the end user to enter a Unit ID.
• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the end user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select
Do Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the end user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the first 8
characters of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial
Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–Use the specified characters of the 18-character meter serial number as the Unit ID.
Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial
Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for Meter Serial Number above, select the serial number length. The range is 1 through
18.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want to use the Employee ID in a User Data field, select Do Not Prompt.
• User Data 1 / 2 / 3–To use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the
user at system logon) in a User Data field, select User Data 1, User Data 2, or User Data 3. If you choose a
User Data field, the Employee ID is shown in the corresponding User Data field on the Initialization
Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed. If selected for the Employee ID, the corresponding User Data
field above is no longer available on this dialog.
Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).

CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options


Use the CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that
you want to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a CENTRON (C12.19) meter.

User's Manual 40
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 23: CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options

CENTRON (C12.19) Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Unit ID
For CENTRON (C12.19) meters, the Meter ID is the first nine characters of the Unit ID. Meter ID2 is the next
nine characters (if applicable) of the Unit ID. Choose the default Unit ID option:

• Use Existing Unit ID–The value for Unit ID is shown on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can
change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Meter Serial Number–The meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on the initialization prompt-
for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on
the prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

User's Manual 41
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• The MV-90 system uses the Unit ID to identify meters.


• The Unit ID (Meter ID and Meter ID2) can be configured for display on the CENTRON (C12.19) meter
using the Display Configuration component. For information about Display Configuration, refer to the
PC-PRO+ Advanced CENTRON (C12.19) Device User’s Manual.
Meter Serial Number
Note: The manufacturer's meter serial number is pre-configured in the CENTRON (C12.19) meter and is
displayed in the Device Status, Operational Status information while online with a meter or in the Meter
Image File.

Choose the default meter serial number option.

• Use Meter Serial Number–The user-defined meter serial number is shown as the default on the
initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial Number on the prompt-for
dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the default
meter serial number on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial
Number on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–Use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the user at system
logon) in the User Data 1 field. If you choose Prompt, the Employee ID is shown in the User Data 1 field
on the Initialization Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed.
• Do Not Prompt– The employee ID is not used in the User Data 1 field.

Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).


User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

• If you chose to use the Employee ID in the User Data 1 field (for Employee ID select Prompt), the User
Data 1 field is not available on this dialog.
• If the meter is configured to use a Custom Schedule, the Custom Schedule Name is used in the User Data
2 field.
Reset # of Power Outages
Choose an option:

User's Manual 42
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset # of Demand Resets
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Clock
Choose an option:

• Enable–To enable all clock-dependent functionality when the meter is initialized, select Enable. This
enables the meter battery and all clock-dependent features such as Load Profile, TOU, billing schedules,
self-reads, and time stamps for RF board data.
• Do Not Enable– Do not enable the meter clock and clock-related functionality when the meter is
initialized.

CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options


Use the CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that
you want to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a CENTRON (V&I) meter.

User's Manual 43
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 24: CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options

CENTRON (V&I) Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Unit ID
For CENTRON (V&I) meters, the Meter ID is the first nine characters of the Unit ID. Meter ID2 is the next
nine characters (if applicable) of the Unit ID. Choose the default Unit ID option:

• Use Existing Unit ID–The value for Unit ID is shown on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can
change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Meter Serial Number–The meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on the initialization prompt-
for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on
the prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

User's Manual 44
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• The MV-90 system uses the Unit ID to identify meters.


• The Unit ID (Meter ID and Meter ID2) can be configured for display on the CENTRON (C12.19) meter
using the Display Configuration component. For information about Display Configuration, refer to the
PC-PRO+ Advanced CENTRON (C12.19) Device User’s Manual.
Meter Serial Number
Note: The manufacturer's meter serial number is pre-configured in the CENTRON (C12.19) meter and is
displayed in the Device Status, Operational Status information while online with a meter or in the Meter
Image File.

Choose the default meter serial number option.

• Use Meter Serial Number–The user-defined meter serial number is shown as the default on the
initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial Number on the prompt-for
dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the default
meter serial number on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial
Number on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–Use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the user at system
logon) in the User Data 1 field. If you choose Prompt, the Employee ID is shown in the User Data 1 field
on the Initialization Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed.
• Do Not Prompt– The employee ID is not used in the User Data 1 field.

Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).


User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

• If you chose to use the Employee ID in the User Data 1 field (for Employee ID select Prompt), the User
Data 1 field is not available on this dialog.
• If the meter is configured to use a Custom Schedule, the Custom Schedule Name is used in the User Data
2 field.
Reset # of Power Outages
Choose an option:

User's Manual 45
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset # of Demand Resets
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Clock
Choose an option:

• Enable–To enable all clock-dependent functionality when the meter is initialized, select Enable. This
enables the meter battery and all clock-dependent features such as Load Profile, TOU, billing schedules,
self-reads, and time stamps for RF board data.
• Do Not Enable– Do not enable the meter clock and clock-related functionality when the meter is
initialized.

DATA STAR Programming Options


Use the DATA STAR Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that you
want to be able to change for individual devices when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a device PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual device. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a DATA STAR recorder.

User's Manual 46
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 25: DATASTAR Programming Options

DATA STAR Programming Options Field Descriptions


Unit ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the first 8 characters
of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number
select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–Use the specified characters of the 18-character meter serial number as the Unit ID.
Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial
Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.

200 Series Programming Options


Use the 200 Series Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that you want
to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

User's Manual 47
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a 200 Series meter.

Figure 26: 200 Series Programming Options

200 Series Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Note: Also refer to the options for the Employee ID field later in this section. If you choose to use the
Employee ID for a User Data field, the corresponding User Data field is not available on this dialog.
Unit ID
Choose an option:

User's Manual 48
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the first 8 characters
of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number
select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–Use the specified characters of the 18-character meter serial number as the Unit ID.
Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial
Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for Meter Serial Number above, select the serial number length. The range is 1 through
18.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want to use the Employee ID in a User Data field, select Do Not Prompt.
• User Data 1 / 2 / 3–To use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the
user at system logon) in a User Data field, select User Data 1, User Data 2, or User Data 3. If you choose a
User Data field, the Employee ID is shown in the corresponding User Data field on the Initialization
Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed. If selected for the Employee ID, the corresponding User Data
field above is no longer available on this dialog.
Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).

User's Manual 49
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

FULCRUM Programming Options


Use the FULCRUM Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that you want
to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a FULCRUM meter.

Figure 27: FULCRUM Programming Options

FULCRUM Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Note: Also refer to the options for the Employee ID field later in this section. If you choose to use the
Employee ID for a User Data field, the corresponding User Data field is not available on this dialog.

User's Manual 50
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Unit ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the first 8 characters
of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number
select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–Use the specified characters of the 18-character meter serial number as the Unit ID.
Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial
Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for Meter Serial Number above, select the serial number length. The range is 1 through
18.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want to use the Employee ID in a User Data field, select Do Not Prompt.
• User Data 1 / 2 / 3–To use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the
user at system logon) in a User Data field, select User Data 1, User Data 2, or User Data 3. If you choose a
User Data field, the Employee ID is shown in the corresponding User Data field on the Initialization
Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed. If selected for the Employee ID, the corresponding User Data
field above is no longer available on this dialog.
Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).

Q1000 Programming Options


The Programing Options allow you identify items that you want to be able to change for individual devices
when you initialize (program) a meter. The programming options that you select determine the initialization
prompt-for options that will be displayed each time you initialize a meter. For more information see the PC-
PRO+ Advanced System User’s Manual.

Use the Q1000 Programming Options dialog to identify the meter information that you want to be able to
change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

User's Manual 51
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Each device should have a unique serial number—the Meter Serial Number and the Unit ID may have the
same identification number. The Unit ID Source can be the user-entered ID, a Load Research ID, or the Meter
Serial Number. Additionally, if the Source ID is longer than the required Unit ID, you can specify where in
the Source ID string to begin validating the ID.

Figure 28: Q1000 Programming Options

Q1000 Programming Options Dialog Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Reset # of Power Outages
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset # of Demand Resets
Choose an option:

User's Manual 52
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset # of Field Tests
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset Time on Battery
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
User Data 1 through 5
For Q1000 meters, user data fields can be used in the following ways:

• You can configure a line on the Q1000 meter display to display text using the text from a user data field.
The selections for the user data fields are available in the Non-Register Values section of the displayable
items.
• The first five user data fields can be modified at program time if you select them on the Programming
Options: Electricity tab. User Field number one in Programming Options corresponds to User Data field
number one on this dialog.
• You can use one of the first five user data fields to define a unit ID for the QDIP protocol (QDIP ID).
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Unit ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the specified
characters of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, select Prompt for
Meter Serial Number, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
Load Research ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the load research ID and use the specified
characters of the Load Research ID as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position in the field
provided below.

User's Manual 53
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Unit ID Starting Position


Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for meter serial number above, enter a value from 1 through 32 for the number of
digits in the meter serial number.

QUANTUM Programming Options


Use the QUANTUM Programming Options dialog to identify the site-specific meter information that you
want to be able to change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of dialogs that prompt you to enter the
site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you define on the Programming Options dialogs
determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a QUANTUM meter.

Figure 29: QUANTUM Programming Options

QUANTUM Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

User's Manual 54
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Reset Time on Battery
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
User Data 1 through User Data 4
Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Note: Also refer to the options for the Employee ID field later in this section. If you choose to use the
Employee ID for a User Data field, the corresponding User Data field is not available on this dialog.
Unit ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the first 8 characters
of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number
select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–Use the specified characters of the 18-character meter serial number as the Unit ID.
Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial
Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for Meter Serial Number above, select the serial number length. The range is 1 through
18.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

User's Manual 55
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want to use the Employee ID in a User Data field, select Do Not Prompt.
• User Data 1 / 2 / 3 / 5–To use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the
user at system logon) in a User Data field, select User Data 1, 2, 3, or 5. If you choose a User Data field,
the Employee ID is shown in the corresponding User Data field on the Initialization Prompt For dialog,
but it cannot be changed. If selected for the Employee ID, the corresponding User Data field above is no
longer available on this dialog.
Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).

SENTINEL Programming Options


Use the SENTINEL Programming Options window to select the device-specific program components that you
want to be able to change when you initialize (program) an individual SENTINEL meter.

When you initialize a meter, you select the program file to use. However, you may want to change certain
site-specific values for an individual meter. The items you select on the Programming Options window
determine the system prompts that will be displayed when you initialize a meter.

The Activity Counters options (Reset Number of Power Outages and Reset Number
of Demand Resets) do not display a user prompt at initialization; they are reset
during initialization based on your selections on the Programming Options dialog.

Figure 30: SENTINEL Programming Options

SENTINEL Programming Options Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

User's Manual 56
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Unit ID
For SENTINEL meters, the Meter ID is the first nine characters of the Unit ID. Meter ID2 is the next nine
characters (if applicable) of the Unit ID. Choose the default Unit ID option:

• Use Existing Unit ID–The value for Unit ID is shown on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can
change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Meter Serial Number–The meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on the initialization prompt-
for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the Unit ID on
the prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Unit ID on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

• The MV-90 system uses the Unit ID to identify meters.


• The Unit ID (Meter ID and Meter ID2) can be configured for display on the SENTINEL meter using the
Display Configuration component. For information about Display Configuration, refer to the PC-PRO+
Advanced SENTINEL Device User’s Manual.
Meter Serial Number
Note: The manufacturer's meter serial number is pre-configured in the SENTINEL meter and is displayed in
the Device Status, Operational Status information while online with a meter or in the Meter Image File.

Choose the default meter serial number option:

• Use Meter Serial Number–The user-defined meter serial number is shown as the default on the
initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial Number on the prompt-for
dialog as desired.
• Use Manufacturer’s Serial Number–The manufacturer's meter serial number is shown as the default
meter serial number on the initialization prompt-for dialog. You can change the value for Meter Serial
Number on the prompt-for dialog as desired.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–Use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the user at system
logon) in the User Data 1 field. If you choose Prompt, the Employee ID is shown in the User Data 1 field
on the Initialization Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed.
• Do Not Prompt–The employee ID is not used in the User Data 1 field.

Note: Also see Security for Users (on page 75).

User's Manual 57
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

User Data 1 / User Data 2 / User Data 3


Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Notes:

• If you chose to use the Employee ID in the User Data 1 field (for Employee ID select Prompt), the User
Data 1 field is not available on this dialog.
• If the meter is configured to use a Custom Schedule, the Custom Schedule Name is used in the User Data
2 field.
Peak Demand Current
The Peak Demand Current is used for harmonic configuration. If a value for Peak Demand Current is not
entered when you initialize a meter that supports harmonics, the maximum rated current for the meter as
determined by the meter class is used. Choose an option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Set Custom Schedule Name to User Data 2
Choose an option:

• Set–Use the custom schedule name in the User Data 2 field. If you also select Prompt for the User Data 2
field, the User Data 2 field can be edited when you initialize a meter.
• Do Not Set–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
Reset # of Power Outages
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Reset # of Demand Resets
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.

VECTRON Programming Options


Use the VECTRON Programming Options dialog to identify the meter information that you want to be able to
change for individual meters when you initialize devices.

User's Manual 58
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

When you initialize a meter, PC-PRO+ Advanced presents a series of prompt-for dialogs that allow you to
enter the site-specific values for the individual meter. The items you check on the Programming Options
dialogs determine which system prompts are displayed when you initialize a VECTRON meter.

Figure 31: VECTRON Programming Options

VECTRON Programming Options Dialog Field Descriptions


Options
For each programming option, choose Prompt, Do Not Prompt, or other options as described below:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
SiteScan Service Type
For VECTRON meters with firmware version 2.4 or later, the auto service sensing feature of the meter
automatically selects the service type. For VECTRON meters with firmware version 2.3 and earlier choose an
option:

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt– You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.
User Data 1 through 3
Choose an option:

User's Manual 59
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Prompt–You will be able to configure this item on the initialization prompt for dialog.
• Do Not Prompt–You will not be able to configure this item at initialization.

Note: Also refer to the options for the Employee ID field later in this section. If you choose to use the
Employee ID for a User Data field, the corresponding User Data field is not available on this dialog.
Reset Time on Battery
Choose an option:

• Reset–This item will be reset when the meter is initialized.


• Do Not Reset–This item will not be reset at initialization.
Unit ID
Choose an option:

• Prompt–At meter initialization, prompt the user to enter a Unit ID.


• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want the user to be able to configure this item at initialization, select Do
Not Prompt.
• Meter ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the Meter Serial Number and use the specified
characters of the serial number as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter Serial
Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
• Load Research ID–At initialization, prompt the user to enter the load research ID and use the specified
characters of the Load Research ID as the Unit ID. Also enter the Unit ID Starting Position, for Meter
Serial Number select Prompt, and enter the Serial Number Length in the fields provided below.
Unit ID Starting Position
Select the position in the meter serial number or the load research ID that is the first character of the unit ID.
For example, if the unit ID starts with the 2nd digit of the Meter ID, select 2. The range is 1 to 32.
Meter Serial Number Length
If you selected Prompt for Meter Serial Number above, select the serial number length. The range is 1 through
18.
Employee ID
Choose an option:

• Do Not Prompt–If you do not want to use the Employee ID in a User Data field, select Do Not Prompt.
• User Data 1 / 2 / 3–To use the Employee ID of the employee who initializes the meter (entered by the
user at system logon) in a User Data field, select User Data 1, User Data 2, or User Data 3. If you choose a
User Data field, the Employee ID is shown in the corresponding User Data field on the Initialization
Prompt For dialog, but it cannot be changed. If selected for the Employee ID, the corresponding User Data
field above is no longer available on this dialog.

User's Manual 60
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Configuring DST Change Dates


Use the DST (Daylight Savings Time) dialog to configure the DST time change dates for your PC-PRO+
Advanced system. DST dates are automatically updated in the meter when you initialize the meter or if you
select the DST option when you reconfigure a meter. Configuring the DST change dates in the PC-PRO+
Advanced System Manager provides the correct times for load profile data read between the time of the DST
change and the next device clock reset.

When you install PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.20 or higher, you are prompted to choose
whether to use the DST dates defined in the U. S. Energy Regulatory Act of 2005. If you
choose to use the new DST dates, the PC-PRO+ Advanced DST calendar is revised to use
the new dates for years 2007 and later. For more information refer to the PC-PRO+
Advanced and Shop-Pro Installation Guide.

To Define DST Change Dates


1. Start the System Manager application.
2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select DST.
3. In the To DST and From DST columns, double-click to select each date you want to change.
A calendar is displayed.
4. Use the arrows or the scroll bar at the bottom of the calendar to select the month. Click to select the date
for the time change.
5. In the clock area, select the Time to Jump To DST and From DST. Click and drag the hands of the clock
or type over the time shown.
6. Continue setting the change times for years as desired for the dates listed.
7. When you have finished, click the Save All Changes.

Avoiding DST Clock Reset Problems


To avoid problems with PC-PRO+ Advanced identifying DST or standard time, allow a one hour buffer
before and after the hour of the DST change during which no DST configuration or clock resets are done.

The following table indicates the standard hours when the DST time change occurs for different locations.
The DST time change dates are shown as "Advance to DST" and "Retard from DST"; the actual dates are not
shown. It also shows the times when you should avoid making changes to the DST configuration or resetting
the device clock on the date of the DST change.

User's Manual 61
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Hours to Avoid Changing DST and Resetting Device Clock

USA EU South America Brazil

Advance Retard Advance Retard Advance Retard Advance Retard


to DST from DST to DST from DST to DST from DST to DST from DST
to to to to
Standard Standard Standard Standard
Time Time Time Time
Hour of At 2:00 At 2:00 AM At 2:00 AM At 3:00 AM At 1:00 AM At 1:00 AM At 12:00 At 12:00
DST AM change change to change to change to change to change to AM AM
Change to 3:00 AM 1:00 AM 3:00 AM 2:00 AM 2:00 AM 12:00 AM change to change to
1:00 AM 11:00 PM

Do not From 1:00 From 12:00 From 1:00 From 1:00 From 12:00 From 11:00 From 11:00 From 10:00
Configure AM until AM until AM until AM until AM until AM until AM until AM until
DST or 4:00 AM 3:00 AM 4:00 AM 4:00 AM 3:00 AM 2:00 AM 2:00 AM 1:00 AM
Reset
Clock

Figure 32: Example: Changing To DST

User's Manual 62
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 33: Example: Changing From DST

DST Dialog
When you select DST from the System Manager navigation tree, the DST Control dialog is displayed. The left
side of the window lists the years and the dates on which the DST time change will take place for each year.
The DST dates for North America are used as the default change dates. The right side of the dialog shows the
DST change times.

Set the beginning and ending DST dates for each year by clicking on the dates shown for each year. The To
DST date is the date when Daylight Savings Time begins and the From DST Date is the date when the time
changes back to standard time.

User's Manual 63
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 34: Daylight Savings Time Window

DST Field Descriptions


To DST (Begin)/From DST (End)
Double-click to select the DST date you want to modify. Use the scroll bar to select the new month and click
to select the date from the pop-up calendar.
Time to Jump To DST
Select the time to begin DST. Select the date of the DST change and then click and drag the hands of the
clock or enter the time for the change.
Time to Jump From DST
Select the time to end DST. Select the date of the DST change and then click and drag the hands of the clock
or enter the time for the change.
New Year to Add
To add a year to the DST change list, select the year and then click the Add Year button.

Defining Field-Pro Settings


The Field-Pro system is a meter programming and reading tool that can be used to initialize metering devices
in the field. The software is designed for ease of use on a Windows-based PC and can be used on laptop or
notebook PCs. The Field-Pro system uses program files and settings that are created on a PC-PRO+ Advanced
master station and exported for a Field-Pro PC.

User's Manual 64
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

In addition to initializing meters, Field-Pro can be used to reset demand registers, view and edit meter data,
and adjust the device clock. Field-Pro also supports meter reading, diagnostics, and export of Meter Image
File and MV-90 HHF data.

The Field-Pro device settings determine which programming operations the Field-Pro user will be able to
perform for each device type. The Field-Pro settings also define which data file format Field-Pro will use to
store data collected from each device type. Field-Pro can export meter data in the MV-90 HHF file format, the
Meter Image File format, or both.

Field-Pro Setup Overview


Before you begin using a Field-Pro system to program and read meters, you must configure the following
Field-Pro settings in the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station using the System Manager application.

• The Field-Pro settings determine which programming and reading operations the Field-Pro user will be
able to perform for each device type. The Field-Pro settings also define which file format Field-Pro will
use for saving meter data. Field-Pro can export meter data in the MV-90 HHF file format, the Meter
Image File format, or both. For more information see the Field-Pro settings window for each device type.
• You can create a different settings file and a different master station program export directory for each
Field-Pro user, if desired. Use the Windows file sharing features to control user access to the different
directories on the master station.
• After you have configured the Field-Pro settings in the System Manager, create a Replica File by selecting
File | Create Replica File. This will contain all the necessary settings to be used by Field-Pro.

Field-Pro settings are transferred to the Field-Pro PC when the Field-Pro user runs the "Load Replica File"
function on the Field-Pro PC. After data is acquired by the Field-Pro system, the "Upload to Master Station"
function is performed again on the Field-Pro PC to transfer the MIF and/or MV-90 HHF data files to the PC-
PRO+ Advanced master station. This function will also transfer the Activity Log.

For more information about the Field-Pro functions, refer to the Field-Pro User’s Manual or online help.

Setting Up the Master Station File Upload Directory


The Field-Pro PC will copy MV-90 HHF and/or Meter Image Files to the master station data file upload
directory during Field-Pro upload to Master Station. On the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station, create a
directory for the Field-Pro data files and set up Windows file sharing for the data directory.

This directory must be set up to allow Field-Pro network users full access to allow Field-Pro to write to this
directory. Set the File Sharing Permissions for this directory to allow Field-Pro users Full Control. Consult
your network administrator as needed.

To Define Field-Pro Settings


The following steps summarize the process of defining Field-Pro settings.

You must have a replica file loaded prior to logging into Field-Pro.

User's Manual 65
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

1. Start the System Manager application.


2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the Field-Pro Settings node.
3. Select the All Devices item to define common settings for all device types. For more information see
Field-Pro Settings - All Devices (on page 66).
4. Optionally, select the Logon Options item and define the Field-Pro Logon Options. For more information
see Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options (on page 68).
5. Optionally, select the Customizable User Interface item and define the Field-Pro Synchronization
settings. For more information see Field-Pro Settings - Customizable User Interface (on page 69).
6. After you have made your selections for all items, click Save All Changes on the toolbar.

Field-Pro Settings - All Devices


Use the All Devices item to define common settings for all device types.

Figure 35: Field-Pro Settings - All Devices Window

Field-Pro Settings - All Devices Field Descriptions


Set Custom Schedule Name to User Data #2
Select whether or not to set the Custom Schedule name to User Data #2 during Custom Schedule Reconfigure
(SENTINEL only). Choose an option:

User's Manual 66
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Do Not Set (default)


• Set
Reset Billing Registers on Initialization
• Reset–Field-Pro will clear the meter’s billing registers when a meter is initialized.
• Prompt–Field-Pro will prompt the user to decide whether to clear the billing registers.
• Do Not Reset–Leave the billing registers unchanged in the Field-Pro system (default).
Create Data Type
Select what type of Data File to create when creating a Data Files for a connected device (not supported by
CENTRON II C12.19). Choose an option:

• MIF File Only (default)


• MV-90 HHF File Only
• MIF and MV-90 HHF File
• MV-90 HHF Data File Contents
• Maximum Days of Load Profile in MV-90 HHF
Auto Data File Creation
Select whether or not Data File(s) should be created before resetting data on the connected device. Choose an
option:

• Disabled (default)
• Create Data File Before Resetting Data
Transfer Activity Log to Master Station
Select whether or not to transfer the activity logs to the Master Station during upload. Choose an option:

• Yes (default)
• No
Log Upload Directory
Select the directory to use for log files. This folder will contain the logs uploaded from the Field-Pro systems.
This field becomes visible if the Transfer Activity Log to Master Station settings is set to Yes. The default
directory is "C:\".
Data File Upload Directory
Select the directory to use for the Data Files. This folder will contain the Data Files uploaded from the Field-
Pro systems. This field is always visible. The default directory is "C:\".
Field-Pro Password
If you want the Field-Pro user to be prompted to enter a password when the Field-Pro software is started, enter
the password here. Enter a maximum of 20 characters for the password. Click in the field and type the
password.

User's Manual 67
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

If you do not enter a password here, Field-Pro users can start the Field-Pro software without
password security.

Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options


For your convenience you can define the Field-Pro Logon Options on the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station
in the System Manager. If Logon Options are defined in the System Manager, they are transferred to the
Field-Pro system whenever a Replica File is loaded.

For instructions for defining the Field-Pro Logon Options on the Field-Pro system, refer to
the Field-Pro User’s Manual or the Field-Pro help.

Use the Logon Options window to define the default optical probe model, the default maximum baud rate to
use for logging on to ANSI devices, and the override security code setting.

For non-ANSI meters, 4800 or 9600 baud is used.

Figure 36: Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options

Field-Pro Settings - Logon Options Field Descriptions


Override Security Code
This setting determines if the user can specify a security code during logon. The user is only prompted for a
security code if Primary, Previous, and NULL fail to logon. Choose an option:

User's Manual 68
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Disabled (default)
• Enabled
Optical Probe Model
Select the optical probe model the Field-Pro system will use to connect to metering devices. Some optical
probe cables are powered from the PC by turning on the voltage to pins on the PC’s serial port. The model
that you select determines the voltage on the PC’s RS-232 serial port connector pins to the optical port cable.
It also determines how RTS (Request-to-send) and DTR (Data Receive) are set for communications. If the
model used with the Field-Pro PC is not listed, try Generic 1 or Generic 2.

The following values can be used:

• Schlumberger
• Schlumberger (France)
• Schlumberger (Spain)
• US Microtel PM-300
• US Microtel PM-500
• US Microtel PM-600
• GE Smartcoupler SC-1
• Generic 1 (default)
• Generic 2
For information about data values and optical port head types for the different optical probe models, see
Defining the Optical Probe in the Program Editor help.

This value will be able to be modified in the Field-Pro application prior to logging onto a
meter by going to Options | Baud Rate.
Maximum Baud Rate
Select the maximum baud rate to be used by Field-Pro from the drop down list. This value only affects the
ANSI meters as SCS meters will always attempt 9600 and 4800. The default value is "9600".

Customizable User Interface


Field-Pro's Customizable User Interface feature allows you to set up which options you want to be able to
select in Field-Pro as well as the menu the feature should appear on.

The Customizable User Interface screen is available under Field-Pro Settings in the System Manager. You
can make changes, save, and create replica files including these settings. You can even undo changes while
working with the Customizable User Interface screen.

User's Manual 69
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

The left side of the Customizable User Interface screen displays the available Field-Pro features. They have
been grouped together to make selection easier. Each feature could have any number of additional screens
under them (for example, Reset Demand Registers feature will launch a confirmation screen). These
additional screens will not be selectable by a user.

The right side of the Customizable User Interface screen displays the screen layout for Field-Pro. It shows the
function key along with the menu or feature in the order that they will be presented to the Field-Pro user.

You can select a feature and add it to the layout by clicking the Add button or by dragging and dropping it. If
a menu is selected and Add is clicked (or if a feature is dragged onto a menu), then the feature is added to the
first open function key in the menu. The features on the left side become bold when added to the screen
layout. This indicates that the feature is present in one or more menus.

Figure 37: Field-Pro Options - Customizable User Interface

Field-Pro Settings - Customizable User Interface Field Descriptions


Add Menu
The Add Menu button allows you to add new menus to the layout. If an empty function key is selected then
you can click the Add Menu button. A dialog is displayed to allow you to enter the title for the new menu, up
to 80 characters. The menu is added to the layout and the eight empty function keys are displayed. You are
only allowed to create menus down to the third level. If and empty function key is selected on a third level,
the Add Menu button is disabled.
Edit Menu
The Edit Menu button allows you to change the name used for the menu in the Screen Layout tree control, up
to 80 characters.

User's Manual 70
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Delete Menu
Features and empty menus can be removed from the Screen Layout tree control by selecting the feature/menu
and clicking Clear or by hitting the Delete key. Menus with items can be deleted by clicking the Delete Menu
button.
Add >>
The Add >> button allows the user to move a feature to the Field-Pro menu set.
Clear <<
The Clear << button allows the user to remove a feature from the Field-Pro menu set.
Move Up and Move Down
The features can be moved throughout the layout by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. Items
within a menu cannot be moved outside of the menu. The top most items in a menu can only be moved down,
and bottom most items in a menu can only be moved up. You can also move an entire menu either up or
down.

Defining System Security


The PC-PRO+ Advanced system maintains security at two levels:

• Logon access for individual users


• User group access to system functions
Individual users for PC-PRO+ Advanced applications and the Shop-Pro application are defined on the
Security - Users window. Each user is assigned to an access group and each user must have a user ID and
password assigned in the System Manager application.

System access is controlled by designating system functions to user access groups. The functions that each
user group will be allowed to perform are defined on the Security - Features window. The names and
descriptions for Access Groups are defined on the Security - Access Groups window.

The Security node in the navigation tree contains the following items:

• The Features item lists all system functions. Assign system functions to the different user groups.
Assigning features to an access group authorizes all users in that group to perform all features selected for
that group. For more information see Security Features (on page 72).
• The Access Groups item lists all user groups currently defined in the system. Select the Access Groups
item to assign a group ID or name to each group and enter a description for each group. For more
information see Security for Access Groups (on page 73).
• The Users item lists all users currently defined in the system. Select the Users item to authorize individual
users to access the system. You can add new system users and to edit information for users. For more
information see Security for Users (on page 75).

User's Manual 71
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

For information about security for communicating with metering devices, see Defining
Default Device Security Codes (on page 23).

Security Features
The Security Features control access to each function in the PC-PRO+ Advanced system and the Shop-Pro
system. For each feature, you choose whether a user group is allowed to perform the function. For example,
you can create a user group that has access to the reading and viewing of meter information, but not the
functions that would update a program file or initialize a device.

It is highly recommended that the system administrator utilize the security features to avoid
accidental deletion of programs. All users with administrative (Admin) authorization are
allowed to perform all system functions. For more information see Security for Users (on
page 75).

Figure 38: Security - Features

Security - Features Field Descriptions


Features
The PC-PRO+ Advanced system features are listed. The Admin access group has access to all system
functions.

User's Manual 72
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Reconfigure Device and Reconfigure Functions:

For the CENTRON, Q1000, and VECTRON devices, if you set Reconfigure Device to Yes
for a group, all users assigned to the group will be able to perform all of the reconfigure
functions listed below the Reconfigure Device function.

For the SENTINEL, CENTRON (C12.19), and CENTRON (V&I) devices, set each
individual reconfigure function including the Reconfigure Device function to Yes to allow
users to perform the individual functions.
Groups 1 through 4
For each user group, select the system functions that this group will be authorized to perform.

• To authorize all users in this group to perform this function, select Yes.
• To prevent all users in this group from performing this function, select No.

To Authorize Features for Each User Access Group


To Authorize Features for Each User Access Group:

1. Start the System Manager application.


2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the Security node.
3. Select Features.
The Security - Features window is displayed.
4. For each feature listed, choose an option:
• To authorize all users in this group to perform this function, select Yes.
• To prevent all users in this group from performing this function, select No.
5. Click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

Security for Access Groups


The PC-PRO+ Advanced system provides for a system administrator and four levels of users assigned to
access groups. Use the Access Groups item to assign a Group ID and description for each user group.

All users assigned to the administrative (Admin) group have access to all system functions. At least one user
must be assigned to the Admin group.

After you have defined the access groups, use the Security | Features item to identify the system functions that
each access group is authorized to perform. For more information, see Security Features (on page 72).

An example for the Security - Access Groups window is shown below.

User's Manual 73
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 39: Security - Access Groups

Security - Access Groups Field Descriptions


Group ID
Enter from 1 to 8 characters for the Group ID for each user access group you want to define. The Group IDs
defined here are displayed in the Access Group fields on the Security - Users window. For more information
see Security for Users (on page 75).
Description
Enter from 1 to 64 characters for the description for each access group. For example, you could briefly
describe the kinds of system functions this group is authorized to perform.

To Edit Access Group Information


1. Start the System Manager application.
2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the Security node.
3. Select Access Groups.
The Security - Access Groups window is displayed.
4. Select a field and enter the Group ID and Description as desired.
5. Click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

User's Manual 74
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Security for Users


Select the Users item to add new users to the system, modify current user information, and delete users from
the system. An example of the Security - Users window is shown below.

After logging on with the administrator’s (ADMIN) password shipped with the system, you
should change the ADMIN password to a locally secure password. Although you can assign
as many users as desired to the ADMIN group, for security purposes Itron recommends that
you limit the number of users who have ADMIN access.

Figure 40: Security - Users

Security - Users Field Descriptions


User ID
Enter from1 to 8 characters for the User ID for each PC-PRO+ Advanced system user. The User ID is used to
identify each system user to PC-PRO+ Advanced at system logon.
Access Group
Select the Access Group to which this new user will belong.

• The Access Group IDs are defined on the Security - Access Groups window. For more
information see Security for Access Groups (on page 73).
• At least one user must be assigned to the Admin (Administrator) group. All users assigned
to the Admin group have access to all system functions.
Employee ID
Follow your company's guidelines for this field. Choose an option:

User's Manual 75
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Enter from 1 to 15 characters for the Employee ID.


• For Canadian installations using SENTINEL meters, the Employee ID must be a numeric value from 2 to
65535.
Full Name
Enter from 1 to 32 characters for the user's full name.
Password
This defines the password the user will enter on the Logon dialog to log on to PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-
Pro applications. Enter a maximum of 8 characters for the password.

To Add a New User


From the Security | Users item, the administrator can add a new user or modify user information.
1. Start the System Manager application.
2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the Security node.
3. Select Users.
The Security - Users window is displayed.
4. In the User ID column, select a blank line and enter a unique user ID to identify the user to the system.
Use any alphanumeric string of characters. This is the ID the user will enter on the system Logon dialog.
5. In the Access Groups column, select the group to which this user should be assigned. The system
functions for each Access Group are defined using the Features item under the Security node. All users
assigned to the administrative (ADMIN) access group have access to all system functions. At least one
user must be assigned to the ADMIN group.
6. Enter the user’s employee ID in the Employee ID field.
For SENTINEL devices, for Canadian installations, the Employee ID must be a numeric
value greater than or equal to 2.
7. Enter the user’s name in the Full Name field.
8. Enter the user’s password in the Password field. This is the password the user will enter on the PC-PRO+
Advanced logon dialog.
Even though this field displays a string of asterisks (*) initially, there is no default password. To reduce
security breaches, this field is always shown as asterisks regardless of the actual length of the password.

The User ID, Employee ID, and Full Name are required.

9. Click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

To Modify User Information


1. Start the System Manager application. For more information see Starting the System Manager (on page
10).
2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select the Security node.
User's Manual 76
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

3. Select Users.
The Security - Users window is displayed.
4. In the User ID column, select the user whose information you want to edit.
5. Select the field you want to change and enter the desired information. Refer to Security for Users (on page
75) Field Descriptions as needed for field descriptions.
6. Click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

Using System Replication


System Replication is the process of setting up a new PC-PRO+ Advanced system on another PC using the
same system defaults and options as the original system. You can also use the System Replication feature to
set up an optional Shop-Pro client system or Field-Pro client system.

The System Manager application facilitates the process of setting up a new system by creating a replica file
which can be loaded to the new system to set up system defaults and options and copy device program files to
the new system.

Replica File Compatibility


The PC-PRO+ Advanced software version determines compatibility between the Replica file and the system
onto which the Replica file will be loaded. Replica files are compatible for all interim releases from one major
release until the next major release.

• A major release is a release for which the full set of installation files are distributed either on CD or via
download from the Itron Metering FTP site.
• An interim release, also called a patch release, is a release for which selected files are downloaded from
the FTP site and installed to upgrade certain system features.
Replica files created using the same major version release of the software can be loaded to another PC-PRO+
Advanced or Shop-Pro system of the same major version release level or a later interim release version. A
Replica file is compatible with the following systems:

• Other PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-Pro, or Shop-Pro systems which are at the same major software release
level as the Replica file
• PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-Pro, or Shop-Pro systems upgraded to the next interim or patch release level.

Replication Process Overview


Follow these steps to set up a second PC-PRO+ Advanced system using the settings of the original system:
1. In the System Manager of the original PC-PRO+ Advanced system, set up and save system defaults and
settings.
2. In the Program Editor of the original system, create and save device program files.
3. In the System Manager of the original system, define Replica File Settings to choose the files and settings
that will be transferred to the new system.

User's Manual 77
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

4. In the System Manager of the original system, create the Replica File.
5. Transfer the replica file to the new system.
6. Install PC-PRO+ Advanced 7.0 or later on the new PC.
7. On the new PC-PRO+ Advanced system, select Start |Programs |PC-PRO+ Advanced| Load Replica
File.
The second PC-PRO+ Advanced system is now set up and ready for all PC-PRO+ Advanced functions.

Replica File Contents


The following table describes the files associated with each item included in a replica file. A Replica File may
contain one or more of the replica items described in the following table.

Replica Item Contents of Replica File


Program Files • Metering device program files
• Default programs
• Custom schedules
• TOU (Time of Use) schedules
• Advanced Protocol configuration files (used in Q1000 program files)
• Display configuration files created in the Display Editor application (CENTRON and
VECTRON)
Settings • System default values (Kh, SENTINEL Standard Kh) P/DR, Pulse Weights, Phone Home
numbers, CT ratios, VT ratios, SENTINEL Display format)
• Device Security Codes
• Device Programming Options
• Field-Pro Settings
• Meter Change Out Settings
• HH-Pro Settings
DST Daylight Savings Time change dates and calendars
Security • Passwords and user IDs for system users
• Security level for individual system features
• Authorization for user access groups
Address Book Metering Device logon settings, such as baud rates, for specific meter service points

Report Specifications Option to determine if report specification files should be included in a replica file

Replica Protection Determines if encryption should be applied to protect the replica file

The contents of a replica file will overwrite the existing settings in Field-Pro and Shop-Pro.
Only the replica items in the Replica File are changed in Field-Pro or Shop-Pro; other
settings are not affected.

User's Manual 78
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Replica File Settings


Use the Replica File Settings window to define the items to be exported and used to set up another PC-PRO+
Advanced system or for system backup. The settings, defaults, and program files defined in the System
Manager application for this PC-PRO+ Advanced system are used to create the replica file based on the
selections you make in the Replica File Settings window.

The settings contained in a Replica File will replace the existing settings of the same type in a client system
when you load a Replica File to a client system. Settings will only be changed if that type of setting is
contained the Replica File loaded to the client system.

In order to effectively use the Field-Pro utility, it is recommended that Programs, Settings, and DST are
included in the Replica File.

The contents of a Replica File will overwrite the existing settings on a client system to which
the Replica File is loaded. Only the settings from the Replica File are changed in the client
system; other settings in the client system are not affected.

Figure 41: Replica File Settings

Replica File Settings Field Descriptions


Programs
Choose an option:

User's Manual 79
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Include–Include all device program files, custom schedules, TOU schedules in the replica file.
Additionally, all files associated with the program files such as protocol configuration files, meter display
files, and default SENTINEL program files are included in the replica file
• Do Not Include in Replica File–Program files will not be included in the Replica File.
• Select Program Files to Include-Allows the user to select a subset of programs to be included in the
Replica File. The programs are selected when the replica file is being created.
Settings
Choose an option:

• Include–Include all system default values, device programming options, device security codes, Field-Pro
settings, Meter Change Out, and HH-Pro settings in the replica file.
• Do Not Include in Replica File–System settings will not be included in the Replica File.
DST
Choose an option:

• Include–Include Daylight Savings Time dates and settings in the replica file.
• Do Not Include in Replica File–DST dates and settings will not be included in the Replica File.
Security
Choose an option:

• Include–Include system security features, access groups, and user logon settings in the replica file.
• Do Not Include in Replica File–System security settings will not be included in the Replica File.
Address Book
Choose an option:

• Include–To include all Address Book settings created in the Program Editor (Logon dialog) in the replica
file, select Include.
• Do Not Include in Replica File–Address Book settings will not be included in the Replica File.
Report Specifications
Choose an option:

• Include–To include all Report Specifications created in the Data Manager in the replica file, select
Include.
• Do Not Include in Replica File–Report Specifications will not be included in the Replica File.
Replica Protection
Choose an option:

User's Manual 80
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Do Not Encrypt Replica File–The Replica File is not password protected. This is the default.
• Encrypt Replica File–Protect the Replica File with a system-assigned password. Using Password
Protection increases the security for a Replica File. The password is only used by the software and no
password is entered by the user when the Replica File is loaded.
Note: If you use password protection for the Replica File, some e-mail systems or other software may identify
the Replica File as a security risk.

Select Programs
When creating replica files, you have the option of only including a smaller subset of programs rather than all
of the programs in the database. By selecting "Select Program Files to Include" in the Replica File Settings
section in System Manager, you can manually select the Meter Programs to be included in the Replica File.

The Select Programs dialog listing of the list of the programs is populated from the copy of the PC-PRO+
Advanced program directory database. Select the programs to be included in the replica file by checking the
checkbox to the left of the program name. Programs not selected will not be visible in Data Manager once the
Replica File is loaded on the new computer.
Field Descriptions
Select All-Selects all the meter programs by checking all the checkboxes

Clear All-Unselects all the meter programs by unchecking all the checkboxes

Cancel-Closes the dialog and control will return back to System Manager; no Program selections will be
saved and no Replica File will be created.

Create File-Creates the Replica File

Help-Launches the online help

Creating a Replica File


Use the Create Replica File icon in the System Manager toolbar to create a Replica File after
settings are defined in the System Manager.

A replica file contains the system files, program files, defaults, and settings from a parent or source PC-PRO+
Advanced system. A replica file can be created for backup purposes or be used to set up a Field-Pro or Shop-
Pro system or another PC-PRO+ Advanced system using the settings from the parent system. A replica file
can include a single setting, a user-selectable sub-set of the system settings, or all of the settings.

After you have defined system settings and options in the System Manager and saved the settings, you can
create a replica file. Close all other PC-PRO+ Advanced applications before creating the replica file. For
example, close the Program Editor, TOU Calendar Editor, Display Editor, Schedule Editor, and Protocol
Editor.

You can view the properties of an existing replica file in the Windows Explorer to determine the contents of
the replica file. In the Windows Explorer, right-click the replica file and then select Properties.
User's Manual 81
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

To Create a Replica File


Follow the steps below to create a replica file.
1. Close all PC-PRO+ Advanced applications. For example, close the Program Editor, TOU Calendar Editor,
Display Editor, Schedule Editor, and Protocol Editor.
2. Open the System Manager (Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | System Manager). Select the Replica
File Settings.
3. Define and save the system settings you want to include in the replica file (at least one setting). For
example, define system default values, DST dates, programming options, and so forth.
4. Select File | Create Replica File or click the button on the System Manager Toolbar. The Create Replica
File dialog is displayed.
5. Navigate to the folder where you want to store the replica file, enter a name for the replica file, and click
Save. A progress indicator is displayed and the file is saved with the default file name extension
.REPLICA. A results dialog is displayed.

Loading a Replica File


To load system settings contained in a Replica file, use the Load Replica File application on the Windows
Start menu in the PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-Pro or Shop-Pro program group.

A Replica file can be used to update system settings for a PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-Pro or Shop-Pro system.
You can also use the Load Replica File feature to restore settings which were previously backed up using the
Create Replica feature.

Replica files are created on a PC-PRO+ Advanced 7.0 or later master station using the System Manager
application.

Replica files created with PC-PRO+ Advanced 8.0 can be loaded in PC-PRO+ Advanced 9.0. Previously,
users needed to re-create replica files after each new installation.

When you load a replica file, the replica file writes over the corresponding existing items in
the system to which the replica file is loaded. Existing settings and files for the items in the
Replica File will be lost! Only the items contained in the replica file are deleted and replaced.

Only the settings in the replica file are changed when you load a replica file. You can view the contents of the
replica file by viewing the file Properties. In the Windows Explorer, right-click the replica file and then select
Properties. For information about the contents of a replica file, see Replica File Settings (on page 79).

If you load a replica file that only contains the Program Files item, the program files and associated items in
the replica file are written to the new system; other system settings are not changed. The following files are
deleted:

User's Manual 82
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Metering device program files


• Default programs (SENTINEL)
• Custom schedules
• TOU (Time of Use) schedules
• Advanced Protocol configuration files (used in Q1000 program files)
• Display configuration files created in the Display Editor application

To Load a Replica File


1. Close all PC-PRO+ Advanced applications. For example, close Shop-Pro, Meter Worklist Editor, and
MeterKey.
2. From the Windows Start menu, select one of the following:
• For PC-PRO+ Advanced, Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Advanced Tools | Load Replica File
• For Field-Pro, Programs | Field-Pro | Advanced Tools | Load Replica File
• For Shop-Pro, Programs | Shop-Pro | Advanced Tools | Load Replica File
The Load Replica File dialog is displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder that contains the replica file, select the replica file you want to load, and then click
Open. The Load Replica File Confirmation dialog is displayed listing the items that will be deleted on
your system and replaced with the items in the Replica file.
4. Choose an option:
• To load the settings in this replica file to your system, click Yes. A progress indicator is displayed.
Your existing settings are deleted and the settings in the Replica File are loaded to your system.
• To keep the existing settings on your system, click No. No changes are made to your system.
5. If you selected Yes, the Replica File is loaded to the system and the items listed are updated with the
values in the Replica File. A message is displayed stating that the Replica file loaded correctly.

Automatically Creating Replica Files


Replica Files can also be created automatically at a command prompt:

"System Manager.exe" -create "C:\Path\ReplicaName.replica"

Notes:

• -create tells it to create a Replica file


• The second parameter is a fully qualified path including the name of the new replica file.
• The "System Manager.exe" is located in the following directory by default:
C:\Program Files\Itron\PC-PRO+ Advanced\PCPROP)

User's Manual 83
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Loading a Replica File from a Command Line


Loading a Replica File with Confirmation Dialog

1. Open up a DOS Prompt (Start | Programs | Accessories | Command Prompt). Go to the c:\Program
Files\Common Files\Itron\Metering\LoadReplica directory.
2. Type the following in order to load the replica file (be sure to include the quote around "Load Replica
File" as it is the name of the executable):
"Load Replica File" <Full path to Replica File>\Replica Name.Replica
For example:
"Load Replica File" c:\Replica_Files\TestFile.Replica
3. The progress indicator will be displayed briefly indicating the files are being copied.
Loading a Replica File with No Confirmation Dialog

1. Open up a DOS Prompt (Start | Programs | Accessories | Command Prompt). Go to the c:\Program
Files\Common Files\Itron\Metering\LoadReplica directory.
2. Type the following in order to load the replica file (be sure to include the quote around "Load Replica
File" as it is the name of the executable):
"Load Replica File" \s <Full path to Replica File>\Replica Name.Replica
For example:
"Load Replica File" \s c:\Replica_Files\TestFile.Replica
3. The replica file is loaded without confirmation.

Defining Meter Change Out Settings


The Meter Change Out feature automates the process of switching out one meter for another meter of the
same device type and using the same program file.

The program file currently in the meter must be present on the PC. You can set up the Meter Change Out
process in the System Manager to perform the following functions:

• Create a data file before the old meter is un-installed


• Copy the registers from the old meter to the new meter
• Allow the user to Edit Registers after the new meter is initialized
After the Meter Change Out settings are defined in the System Manager, the settings are used for the Meter
Change functions in Shop-Pro, and PC-PRO+ Advanced. The Meter Change Out settings are transferred to a
Shop-Pro system as part of a Replica File.

To Define Meter Change Out Settings


1. Start the System Manager application.

User's Manual 84
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

2. In the System Manager navigation tree, select Meter Change Out Settings. The Meter Change Out
Settings Window is displayed.
3. For each option, click the down arrow in the column on the right to select the desired setting.
4. When you have finished, click Save All Changes in the toolbar.

Meter Change Out Settings


For each Meter Change Out option, click the down arrow to select the Meter Change Out options for PC-
PRO+ Advanced and Shop-Pro.

Figure 42: Meter Change Out Settings

Meter Change Out Settings Field Descriptions


Create Data File(s)
Select the type of data file that will be created for the old meter before it is disconnected or select do not
perform this step during the meter change out. Choose an option:

• Do not perform this step–Do not create a data file for the meter that is being replaced.
• MIF file only–Create a Meter Image File
• MV-90 HHF file only–Create a MV-90 HHF file
• MIF and MV-90 HHF file–Create both types of files
Copy Registers
Copy the registers in the old meter to the new meter after the new meter is initialized. Choose an option:

User's Manual 85
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Do not perform this step–Do not copy registers to the new meter.
• Copy Energy–Copy the energy registers (kWh, VAh, etc.) from the old meter to the new meter.
• Copy Energy and Demand–Copy the energy and demand (kWh, kW, VAh, VA, etc.) registers from the
old meter to the new meter.
Edit Registers
Prompt the user to edit the registers in the new meter after the new meter is initialized. Choose an option:

• Do not perform this step–Do not allow the user to edit registers in the new meter after it is initialized.
• Perform this step–Prompt the user to edit registers in the new meter after it is initialized.
Data File Location
If you selected a data file type for Create Data File(s) above, double-click to select the default path for storage
of the data file for PC-PRO+ Advanced and Shop-Pro.

Defining HH-Pro Settings


The HH-Pro application runs on an Itron FC200 or FC200R handheld computer as a client of a PC-PRO+
Advanced version 7.30 or higher system.

HH-Pro is an easy to use handheld application. You can use HH-Pro to perform the following meter
installation and maintenance operations for supported devices:

• Adjust device clock


• Update DST dates
• Check for errors
• Reconfigure Passwords
• Reconfigure TOU
• Reconfigure Custom Schedule
• Create MV-90 HHF
• Reset Demand Registers
• Reset Billing Registers
• Reset Diagnostic Counters
• Reset Canadian Event Log
• Check ERT

User's Manual 86
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Meter Specific Installation and Maintenance Operations


• Verify service wiring - CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL, VECTRON
• Check SiteScan Diagnostics - CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL, VECTRON
• Verify ERTs are broadcasting (requires the use of a FC200R handheld) - SENTINEL
• Reconfigure the Custom Schedules - CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL

See Devices Supported by HH-Pro for more information about these operations.

The operation of HH-Pro is defined on the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station in the System Manager
application. Settings, DST dates, and schedule files are transferred to the FC200 or FC200R handheld
computer automatically by the HH-Pro Synchronization application in conjunction with the Microsoft®
ActiveSync® application when the handheld is connected to the master station.

The HH-Pro Synchronization application is available on the Windows Start menu in the PC-PRO+ Advanced
or Shop-Pro program group.

Complete instructions for installing and using the HH-Pro are provided in the HH-Pro
User’s Manual. From the Windows Start menu select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced |
Online Manuals | HH-Pro User’s Manual.

HH-Pro Settings Dialog


For each HH-Pro option, click the down arrow to select the options for the HH-Pro application.

User's Manual 87
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

Figure 43: HH-Pro Settings

HH-Pro Settings Field Descriptions


Automated DST Update
Choose an option:

• Select Yes to automatically detect and update DST dates in the device after logging on with HH-Pro. The
DST dates currently in the device will be updated. The dates are not reconfigured or extended.
• Select No to disable this feature (default option).
Automated Device Clock Adjust
Choose an option:

• Select Yes to automatically detect and adjust the device clock after logging on with HH-Pro.
• Select No to disable this feature (default option).
Automated Device Clock Adjust Threshold (Seconds)
If you enabled the Automated Device Clock Adjust option, this setting is available. Enter the number of
seconds of difference allowed before a clock adjustment is made. If the difference between the device clock
and the FC200/FC200R handheld clock is greater than the number of seconds entered here, HH-Pro will
adjust the device clock. Valid entries are from 1 to 3600 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds.

The maximum number of seconds of clock adjustment allowed is determined by the device
type. Refer to the technical reference guide for the device.
Automated Password Reconfiguration
This feature controls automatic password reconfiguration. Choose an option:

User's Manual 88
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Select Yes to automatically Reconfigure the meter's passwords to the passwords set in the System
Manager during logon. The passwords will be reconfigured every time the meter is logged on to if this
option is set to Yes.
• Select No to disable this option (default option).
Reset Diagnostic Counters
• Select Enabled to allow the HH-Pro user to reset diagnostic counters when the device is configured for
SiteScan Diagnostics and a diagnostic counter has been incremented.
• Select Disabled if you do not want the HH-Pro user to be allowed to reset diagnostic counters. If you
disable this option it will not appear as an option in HH-Pro (default option).
Reset Demand
This feature determines if the user is able to perform a Demand Reset. This option does not affect items in the
Work List.

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to perform a Demand Reset.
• Select Disabled to prevent a user from being able to perform a Demand Reset (default option). If the
option is disabled, the Work List can still reset demand.
Reset Billing Registers
This feature determines if the user has the option to Reset the Billing Registers. This option does not affect
items in the Work List.

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to Reset the Billing Registers.
• Select Disabled to prevent a user from being able to perform a Demand Reset (default option). If the
option is disabled, the Work List can still reset billing registers.
Reset Canadian Event Log
This feature determines if the user has the option to Reset the Canadian Event Log (Canadian meters only).

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to Reset the Canadian Event log.
• Select Disabled to prevent a user from being able to Reset the Canadian Event log (default option).
Reconfigure TOU
This feature determines if the user has the ability to Reconfigure Time of Use (TOU).

User's Manual 89
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to Reconfigure TOU.


• Select Disabled to prevent a user from being able to Reconfigure TOU (default option). If the option is
disabled, the Work List can still reconfigure TOU.
Reconfigure Custom Schedule
• Select Enabled to allow the HH-Pro user to reconfigure custom schedules when the device is configured
to use a custom schedule for demand resets or self reads.
• Select Disabled if you do not want the HH-Pro user to be allowed to reconfigure custom schedules
(default option). If you disable this option it will not appear on the HH-Pro menu. If the option is
disabled, the Work List can still reconfigure custom schedules.

The Multiple Custom Schedules feature is not supported by HH-Pro at present.

Set Custom Schedule Name to User Data #2 During Reconfigure


For SENTINEL devices, choose an option:

• Select Set to write the Custom Schedule name to the device’s User Data 2 area during a custom schedule
reconfigure operation for a SENTINEL device.
• Select Do Not Set to disable this feature (default option).
MV-90 HHF Data File Contents
Select from the following meter data contents for the MV-90 HHF file. This option does affect what is put in
the HHF file during manual HHF creation and Work List HHF creation.

• Select the LP option to retrieve load profile intervals (default option).


• Select the Registers to retrieve energy and demand register values.
• Select LP and Registers to retrieve both load profile and energy and demand register values.
Maximum Days of Load Profile in MV-90 HHF
Select the Maximum Days of Load Profile intervals to be included in the created MV-90 HHF. Note that this
item will only appear if "LP" or "LP and Registers" is selected for the "MV-90 HHF Data File Contents"
option. This option does affect what is put in the HHF file during manual HHF creation and Work List HHF
creation.

• 45 Days
• 90 Days
• All Days (default value)
Use Meter Work List
The Meter Work List is used by HH-Pro to associate a Meter ID with the functions to be performed on a
particular meter. Choose an option:

User's Manual 90
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to process the functions in the Meter Work List.
• Select Disabled to disable the Meter Work List feature (default option).
Override Security Code
This feature determines if the user should have the ability to specify a security code during logon. Note that
the user is only prompted for a security code if Primary, Previous, and NULL fail to logon.

• Select Enabled to give the user the ability to override the security code.
• Select Disabled to prevent a user from being able to override the security code (default option).
Transfer Activity Log to Master Station
Choose an option:

• Select Yes to transfer the HH-Pro Activity Log to the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station during the HH-
Pro Synchronization (default option). If you choose Yes, the Activity Log on the handheld will also be
cleared during the synchronization.
• Select No to disable this feature. If you choose No, the Activity Log will continue to increase in size until
this item is changed to Yes and an HH-Pro Synchronization occurs.
Log Synchronization Directory
Select the folder to use for the Log Synchronization Directory. This folder will contain the Logs synchronized
from the handheld computers. Note that this field becomes visible if the Transfer Activity Log to Master
Station settings is set to Yes. The default value is "C:\".
HHF Synchronization Directory
Select the folder to use for the HHF Synchronization Directory. This folder will contain the HHF's
synchronized from the handheld computers. This field is always visible. The default value is "C:\".

For more information about HH-PRO, refer to the HH-Pro User's Manual.

Devices Supported by HH-Pro


The HH-Pro operations support Itron metering devices as shown in the following table.
CENTRON CENTRON CENTRON FULCRUM
Feature MT200® SENTINEL VECTRON
D/T/L (C12.19) (V&I) ® SL Series
Reconfigure Custom No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Schedule
DST Update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Clock Adjust Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ERT Check No No No No No Yes No
View Toolbox No No Yes No No Yes Yes
Reset Diagnostics No No Yes No No Yes Yes
Counters
Create HHF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
User's Manual 91
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults

CENTRON CENTRON CENTRON FULCRUM


Feature MT200® SENTINEL VECTRON
D/T/L (C12.19) (V&I) ® SL Series
Demand Reset Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reset Billing (and Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maintain Program)
Reset Canadian Event No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Log
TOU Reconfigure Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Password Reconfigure Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

User's Manual 92
Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 3

Data Manager

The Data Manager allows you to manage all programming data. You can to navigate through meter programs
and schedules – all within the same user interface. These include:

• Meter Programs
• TOU Schedules
• Custom Schedules
• Protocol Files
• Display Files
You are required to log on to the Data Manager. The security dialog displayed requires a user ID and
password set up through System Manager. You are not required to log in to applications that are launched
through the Data Manager (such as the Program Editor and the Calendar Editor).

As shown in the following diagram, the Data Manager is very similar to other applications most users are
already familiar with.

Figure 44: Data Manager Main Interface


1 Itron Menu Button is used to open the file menu. The file menu consists of Print, Print Preview, an About Box button, and
an Exit button.
2 Listing of Options.
3 Navigation tabs to allow user to move from one section to another.

User's Manual 93
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

4 Customization Options.
5 Hyperlink to open a program, schedule, service point, or display file.
6 Listing of Meter Type. Note that hovering the mouse over the meter type will open up a dialog explaining the meter's
functionality.
7 Export, Print, Help, and link to the Itron Metering website (www.itronmeters.com) buttons
8 Use to minimize, maximize, or close the application.
9 Use to select all the programs or to clear all the selected programs.
10 Check box used to select items.

The upper left of the screen displays the options available for the currently selected data type. Some of the
options will only be visible when an item is selected on the right hand side.

The upper right of the screen contains buttons for Export, Print, and Help. The buttons are tied to the screen
that is visible on the right hand side of the Data Manager. The Export button will bring up a dialog to browse
for the location to save the data as a Microsoft Office Excel Workbook. The Print button will print the
contents of data in the grid control of the Data Manager. The Help button brings up help contents based on the
current screen's data type.

A progress bar will be displayed on the bottom left of the status bar. This progress bar is displayed for any
actions that require time to be performed.

Defining Programs Using the Data Manager


The Data Manager provides a single user interface to all the programming tools necessary for creating and
managing meter programs. It is a complete and efficient system for managing electricity metering devices and
meter data. While the tools to create and edit programs remain unchanged, the Data Manager organizes and
provides quick and easy access to all of your existing meter programming data.

• Meter Programs (on page 97)


• TOU Schedules (on page 125)
• Custom Schedules (on page 134)
• Display Files (on page 140)
• Protocol Files (on page 154)
• Service Points (on page 144)
• Meter Image Files (on page 159)
• MV-90 HHF Files (on page 178)
• Create Report (see "Create Report for MIF Files" on page 164)

Starting the Data Manager


To start the Data Manager application:
1. Go to Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager.

User's Manual 94
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

2. Data Manager opens to the default screen.


3. If prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
For more information, refer to:

• System Logon (on page 10)


• Using the Itron Button (on page 95)
• Customizing the Data Manager (on page 96)
• Navigating Data Manager (on page 97)

System Logon
Enter your user ID and password to log on to the system. You must have a valid user ID and password to be
able to start the software. Consult your system administrator as needed.

User ID and Password information is established in the System Manager. Refer to Security
for Users (on page 75).

When you click OK:

• If your entry is valid, the application is started and you can perform the system functions allowed for your
User ID and Password.
• If the information you enter is not valid, a message box displays indicating that the system does not
recognize the User ID and Password you entered.

Using the Itron Button


The Itron button allows a user to perform basic operations. The Online Support includes a link to the Itron
User Forum (Knowledge Exchange) as well as Technical Support and the Itron Metering website.

Figure 45: Itron Button Menu

User's Manual 95
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Customizing the Data Manager


To customize the data manager, click the ">>" button in the lower left part of the screen. This brings up the
following menu:

Figure 46: Customization Menu

To add or remove buttons from the menu bar, click Add/Remove buttons. Click an object to select or de-
select it from the list. Objects with a "√" are included in the menu.

Figure 47: Add or Remove Buttons

To move an item either up or down the list on the left, click Navigational Panel Options. Highlight the
object needing to be moved and click either Move Up or Move Down. To return the menu back to its original
state, click Reset. Once complete, click OK. To return back to the main screen without making any changes,
click Cancel. You can also remove an item from the list by un-checking the box next to the item.

Figure 48: Navigational Panel Options

User's Manual 96
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Navigating Data Manager


Navigation in the Data Manager is mouse-driven. Hyperlinks allow you to automatically open existing
programs, schedules, or displays.

The following buttons are available on all screens:


Icon Description
Export: Click this icon to export the current data.

Print: Click this icon to print the current screen.

Online Help: Click this icon to open the online help.

Itron Metering Website: Click this icon to automatically go to the Itron Metering website.

Some screens allow you to resize columns in case a description or value is too long to fit into the default
column width provided. To expand a column, use the mouse to drag the column width to the desired width.

The "+" and "-" buttons allow a user to expand or contract individual sections.

Meter Programs
A meter program file defines a specific meter configuration which controls the operation of the meter and the
meter’s display. You can program many meters using the same program file. Site-specific information, such
as a meter serial number and unit ID, are entered when you initialize the meter.

To begin, use the Go To box in the left panel to select either Legacy meters or the
CENTRON II (C12.19) meter.

The Meter Programs window lists the meter programs in the PC-PRO+ Advanced database. It includes the
Program ID, Program Name, Meter Type, and Last Modified data. For specific instructions for creating a
program file for a particular device type, refer to the User Manual for the device type.

User's Manual 97
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 49: Meter Programs Screen

The check box to the left of the Program ID name allows you to perform specific operations to the selected
item(s). Depending on the number of items checked, different operations will be available.
# Items Checked Options Available
None New
Import
One New
Open
Delete
Import
Export
View Dependencies
Two, Three, Four New
Compare
Delete
Import
Export
View Dependencies
Five or More New
Delete
Import
Export
View Dependencies

User's Manual 98
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

For more information, refer to the following topics:

• Creating a New Program (on page 99)


• Opening an Existing Program (on page 100)
• Comparing Programs (on page 101)
• Importing a Program (on page 102)
• Exporting a Program (on page 105)
• View Dependencies (on page 106)
PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

Creating a New Program


The New Program option is used to create new meter programs. A program does not need to be selected for
this option to be available. When New Program is clicked, the Program Editor is launched. The New
Program (on page 99) dialog is displayed.

The list of meter programs in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after creating a new
program.

Refer To Create a Program File (on page 225) for more information.

New Program
The following dialog appears when creating a new program. To return to the main menu without making any
changes, click Cancel.

Select the meter type that will be used in the program. Once selected, click OK. To return to the previous
screen, click Cancel. The following device types are available:

User's Manual 99
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• CENTRON
• CENTRON (C12.19)
• CENTRON (V&I)
• Q1000
• SENTINEL
• VECTRON

Figure 50: Select Device Type Dialog

Opening an Existing Program


To open an existing program, click on the name of the program using the hyperlink. You can also open a
program by selecting it and then using the Open option on the menu on the left side of the screen.

The system launches the Meter Configuration Editor with the selected program open.

Deleting a Program
The Delete Program option is available if at least one meter program is selected. When you click this option,
you are prompted to confirm the deletion of the meter programs. After the confirmation, the meter programs
are removed and the list is updated.

Delete Program
Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the programs(s) that were chosen for
deletion.

User's Manual 100


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 51: Confirm Program Deletion Dialog

Once deleted, programs cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental program deletion, it is


highly recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System
Manager (Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

To return to the main screen without deleting a program, click Cancel. To delete the selected programs, click
OK.

Only programs that do not have any dependencies can be deleted. If a program has an
existing dependency, it will not appear on this screen. Refer to Program Dependencies (on
page 107).

Comparing Programs
The Program Comparison tool is an innovative way to compare up to four programs, time of use schedules, or
custom schedules. Differences in programs or schedules can now be quickly identified. This allows you to:

• Manage existing programs


• Reduce duplicates
• Check existing files for accuracy and consistency
To Compare Programs

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Meter Programs tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select the programs needing to be compared using the check box. You can select up to four programs.
4. Under Program Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Compare.
5. The Meter Program Comparison dialog will appear.

User's Manual 101


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Meter Program Comparison


The Meter Program Comparison dialog shows the differences when showing differences between two, three,
or four programs. Meter functionality is given in the left-most column. You can collapse or open an individual
section by clicking the '+' or '-' button. The selected meter programs (up to four) are listed in the rest of the
columns. Differences in the programs are noted with red italicized text.

To return to the main screen, click OK. To print the results, click Print. To export the results, click Export.

Figure 52: Meter Program Comparison Dialog

Field Descriptions
Display Differences Only
Checking this box will force the comparison to only show the differences in the programs.

Importing a Program
The Import Program option is used to import meter programs into the programs database. Some situations in
which you may want to import program files include the following:

• A metering expert can create program files and TOU schedules which are exported for use in the meter
shop where meters are programmed. The meter shop technician can then import the program file into a
PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-Pro system.
• Program files and related files can be exported for use in programming meters in the field.
A program does not need to be selected for this option to be available. When Import Program is selected, the
Import Program dialog will be displayed. You can browse to the files, select the files, and click OK to import
them. The import status is displayed on the bottom of the screen. Results of the import are given after the
import is completed. The Data Manager will be refreshed to show the new programs.

User's Manual 102


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

You can also import 200 Series, CENTRON, FULCRUM, and VECTRON program files
that were created on a PC-PRO+ (16-bit) system.

When you import a program file, the following information is imported as part of the program file:

• System default values


• Programming options
• TOU schedules
• For applicable Q1000 programs, the Advanced Protocol configuration file
You can import the Daylight Saving Time information from another PC-PRO+ Advanced
7.0 or higher system using the System Replication feature. Create a Replica File that includes
only DST information and use the Load Replica File feature to load the DST information to
the second system. For more information see Using System Replication (on page 77).

If you attempt to import a program file that has the same name as a program file that already exists on your
system, you are prompted to overwrite the existing file, cancel the import, or rename the imported file.

Use the Import Options button to define what the system will do if you try to import a program file with the
same name as an existing program file on your system. You can also define what the system will do if the
program file uses a TOU schedule with the same name or the same ID as a TOU schedule that currently exists
on your system.

Import files must have an .xml extension for CENTRON II meters, or an .exp extension for
all other meters.

Figure 53: Program Import Status

To Import a Program

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Meter Programs tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Under Program Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Import.
User's Manual 103
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

4. The Import Programs dialog will open.


5. Click the Browse... button to locate the import files. These files have a .exp extension. Once the directory
is located, click OK.
6. Check (or use the Select All feature) the programs needing to be imported.
7. Click OK to begin the Import. A progress bar will be displayed.
8. When the process is complete, a Program Import Status box will appear.
Some situations in which you may want to import and export program files include the following:

A metering expert can create program files and TOU schedules which are exported for use in the meter shop
where meters are programmed. The meter shop technician can then import the program file into a PC-PRO+
Advanced or Shop-Pro system.

Import Programs
This dialog allows you to select programs to import into the database. You can sort on any of these columns
by clicking on the column header. The Source Directory is where import files are located. To browse to a new
location, use the Browse... button.

The file name of the program that is to be imported will have a .exp extension.

If you attempt to import a program file that has the same name as a program file that already exists on your
system, you are prompted to overwrite the existing program, cancel the import, or rename the imported file.

Figure 54: Duplicate Programs

To select all the programs listed, click the Select All button at the bottom of the dialog. To clear all
selections, click Clear All. To return to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel. To import
the selected programs, click OK.

User's Manual 104


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 55: Import Programs Dialog

Exporting a Program
The Export Program option is available if at least one meter program is selected. When Export Program is
selected, the Export Programs dialog will be displayed.

When you export a program file, the following information is exported as part of the program file:

• System default values


• Programming options
• TOU schedule, if used in the program file
• For applicable Q1000 programs, Advanced Protocol configuration files
Some situations in which you may want to export program files include the following:

• A metering expert can create program files and TOU schedules which are exported for use in the meter
shop where meters are programmed
• Program files and related files can be exported for use in programming meters in the field
• Program files and related files can be exported and sent to a support technician for troubleshooting
For CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL devices, program files can be
exported and sent to Itron along with an order for meters that will be programmed in the
factory before shipment.

The Export Programs dialog lists the programs to be exported. The dialog also allows you to browse to the
location for the destination of the export. This destination field is loaded with the previously used destination
directory.

User's Manual 105


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

When you click OK, a status is given as the programs are exported. A confirmation message will be given
once the operation has completed.

Figure 56: Program Export Status

To Export a Program

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Meter Programs tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one or more programs to be exported by clicking on the check box next to the Program ID.
4. Under Program Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Export.
5. The Export Programs dialog will open.
6. Click the Browse... button to locate the directory where the export file should be located. Once the
directory is located, click OK.
7. Click OK to begin the Export. A progress bar will be displayed. The files have a .exp extension.
When the process is complete, a Program Export Status box appears.

Export Program

View Dependencies
The View Dependencies option is available if one or more programs are selected. You can view any
dependencies that may exist between programs, schedules, or displays. This feature is valuable when needing
to see how a particular program relates to another one. It gives you the ability to quickly see how many
programs a schedule change may affect. This feature also highlights which programs are no longer used and
can be deleted.

The Program Dependencies dialog has tabs for TOU Dependencies, Display Dependencies, and Custom
Schedule Dependencies, plus a tab to show which selected programs have no dependencies.
User's Manual 106
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The TOU Dependencies tab shows the list of selected programs that have a TOU schedule with the name of
the schedule and the TOU ID.

The Display Dependencies tab shows the programs that are associated with a display file with the display
name and the display ID.

The Custom Schedule Dependencies tab shows the list of selected programs that have multiple custom
schedules configured along with the list of custom schedules associated with that program.

Program Dependencies
This dialog allows you to view which files are dependent on the selected program.

To print the information listed, click the Print button at the bottom of the dialog. To export the information,
click Export. To return to the main screen without making any changes, click OK.

Only CENTRON (C12.19) and CENTRON (V&I) support multiple custom schedules.

Tab Contents Applicable Meter Types


TOU Dependencies This tab displays the list of programs that use Time of Use (TOU) files. All Meter Types
For each program, the associated TOU file name and program ID are
shown.
To easily see how many different programs use a single TOU file, you
can sort the list of TOU files by clicking on the TOU Name column
heading.
Display Dependencies This tab displays the list of programs that use display schedules. Display 200 Series
schedules are only used by older programs to specify which values should CENTRON
be shown on the meter's LCD display.
VECTRON
To easily see how many different programs use a single display schedule,
you can sort the list of display schedules by clicking on the Display Name FULCRUM
column heading.
Custom Schedule This tab displays the list of programs that are configured to use multiple CENTRON (C12.19)
Dependencies billing schedules. CENTRON (V&I)
Programs that specify the use of custom schedules for self reads or
demand resets will not be listed since the custom schedule is assigned to
each meter is initialized rather than included in the program file.
Programs with No This tab displays the list of programs that do not have any external All Meter Types
Dependencies dependencies.

User's Manual 107


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 57: Program Dependencies Dialog - TOU Tab

Meter Programs (CENTRON II C12.19)


CENTRON II C12.19 meter programs are created by meter experts using the Meter Configuration Editor in
PC-PRO+ Advanced.

To begin, use the Go To box to select either Legacy meters or the CENTRON II (C12.19)
meter.

To create a new program, click New in the Program Options box. When the Select Device
Class dialog appears, select either Mono (singlephase) or Poly, then click OK.

A program file defines a specific meter configuration which controls the operation of the meter and the
meter's display. You can program many meters using the same program file. Site-specific information, such as
a meter serial number and unit ID, are entered when you initialize the meter.

The Active check box controls each file's availability: checked = you can see the file in Field-Pro and you can
load it to a meter; unchecked = you cannot see the file displayed in Field-Pro.

The check box to the left of the program name allows you to perform specific operations to the selected item.
Depending on the number of items checked, different operations are available. For more information, refer to
the following topics:
Opening an Existing Program (on page 100)
Comparing Programs (on page 101)
Importing a Program (on page 102)

User's Manual 108


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 4

Data File Viewer (CENTRON II C12.19)


The Data Manager allows you to manage all programming data. You can to navigate through meter programs
and schedules – all within the same user interface. These include:

• Meter Programs
• TOU Schedules
• Custom Schedules
• Protocol Files
• Display Files
You are required to log on to the Data Manager. The security dialog displayed requires a user ID and
password set up through System Manager. You are not required to log in to applications that are launched
through the Data Manager (such as the Program Editor and the Calendar Editor).

As shown in the following diagram, the Data Manager is very similar to other applications most users are
already familiar with.

Figure 58: Data Manager Main Interface


1 Itron Menu Button is used to open the file menu. The file menu consists of Print, Print Preview, an About Box button, and an
Exit button.
2 Listing of Options.
3 Navigation tabs to allow user to move from one section to another.

User's Manual 109


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

4 Customization Options.
5 Hyperlink to open a program, schedule, service point, or display file.
6 Listing of Meter Type. Note that hovering the mouse over the meter type will open up a dialog explaining the meter's
functionality.
7 Export, Print, Help, and link to the Itron Metering website (www.itronmeters.com) buttons
8 Use to minimize, maximize, or close the application.
9 Use to select all the programs or to clear all the selected programs.
10 Check box used to select items.

The upper left of the screen displays the options available for the currently selected data type. Some of the
options will only be visible when an item is selected on the right hand side.

The upper right of the screen contains buttons for Export, Print, and Help. The buttons are tied to the screen
that is visible on the right hand side of the Data Manager. The Export button will bring up a dialog to browse
for the location to save the data as a Microsoft Office Excel Workbook. The Print button will print the
contents of data in the grid control of the Data Manager. The Help button brings up help contents based on the
current screen's data type.

A progress bar will be displayed on the bottom left of the status bar. This progress bar is displayed for any
actions that require time to be performed.

Device Status (CENTRON II C12.19)


This window displays information about the meter at the time the EDL file was created.
Field Description
Meter ID This field is set aside for customers who want to identify a set of meters with
an ID number. This ID can be set in the meter at the time of manufacture (by
arrangement when purchased) or you can set it manually using the Initialize
Meter window of Field-Pro.

Serial Number This field is set aside for customers who want to identify each individual meter
with their own ID numbers. This ID can be set in the meter at the time of
manufacture (by arrangement when purchased) or you can set it manually
using the Initialize Meter window of Field-Pro.

Manufacturer's Serial An ID that uniquely identifies this meter. It is created by Itron and set
Number permanently in the meter at the time of manufacture.

Date Last Programmed The date and local time that the meter was most recently loaded with a new
meter program.

Number of Demand Resets Demand resets can be configured to occur on a timed basis or when triggered
by another event. An unexpectedly high number in this field could indicate
meter tampering.

Software Version The version of PC-Pro+ Advanced software used to program the meter.

User's Manual 110


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Field Description
Firmware Version The revision number of the register firmware currently in the meter.

Hardware Version The revision number of the meter hardware.

Device Time The date and time on the meter when the data file (EDL file) was created.

Time Zone The time zone in which the meter was programmed, stated as hours plus or
minus GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

DST Enabled Indicates whether the meter is programmed to adjust for Daylight Savings
Time.

Meter in DST If DST is enabled in the meter, indicates whether Daylight Savings Time was
in effect when the data file was created.

If DST is disabled, this field does not display.

Device Errors If the meter was experiencing any fatal or non-fatal errors when the data file
was created, they are displayed here. If not, field displays "None Found."

Configuration Data
In the Configuration Data area, the Configuration tab contains summary information for each of the
configurable parameters in the meter.

The TOU Schedule tab shows a graphical representation of the TOU Schedule (if used).

Register Data (CENTRON II C12.19)


Register Data contains a listing of measurement readings from the meter.

User's Manual 111


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Registers tab
This tab displays the current register values at the time the data file was created.

Normal Display Registers tab


This tab displays the selected meter display registers for Normal Mode.

Alternate Display Registers tab


This tab displays the selected meter display registers for Alternate Mode.

Self Reads tab


This tab displays the self read data which can be configured to save register data periodically.

Snapshots tab
This tab displays register data present at the time of a demand reset. Data for the previous four snapshots is
available.

Season Change tab


This tab displays register values at the time of the last season change as defined by the TOU schedule in the
meter.

Load Profile Data (CENTRON II C12.19)


Load Profile (mass memory) data is stored in blocks (records) of 128 intervals. The profile interval length is
the same for all channels and is independent of the interval length for demand quantities. Each interval of load
profile data is identified by date and time. Each interval contains status bits indicating the occurrence of
outages, Daylight Saving Time, and other significant events or errors.

The Load Profile functionality is designed for use in billing and load research applications where multi-
channel high resolution data is needed.

Load Profile Data contains five tabs:

• Profile Summary contains summary data about the load profile feature.
• Interval Data contains the energy accumulated for each interval.
• Demand Data shows the demand for each interval.
• Pulse Data shows the number of pulses for each interval.
• Graph displays the energy for each interval over time.
The Pulse Data tab uses the following statuses:
Status Definition Cause
A Time Adjustment Time was adjusted during the interval. When status A appears, there will
also be a status of S, K, or L.

User's Manual 112


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Status Definition Cause


D In DST The interval occurred while Daylight Saving Time was in effect.

K Skipped Interval The interval was skipped either due to an outage or a time adjustment. No
data was accumulated during this interval.

L Long Interval The interval was longer than normal. Possible causes are time adjustment,
loss of metrology communication, or power outage.

O Outage An outage occurred during the interval. The minimum outage length is set
in the Meter Configuration Editor.

R Power Restoration Power was restored after a power outage during this interval.

S Short Interval The interval was shorter than normal. Possible causes are time
adjustment, loss of metrology communication, or power outage.

T Test Mode The meter was in test mode at some point during the interval.

V Overflow More data was accumulated in the interval than could be properly stored.
This could happen because there was a large amount of data stored or
there was a time adjustment backwards. If this occurs frequently, a
smaller pulse weight should be used.

The indicators of interval status have an order of precedence. The order (from least to greatest) is: Short,
Long, Skipped, Test, and Power Restoration. If two things happen in the same interval, the one with the
greatest precedence is displayed.

Voltage Monitoring Data (CENTRON II C12.19)


Voltage Monitoring Data monitors the voltage used during a set interval (1-60 minutes). This interval is
programmed in the configuration file.

User's Manual 113


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Be sure to allow at least one voltage monitoring interval to pass before creating the EDL file
in order to capture interval data.

The Voltage Monitoring Data tab includes three main areas:

• Summary - A summary listing of key points within voltage monitoring


• Interval Data - A detailed listing by date and time of each phase and its corresponding value
• Graph - Provides a visualization of voltage history in terms of volt-hours per interval.
The tabs on this screen depend on the contents of the EDL file. The Voltage Monitoring tab
is only present if there is Voltage Monitoring data within the data file.

Thresholds can be setup in the configuration to indicate when events should be tagged for exceeding the
thresholds based on a percent of nominal voltage. These events are noted in the event log and noted in the
interval status.
Status Definition Cause
B Time Adjusted A time was adjusted backward during the specified interval.
Backward When using a status of an A, there will also be a status of S,
K, or L.

D In DST The status was recorded during DST time within the specified
interval.

F Time Adjusted Forward A time was adjusted forward during the specified interval.
When using a status of an A, there will also be a status of S,
K, or L.

User's Manual 114


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Status Definition Cause


I Invalid Service Type The current service type is not valid (the meter may be wired
improperly).

L Long Either an outage or a time adjustment which caused the


interval to be longer than the specified interval length.

O Outage An outage occurred during the specified interval. The


minimum outage length is recorded in seconds and is specified
in the head-end system.

P Partial Either an outage or a time adjustment which caused the


interval to be shorter than the specified interval length.

S Skipped The interval was skipped either due to a outage or a time


adjustment during the specified interval. No data was
accumulated during this interval.

The VRMS Threshold columns indicate which phase (or phases) the event occurred. When a threshold has
occurred, an event will be triggered and recorded in the event log.

User's Manual 115


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Event Data (CENTRON II C12.19)


The Events Summary screen lists events that have occurred in the meter. The right column shows the number
of occurrences of each event. "Logging Disabled" appears for events that the meter was configured to ignore.
The Events Summary log holds a maximum of 420 events; as additional events occur, the oldest events are
deleted.

The following table lists possible fields that can be reported in the Event Summary.
Field Description
ANSI Security Failed An incorrect security code was provided during logon.

ANSI Security Succeeded The correct password was used over C12.19 port(s).

Billing Data Cleared Billing data was cleared.

Configuration Error A meter event triggered by the detection of a configuration parameter that
Detected is invalid.

Critical Peak Pricing A CPP event has occurred with the status of that event.

Demand Reset A meter event triggered when a demand reset occurs. Demand resets can
be configured to occur on a timed basis or when triggered by another
event. Checking the event log is a good procedure when troubleshooting
meter symptoms.

Demand Threshold Min/Max demand threshold has been exceeded for recorded energy.
Exceeded

Demand Threshold Restored Energy demand is now falling within the boundaries of the min/max
threshold.

DST Time Change The system time has changed due to Daylight Savings Time (DST).

Event Tamper Cleared The tamper events were cleared from the meter.

External Event Event caused by use of Manufacturer Procedure 19.

Fatal Error A fatal error which causes a meter to stop communicating. (Non-fatal
errors can be recorded for later use, but do not terminate meter
functionality.)

Firmware Download Logged when a CLEAR PENDING TABLE is received before the first
Aborted block of a firmware download is received.

History Log Cleared History log was cleared.

History Log Pointers History Log Pointers updated as a result of Standard Procedure 5.
Updated
User's Manual 116
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Field Description
Inversion Tamper A meter event triggered when the meter has been inverted. Meter
inversion is an attempt to commit fraud by reversing the power flow
through the meter. A set of counters in the meter increment each time the
meter is inverted. This event can also be transmitted to a remote device or
location.

Load Profile Pointers Load Profile Pointers updated as a result of Standard Procedure 5.
Updated

Load Profile Reset Load Profile cleared as a result of the Standard Procedure 4

Load Voltage Present The switch-connect request failed due to the presence of load-side voltage.

Loss of Phase Non-Fatal Error 2: The voltage on each phase is checked every five
seconds. A phase must fail twice in a row to cause an error.

Loss of Phase Restored Phase voltage was restored.

Low Battery A meter event triggered when the battery voltage drops below a
predetermined value.

Mass Memory Error The load profile was halted due to outage or the meter was configured
without a battery.

Meter Reconfigure A meter reconfigure has occurred.

New Battery Detected Battery level has been detected.

Pending Reconfigure Reconfigure event started.

Pending Table Activate Fail Pending table activation failed.

Pending Table Activation Pending table was activated.

Pending Table Clear Failed Request to clear a specific pending tabled failed.

Pending Table Cleared A Pending Table item was cleared.

Pending Table Error During Pending table swap failed


Procedure

Pending Table Full Unable to add data to a pending table, write failed.

Pending Table Header Logged when a firmware download pending table header is swapped with
Swapped a new header.

Primary Power Down A loss of power to an endpoint.

User's Manual 117


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Field Description
Primary Power Up An indication that power is once again available at an endpoint. This
indication generally follows a Power Outage.

Rate Change The TOU rate has changed.

Register Download Failed Register Download failed for the described reasons.

Register Download Initiated Register FW download successfully started.

Register Download Initiation Register FW download initiation via MFG Procedure 37 failed.
Failed

Register Download Register Download was successful.


Succeeded

Register Full Scale A kW threshold value that defines the maximum rated demand for a
Exceeded particular meter site. The register fullscale value monitors secondary kW
delivered (maximum) only (no multiplier is applied). The secondary
kilowatt demand value defines the maximum rated demand for this meter
site. Valid entries are 1.0 to 460.80 kW in increments of 0.001. The default
value is 460.800.

If the register fullscale value is exceeded, the meter records a non-fatal


Register Fullscale Exceeded Error (Err 6) that can be displayed and logged
in the event log. If a Register Fullscale Exceeded error occurs, the meter
continues to measure and function properly in later intervals. KW is still
accumulated while the Register Fullscale Exceeded condition is active.

Remote Connect Failed Logged if load voltage is not seen after sending a pulse to the connect
relay.

Remote Connect Relay Logged if the Connect relay was successfully activated and load voltage is
Activated present.

Remote Connect Relay Logged if the meter was successfully armed for connect with user
Initiated intervention.

Remote Disconnect Failed Logged if load voltage is seen after sending a pulse to the disconnect relay,
or if a disconnect is attempted during a failsafe period.

Remote Disconnect Relay Logged if the Connect relay was successfully activated and load voltage is
Activated present.

Removal Tamper A meter event triggered when the meter is removed. A set of counters in
the meter increment each time the meter is removed. This event can also
be transmitted to a remote device or location.

Reverse Power Flow Detected reverse power flow on one or more phases.

User's Manual 118


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Field Description
Reverse Power Flow Power has returned to flowing in the normal direction.
Restored

RMS Voltage Above High RMS Voltage above higher VM threshold.


Threshold

RMS Voltage Below Low RMS Voltage below lower VM threshold.


Threshold

Self Read Cleared Self Reads cleared as a result of Standard Procedure 4.

Self Read Occurred A meter event indicating that a self read has occurred. Self Reads are
configurable in the meter program.

Self Read Pointers Updated Pointers updated as a result of Standard Procedure 5 call.

Time Changed A meter event indicating that the host system has reset the clock. This can
be important information since most meter data is time based.

TOU Schedule Error A meter event triggered by the detection of an error in a Time of Use
(TOU) Schedule. Logging this event can aid in troubleshooting TOU
schedule problems.

TOU Season Changed Changed to a new Time of Use season.

Volt Hour Above High A meter event triggered by the volt hour value exceeding the high
Threshold threshold configuration setting.

Volt Hour Below Low A meter event triggered by the volt hour value falling below the low
Threshold threshold configuration setting.

The data on the Events Summary screen can be exported and printed using the icons in the upper right hand
corner.

Service Switch (CENTRON II C12.19)


This window displays the meter's service switch status when the data file was created.

Most CENTRON II C12.19 meters have a service switch: a disconnect module which gives the utility two
options for turning off power to that service point without physically removing the meter:

User's Manual 119


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Remotely through a third party communication board


• On-site through an optical connection using Field-Pro

Field Descriptions
Service Switch Connected. True – operating conditions indicate that the switch is closed and power can
flow through the meter. False – operating conditions indicate that the switch is open and no power is
available.

Service Switch Ready. True – the service switch is functional and ready to operate. False – the service
switch is not functional. Possible causes could be damage or a short time delay after a connect or disconnect
while the capacitor is charging.

Service Switch Functioning. True – there are currently no conditions indicating that the switch isn't ready to
function.

Load Voltage Present. True – there is voltage on the load side of the meter. False – the meter does not detect
any load voltage present.

Meter Armed. True – Connect w/Intervention has been triggered; "ready" flashes on the display until reset
button is pushed. False – displays at all times other than the "ready" period associated with Connect
w/Intervention.

Last Attempt to Connect Failed. True – The most recent attempt to connect or disconnect failed. This could
be due to load voltage present or hardware failure. False – the previous connect / disconnect attempt was
successful.

Service Limiting Failsafe


Meters equipped with a service switch can implement service limiting, a feature that limits the amount of
demand during an interval. If the consumer exceeds the limit, the service switch opens, interrupting power for
a configurable length of time. The switch then closes and power resumes.

Failsafe prevents the occurrence of service limiting disconnects for a selected period of time following
firmware downloads or meter reconfigures. Note that the Connect/Disconnect function can still work during
the failsafe period. Use Meter Configuration Editor to set up the parameters of both service limiting mode and
failsafe period.

Field Descriptions
In Failsafe Period. True – the failsafe period is in effect and service limiting cannot be triggered. False –
failsafe is not in effect; if the meter is configured for service limiting, it can be triggered.

Disconnect attempted. True – a service limiting disconnect would have occurred except that the failsafe
period prevented it. False – no service limiting disconnect was attempted.

User's Manual 120


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Reason. Not In Failsafe Period – displays at all times except during failsafe period. Duration Will Cause
End Of Failsafe – the failsafe period is in effect because a procedure was sent to the meter with instructions
to remain in failsafe for a specified number of minutes. Failsafe Period Never Timed out – the failsafe
period is in effect because a procedure was sent to the meter with instructions to remain in failsafe
continuously. Firmware Activation – the failsafe period is in effect because new firmware was loaded to the
meter. Meter Initialization – the failsafe period is in effect because a the meter was reinitialized. Service
Limiting Configuration – the failsafe period is in effect because new service limiting information was added
to the configuration. Demand Configuration – the failsafe period is in effect because new demand
information was added to the configuration.

Time Remaining in Minutes. If the failsafe period is in effect, this countdown field displays the number of
minutes remaining till the meter returns to normal mode. If FFFF displays, the meter has been instructed to
remain in failsafe continuously.

Site Scan Toolbox Data


The label(s) at the top of the window indicate what data was captured. "Present" always appears first and
displays the data at the moment the data file was created. Snapshots (up to eight) appear if one or more
diagnostics have been enabled and configured to capture snapshots. A snapshot is a representation of the
toolbox data at the time a diagnostic event occurred.

The data at the top of the screen (Item and Value) provide instantaneous information about the service such as
phasor information about current and voltage for each phase. Additionally it shows the number of occurrences
of each diagnostic and flags any active ones.

The Toolbox graph displays the phasor diagram for the current service based on the data available at the time.

User's Manual 121


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The Power Circle is a graphical representation of the instantaneous energies.

Firmware Download Log


This window allows you to view the history of firmware downloads to the meter that generated this data file.

Time. The date and time that the firmware download was finished successfully.

From. The previous version of the firmware, which was replaced.

To. The new version of the firmware, which was loaded successfully.

Validation Code. A secure identifier of the new firmware version. This can be used to validate approved
firmware releases.

Meter Data Files (CENTRON II C12.19)


Meter data files are created in Field-Pro while logged onto a meter; they are a list of data currently existing in
that meter. The name of CENTRON II C12.19 meter data files always begins with EDL_ and ends .xml.
Between are 14 numbers showing the date and time the data file was created.

The Meter Data Files window displays a list of all data files in a selected directory and allows you to view and
manipulate these files. This directory is remembered from one session to another and is independent of the
Program directories. The view shows all .XML files in the selected directory regardless of source; it is up to
you to organize the files appropriately on the computer.

The Data File Directory at the top of the screen is the directory where Data Manager is currently looking for
the data files. To change this directory, click Change Directory on the left side of the screen. For more
information, see Change Data Directory.

The File Name, Unit ID, Serial Number, and Date Created are displayed for the data files. The file names are
hyperlinks that open the data file in the Data File Viewer when clicked.

Moving files
The Move option is only available when one or more files are selected. If a file is not selected, then this
option is not available. When the Move option is selected, a browse dialog is displayed for you to choose the
location. After confirmation, the file is moved to the specified location and the list is updated. If more than
one file is selected, then all files are moved to the specified location.

Use this dialog to move a file from one location to another location. Use the Browse... button to change the
Destination Directory. To return to the main menu without making any changes, click Cancel. To move the
files, click OK.

Deleting files
The Delete option is available if at least one file is selected. When you click this option, you are prompted to
confirm the deletion of the file. After the confirmation, the files are removed and the list is updated.
User's Manual 122
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the data file(s) that were chosen for deletion.
The Delete option prompts you to confirm the deletion of the file. After confirmation, the files are removed
and the list is updated.

Click Cancel to return to the main screen without making any changes. Click OK to delete the selected files.

Change Data Directory


The Current Data Field Viewer Directory field displays the location where Data Manager currently is set to
look for data files. You can change this location by clicking the Browse button.

The Field Pro Data File Creation Directory field displays the hard-coded location where Field-Pro puts data
files when it creates them. You cannot modify this location. If you want data files to be put in a different spot,
use the Field-Pro Upload to Master Station function, which moves the data files from the hard-coded
location to a folder you can specify using System Manager, Field-Pro Settings - All Devices.

Create Report for EDL Files


To create a report of one or more EDL files, go to the Meter Data Files tab of Data Manager, select one or
more EDL files, then click Create Report.

The Report Specification drop down lists all of the saved report specifications.

The Report Contents section contains the list of options for setting up the duration of the data to use for the
report. Options include All Data in File or Custom Date Selection. If Custom Date Selection option is
selected, the Report Start Date and the Report End Date date/time calendar controls are enabled to allow you
to choose the date and an hour. The Start Date must be before the End Date.

The Save Options section contains the options for saving a hard copy of the report. Select one of the
following options:
Save Option Reason for Using
Microsoft® Excel® Useful for manipulating data or performing calculations.
HTML Useful for posting information on websites or in e-mails.

User's Manual 123


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Save Option Reason for Using


Adobe® PDF A user-friendly report format that is easily sent to other users. This format cannot be manually edited.
Text A text-only report format. No graphics can be used.
XML Useful for programmatically using data.

If the data you will be generating is large (for example multiple intervals or channels),
you may see undesirable formatting in the .txt format. The Adobe PDF and Microsoft
Excel outputs are better suited for larger amounts of data.

When one or more of these options are selected, the Directory and Browse buttons become enabled. These
controls allow the user to choose the file location of the report. The path selected here will be the path used in
the Data Manager reports view.

The Print Report option can be used to print the reports that will be generated. This feature allows batch
printing of multiple selected data files using the settings selected in this dialog. You can choose this in
conjunction with the Save Options.

The OK button is only enabled if the Print Report or one of the Save Options is selected. It allows a report to
be printed and/or saved. The saved reports will have the name of the EDL plus the name of the Report
Specification file. Saved reports will not be overwritten if they already exist. A number is appended to the
report's name to allow multiple reports being created. You can then see the newly created reports in the
Reports view of the Data Manager.

Create MV-90 HHF from EDL Files


This function allows you to create an MV-90 HHF file from an existing EDL file created by a CENTRON II
C12.19 meter. Select data files in the Meter Data Files view in Data Manager, then click the link labeled
Create MV-90 HHF File. This opens the Create MV-90 HHF Files dialog that displays information about the
selected EDL files and allows you to choose a destination directory. MV-90 HHF files are only created from
EDL files that contain load profile data. The newly created HHF file also can be used by MV-90 software.

MV-90 HHF files should not be created for one minute load profile data. This includes
joining, totalization, EDL to MV-90 conversion, and direct communications.

Click OK to create the MV-90 HHF file(s). Click Cancel to return to the Data Manager.

User's Manual 124


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Reverse Engineer Program


Reverse engineering allows you to take a meter data file (EDL) from a meter and extract the program
information from it. You can then use it to program other meters.

To reverse engineer one or more EDL files, go to the Meter Data Files tab of Data Manager, select the EDL
file(s), then click Reverse Engineer Program.

Field Descriptions

Destination Directory. Displays the current location where the meter programs will be placed. Click the
Browse button to choose another location.

Output Format. Choose Itron format to use the file like a normal meter program. Other formats are intended
for use with other head-end systems.

File Name. Created by Field-Pro at the time the file was created; you can change the name using Windows
Explorer.

Meter Program Name. You must click in this field and enter a name for each file before clicking the OK
button.

TOU Schedules
Time of Use metering allows energy providers to assign different rates to different times of the day, days of
the week, and seasons of the year. This allows utility companies to set up incentives that encourage consumers
to shift power consumption to off-peak hours.

PC-PRO+ Advanced allows the creation of TOU Schedules for download into meters and for analyzing load
profile data in reports.

Using the TOU Calendar Editor you can define daily TOU schedules or TOU patterns that identify the rates
used and the time of day when each rate begins and ends. The daily patterns can be assigned to different days
of the week, seasons, and holidays. Once the schedules are created, you can modify and print using the TOU
Calendar Editor.
User's Manual 125
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

You can also create a default schedule which you can use as a template to expedite the process of creating
additional schedules. You can modify the default as needed and then save it as a new schedule.

Daylight Saving Time Schedules are independent of Time of Use Schedules – a TOU
schedule can work for both DST and non-DST locations.

Time of Use includes Holiday Lists as well. Use the Holiday Editor to create a list of days that are billed or
treated differently from other days (such as weekdays or weekends) within a schedule.

Changes to a holiday list do not affect previously saved TOU schedules. If a previously
saved TOU schedule needs a changed holiday list, you must reopen the TOU schedule and
reapply the updated holiday list.

For more information about Time of Use, refer to Using the TOU Calendar Editor (on page 234). For
detailed information on the devices using Time of Use, refer to TOU Schedule Features for Device Types (on
page 235).

Figure 59: TOU Schedules Screen

The Time of Use Schedules window displays the Start Year and End Year of the schedule. You can sort by
clicking on the column heading to easily show the order in which the schedules will expire. If a schedule has
already expired or will expire in the current year, the TOU End Year is displayed in red.

There are two sets of options for managing calendar times: Schedule Options and Holiday List Options. They
are displayed in the upper left of the Data Manager. The check box to the left of the TOU ID allows you to
perform specific operations to the selected item. Depending on the number of items checked, different
operations are available.

For more information, refer to the following topics:

User's Manual 126


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Creating a New Schedule (on page 127)


• Opening a Schedule (on page 127)
• Deleting a TOU Schedule (on page 129)
• Opening a Default TOU Schedule (on page 131)
• View TOU Dependencies (on page 132)
• Editing Holiday Lists (on page 133)
PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

Creating a New Schedule


The New Schedule option is used to create new TOU schedules. A schedule does not need to be selected for
this option to be available. When New Schedule is selected, the Calendar Editor will be launched and will
display the New Schedule dialog.

The list of TOU schedules in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after creating a new
schedule.

To Create a New TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Under Schedules Options menu on the left side of the screen, click New.
4. The TOU Calendar Editor will open showing the New Schedule (on page 241) Dialog.

Opening a Schedule
The Open Schedule option is only available when one to five schedules are selected. If more than five
schedules are selected then the option will not be available. If a schedule is not selected, then this option will
not be available. When the Open Schedule option is selected, the Calendar Editor will be launched with the
selected schedule open. If more than one schedule is selected, then multiple Calendar Editors will be opened
with the selected schedules.

The list of TOU schedules in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after opening/editing
a schedule.

To Open an Existing TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.

User's Manual 127


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.


3. Select one or more of the TOU schedules by using the check box. Click Open on the on the Schedules
Options menu on the left hand side. Optionally, you can click on the hyperlink name.
4. The TOU Calendar Editor will open.

Import TOU Schedule


Use this window to locate and import TOU schedules into your database. This is useful when sharing
schedules among employees or debugging a schedule for a co-worker.

Once you select one or more files and click OK, they appear in the Time of Use Schedules window in Data
Manager. They can then be edited and used like all TOU schedules.

Field Descriptions
Source Directory. Displays the current location where the program looks for TOU Schedule files. Click the
Browse button to choose another location.

(check box). Click to select a row. Multiple rows can be selected at the same time.

Program Name. The name of the TOU Schedule selected by the person who created it.

ID. The ID number of the TOU Schedule selected by the person who created it. The window requires
permission before importing a file with a duplicate ID.

File Name. At the time the schedule is created, the file name defaults to a combination of ID and Program
Name with an XML extension. The file name can be modified in Windows Explorer.

Meter Type. All meters that this TOU Schedule supports.

Export TOU Schedule


When you are in the TOU Schedules tab of the Data Manager and you select one or more TOU schedule, then
click Export, this window appears.

User's Manual 128


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Use this window to export TOU schedules from your database. This is useful when sharing schedules among
employees.

Click OK to copy the selected file to the location shown in the Destination Directory.

Field Descriptions
Destination Directory. Displays the current location where the TOU Schedule will be exported to. Click the
Browse button to choose another location.

Schedule Name. The name of the TOU Schedule selected by the person who created it.

ID. The ID number of the TOU Schedule selected by the person who created it.

Last Modified. The date on which this schedule was created or most recently modified.

Deleting a TOU Schedule


The Delete Schedule option is available if at least one schedule is selected. When you click this option, a
confirmation dialog will appear. A check is made on the schedule's dependencies and if the schedule is being
used by a program or a report specification, the confirmation dialog will inform the user and prevent deletion
of that schedule. A button is available to allow the user to view the dependencies. If there are no
dependencies, the user will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the TOU schedules. After confirmation, the
schedules are removed and the list is updated.

To Delete a TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one or more of the TOU schedules by using the check box. Click Delete on the on the Schedules
Options menu on the left hand side.
4. The Confirm Deletion Dialog will open. Click OK. To return to the main screen without making any
changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 129


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Confirm Deletion
Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the TOU schedule(s) that were chosen for
deletion.

To return to the main screen without deleting a schedule, click Cancel. To delete the selected programs, click
OK.

Once deleted, TOU Schedules cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is


highly recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System
Manager (Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

Figure 60: TOU Confirm Deletions Dialog

Comparing TOU Schedules


The Schedule Comparison tool is an innovative way to compare up to four programs, time of use schedules, or
custom schedules. Differences in programs or schedules can now be quickly identified. This allows a user to:

• Manage existing schedules


• Reduce duplicates
• Check existing files for accuracy and consistency
To Compare TOU Schedules

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select the schedules needing to be compared using the check box. You can select up to four programs.
4. Under Program Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Compare.

User's Manual 130


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

5. The Meter Program Comparison dialog will open.

TOU Schedule Comparison


The TOU Schedule Comparison dialog shows the differences between two, three, or four TOU Schedules.
TOU Schedule functionality is given in the left-most column. A user can collapse or open an individual
section by clicking the '+' or '-' button. The individual TOU Schedules (up to four) are listed in the rest of the
columns. Differences in the TOU Schedules are noted with red italicized text.

To return to the main screen, click Close. To print the results, click Print.

Figure 61: TOU Schedule Comparison

Field Descriptions
Display Differences Only
Checking this box will force the comparison to only show the differences in the programs.

Opening a Default TOU Schedule


The default TOU schedule is used as the starting point for modifications when creating a set of TOU
schedules for your system. When you create a new schedule, TOU Calendar Editor uses the default schedule
as a template, which you can then modify as needed and save it to create the new schedule. Using a default
template expedites the process of creating schedules since you do not need to define every feature for each
schedule.

The Open Default Schedule option is used to open and edit the default TOU schedule. A schedule does not
need to be selected for this option to be available. When Open Default Schedule is selected, the Calendar
Editor will be launched displaying the default schedule.

User's Manual 131


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

To Open a Default TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Click Open Default on the Schedules Options menu on the left hand side.
4. The TOU Editor will open.

View TOU Dependencies


The View Dependencies option is available if one or more schedules are selected. This feature is valuable
when needing to see how a particular schedule relates to another one. It gives you the ability to quickly see
how many programs a schedule change may affect. This feature also highlights which schedules are no longer
used and can be deleted.

Time of Use Dependencies


The View Dependencies option is available if one or more TOU Schedules are selected. When you click this
option, a dependencies dialog is displayed showing the dependencies of the selected schedules.

The Time of Use dependencies dialog shows how each of the selected schedules are currently being used.
This information is extremely useful when considering changing or deleting any Time of Use Schedule.

Before editing a TOU schedule, it is a good idea to examine the Time of Use Dependencies to make sure that
you understand the impact of your changes on any associated meter programs or reports.

The Time of Use Dependencies dialog has tabs for Programs Dependencies (showing which programs use
the TOU Schedule), Report Dependencies (showing which reports use the TOU Schedule) as well as a tab to
show Items not in use.

Only those schedules listed in the "Items Not Used" tab can be deleted. Time of Use schedules that are listed
in the program dependencies tab are currently referenced by at least one meter program and cannot be deleted
prior to changing or deleting the associated program.

The user has the option to open up the program by clicking the name of the program. The Print button in the
bottom left of the dialog is used to print the contents of the dialog. The Export button allows the user to
export the information. The OK button returns the user to the Data Manager application.

User's Manual 132


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 62: Time of Use Dependencies Dialog

Editing Holiday Lists


The Edit Holiday Lists option is used to create new holiday lists for use in TOU schedules. A schedule does
not need to be selected for this option to be available.

To Edit Holiday Lists

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Click Edit Holiday Lists on the Holiday List Options menu on the left hand side.
4. The Holiday Editor will open.

Firmware Files (CENTRON II C12.19)


Firmware files are computer programs that reside in the meter and control the meter's behavior. They are
created at Itron and released to utility companies. They cannot be generated or modified by the user.

The Firmware Files window of Data Manager imports and displays your firmware files. The All Files tab
displays all available firmware. The Select Active tab allows you to sort the files by hardware platform and
singlephase or polyphase.

User's Manual 133


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The Firmware Directory field shows the location of all the firmware files displayed in this window. To
introduce additional files use Windows Explorer to copy the files to this directory, or click Import to browse
and retrieve them.

On the Select Active tab, check the Active box to select the firmware for download to CENTRON II C12.19
meters. Field-Pro reads this table and displays the active firmware file on the Load Firmware window.

The Validation Code field provides information for auditing the current firmware on your meters. The code is
generated automatically for firmware files version 2.5.69 and above. Previous versions display "(not
generated)." When logged into the meter via Field-Pro a configurable window called Firmware Download
Log displays the history of firmware upgrades in the meter. This code is included there.

Import Firmware
The Source Directory field displays the location where Data Manager is set to look for firmware files. You
can change this location by clicking the Browse button.

To import any of the firmware files shown, click the check box next to it and click the OK button. The
window closes and and the Firmware Files window displays the selected firmware file.

Custom Schedules
Custom schedules are needed for irregular self-read schedules or billing schedules. For example, a custom
schedule can be used as a listing of dates when a demand reset or self read needs to be performed.

Use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Schedule Editor application to create a custom schedule. The Custom Schedules
screen displays the list of custom schedules in the system.

User's Manual 134


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Only one custom schedule can be used in a program file. For example, if you use a custom schedule for the
Billing Schedule program component, you cannot select a custom schedule for Self Read.

Standard Self Read and demand reset (billing) schedules are defined within a program file. If you cannot
define the schedule that you need within the program component, use the Schedule Editor to create a custom
schedule.

You can create any number of custom schedules. Each custom schedule can contain a maximum of 300 dates
per calendar year. You can also add a description for the schedule and print a report of each schedule. You can
configure a custom schedule for a maximum of 25 years.

Custom Schedules are only used for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and
SENTINEL meters. If you do not use this functionality, it is recommended that you hide this
tab. Refer to Customizing the Data Manager (on page 96).

Figure 63: Custom Schedules Screen

For more information, refer to the following topics:

• Creating a New Custom Schedule (on page 136)


• Opening a Custom Schedule (on page 136)
• Deleting a Custom Schedule (on page 136)
• View Custom Schedule Dependencies (on page 139)
PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

User's Manual 135


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

Creating a New Custom Schedule


The New Custom Schedule option is used to create new custom schedules. A schedule does not need to be
selected for this option to be available. When New Custom Schedule is selected, the Custom Schedule Editor
will be launched and will display the Schedule Description dialog.

The list of Custom Schedules in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after creating a
new custom schedule.

To Create a New Custom Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Custom Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Click New on the Schedule Options menu on the left hand side of the screen.
4. The Custom Schedule Editor will open.

Opening a Custom Schedule


The New Custom Schedule option is used to create new custom schedules. A schedule does not need to be
selected for this option to be available. When New Custom Schedule is selected, the Custom Schedule Editor
will be launched and will display the Schedule Description dialog.

The list of custom schedules in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after
opening/editing a schedule.

To Open an Existing TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Custom Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one of the Custom schedules by using the check box. Click Open on the menu on the left hand side.
Optionally, you can click on the hyperlink name.
4. The Custom Schedule Editor will open.

Deleting a Custom Schedule


The Delete Custom Schedule option is available if at least one custom schedule is selected. When you click
this option, you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the custom schedules. If any of the custom
schedules are in use by a program or report specification, a warning will be displayed and deletion of those
custom schedules will not be allowed. After the confirmation, the schedules are removed and the list is
updated.

User's Manual 136


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

To Delete an Existing TOU Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Custom Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one or more of the Custom schedules by using the check box.
4. Click Delete on the menu on the left hand side.
5. The Confirm Custom Schedule Deletion (on page 137) Dialog will appear.

Confirm Custom Schedule Deletion


Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the custom schedule(s) that were chosen for
deletion.

To return to the main screen without deleting a schedule, click Cancel. To delete the selected schedule, click
OK.

Once deleted, Custom Schedules cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is


highly recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System
Manager (Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

Figure 64: Confirm Custom Schedule Deletion Dialog

Comparing Custom Schedules


The Schedule Comparison tool is an innovative way to compare up to four programs, time of use schedules, or
custom schedules. Differences in programs or schedules can now be quickly identified. This allows a user to:

User's Manual 137


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Manage existing schedules


• Reduce duplicates
• Check existing files for accuracy and consistency
To Compare Custom Schedules

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Custom Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select the schedules needing to be compared using the check box. You can select up to four programs.
4. Under Program Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Compare.
5. The Custom Schedule Comparison dialog will appear.

Custom Schedule Comparison


The Custom Schedule Comparison dialog shows the differences between two, three, or four Custom
Schedules. Custom Schedule functionality is given in the left-most column. A user can collapse or open an
individual section by clicking the '+' or '-' button. The individual custom schedules (up to four) are listed in the
rest of the columns. Differences in the schedules are noted with red italicized text.

To return to the main screen, click Close. To print the results, click Print.

Figure 65: Custom Schedule Comparison

Field Descriptions
Display Differences Only
Checking this box will force the comparison to only show the differences in the programs.

User's Manual 138


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

View Custom Schedule Dependencies


The View Dependencies option is available if one or more schedules are selected. A user can view any
dependencies that may exist between programs, schedules, or displays. This feature is valuable when needing
to see how a particular schedule relates to another one. It gives you the ability to quickly see how many
programs a schedule change may affect. This feature also highlights which schedules are no longer used and
can be deleted.

Custom Schedule Dependencies


The custom schedule dependencies dialog shows how each of the selected custom schedules is currently being
used. This information is extremely useful when considering changing or deleting any custom schedule.

Only those schedules listed in the "Items Not Used" tab can be deleted. Custom schedules that are listed in the
program dependencies tab are currently referenced by at least one meter program and should not be deleted
prior to changing or deleting the associated program.

It is important to note that although a custom schedule may be listed in the "Items Not Used" tab, the custom
schedule may still be needed. Custom schedules can be assigned to meters during meter initialization for use
as self read or demand reset schedules. Since these schedules are not directly referenced by the meter
program, they may be listed as not used despite the fact that they are required during meter initialization.

The Custom Schedule Dependencies dialog is a tabbed dialog. The Program Dependencies tab lists the
Program ID, Program Name, Meter Type, and Last Modified date. You have the option to open up the
program by pressing the button next to the name of the program. The Custom Schedules not used in programs
tab lists which of the selected custom schedules, if any, are not used in any program. The Print button in the
bottom left of the dialog is used to print the contents of the dialog. The OK button returns the user to the Data
Manager application.

Figure 66: Custom Schedule Dependencies Dialog

User's Manual 139


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Display Files
The PC-PRO+ Advanced Display Editor is used to configure meter display files for the VECTRON and
CENTRON meters. A single display file can be used by multiple program files.

The Display Files screen displays the list of display files in the system.

Display Files are only used for VECTRON and CENTRON meters.

Although the Display Editor cannot configure displays for the FULCRUM and 200 Series
meters, it allows you to view the displays.

If you do not use this functionality, it is recommended that you hide this tab. Refer to
Customizing the Data Manager (on page 96).

Figure 67: Display Files Screen

The Display Name, Display Type, and Last Modified date are displayed for the files.

There are display file options available to help manage display files through the Data Manager. They are
displayed in the upper left of the Data Manager.

User's Manual 140


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

There are schedule options available to help manage custom schedules through the Data Manager. They are
displayed in the upper left of the Data Manager.

The check box to the left of the Schedule Name allows the user to perform specific operations to the selected
item. Depending on the number of items checked, different operations will be available:
# Items Checked Options Available
None New
One New
Open
Delete
View Dependencies
Two or More New
Delete
View Dependencies

For more information, refer to the following topics:

• New Display (on page 141)


• Open Display (on page 142)
• Deleting Displays (on page 142)
• Viewing Display Dependencies (on page 143)
PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

New Display
The New Display option is used to create new display files. A display file does not need to be selected for
this option to be available. When New Display is selected, the Display Editor will be launched and will
display the Select Display Type dialog.

The list of display files in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after creating a new
display file.

To Create a New Display

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Display Files tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Click New on the Display File Options menu on the left hand side of the screen.

User's Manual 141


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

4. The Display Editor will open. Select the appropriate Display Type and click OK. Optionally, go to File |
New once the Display Editor has opened.

Open Display
The Open Display option is only available when one to five displays are selected. If more than five files are
selected then the option will not be available. If a display file is not selected then this option will not be
available. When the Open Display option is selected, the Display Editor will be launched with the selected
display schedule open. If more than one display file is selected, then multiple Display Editors will be opened
with the selected display file.

To Open a Display Schedule

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). You
might be asked for a User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Display Files tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one of the Display Files by using the check box. Click Open on the menu on the left hand side.
Optionally, you can click on the hyperlink name.
4. The Display Editor will open.

Deleting Displays
The Delete Display option is available if at least one display file is selected. When you click this option, a
confirmation dialog appears. A check will be made on the display file's dependencies and if the schedule is
being used by a program, the confirmation dialog will inform the user and prevent deletion of that display file.
A button will be provided to view the dependencies. If there are no dependencies, you will be prompted to
confirm the deletion of the display files. After confirmation, the schedules are removed and the list is updated.

To Delete an Existing Display

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Display Files tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one or more of the Display Files by using the check box.
4. Click Delete on the menu on the left hand side.
5. A Delete Display (on page 142) Dialog will appear.

Delete Display
Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the displays that were chosen for deletion.

To return to the main screen without deleting a display, click Cancel. To delete the selected programs, click
OK.

Note that the Show Dependencies option only appears if there are some displays that currently cannot be
deleted.

User's Manual 142


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Once deleted, Display FIles cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is highly
recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System Manager
(Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

Figure 68: Delete Display Confirmation Dialog

Viewing Display Dependencies


The View Dependencies option is available if one or more display files are selected. You can view any
dependencies that may exist between programs, schedules, or displays. This feature is valuable when needing
to see how a particular display file relates to another one. It gives you the ability to quickly see how many
programs a display file change may affect. This feature also highlights which display files are no longer used
and can be deleted.

View Display Dependencies


The Display Dependencies dialog shows where each of the selected meter displays are currently being used.
This information is extremely useful when considering changing or deleting any meter display schedule.

Before editing a display schedule, it is a good idea to examine the display dependencies to make sure that you
understand the impact of your changes on any associated meter programs.

The Display Dependencies dialog is a tabbed dialog. The Program Dependencies tab lists the Program ID,
Program Name, Meter Type, and Last Modified date. You have the option to open up the program by pressing
the button next to the name of the program. The Print button in the bottom left of the dialog is used to print
the contents of the dialog. The OK button returns the user to the Data Manager application.

Only those schedules listed in the "Items Not Used" tab can be deleted. Display schedules that are listed in the
program dependencies tab are currently referenced by at least one meter program and cannot be deleted prior
to changing or deleting the associated program.

User's Manual 143


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 69: Display Dependencies Dialog

Service Points
A service point is a metering device used for automatic data acquisition. The Service Points screen displays
the list of service points from the Program Editor's address book.

The following information is included when defining a specific service point:

• Service Point Name (User defined)


This is the name of the service point (255 characters is the maximum value allowed for this field). To edit
the service point, you can click on the blue hyperlink, or use the check mark and click Open on the left
menu.
• Meter Type
Select the device type via the drop down menu. Values include the 200 Series, CENTRON, CENTRON
(C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), FULCRUM, QUANTUM, Q1000, SENTINEL, SQ400, and VECTRON.
• Network Type (such as Standalone or Ethernet)
A Network will need to be created for the following Network Types: Multi-drop (PSEM) or for Phone
Line Sharing (SENTINEL only). Each Network can have a unique Network Name.
• Connection Type (Direct or Modem)
Select the network type from the drop down menu. Values include Standalone, Multi-drop (PSEM),
Phone Line Sharing (SENTINEL only), or Ethernet. The options on the dialog will change depending on
the Network Type.
Only one Service Point can be opened at a time. Likewise, a user can only connect to one service point at a
time. These options will go away on the side menu when more than one service point is selected.

Multiple Service Points can be deleted at a time. At least one service point should be selected in order for the
Delete option to be active.

User's Manual 144


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Service points are used to easily identify meters that are read via Ethernet, phone line
sharing, or multi-drop connections. It is not recommended for direct communications via an
optical probe.

By default, this option is hidden. If you use this functionality, you will need to un-hide this
tab. Refer to Customizing the Data Manager (on page 96).

Figure 70: Service Points Screen

The check box to the left of the service point name allows you to perform specific operations to the selected
item.

Each of the columns can be sorted by single clicking on the labels.

For more information, refer to the following topics:

• Creating New Service Points (on page 146)


• Creating New Networks (on page 148)
• Edit Service Point (on page 151)
• Deleting Service Points (on page 153)
• Connect to Service Point (on page 154)
PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

User's Manual 145


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Creating New Service Points


The New Service Point option is used to create new meter service points. An existing service point does not
need to be selected for this option to be available.

On the Service Point tab, click New under Service Point Options. This will open the Creating a Service Point
Dialog (on page 146).

Creating a Service Point Dialog


When New Service Point is selected, the Create Service Point dialog is displayed from the Data Manager.
To define the new service point, click the Create Service Point button at the bottom of the dialog. To return
to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel.

Figure 71: New Service Point Dialog

Field Descriptions
Service Point Name
This is the name of the service point (255 characters is the maximum value allowed for this field).

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Device Type
Select the device type via the drop down menu. Values include the 200 Series, CENTRON, CENTRON
(C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), FULCRUM, QUANTUM, Q1000, SENTINEL, SQ400, and VECTRON.
Network Type
Select the network type from the drop down menu. Values include Standalone, Multi-drop (PSEM), Phone
Line Sharing (SENTINEL only), or Ethernet. The options on the dialog will change depending on the
Network Type.

User's Manual 146


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Security Code
The Security Code is used to log on to a specific meter. This value is defined when the meter is actually
programmed.
Communication Specific Parameters
• Network Address - Using the drop-down box, select the Network Address.
• Network Name - A user defined field used to describe the Network.
• Baud Rate - Select the appropriate baud rate (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800).
• Phone Number - Enter in the phone number.
• Select a Network - Using the drop-down box, select the appropriate Network. If necessary, click the
New Network button. Refer to Creating a New Network Dialog (on page 148).
• Network Description - This is a user-defined description of the network.
Standalone Specific Options
• Connection Type - Select the method for connecting to the service point (either Direct or Modem).
• Baud Rate - Select the appropriate baud rate (9600, 14400, 19200, 28800).
• Port - If a direct connection, select the appropriate port value (COM1, COM2, or COM3).
• Phone Number - If a modem connection, enter in the phone number.
• Modem Answer Delay (in seconds) - If a modem connection, enter in any time required (in seconds)
for the modem answer delay.
Ethernet Specific Options
• IP Address or DNS Name - Enter in the IP Address (or DNS Name) of the service point.
• Port Number - Select the port number using the arrow keys or by typing in the field.
• Encryption Key - Select the Encryption bit rate (none, 128 bit, 192 bit, or 256 bit). If other than None,
enter in the value in the box below.
Transformer Specific Options
• CT - Select the appropriate CT value from the drop down box.
• VT - Select the appropriate VT value from the drop down box.
• Transformer Ratio - Select the appropriate Transformer value from the drop down box.
• Acquire Values on Next Connect - Check this box if you wish to have the CT, VT and Transformer
Ratios to be read out of the meter the next time it is connected to that service point. These values will
be written to the address book entry.
Service Point Description
This is a user-defined description of the service point.

User's Manual 147


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Creating New Networks


A new network is created by clicking on the New Network button while creating a new Service Point (multi-
drop network only).

To create the New Network, click the New Network button on the New Service Point dialog. You must have
the multi-drop network option selected.

Creating a New Network Dialog


When New Network is selected on the New Service Point dialog, the Create Service Network dialog is
displayed from the Data Manager. To define the new service point, click the Create Network button at the
bottom of the dialog. To return to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel.

Figure 72: Creating a New Network Dialog

The list of service points in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after creating the new
service point.

Field Descriptions

Network Name
This is the name of the network (255 characters is the maximum value allowed for this field.

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Communication Parameters
Connection Type - Select either Direct or Modem for the type of connection you want. Select Direct when
the PC is connected directly to the meter; select Modem when you want to call the meter through a modem
connection.

User's Manual 148


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Use a direct connection to download firmware to SENTINEL meters.

For Q1000 meters with firmware rev 2.x or earlier, 56K US Robotics modems are not
supported.

Baud Rate - Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used
for both receiving and transmitting data. The following values are available using the drop down box: 9600,
14400, 19200, and 28800.

Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.

Port - Select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and
COM4 are supported.

If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button
to configure the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices.

Phone Number - Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by
modem. This option is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for
the device phone number.

Modem Answer Delay (in seconds) - Enter the number of seconds PC-PRO+ Advanced will wait for the
meter to answer when you are calling the meter over a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179
seconds. The default is 45. The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem.
Configure your PC’s modem settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties |
Connection and setting the Call Preference for “Cancel if not connected.” Your PC modem setting for
“Cancel if not connected” should be set for longer than the modem time-out.
QDIP Settings
RTS To Transmit Delay - Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the RTS (ready to
send) On and the start of Transmit. This is the minimum time that the RTS signal is asserted prior to the start
bit being transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255
milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.

End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay - Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS Off.
This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The minimum delay
may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
Network Description
This is a user-defined description of the network.

Editing an Existing Network


Once a network has been created, you can edit its settings.

To edit the Network, click on the network name on the Service Points tab in the Data Manager.

User's Manual 149


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Edit Network Dialog


Click on the Network Name to edit an existing network.

To save changes, click Save. To return to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel.

Figure 73: Edit Network Dialog

The list of service points in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after editing the
network.

Field Descriptions

Network Name
This is the name of the network (255 characters is the maximum value allowed for this field).

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Communication Parameters
Connection Type - Select either Direct or Modem for the type of connection you want. Select Direct when
the computer is connected directly to the meter; select Modem when calling the meter through a modem
connection.

Use a direct connection to download firmware to SENTINEL meters.

For Q1000 meters with firmware rev 2.x or earlier, 56K US Robotics modems are not
supported.

Baud Rate - Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used
for both receiving and transmitting data. The following values are available using the drop down box: 9600,
14400, 19200, and 28800.

User's Manual 150


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.

Port - Select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and
COM4 are supported.

If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button
to configure the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices.

Phone Number - Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by
modem. This option is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for
the device phone number.

Modem Answer Delay (in seconds) - Enter the number of seconds PC-PRO+ Advanced will wait for the
meter to answer when you are calling the meter over a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179
seconds. The default is 45. The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem.
Configure your PC’s modem settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties |
Connection and setting the Call Preference for "Cancel if not connected." Your PC modem setting for
"Cancel if not connected" should be set for longer than the modem time-out.
QDIP Settings
RTS To Transmit Delay - Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the RTS (ready to
send) On and the start of Transmit. This is the minimum time that the RTS signal is asserted prior to the start
bit being transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255
milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.

End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay - Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS Off.
This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The minimum delay
may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
Network Description
This is a user-defined description of the network.

Edit Service Point


To modify an existing service point, click the Service Point Name. This will open the Service Point dialog.
Optionally, a user can click the check box next to the service point name and click Open on the left side of the
screen.

Only one service point at a time can opened to be edited.

Edit Service Point Dialog


To edit an existing service point, click the hyperlink Service Point name. This brings up the Edit Service
Point dialog. Make any necessary changes. To save your changes, click Save Changes.

To return to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 151


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 74: Edit Service Point Dialog

Field Descriptions
Service Point Name
This is the name of the service point (255 characters is the maximum value allowed for this field).

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Device Type
Select the device type via the drop down menu. Values include the 200 Series, CENTRON, CENTRON
(C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), FULCRUM, QUANTUM, Q1000, SENTINEL, SQ400, and VECTRON.
Network Type
Select the network type from the drop down menu. Values include Standalone, Multi-drop (PSEM), Phone
Line Sharing (SENTINEL only), or Ethernet. The options on the dialog will change depending on the
Network Type.
Security Code
The Security Code is used to log on to a specific meter. This value is defined when the meter is actually
programmed.
Communication Specific Parameters
• Network Address - Using the drop-down box, select the Network Address.
• Network Name - A user defined field used to describe the Network.
• Baud Rate - Select the appropriate baud rate (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800).
• Phone Number - Enter in the phone number.
• Select a Network - Using the drop-down box, select the appropriate Network. If necessary, click the
New Network button. Refer to Creating a New Network Dialog.
• Network Description - This is a user-defined description of the network.
User's Manual 152
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Standalone Specific Options


• Connection Type - Select the method for connecting to the service point (either Direct or Modem).
• Baud Rate - Select the appropriate baud rate (9600, 14400, 19200, 28800).
• Port - If a direct connection, select the appropriate port value (COM1, COM2, or COM3).
• Phone Number - If a modem connection, enter in the phone number.
• Modem Answer Delay (in seconds) - If a modem connection, enter in any time required (in seconds)
for the modem answer delay.
Ethernet Specific Options
• IP Address or DNS Name - Enter in the IP Address (or DNS Name) of the service point.
• Port Number - Select the port number using the arrow keys or by typing in the field.
• Encryption Key - Select the Encryption bit rate (none, 128 bit, 192 bit, or 256 bit). If other than None,
enter in the value in the box below.
Transformer Specific Options
• CT - Select the appropriate CT value from the drop down box.
• VT - Select the appropriate VT value from the drop down box.
• Transformer Ratio - Select the appropriate Transformer value from the drop down box.
• Acquire Values on Next Connect - Check this box if you wish to have the CT, VT and Transformer
Ratios to be read out of the meter the next time it is connected to that service point. These values will
be written to the address book entry.
Service Point Description
This is a user-defined description of the service point.

Deleting Service Points


The Delete Service Point option is available if at least one service point is selected using the check box to the
left of the Service Point Name. To select all Service Points, use the "Select All" button at the bottom of the
screen. To clear all of the selections, use the "Clear All" button at the bottom of the screen.
1. Select the service points to be deleted by clicking on the check boxes.
2. Click Delete on the left menu. The Confirm Deletions dialog will appear.

Delete Service Points Dialog


Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the service points that were chosen for
deletion.

To return to the main screen without deleting a service point, click Cancel. To delete the selected service
points, click OK.

User's Manual 153


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Once deleted, Service Points cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is highly
recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System Manager
(Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

Figure 75: Service Point Deletion

Connect to Service Point


The Connect to Service Point option is used to log on to a service point. This option is available when one,
and only one, service point is selected. If the selected service point is in a phone line shared network, and is
not the master, this option will not be available. When Connect to Service Point is selected, the
Communication Manager is launched and log on begins for the selected service point.

To connect to a Service Point

1. To connect to a service point, click the check box next to the Service Point Name.
2. Click Connect to Service Point on the left menu. The Communication Manager will open.

Protocol Files
The Protocol Editor software is a configuration file editor used to create and modify advanced protocols that
support communication with the Q1000 meter. Using the Protocol Editor software, you can create advanced
protocol configuration files that are then loaded into the Q1000 meter using the PC-PRO+ Advanced or PC-
PRO+ 98 programming software. Advanced protocols currently supported for the Q1000 meter include the
following protocols:

User's Manual 154


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• DNP 3.0
• IEC 60870-5-102
• IEC 60870-5-102 Plus
• MODBUS
The advanced protocols are often used to provide a means of communication between the meter and a system
or other equipment. One of the strengths of the advanced protocol implementations in the Q1000 meter is that
they are flexible. This flexibility allows the meter to be configured to work with an existing data retrieval
system at the electric utility or industrial site. The advanced protocol configuration files reduce
implementation time and the expense of developing custom SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data
Acquisition) protocol implementations.

Protocol Editor is intended for a user who is familiar with an advanced protocol. Typically, the electric utility
company’s protocol expert will work with the utility’s Q1000 meter expert to identify the measurement data
needed from the meter and design the protocol configuration files. The Protocol Files screen displays the list
of protocol files in the system.

Protocol Files are only used for QUANTUM Q1000 meters.

By default, this option is hidden. If you use this functionality, you will need to un-hide this
tab. Refer to Customizing the Data Manager (on page 96).

Figure 76: Protocol Files Screen

User's Manual 155


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The Protocol File Name, Protocol Type, and Last Modified date are displayed for the files.

For more information, refer to the following topic:

• Opening Protocol Editor (on page 156)


A user can open the Protocol Editor through the Data Manager by clicking on Open Protocol Editor under
Protocol Options on the left hand side of the screen.

PDF versions of the individual user manuals previously included in the software download are now available
from either of the following sources:

• PC-PRO+ Advanced Installation CD (Documentation directory)


• Itron Secure Website (on page 6)

Opening Protocol Editor


The Open Protocol Editor option is used to launch the Protocol Editor application. When Open Protocol
Editor is selected, the Protocol Editor will be launched.

The list of protocol files in the Data Manager will be refreshed when focus is returned after opening the
Protocol Editor.

To Open the Protocol Editor

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Protocol Editor tab on the left side of the screen (note that this tab might be hidden).
3. Click Open Protocol Editor on the menu on the left hand side.
4. The Protocol Editor will open.

Managing Metering Data Using Reports


PC-PRO+ Advanced offers meter data reporting capabilities. Reports can be generated from either new or
existing meter image files (MIFs) and MV-90 HHF files. Reports can be created either one at a time or in
batches immediately after the data has been uploaded by any of the PC-PRO+ suite of products including PC-
PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro (MIF file creation in a future release).

User's Manual 156


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Report Specifications (on page 157)


• Meter Image Files (on page 159)
• MV-90 HHF Files (on page 178)
• Reports (on page 184)

Figure 77: Report Specification Process

Report Specifications
PC-PRO+ Advanced offers meter data reporting capabilities. Reports can be generated from either new or
existing meter image files (MIFs), MV-90 HHF files, and EDL files (CENTRON II C12.19 meters only).
Reports can be created either one at a time or in batches immediately after the data has been uploaded by any
of the PC-PRO+ suite of products including PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro (MIF file
creation in a future release).

Figure 78: Creating the Report Specification

In order to create a meaningful report, you must first create a Report Specification, or template, that will be
used by the report engine. The template is simply a definition telling what values should be calculated in the
report and what values should be used in the calculations.

The Report Specifications screen displays the list of report specification files created and saved by the Report
Designer.
User's Manual 157
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 79: Report Specifications Screen

The check box to the left of the Schedule Name allows the user to perform specific operations to the selected
item. For more information, refer to the following topics:

• Creating a New Specification (on page 158)


• Opening a Specification (on page 158)
• Deleting a Specification (on page 158)

Creating a New Specification


The New Specification option is always available. It is used to create report specifications that are used when
viewing and printing reports. When New Specification is selected, the Report Designer is displayed. The
Report Designer section below details the report specification creation function.

Refer to Using the Report Designer (on page 299).

Opening a Specification
The Open Specification option is available when a file is selected. If a file is not selected, then the option will
not be available. When Open Specification is selected, the Report Designer is displayed for the selected files.
The Report Designer section below details the report specification editing function.

Deleting a Specification
The Delete Specification option is available if at least one file is selected. When you click this option, you
will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the files. After the confirmation, the files are removed and the list
is updated.
User's Manual 158
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Once deleted, Report Specifications cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it


is highly recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System
Manager (Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

Figure 80: Delete Report Specification Dialog

Meter Image Files


PC-PRO+ Advanced offers meter data reporting capabilities, including from new or existing meter image files
(MIFs). Reports can be created either one at a time or in batches immediately after the data has been uploaded
by any of the PC-PRO+ suite of products including PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro
(MIF file creation in a future release).

Figure 81: Load Profile Data (MIF or MV-90 HHF)

A Meter Image File is often used as a troubleshooting tool. When a problem is detected in a meter, PC-PRO+
Advanced, Field-Pro, or Shop-Pro can be used to create the MIF file from the meter either locally or remotely
via a meter communications port. This file can then be saved and sent back to the home office to be later
loaded into PC-PRO+ Advanced allowing you to better diagnose the problem later.

A MIF is useful in several ways including:

User's Manual 159


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Retrieving and viewing meter data with the following programs: PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor,
Shop-Pro, EnergyAudit and PC-PRO+ Views software
• Documenting the configuration of a meter
• Capturing meter diagnostic information
• Sending meter data for data review by a third party
Once the file has been created, the following information is saved (if it is supported in the meter):

• Billing Data
• Meter Values
• Register Data
• Toolbox Data
• Status Data
• Configuration Data
• Load Profile Data
While you are logged on to a meter, you can save the values in the meter by creating a Meter Image File
(MIF). The file name extension indicates the device type for the Meter Image File.
Meter Image File
Device Type
Name Extension
CENTRON CEN
CENTRON (C12.19) CMA
CENTRON (V&I) CVI
200 Series MT2
FULCRUM X20
Q1000 Q1K
QUANTUM QTM
SENTINEL SEN
SQ400 SQ4
VECTRON VEC

The file creation takes a few minutes. Do not disconnect or log off the meter until the
process is finished.

Since Meter Image Files contain register data, a user can also do the following:

User's Manual 160


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Import data into EnergyAudit or PC-PRO+ Advanced for further analysis


• Extract billing data
• Save meter data prior to completing a meter change out (the technician would make a MIF of the old
meter prior to installing the new meter)
• View meter data as if online with the meter
The Meter Image Files screen displays the list of meter image files in the system for the given location.

Figure 82: Meter Image Files Screen

The File Name, Unit ID, and Date Created fields are displayed for the meter image files. The list of meter
image files is displayed based on the selected directory. The user can browse to any directory using the Meter
Image File Data Directory control at the top of the screen.

The check box to the left of the Meter Image File allows the user to perform specific operations to the selected
item. For more information, refer to the following topics:

User's Manual 161


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• Open MIF (on page 162)


• Move MIF (on page 162)
• Deleting MIF files (on page 163)
• Create Report (see "Create Report for MIF Files" on page 164)
• Create MV-90 HHF (see "Create MV-90 HHF from MIF Files" on page 165)
• Reverse Engineer Program (on page 166)
• Join Files (on page 168)
• Totalize Files (see "Totalization" on page 175)

Open MIF
The Open MIF option is only available when one to five files are selected. If more than five files are selected,
then this option will not be available. If a file is not selected, this option will not be available.

When the Open MIF option is selected, the Communication Manager is launched with the selected MIF open.
If more than one file is selected, multiple Communication Managers are opened with the selected meter image
files.

A MIF can also be opened by clicking on the hyperlink File Name of the MIF.

Moving MIF files


The Move MIF option is only available when one or more files are selected. If a file is not selected, then this
option will not be available. When the Move MIF option is selected, a browse dialog will be displayed for
you to choose the location. After confirmation, the file will be moved to the specified location and the list is
updated. If more than one file is selected, then all files will be moved to the specified location.

Move MIF
Use this dialog to move a MIF file from one location to another location. Use the Browse... button to change
the Destination Directory. To return to the main menu without making any changes, click Cancel. To move
the files, click OK.

User's Manual 162


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 83: Move MIF Dialog

Deleting MIF files


The Delete MIF option is available if at least one file is selected. When you click this option they are
prompted to confirm the deletion of the file. After confirmation, the files are removed and the list is updated.

Delete MIF
Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog appears shows the MIFs that were chosen for
deletion.

To return to the main screen without deleting a MIF, click Cancel. To delete the selected MIFs, click OK.

Once deleted, MIF files cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is highly
recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System Manager
(Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

User's Manual 163


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 84: Confirm MIF File Deletion

Create Report for MIF Files


The Create Report option is only available when one or more files are selected. The Create Report dialog
contains the options needed to generate a report.

The Report Specification drop down lists all of the saved report specifications.

The Report Contents section contains the list of options for setting up the duration of the data to use for the
report. There are options for All Data in File or Custom Date Selection. If Custom Date Selection option is
selected, the Report Start Date and the Report End Date date/time calendar controls are enabled to allow you
to choose the date and an hour. The Start Date must be before the End Date.

The Save Options section contains the options for saving a hard copy of the report. Select one of the
following options:
Save Option Reason for Using
Microsoft® Excel® Useful for manipulating data or performing calculations.
HTML Useful for posting information on websites or in e-mails.
Adobe® PDF A user-friendly report format that is easily sent to other
users. This format cannot be manually edited.
Text A text-only report format. No graphics can be used.
XML Useful for programmatically using data.

If the data you will be generating is large (for example multiple intervals or channels), you
may see undesirable formatting in the .txt format. The Adobe PDF and Microsoft Excel
outputs are better suited for larger amounts of data.

When one or more of these options are selected, the Directory and Browse buttons become enabled. These
controls allow you to choose the file location of the report. The path selected here will be the path used in the
Data Manager reports view.

User's Manual 164


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The Print Report option can be used to print the reports that will be generated. This feature allows batch
printing of multiple selected data files using the settings selected in this dialog. You can choose this in
conjunction with the Save Options.

The OK button is only enabled if the Print Report or one of the Save Options is selected. It allows a report to
be printed and/or saved. The saved reports will have the name of the MIF plus the name of the Report
Specification file. Saved reports will not be overwritten if they already exist. A number will be appended to
the report's name to allow multiple reports being created. You will then be able to see the newly created
reports in the Reports view of the Data Manager.

Figure 85: Create Report Dialog

Create MV-90 HHF from MIF Files


This function allows you to create an MV-90 HHF file from an existing Meter Image File (MIF). The MIF
dialog in Data Manager shows a listing of the MIF files that have been selected from the Meter Image File tab
of the Data Manager. The information includes the Source File name, the Unit ID (if applicable), the profile
start and end time, and information about the Destination File. MV-90 HHF files will only be created from
MIF files that contain load profile data. The newly created HHF file also can be used by MV-90 software.

The new meter program will be located in the Meter Image File Directory indicated at the top of the Meter
Image Files screen in the Data Manager.

MV-90 HHF files should not be created for one minute load profile data. This includes
joining, totalization, MIF to MV-90 conversion, and direct communications.

Click OK to create the MV-90 HHF file(s). Click Cancel to return to the Data Manager.

MV-90 HHF files will only be created from MIF files that contain load profile data.

User's Manual 165


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 86: Create MV-90 HHF Dialog

Reverse Engineer Program


Reverse engineering of meter programs allows you to easily recreate a lost meter program. A MIF file can be
created in PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro and PC-PRO+ Views. A meter program can then be
recreated from the provided Meter Image File (MIF).

The Reverse Engineer Program link is visible when one and only one MIF file has been selected on the
“Meter Image File” tab of the Data Manager.

The new meter program will be located in the Meter Image File Directory indicated at the top of the Meter
Image Files screen in the Data Manager. Once the new meter program is created, it will automatically be on
the list of programs on the Meter Programs tab.

Due to the complexity of the Q1000 programs, reverse engineering will not be supported for
the Q1000 meter. In addition, any meter type that currently does not allow program creation
in PC-PRO+ Advanced (such as the FULCRUM meter, MT200 meter, SQ400 meter, and the
QUANTUM meter) will not be supported.

The Reverse Engineer utility is available in the Data Manager's MIF file view and is not available in Shop-
Pro, Field-Pro or PC-PRO+ Views. However, a MIF file can be created in PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro,
Field-Pro and PC-PRO+ Views.

Reverse engineering of any user-defined table configuration is not currently supported.

To Reverse Engineer a Program

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Meter Image Files tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select the Meter Image File in question.
4. Under Data Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Reverse Engineer Program.

User's Manual 166


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

5. The Reverse Engineer Program dialog will appear.


MIF Information

This section includes general information about the Meter Image File that was selected.

Program

The Reverse Engineer Program dialog gives you the opportunity to select a name and ID number for the
program that is about to be created. A program ID as well as a Program Name are automatically generated;
however, you have the ability change these values if needed. The name is pre-filled with the name of the MIF
file. The ID field will use the program ID in the MIF file if it is not in use; otherwise, it will use the next
available ID.

Figure 87: Reverse Enginner Program Dialog

TOU Schedule

In addition to recreating the program, TOU schedules will be created from the MIF. When recreating the
schedule, none of the names of patterns, seasons or holidays will be retrieved. These fields are only enabled if
TOU was enabled in the meter that the MIF was created from. A TOU ID as well as a TOU Name are
automatically generated; however, you have the ability change these values if needed. The name is pre-filled
with the name of the MIF file. The ID field will use the program ID in the MIF file if it is not in use;
otherwise, it will use the next available ID.

Custom Schedule

User's Manual 167


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The custom schedule section is available for SENTINEL meters, CENTRON (V&I) meters, and CENTRON
(C12.19) meters. This section allows you to specify the names of the custom schedule or multiple custom
schedules to be recreated.

The custom schedule name text box is only enabled if custom schedules are used in the meter that the MIF
was created from. The name is pre-filled with the name of the MIF file. If the MIF contains multiple custom
schedules, the schedule name provided will be used followed by an underscore and the index number of the
schedule. For example, if the name entered was "SchedA", the first multiple custom schedule would be
named "SchedA_1". The second multiple custom schedule would be named "SchedA_2".

Display Schedule

The display schedule section is available for the CENTRON meter as well as the VECTRON meter. This
section specifies the name for the display schedule that will be recreated.

The display schedule text box will always be enabled. By default, the display name is the name of the MIF
file.

Reverse Engineering Status

After making selections on the reverse engineer program dialog and hitting OK, the reverse engineering status
dialog will be displayed. It will show status of the program and its associated schedules as they are reverse
engineered. When complete the names of the program and its schedules will be shown as links that can be
used to open them.

Progress will be displayed as each item is re-created. Also a result box will display the overall result of the
operation. Any errors that cause a failure will be displayed here.

Security Features

The reverse engineering of programs is controlled by a user's security privileges. Because the reverse
engineering of programs is creating a new program, it is tied to the "Create New Program" security feature.
Only users who have this feature enabled will have access to reverse engineer programs.

Join Files
Multiple Meter Image Files or MV-90 HHF files from the same device can be combined into one file using
the Join Data Files feature. This function will create a single, extended MV-90 HHF file. Join Data Files
allows you to create reports over long time spans or to create a single report from two or more intermediate
reads (for example, using meter change-outs).

The joining process can only be used on different files from the same source. The joining process validates the
device ID of each file. In addition, it will verify that the meter’s configuration has not changed between meter
reads. This is to insure the integrity of the resulting data.

Using Join Data Files is also useful in creating and managing totalized data. Joining files allows you to create
a longer date range between contributing files.

User's Manual 168


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 88: Join Files

The load profile data does not have to be contiguous. If there are gaps between any of the contributing files,
the missing intervals will have a status of ‘K’ to indicate that they have been skipped and will have a value of
0.

Figure 89: Join Files with Overlap

Joined files will not contain register or event data. Only profile data can be stored.

To Join Data Files

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Meter Image Files tab or the MV-90 HHF Files tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select two or more Meter Image Files or MV-90 HHF files.
4. Under Data Options menu on the left side of the screen, click Join Data Files.

User's Manual 169


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

5. The Join Data Files dialog will appear.

Figure 90: Join Data Files Dialog

Output Specification

Enter in a unit ID for the new combined MV-90 HHF file. The name entered here will be appended with a
date/time stamp which will be noted in the Result file name section on the right side of the screen.

Check Generate Reports if you wish to go ahead and run a report with the new combined file. This will
open the Create Report dialog.

The destination directory of the joined file is noted in System Manager under Field-Pro
Settings | All Devices | Data File Upload Directory.

Contributor List

This is a listing of all the meter image files that are being combined to form the new MV-90 HHF file.

Totalization
Billing data can be collected from load profile meters in the form of data files (MIFs). Billing determinants
can be generated directly from these files using reports within PC-PRO+ Advanced Data Manager. Using the
new totalization feature in PC-PRO+ Advanced 9.50, you will be able to take this process one step further by
combining data from several data files to generate reports on this new data set.

Totalization is the aggregation of two or more load profile channels. All channels that are contributor channels
(channels included for totalization) must have the same interval length. All interval data will be converted to
primary values before they are totalized.

Totalization within the software is different than with totalization within the meter.

User's Manual 170


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Totalization Formula
After data is read from the source files, and after the user clicks the OK button on the Totalization dialog, the
following formula is used to calculate the totalization:

T[i] = (C1[i] * F1 *PW1 + C2[i] * F2 * PW2 + C3[i] * F3 * PW3)

Where:

T is the totalized value for each interval

i is the interval

Cn is the contributing channel in pulses

Fn is the transformer ratio used to convert the energy value from secondary units to primary units

PW is the channel pulse weight used to convert the pulse values to secondary energy values

The totalization process is independent of meter type. You can combine data from all meter types supported
by PC-PRO+ Advanced including the CENTRON meter, CENTRON (C12.19) meter, CENTRON (V&I)
meter, SENTINEL meter, VECTRON meter, DATASTAR meter, FULCRUM SL meter, FULCRUM SQ
meter, QUANTUM STQ meter, and the QUANTUM Q1000 meter.

Due to the possibility of differences in transformer ratios, PC-PRO+ Advanced totalizes


primary energy values and not secondary energy values. Therefore, the CT and VT values
must be configured within the meter itself (within the meter program) in order for the
totalization utility to work properly within PC-PRO+ Advanced.

Data Used for Totalization


If the data stored for the contributing channels in a totalized channel do not have the same time spans, the
totalization component selects the common time span for totalization. In the following diagram all three
contributing channels have data for 3/14 through 5/28. All intervals within time span 3/14 through 5/28 are
used for the totalization.

User's Manual 171


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 91: Totalization Data Diagram

In this example, the resulting MV-90 HHF file will contain the data for the time span of 3/14 through 5/28.

Totalization with the Meter


SENTINEL meters with firmware version 3.210 and higher have an optional Totalization feature that allows
totalization of KY inputs. This utility requires additional meter hardware and can only be done when meters
are close geographically.

Figure 92: Totalization withing a meter's hardware

Totalization with PC-PRO+ Advanced


Totalization within PC-PRO+ Advanced allows you to combine channel information for many different meter
types for up to 75 total meters. It requires no extra hardware or any meter upgrades. Totalization can be
performed immediately after data has been acquired or during the process of generating utility reports.

User's Manual 172


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 93: Totalization within PC-PRO+ Advanced 9.50

Using the Totalization Feature


1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Create a Report Specification by going to the Report Specification tab in Data Manager. Click New to
open the Report Designer.
3. In the Report Designer, complete information on each of the 3 tabs as needed. An example is given below.
Note that on the Data Selection tab, The Channel Definitions should all be set to a value of 1.0.
4. Save the report format. In the example above, we saved it as “Interval”.
5. Go to the Meter Image Files tab on the left side of the screen. Select two or more (up to 75 files total)
Meter Image Files. Note that each Meter Image File must contain Load Profile Data containing Energy
Values and not Pulses.
Each Meter Image File must contain Load Profile Data containing Energy Values and not
Pulse Values.
6. Under the Data Operations menu on the left side of the screen, click Totalize Files.

User's Manual 173


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

7. Since the totalization feature is an optional add-on to PC-PRO+ Advanced, you have a 120 day trial period
to test out the features and benefits of totalization. The license for the totalization feature is done on a per
computer basis. Each computer will have a 120 day trial period from the time the feature is first accessed.
Once the trial period has expired, each individual computer will have to obtain a license to use the
Totalization feature. This will not affect other PC-PRO+ Advanced features.

Figure 94: PC-PRO+ Advanced Totalization Activation


8. Select "Activate Later" to start using the Totalization feature. Remember that this option will only be
available for a limited period of time.
The trial period begins once you have started using the Totalization feature; it does not begin
at the time of software installation.
9. Once the trial period has ended, you will no longer be able to use the totalization feature until the license
has been activated. Data generated during the trial period, however, will still be available.
10. Once two or more data files have been selected in the data manager and the "Totalize Files" link has been
selected, the Totalization dialog is displayed. The totalization dialog gives you the opportunity to confirm
the file selections, to preview a summary of the operation, to indicate how the contributors will be
combined, and to specify the type of output.
11. Enter in a Result file unit ID. If you would like the report to automatically be generated, click "Generate
totalization reports". If you do not need the report to be generated at this time, leave the "Generate
totalization reports" box unchecked.
12. Click OK to generate the Totalization file. This will generate an HHF file and will be listed on the MV-90
HHF Files tab in Data Manager.
13. If you wanted the report to be automatically generated, a second dialog will appear. Select the appropriate
Report Specification from the drop down box.
14. The resulting report file is a totalization of all the included MIF files. You can view it now or at a later
time by going to the Reports tab in the Data Manager.

User's Manual 174


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Activating the Totalization License


1. Contact Itron Meter Support or your Itron Account Representative if interested in activating this feature.
2. Once a purchase order has been received, select "Activate manually by entering a code". Send the results
to Itron Meter Support by selecting "Copy to Clipboard" or "Copy to Email". The email will go to Meter
Support (meter.support@itron.com). Itron Technical Support will confirm the information and will email
you back the activation code.

Figure 95: Totalization Activate Manually


3. Once you receive the activation code, enter it on this screen and click Activate.
The activation code is only valid for the one computer. Contact your Itron Account
Representative if additional codes are needed.

Please contact your Itron Account Manager or Itron Support (1-877-487-6602) if you have any additional
questions.

Totalization
Once two or more Meter Image Files have been selected in the data manager and the "Totalize Files" link has
been selected, the Totalization dialog is displayed. You have the opportunity to confirm the file selections,
preview a summary of the operation, indicate how the contributors will be combined, and to specify the type
of output needed.

The interval length is the length of the load profile interval (in minutes). It is configured in
the meter program.

User's Manual 175


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 96: Totalization Dialog

All meter data is considered to be a secondary energy value for each contributor (the only primary value is the
display value); pulse values are not used in order to maintain consistency between files. The meter data can be
classified according to the table below.
Totalization within
PC-PRO+ Advanced
Current (CT) and Voltage (VT or PT) values are different values No
Current (CT) and voltage (VT or PT) values are contained within the meter program Yes
Self Contained Meter where real voltage and current is sent to the meter Yes

The following information is used during the totalization process in order to maintain consistency as well as to
ensure that the resulting output contains meaningful data.

Calculation Options

Using the calculation options, you can combine (add) or remove (subtract) the load profile data from each
contributing file to the totalization result. This is the only column in the list that is editable. The selected
action will apply to all channels in the contributing file.

Channel Selection

The totalization process examines all of the contributing files and totalizes only those channels which are
present in all contributing data files. For example, if a single channel file is totalized with a four channel file,
the result will be a single channel combined from the first channel of each file. If two four channel files are
totalized, the resulting output will be four channels. You will then have the ability to include all channels in
their reports or restrict the output to only those channels that are needed.

In addition, you will also have the ability to label each channel through the report specifications.

Totalization Date Range

User's Manual 176


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

You will not have to enter a specific date range for totalization. The totalization process will automatically
find the intersection of all of the contributing files and totalize all of the data that is available. The totalization
dialog displays the profile start and stop time for each of the contributing file and shows the intersecting date
range as shown. You will be able to calculate demand and report on different interval lengths through the
report specifications.

DST

All contributing data files must use the same DST settings. An error message is displayed if you attempt to
totalize one file that follows DST and another file that does not follow DST but all other criteria (such as
overlapping date range and interval length) are met.

Channel Quantities

In order to ensure data integrity, all contributors to a totalized channel must represent the same quantity.
Therefore, the totalization process will compare the quantity description for each contributing channel and, if
a difference is found between any two contributing channels, an error message will be displayed and the user
will not be allowed to complete the totalization process.

Totalization Errors

All of the contributing files must have overlapping profile data and share a common interval length. When
these conditions are not met, a message will be displayed on the totalization dialog describing the problem.
The totalization dialog also shows all of the factors that are used in validating the contributing files (such as
the number of channels, the interval length, and the profile start/stop times) to help debug any data validation
issues.

Field Descriptions
Result File Unit ID

You must specify a Unit ID for the MV-90 HHF file that will be created as a result of the totalization process.
This ID will be embedded in the output file and also used in the result file name. The Unit ID is limited to 20
ASCII characters and, since the ID will be the basis for the output file name, it can only contain characters
that are allowed in a file name (for example, avoid /,<,>,*,”)

The resulting MV-90 HHF from the totalization process is indistinguishable from MV-90
files created from other means. If you wish to manage these files separately, it is suggested
that you indicate in the Result File Unit ID name that this file has been Totalized. For
example, use "TOTAL". The remaining part of the name will be .HHF.
Result File Name

The following information is given for each file:

User's Manual 177


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

• First totalized interval


• Last totalized interval
• Interval length
• Number Totalized channels
Generate totalization reports
Check this box if you would like the totalization reports to automatically be generated after the totalization
process is complete.
Contributor List
Source File - A listing of the files that will be included in the totalization process.

Unit ID - The Unit ID (if applicable) of each individual file.

Number Channels - The number of channels

Profile Start - The start of data within the source file.

Profile End - The end of data within the source file.

Action - Allows you to combine (add) or remove (subtract) the load profile data from each contributing file to
the totalization result. This is the only column in the list that is editable. The selected action will apply to all
channels in the contributing file.

MV-90 HHF Files


PC-PRO+ Advanced offers meter data reporting capabilities, including from new or existing MV-90 HHF
files. Reports can be created either one at a time or in batches immediately after the data has been uploaded
by any of the PC-PRO+ suite of products including PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro.

Figure 97: Load Profile Data (MIF or MV-90 HHF)

The MV-90 HHF file format is a device neutral file format containing up to 16 channels of load profile data.
PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro are all capable of reading and storing metering data in
MV-90 HHF files.

User's Manual 178


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Because MV-90 HHF files can be created much faster than Meter Image Files (MIFs), MV-90 HHF files are
typically used for routine interrogation and retrieval of load profile data. Meter Image Files, on the other hand,
are better suited for diagnostic reading since they contain the meter's configuration and diagnostic data in
addition to all the load profile data.

Note that not all M V-90 HHF files will contain load profile data. MV-90 HHF files can be created that
contain only register data. These files will still appear in the MV-90 HHF screen but the Profile Start and
Profile End columns will be blank.

The MV-90 HHF Files screen displays the list of all of the MV-90 HHF files found in the specified directory.
Note that this directory is user selectable to allow you to organize and manage your collection of data files as
you see fit.

Figure 98: MV-90 HHF Files Screen

The File Name, Unit ID, and Date Created fields are displayed for the MV-90 HHF files. The list of HHF
files is displayed based on the selected directory. You can browse to any directory using the HHF Data
Directory control at the top of the screen.

The check box to the left of the File Name allows the user to perform specific operations to the selected item.

MV-90 HHF file format uses an interval start time as the start time of the first interval in the
HHF file. In contrast, Meter Image File uses the end time of the first interval as the file start
time. Reports generated from these files will show the difference in the profile start times but
will contain the correct interval data.

For example using 15 minute intervals, in the period from 1:00 to 2:00, Meter Image Files
will set the start time to be at 1:15. MV-90 HHF files will set the start time to be 1:01. Both
files show the exact same data, only with different start times.

User's Manual 179


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

For more information, refer to the following topics:

• MV-90 HHF Filters (on page 180)


• HHF Filter Selection (on page 181)
• Moving MV-90 HHF files (see "Moving files" on page 122)
• Deleting MV-90 HHF files (see "Deleting files" on page 122)
• Create Report (see "Create Report for MIF Files" on page 164)

MV-90 HHF Filters


The MV-90 HHF file screen provides a means for you to filter the items shown in the list of HHF files. The
filter is based on the range of data contained in each HHF file. You can optionally set a date range and then
only files that contain data within that date range are displayed. The goal is to make it easier for the user to
select the files that they want to work with.

The date range filter is enabled by checking the Filter by start/stop date check box.

Figure 99: MV-90 HHF Files with Filter Option

When the filter option is enabled, a second check box becomes visible on the HHF screen. This check box is
labeled 'Display files partially in date range' and is used in conjunction with the date range to determine which
files to show on the display. If this option is checked, then any file that contains any data within the date
range will be displayed. If it is not checked, then the display will only show files that contain data for the
entire date range.

User's Manual 180


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The five month calendar that is displayed allows you to manually select the filter range by clicking on the
intended start and stop dates. All of the dates in between the start and stop dates will be shaded to provide a
visual indication of the range selected. At the same time, the list of files will be refreshed and any files that do
not contain data within the specified range will be hidden.

The filter date range is selected by clicking on any of the displayed dates. The range can be changed simply by
clicking on a new date. If the new date is either before or after the current date range, the range will be
extended to include the new date. If the new date falls within the date range, then a dialog is displayed to
specify how the date range should be adjusted.

HHF Filter Selection


Use this dialog to select a specified data range for viewing HHF files. Select the appropriate date range and
click OK. To return to the main screen without making any changes, click Cancel.

Figure 100: HHF Filter Selection Dialog

Moving files
The Move option is only available when one or more files are selected. If a file is not selected, then this
option is not available. When the Move option is selected, a browse dialog is displayed for you to choose the
location. After confirmation, the file is moved to the specified location and the list is updated. If more than
one file is selected, then all files are moved to the specified location.

Use this dialog to move a file from one location to another location. Use the Browse... button to change the
Destination Directory. To return to the main menu without making any changes, click Cancel. To move the
files, click OK.

Move Files
Use this dialog to move a file from one location to another location. Use the Browse... button to change the
Destination Directory. To return to the main menu without making any changes, click Cancel. To move the
files, click OK.

User's Manual 181


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 101: Move MV-90 HHF Files Dialog

Deleting files
The Delete option is available if at least one file is selected. When you click this option, you are prompted to
confirm the deletion of the file. After the confirmation, the files are removed and the list is updated.

Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the data file(s) that were chosen for deletion.
The Delete option prompts you to confirm the deletion of the file. After confirmation, the files are removed
and the list is updated.

Click Cancel to return to the main screen without making any changes. Click OK to delete the selected files.

Delete MV-90 HHF


Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the MV-90 HHF files that were chosen for
deletion.

The Delete option will prompt you to confirm the deletion of the file. After confirmation, the files are
removed and the list is updated.

Click Cancel to return to the main screen without making any changes. Click OK to delete the selected MV-
90 HHF files.

Once deleted, MV-90 HHF files cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is
highly recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System
Manager (Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

User's Manual 182


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 102: Confirm Delete MV-90 HHF Files Dialog

Create Report for MV-90 HHF Files


The Create Report option is only available when one or more files are selected. The Create Report dialog
contains the options needed to generate a report.

The Report Specification drop down lists all of the saved report specifications.

The Report Contents section contains the list of options for setting up the duration of the data to use for the
report. Options include All Data in File or Custom Date Selection. If Custom Date Selection option is
selected, the Report Start Date and the Report End Date date/time calendar controls are enabled to allow you
to choose the date and an hour. The Start Date must be before the End Date.

The Save Options section contains the options for saving a hard copy of the report. Select one of the
following options:
Save Option Reason for Using
Microsoft® Excel® Useful for manipulating data or performing calculations.
HTML Useful for posting information on websites or in e-mails.
Adobe® PDF A user-friendly report format that is easily sent to other users. This format cannot be manually edited.
Text A text-only report format. No graphics can be used.
XML Useful for programmatically using data.

If the data you will be generating is large (for example multiple intervals or channels), you
may see undesirable formatting in the .txt format. The Adobe PDF and Microsoft Excel
outputs are better suited for larger amounts of data.

When one or more of these options are selected, the Directory and Browse buttons become enabled. These
controls allow the user to choose the file location of the report. The path selected here will be the path used in
the Data Manager reports view.

User's Manual 183


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

The Print Report option can be used to print the reports that will be generated. This feature allows batch
printing of multiple selected data files using the settings selected in this dialog. You can choose this in
conjunction with the Save Options.

The OK button is only enabled if the Print Report or one of the Save Options is selected. It allows a report to
be printed and/or saved. The saved reports will have the name of the MIF plus the name of the Report
Specification file. Saved reports will not be overwritten if they already exist. A number will be appended to
the report's name to allow multiple reports being created. You will then be able to see the newly created
reports in the Reports view of the Data Manager.

Figure 103: Create Report Dialog

Reports
PC-PRO+ Advanced offers meter data reporting capabilities. Reports can be generated from either new or
existing meter image files (MIFs), MV-90 HHF files, and EDL files (CENTRON II C12.19 meter only).
Reports can be created either one at a time or in batches immediately after the data has been uploaded by any
of the PC-PRO+ suite of products including PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro (MIF file
creation in a future release).

Once you have established a Report Specification (or template) and has the MIF, MV-90 file, or EDL file the
user can now run the report.

User's Manual 184


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 104: Creating Report Files

Users can select both the content and the template of their reports. Reports can contain any combination of
the following values:

• Total consumption
• Minimum, Maximum, Average Demands (Block or rolling)
• Peaks and Coincident values
• Time of Use Analysis
• Time series graph
• Raw interval data
• Interval statuses
The Report screen displays the list of report files created and saved by the user.

User's Manual 185


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 105: Reports Screen

The Report File, Format, Unit ID, Source, and Date Created is displayed for the files. The user can sort on any
of these columns.

There are report file options available to help manage report specification files through the Data Manager.
They are displayed in the upper left of the Data Manager.

The check box to the left of the Schedule Name allows the user to perform specific operations to the selected
item. For more information, refer to the following topics:

• Opening a Report (on page 186)


• Moving Reports (on page 187)
• Deleting Reports (on page 188)
• Sending an E-mail (on page 189)

Opening a Report
Once a report has been run, a user can open an existing report directly from the Data Manager.

To Open an Existing Report

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Reports tab on the left side of the screen.
User's Manual 186
Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

3. Using the check box, select the reports that need to be opened. Note that you may need to use the
Browse... button to find the appropriate directory.
4. Under Report Options on the left side of the screen, click Open.
5. In addition, a user can click on the hyperlink name of the report to open up the results.

Moving Reports
The Move Report option is only available when one or more files are selected. If a file is not selected, then
this option will not be available. When the Move Report option is selected, a browse dialog will be displayed
for you to choose the location. After confirmation, the file will be moved to the specified location and the list
is updated. If more than one file is selected, all files will be moved to the specified location.

Moving a Report
Once a report has been run, a user can move the report results directly from the Data Manager.

Figure 106: Move Files Dialog

To Move Existing Report Results

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Reports tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Using the check box, select the reports that need to be moved. Note that you may need to use the
Browse... button to find the appropriate directory.
4. Under Report Options on the left side of the screen, click Move.

User's Manual 187


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

5. The Move Dialog Files Dialog will open. The Current Directory indicates where the file is currently
located. The Destination Directory is the new location of the file. Use the Browse... button to change this
location.
6. Click OK to move the results. Click Cancel to return to the main screen without making any changes.

Deleting Reports
The Delete Report option is available if at least one report is selected. When you click this option, a
confirmation dialog will appear. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the Report. After the
confirmation, the reports are removed and the list is updated.

To Delete a Report

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Reports tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Select one or more of the Reports by using the check box. Click Delete on the on the Schedules Options
menu on the left hand side. Note that you may need to use the Browse... button to locate the correct
report.
The Confirm Deletion Dialog will open. Click OK. To return to the main screen without making any changes,
click Cancel.

Deleting a Report
Based on the selections on the previous screen, this dialog shows the report files that were chosen for deletion.

The Delete option will prompt you to confirm the deletion of the file. After confirmation, the files are
removed and the list is updated.

Click Cancel to return to the main screen without making any changes. Click OK to delete the selected report
HHF files.

Once deleted, reports cannot be recovered. To prevent accidental deletion, it is highly


recommended that you disable program deletion capabilities within the System Manager
(Security | Features) for all users except the system administrator.

User's Manual 188


Proprietary and Confidential
Data Manager

Figure 107: Confirm Report Deletions Dialog

Sending an E-mail
Once a report has been run, a user can send an e-mail directly from the Data Manager with the report results
attached.

To send an E-mail with Report Results

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the Reports tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Using the check box, select the reports that need to be e-mailed. Note that you may need to use the
Browse... button to find the appropriate directory.
4. Under Report Options on the left side of the screen, click Send.
5. This will automatically open up an e-mail with the results attached.

User's Manual 189


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 5

Meter Configuration Editor

The Meter Configuration Editor is an application included in the PC-PRO+ Advanced program group to
manage meter programs for the CENTRON II C12.19 meter.

To open the Meter Configuration Editor program, select CENTRON II C12.19 when opening Data Manager,
then choose either New or Open from the list of Program Options in the Meter Programs window.

Configuration Overview
The Configuration Overview window displays all configuration data in the meter program. To modify the
meter program, click any of the items or select from the list of Configuration Options on the left side of the
window.

Time
Internally the meter stores values using GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). Externally it applies a local time
offset for all time-keeping functions.

Time Zone
Select the time zone in which the meters are installed.
Enable Daylight Saving Time
Check the box to apply DST. If your location does not use Daylight Saving Time, uncheck the box.

TOU
Time of Use is a feature that allows meters to change rates depending on the time of day, day of the week, and
season of the year.

User's Manual 190


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

TOU Schedule Selection


Select an existing TOU schedule for the CENTRON II C12.19 meter from the drop-down list or click the New
link to go to the TOU Calendar Editor application and create a new TOU schedule.

When you select an existing TOU schedule its information is imported into the current meter
configuration. When you save a meter configuration, the selected TOU schedule is imported
again, so if there have been any changes they are picked up.

When you modify a TOU schedule, the changes are not brought into a meter configuration
until you open the meter configuration file and save.
Season Change Option
If you select a TOU schedule, you must select the relationship between demand resets and season changes.

Season change without demand reset. there is no relationship between the two; demand resets occur based
on the billing schedule.

Demand reset at season change. If the TOU change contains season changes, the meter performs a demand
reset at the same time. If the schedule does not include season changes, no demand reset is performed (unless
it was set up through the billing schedule).

Delay season change until demand reset. Use the billing schedule to determine when demand resets occur;
if the TOU schedule contains a season change, it is delayed until the demand reset occurs.

Energy Quantities and Demand Quantities


Use this window to set the types of energy quantities the meter will track. The CENTRON II C12.19
singlephase meter can track a maximum of seven energy quantities and twelve demand quantities. The
polyphase meter can track a maximum of eight energy quantities and twelve demand quantities.

User's Manual 191


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Several rules govern the possible energy selections.

• For all Net quantities, the delivered and received quantities are automatically selected.
• Hardware 3.0 singlephase meters (hardware platform is selected at time of order and appears on the
meter's nameplate):
• Watt hour and VAh arith quantities can always be selected.
• Hardware 3.1 singlephase meters:
• Watt hour quantities can always be selected.
• Only one of the following energy types can be selected: VAh Arith, VAh Vectorial, VAh lag, or
VARh.
• The energy type selected must match what was specified at the time the meter was ordered. For
example, if the meter was ordered as VA Vectorial, this is the energy you must select.
• Hardware 3.1 polyphase meters:
• The possible energy combinations are not fundamentally restricted.
• The window applies limitations per meter capability, preventing incorrect configurations.

Demand Quantities
The values that are available in each of the 12 fields are determined by the selections you made on the Energy
Quantities tab.

Peak Demands: the number of demand peaks for the corresponding energy within a demand interval. Each
peak uses one of the 12 available demand quantities.

User's Manual 192


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Coincident Demands: a coincident demand allows you to capture the concurrent demand of a quantity when
the maximum demand of a different quantity occurred. For example, W net @ max W d provides the watt net
demand at the same time as watt delivered peak occurred.

Quantity. Displays selections from Energy Quantities tab. Click one to select associated demands.

Demand Selection.

• Number of Peaks. If you want to track demand, select the number of demand peaks per interval for the
energy quantity selected.
Coincident demand options appear when you select a non-zero Number of Peaks. Select the check boxes of
the demands you want captured. Although twelve rows display, only eight can be coincident demands.

Selected Demands. Lists the demands and coincident demands you have selected.

Refer to the CENTRON II C12.19 Technical Reference Guide for additional information.

Register Operations
Use this window to define tasks and parameters that the register will perform.

User's Manual 193


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

General
Demand Interval Length (minutes)
Select the number of minutes the meter should accumulate data before calculating demand.

Note: This field interacts with the Switch Open Time field in the Service Limiting tab. The demand interval
length must be equal to or less than the switch open time. If you select a larger value in this field, an Invalid
Demand Interval message displays. Click Yes to have the system reset the switch open time automatically. If
you click No, the demand interval length returns to its previous value.
Number of Subintervals
Select the number of subintervals that each interval should be broken into. Subintervals are the smaller blocks
of time that are used in rolling demand calculations.
Cold Load Pickup Time (minutes)
Enter the number of minutes that must elapse when a recognized power outage occurs before a new demand
interval calculation is started. During Cold Load Pickup Time, only energy measurement occurs. When the
Cold Load Pickup Time expires, demand calculation resumes. The range is 0 to 255 minutes. Setting this
value to zero will cause demand interval calculation to begin immediately after any recognized power outage.

User's Manual 194


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Outage Recognition Time (seconds)


Enter the minimum number of seconds that a power outage must last to trigger a Cold Load Pickup Time. An
outage less than the number of seconds entered will not trigger a Cold Load Pickup Time and demand
intervals will continue uninterrupted. The range is zero to 7200 seconds. Setting this value to zero will cause
Cold Load Pickup Time to be activated after any power outage
Reverse Power Flow Threshold: Wh
Reverse power is tested every second and an accumulator for it is maintained. If power is delivered during the
second, then the accumulator is cleared. If power is received during the second, then the accumulator is
incremented. If the accumulator reaches the number of watt hours you select in this field, then an event is
triggered.
Clock Synchronization
The device's real-time clock provides a time base for demand interval and real-time calculations. For locations
with good system frequency, the meter clock should be synchronized to the line frequency. For sites with
system frequency problems, you can program the device to synchronize the clock to the meter's internal
crystal oscillator. Clock synchronization is programmed into the device when it is initialized. Refer to the
CENTRON II C12.19 Technical Reference Guide for more information.

• Internal Crystal - Select this option to synchronize the meter's real-time clock to its own crystal oscillator.
A crystal-controlled secondary time base is accurate to + or - 0.003 % (at 25 degrees C). The accuracy of
the time is impacted by the ambient temperature. Over the entire temperature range the crystal is accurate
to + or - 0.02 %.
• Line Sync - Select this option to synchronize the meter's real-time clock to the frequency of the incoming
power line.

Demand Thresholds
Use these fields to set thresholds to monitor the values in a maximum of four demand registers. When the
threshold for the quantity is exceeded, an alarm is generated. Thresholds are triggered from secondary values.
The demand register continues to accumulate even if the demand threshold is exceeded.

For the Quantity fields, select up to four different quantities that will generate alarms if the threshold is
exceeded.

For the Value fields, enter the threshold value in units (a secondary value). For example, for a threshold of 5
kW, enter 5000. The default threshold value is 1.00.

The valid range for Power Factor (PF) is 0.0 – 1.0.

The valid range for all others is 1.0 – 500,000.

Note: You can use the Events window to have an event triggered each time a threshold is exceeded.

User's Manual 195


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Self Read
The CENTRON II C12.19 meter can automatically read and store in memory all energy, demand, TOU,
coincident register values, date and time of peak values, instantaneous values, and the time and date of the self
read. Use the Self Read Configuration fields to schedule self reads.
Configuration
Select one of the following options:

None Scheduled. The device performs no user-scheduled self reads.

Read Daily. To perform a self read each day at a specified time, select this option and then for Self Read
Frequency enter the hour and minute of the self read.

Read n days after a demand reset. Performs a self read a designated number of days following each
demand reset. For the n value, use the Self Read Day Value field and select the number of days.

Read on nth day of month. The device performs a self read once a month at midnight on the specified day of
the month. Select 1 for the first of each month, and so forth.

Read n days before the end of the month. The device performs a self read the number of days you specify
before the end of each month.
Configured Time
Select the time at which the device should perform a self read.
Day Value
If you selected any of the schedule options with "n," enter the number the system should use for "n."
Demand Reset
Check the box to have the meter reset demand after performing a self read.

Billing Schedule
Configuration
Select one of the following options:

None Scheduled. The device performs no user-scheduled demand resets.

Demand reset n days after the last demand reset. Performs a demand reset a designated number of days
following each demand reset. For the n value, use the Billing Schedule Frequency (n) field and select up to
255 days.

Demand reset on the nth day of the month. The device performs a demand reset once a month on the date
you specify in the Billing Schedule Frequency (n) field.

Demand reset n days before the end of the month. The device performs a demand reset once a month the
number of days you specify before the end of each month.
User's Manual 196
Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Configured Time
Select the time at which the demand reset should occur.
Frequency
If you selected any of the schedule options with "n," enter the number the system should use for "n."

Test Mode
Interval Length (minutes)
When the meter is in test mode, you can choose a different interval length than in normal or alternate mode.
Select the number of minutes the meter should accumulate data when in test mode before calculating demand.
Number of Subintervals
Select the number of subintervals that each test mode interval should be broken into. Subintervals are the
smaller blocks of time that are used in rolling demand calculations.

Device Multipliers
Measurement values in the meter are stored as Secondary values. Use this window to define the multipliers
the meter should use when displaying Primary values.

CT Ratio
Current Transformer. Select the appropriate value from the list.
VT Ratio
Voltage Transformer. Select the appropriate value from the list.

User's Manual 197


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Register Multiplier
Enter a custom value from .00001 to 99.99999.
Register Fullscale (kW)
The register fullscale value is a kW threshold value that defines the maximum rated demand for a particular
meter site. The register fullscale value monitors secondary kW delivered (maximum) only (no multiplier
applied). Enter the secondary kilowatt demand value that defines the maximum rated demand for this meter
site. Valid entries are 1.000 to 460.800 kW in increments of 0.001.

If the register fullscale value is exceeded, the meter records a non-fatal Register Fullscale Exceeded Error (Err
6) that can be displayed and logged in the event log. If a Register Fullscale Exceeded error occurs, the meter
continues to measure and function properly in later intervals. kW is still accumulated while the Register
Fullscale Exceeded condition is active.

For additional information, refer to the CENTRON II C12.19 Technical Reference Guide.

Note: The value in this field is ignored if Wh d is not selected on the Energy Quantities tab in the Quantities
dialog.

Load Profile
Use this window to configure load profile channels, a maximum of seven for singlephase or eight for
polyphase. 144 KB of meter memory are used for load profile data.

is

Refer to the chart to find the number of days of load profile data the meter can store.

General
Interval Length (minutes)
Data is recorded in mass memory on a block interval basis. The profile interval length is the same for all
channels and is independent of the interval length for displayed demand quantities. Click the drop-down list
and select the interval length. The default is 15 minutes.

User's Manual 198


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Outage Length (seconds)


The number of seconds that a power outage must last before load profile intervals are flagged with a power
outage status. The power outage length must not exceed the programmed interval length. Valid entries are 0
through 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.

Channels
Description
Select an energy register for up to seven channels (up to eight for polyphase). The quantities available for
selection are determined by the energy registers selected in the Quantities dialog.
Pulse Weight
The pulse weight represents the amount of energy needed to generate one load profile pulse. Load Profile
pulse outputs are secondary readings. For example, a watt-hour pulse constant of 1.8 corresponds to 1.8 watt-
hours/pulse of load seen by the meter.

Valid pulse weights are 0.01 to 650.00 unit-hours per pulse in 0.01 increments. The default is 1.000.

The list of allowed pulse weights is configured in the System Manager application in the Default Values |
Pulse Weight Values.
Estimated Number of Days Stored
The number displayed changes based on the number of channels selected and the interval length.

Bit Resolution

The load profile operates with 16-bit data resolution. Equivalent pulse count
resolution is as follows:

Bits Pulse Counts

16 65,535

15 1 32,767

1 When a Net quantity (such as Net Wh) is chosen as a load profile channel, all
load profile channels have 15-bit data resolution because one of the bits must be
used to indicate if the value is positive or negative.

User's Manual 199


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Voltage Monitoring
The CENTRON II C12.19 meter can be configured to store the Volt hour data for average voltage
measurement. Voltage Monitoring supports measurement of average voltage data (line-to-line, or line-to-
neutral) up to three phases. The interval data for each phase is compared with the configured thresholds at
each EOI. Events are recorded for the first interval when a threshold is exceeded, when it returns to normal,
and when it is exceeded again. To minimize recording excessive events, only one event is recorded when
multiple successive intervals exceed thresholds.

Voltage Monitoring also supports the monitoring of instantaneous voltages during each interval. Monitoring
of instantaneous voltages (VRMS) tracks minimum and maximum voltages during each interval. At each EOI,
they are compared with the configured thresholds.

Operation
VRMS. The voltage monitoring configuration sets the VRMS min and max thresholds. Each interval the meter
records the minimum and maximum RMS voltages in each phase. At end of interval, it checks if the minimum
or maximum voltage values during the interval exceed the VRMS thresholds. If so, a corresponding event is
recorded and a bit is set in the interval status. An event is also recorded when the minimum or maximum
voltage returns to normal range.

VH. Voltage monitoring also checks if the accumulation value during the interval is below the VH low voltage
threshold or above the VH high voltage threshold. If either condition exists, a corresponding event is
recorded, but no bit is set in the interval status. An event is also recorded when VH returns to normal range.

All threshold percentages are relative to nominal voltage, which represents an accepted approximation of
service voltage; typical values are 120, 240, 277, and 480 volts.

User's Manual 200


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Enable Voltage Monitoring


Check the box to enable the remaining fields and set up voltage monitoring.
Interval Length
Select the number of minutes of a voltage monitoring interval.
Volt-Hour Thresholds (Low and High)
Select percentage values (in terms of nominal voltage) for the low and high thresholds. Low range = 80 - 100.
High range = 100 - 120.
VRMS Thresholds (Low and High)
Select percentage values (in terms of nominal voltage) for the low and high thresholds. Low range = 80 - 100.
High range = 100 - 120.
VRMS Alarm Minimum Occurrence
Select the number of seconds the threshold must be exceeded before an event is logged and the interval status
reflects the incident.

User Data
Use this window to configure up to three custom items on the display. After setting them up here, use the
Meter Display window to select them.

User's Manual 201


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

User Data 1 - 3
Informational data display item. Up to nine characters. Displayable characters are 0-9, A-Z except K, M, V,
W, X, Z. Hyphen and underscore characters also allowed.
Program ID
Choose a number to identify this meter program. Range is 0 - 65,535, default is 0. There is no internal
mechanism to prevent two programs from having the same ID so it is the responsibility of users to manage
this.

Meter Display
Use this part of the Meter Configuration Editor to configure the meter's LCD display. Refer to the Technical
Reference Guide for details about the display, such as non-displayable characters, the display layout, and
indicators.

Display Items
This tab is used to select the information that will appear on the meter's LCD for Normal, Alternate, and Test
modes. A maximum of 80 display items can be configured among all three modes.

User's Manual 202


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Normal Display Mode


The Normal Display mode is the default display when the meter is energized and when the meter is in normal
operating mode.

Alternate Display Mode


The Alternate Display mode is functionally identical to the normal mode. The meter itself still operates under
normal measurement, but the display sequence can be configured to show a different set of displayable items
from those in the Normal Display mode.

Test Display Mode


Test mode provides a temporary space for performing tests on the meter; the accumulated energies during test
mode are cleared upon return to normal mode. Billing register data is not affected by test mode.

Adding and Removing Display Items


Start in the right pane by clicking to select the header for Normal, Alternate, or Test Mode Display Items. In
the left pane, double-click a display item to make it appear under the selected mode. Alternately, you can use
the double-arrow button to move the display item to the right pane. Right-click functionality is available to
streamline these steps.

To move an item up or down in the list, select it then use the up and down arrow buttons.

User's Manual 203


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

To remove an item from a display mode, select it then click the delete button.

The Edit Display Item function allows you to manipulate the way the item shows up in the display.

ID
Enter up to three characters to represent the selected item; the meter displays this ID at the same time it
displays the item's value. Displayable characters are: 0-9, A-Z except K, M, V, W, X, Z. Hyphen and
underscore characters also allowed.
Decimals
Select up to three digits to display behind the decimal.
Units
Select the appropriate unit for the selected register item. For non-register items, the field defaults to None.
Type
For each item, select the format to display on the meter.
Display Mode
If the selected item is related to energies or demands, you can display its value in primary mode (with all
multipliers applied).

Display Options
Use this tab to configure the display's behavior.

User's Manual 204


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Field Descriptions
Display Scroll On Time (seconds)
Select the number of seconds for each item to display before the meter switches to the next item.
Alternate Display Time Out (minutes)
Select the number of minutes for the display to remain in Alternate mode before switching back to Normal
mode (unless manually changed). Enter 0 (zero) to disable Alternate Mode.
Enable EOI
Select the check box to cause "EOI" to display briefly at the end of each interval.
Enable Watt Load Indicator
Select the check box to enable the watt disk indicator.
Enable Remote Disconnect Messages
Select the check box to display messages about changing states of the remote disconnect.
Displayable Errors
Ignore. The meter's display does not show the error.

Scroll. The non-fatal error appears periodically along with the other display items.

Lock. The meter's display shows only the non-fatal error.

User's Manual 205


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Events
An event is the occurrence of a condition the meter has been programmed to monitor. The Events tab lets you
select the events to be recorded. When a configured event occurs, the event, date, and time are stored in the
Event History Log.

Use the Events tab to select the events you want to monitor and log. Move the events from the left pane to the
right pane to add them. The >> and << buttons move all events regardless of what is selected. The > and <
buttons move only the selected events. Use the Shift and Control keys to select multiple events.

You can see meter events in Field-Pro while you are logged onto the meter, or you can see them in the EDL
file using Data Manager.

For more information about events, refer to the CENTRON II C12.19 Meter Technical Reference Guide.

Communications
Lockout: login attempts
Enter the number of times the meter will permit a user to try to log in using the optical port before locking out
further attempts. If you select 0, the system allows an infinite number of attempts, disabling this security
feature.
Lockout: lockout minutes
Enter the number of minutes the meter will deny login by optical port after the user fails to login correctly. If
you select 0, the system permits another set of login attempts immediately, even if the user has exceeded the
number of tries set in the login attempts field. This effectively disables this security feature.

User's Manual 206


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Entering 0 in either of these fields disables the functionality of the other field. To use this
security feature, you must enter positive (non-zero) numbers in both fields.

SiteScan
The CENTRON II C12.19 polyphase meter can perform site and service checks based on the thresholds and
parameters configured for each diagnostic. The SiteScan Diagnostics feature allows field technicians to
immediately obtain crucial meter site information without using external equipment or disturbing a sealed
installation. You can view diagnostics while communicating with a meter through PC-PRO+ Advanced or by
viewing the meter’s display.

Use the SiteScan Configuration component to define which diagnostics the meter will monitor, count, and
display. Diagnostic counters store the number of occurrences of each configured diagnostic condition.

The CENTRON II C12.19 polyphase meter checks every five seconds for configured diagnostics. A
diagnostic condition must exist for 15 seconds (3 checks) to be counted as a diagnostic event and displayed, if
configured for display. The diagnostic condition must be clear for 10 seconds (2 checks) before the diagnostic
alert is cleared and removed from the meter display.

General Settings
Service Type. Select the service type (see "SiteScan Service Type" on page 209) or select Auto Service Sense
to have the meter automatically detect the service type.

Sensing Delay(s). Enter the number of seconds the meter should delay (see "SiteScan Service Sensing
Delay" on page 210) before sensing the service type or starting diagnostics.

User's Manual 207


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Nominal Voltage (V). Enter the number you want to use to represent the nominal voltage value. The voltage
value is used throughout the program to calculate deviations from normal voltage. Minimum 25 volts,
maximum 500 volts.

Diagnostics Enabled. Select the corresponding check boxes for the Diagnostics that should be active.

Snapshots Triggered. To trigger a SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot for each diagnostic event, check this box.
The meter can store a maximum of eight SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshots.

Diagnostic 1 (Cross-Phase, Polarity, Energy Flow Error)


Verifies that all meter elements are sensing and receiving the correct voltage and current angles for each phase
of a specific polyphase electric service.

Current Tolerance (+/- degrees). Enter the current lead and lag tolerance in degrees. Valid entries are 90.0 to
120.0 degrees.

Diagnostic 2 (Phase Voltage Deviation Error)


Verifies that each individual phase maintains an acceptable voltage level with respect to the other phases.
Problems such as shorted potential transformer windings, incorrect phase voltage, and loss of phase potential,
among others, may be indicated.

Voltage Deviation Tolerance (%). To set this event, enter the percent tolerance for phase voltage deviation.
Any deviation greater than the value entered will be recorded for Diagnostic 2. Valid entries are 1.00 to
25.00%.

Diagnostic 3 (Inactive Phase Current Error)


Verifies that each individual phase maintains an acceptable current level and may indicate problems such as
current diversion and open or shorted circuits, among others.

Tolerance for Inactive Phase Current (A). Enter the minimum amperage (secondary value) that will trigger
an inactive phase current error. Any value less than the value entered will be recorded for Diagnostic 3. Valid
entries are from 0.0005 amps to 200.00 amps, in increments of 0.0001 amps up to the maximum class current
based on the meter rating, for example 20 A for a class 20 meter. Class current is defined for a meter when it
is calibrated in the factory; class current is not entered in the program file.

Diagnostic 4 (Phase Angle Displacement Error)


Allows the user to define an acceptable angle between the phase voltage and current. This diagnostic may
indicate problems such as poor load power factor conditions, poor system conditions, or malfunctioning
system equipment.

Note: Diagnostic 1 must be enabled before you can enable Diagnostic 4.

Tolerance for Displacement (degrees). Enter the tolerance for the maximum phase angle displacement in
degrees. Valid entries are from 1.0 to 90.0 degrees.

User's Manual 208


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Current Threshold (% of class current). Enter the low current threshold as a percentage of class current.
This is the minimum percent of class current that must be present at the meter before Diagnostic 4 will
indicate a phase angle displacement. Valid entries are 0.5 % to 5.0 % in increments of 0.1 %. The default is
0.5%.

For example, if class current is 200 Amps and the Current Threshold is .5 %, at least 1 Amp (200 Amps x .5
%) must be present before Diagnostic 4 will trigger a phase angle displacement.

Class current is defined for a meter when it is calibrated in the factory; class current is not entered in the
program file.

SiteScan Service Type


Select the service type or select Auto Service Sense to have the meter automatically detect the service type.
The service type is used by the meter for SiteScan Diagnostics and for VA arithmetic calculations. The
Service Type options are as follows:

• Auto Service Sense–This is the default. If you select auto service sense, the following occurs:
• The meter will scan to determine the service condition when power is applied after an outage, when the
meter is initialized, or when SiteScan Diagnostics are reconfigured.
• The service type that was detected by the auto service sense scan is communicated to the metrology
firmware.
• SiteScan Diagnostics are run based on the service type detected by the auto service sense scan.
Note: If the auto service sense scan cannot detect the service condition the following occurs:

• For meters with firmware version 3.x and higher, a non-fatal error (Err 9, SiteScan) is indicated if this
non-fatal error is configured.
• For meters with firmware version 2.x and earlier, SiteScan Diagnostic 1 is triggered if this diagnostic is
configured.
Select specific service type–This options is available for meters with firmware version 3.x or higher. If you
select a specific service type (an override service type), the following occurs:

• The auto service sensing feature of the meter is disabled.


• The service type that you select is communicated to the metrology firmware.
• SiteScan Diagnostics are run based on the service type selected
If you select a specific service type, note the following:

• If the service type selected is not valid for the meter form, the meter initialization will fail.
• If the wrong service type is selected, the meter will report errors for configured SiteScan Diagnostics.
• If the wrong service type is selected, VA arithmetic calculations may be incorrect.
• If a 9S in 6S service type is incorrectly selected for a 9S meter installed in a true 9S service, the meter will
incorrectly measure Wh and Varh.

User's Manual 209


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

SiteScan Service Sensing Delay


Enter the service sense delay. The range is 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. This delay determines
the following:

• For auto service sense meters, the number of seconds the meter will wait after power is applied before the
meter scans to detect the service condition after initialization and after SiteScan Diagnostics are
reconfigured.
• For all meters (auto service sense and specific override service type selected on this dialog), the delay
before SiteScan diagnostics begin.
During the delay before the service sense scan the following occurs:

• Metering will continue during the delay and the following default meter service types will be used to
determine calibration data:
• 3-element: 3-element 4-wire WYE
• 2.5 element: 2.5 element 4-wire WYE
• 2-element: 2-element network
• 1-element form 3: 1-element 2-wire
• 1-element: 1-element 3-wire
During the delay before the service sense scan, the following meter forms will measure VA arithmetic
calculation correctly:

• 9S and 16S in 4-wire WYE service


• 46S in a 4-wire WYE service
• 45S in a network service
• 2S in a single phase service
During the delay, all other form and service combinations will calculate VA using the following default
equation: VA = (Va x Ia) + (Vb x Ib) + (Vc x Ic)

Watt and Var calculations will be correct during the delay except for the following meter forms:

• A form 5S meter installed in a 4-wire delta service


• A 9S meter installed in a 46S service

Service Switch and Service Limiting


Meters equipped with a service switch can implement service limiting, a feature that limits the amount of
demand during an interval. If the consumer exceeds the limit, the service switch opens, interrupting power for
a configurable length of time. The switch then closes and power resumes. Use this window to set up the
details of service limiting and the failsafe duration.

User's Manual 210


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Service Switch
Failsafe Duration (minutes)

Enter the length of the service limiting failsafe duration in minutes; maximum 65,535 (approximately 45
days). Failsafe prevents the occurrence of service limiting disconnects for a selected period of time following
firmware downloads or meter reconfigures.
Retry Attempts

If the service switch does not open or close correctly, this is the maximum number of times it will try. Upon
reaching this maximum, the switch will not attempt to open or close again during this Max Disconnect Period.
Max Disconnect Period (minutes)

Max Disconnect Period works with the Max Disconnects field and Retry Attempts field to define a period of
time during which those limits apply. Enter a value up to 1439 minutes (~ 24 hours) to define this period.
Max Disconnects in Max Disconnect Period

Enter a value from 0 to 255 to limit the maximum number of disconnects that can occur during the Max
Disconnect Period.
Switch Open Time (minutes)

Enter the number of minutes that the switch should remain open once the consumer has surpassed the demand
quantity. Minimum value is one demand subinterval, maximum 1439 minutes (~24 hours).

Note: This field interacts with the Demand Interval Length field in the Register Operations window. The
switch open time must be equal to or greater than the demand interval length. If you enter a smaller value in
this field, it automatically changes to the same value as the demand interval length.
Randomization Period before Switch Closes (minutes)

This value allows you to avoid the surge in load that would occur from a large number of service switches
closing at the same time. Enter a number of minutes to define the range of time during which the switches will
close. The meter adds a random number of seconds (within that range of time) to the switch open time.

User's Manual 211


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

User Intervention Required after Disconnect

Select the check box to require that the consumer press the User Intervention Button before power can
resume. Uncheck the box to allow the service switch to close automatically at the end of the service limiting
disconnect period.
Enable Load Side Voltage Delay

Select the check box to enable the Load Side Voltage Delay field. If unchecked, the meter checks for load side
voltage once every minute.

When the command to connect or disconnect the switch is sent, the meter checks for load
side voltage immediately before and after the switch state changes. The delay that is
controlled with these two fields applies only during normal operation mode (when the service
switch is not receiving commands).
Load Side Voltage Delay (minutes)

If Load Side Voltage Delay is enabled, enter the number of minutes the meter should wait in between
checking for the presence of load side voltage. Range 15 minutes to 10080 (approximately 7 days).
Service Limiting Thresholds
Normal, Critical, and Emergency Tier Quantity

The values that are available in these three drop-down lists are determined by the demand quantities that are
set up in the Demand Quantities tab. At each level, choose the quantity to be measured.
Normal, Critical, and Emergency Tier Value

When demand reaches this value during an interval, the service switch opens. Set a the largest value for
Normal, smaller for Critical, and smallest for Emergency. The head-end system tells the meter whether to use
Normal, Critical, or Emergency Tier (unless the tier was set manually in Field-Pro).

LED
CENTRON II C12.19 polyphase meters have an LED (Light Emitting Diode) exposed at the top of the outer
cover. Use this window to determine the rate at which the LED pulses.

User's Manual 212


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Use the LED (light-emitting diode) window to select the LED quantity and the Kh value that will activate the
LED. The CENTRON II C12.19 polyphase meter LED is located in the 12 o’clock position on the meter outer
cover. The LED can be programmed to pulse for energy values supported by the meter. Quantities must first
be selected in the Energy Quantities tab. The LED can be programmed for the following values:

• Wh delivered
• Wh received
• Wh uni-directional (Wh delivered & Wh received)
• VARh delivered
• VARh received
• VAh delivered
• VAh received
The Kh value or energy per pulse is also programmable. When configured for uni-directional quantities, the
LED pulses for both delivered and received quantities. If a uni-directional quantity is assigned to the LED,
then the Load Indicator will scroll in delivered and received directions, depending on the power flow
direction. The load indicator is configured in the Display Options tab.

Field Descriptions
Normal Mode Operation Quantity
Select the quantity that should affect the LED while in normal or alternate mode.

User's Manual 213


Proprietary and Confidential
Meter Configuration Editor

Test Mode Operation Quantity


Select the quantity that should affect the LED while in test mode.
Pulse Weight fields
Select the pulse weight (Kh value) you would like to be applied to each meter form. Kh values are in units of
energy per pulse. Ranges are from 0.1 to 1638.0.

User's Manual 214


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 6

Creating and Using Program Files

The PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor application is the user-interface for configuring metering device
program files, programming meters, and viewing data for supported meter device types.

To begin using PC-PRO+ Advanced, define all default system information using the options available on the
Options menu. Once you have defined the system and other options, you can use the New option on the File
menu to start a new program file.

The program components vary for each type of metering device. When you start a new program file, the
Program menu and the Program Components list display the components available for that device type. To
create a program file, start with the first component in the list and configure each component sequentially.

This section describes how to use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor menu options to create and use
program files. It explains common tasks and provides suggestions for using the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.

Program Files are created and maintained using the Program Editor application in the PC-PRO+ Advanced
program group on the Windows Start menu. Use the Program Editor application to perform all the functions
described in this chapter.

Program files are based on the metering device-type. They define the standard and optional configurations for
the meter.

Before you begin creating program files, define system-wide options and default parameters
as described in Defining Settings and Defaults in the System Manager (see "Using the
System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults" on page 9).

PC-PRO+ Advanced System Overview


The PC-PRO+ Advanced system is a designed to program metering devices, upload metering data from
devices and view data, and perform basic program file and meter maintenance.

PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Group


The program group consists of applications that are installed when you install PC-PRO+ Advanced. Refer to
the PC-PRO+® Advanced Installation Guide for more information about the installation process.

To view the program group, from the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced.

Each application in the PC-PRO+ Advanced program group is described in the following table.

Icon Description

Program Editor—Use this application to create and maintain program files, program metering devices, view
meter data, perform basic device maintenance, and copy information to other applications. These functions are
discussed in this manual. For detailed information about defining program components for a specific device type,
refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced user’s manual for the device type.

User's Manual 215


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Icon Description

System Manager - The PC-PRO+ Advanced System Manager provides the functions typically performed
by a user who has Administrative security privileges. Administrative functions include defining system security
access rights for users, defining system defaults and options, defining Field-Pro settings, and creating system
replica files.
Load Replica File - Use this application to load the default system settings contained in the Replica File to
this PC-PRO+ Advanced system. Only the settings defined in the Replica File will be loaded. For more
information see Using System Replication (on page 77).
Protocol Editor for Q1000—Use this application to view, create, and edit advanced protocol configuration
files for Q1000 meters. The protocol configuration files are then written to the meter using PC-PRO+ Advanced.
For more information refer to the Protocol Editor online help and Protocol Editor User’s Manual.
TOU Calendar Editor—Use this application to view, create, and edit time-of-use schedules for devices that
support time-of-use metering. For more information refer to Using the TOU Calendar Editor (on page 234).

Schedule Editor—(Used for SENTINEL Devices). Use this application to view, create, and edit custom
billing or self read schedules for SENTINEL devices. For more information refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced
SENTINEL Device User’s Manual.
HH-Pro Synchronization—Use this application to synchronize settings in the HH-Pro application with the
System Manager HH-Pro settings. You can also synchronize using a Replica File created by the System Manager.
For more information refer to the HH-Pro User's Manual.
Display Editor—(Used for CENTRON and VECTRON meters.) Use this application to view, create, and
edit meter display schedules. For more information refer to Using the Display Editor (on page 268).
MeterKey–Use this application to upgrade the capabilities of supported meters. You can upgrade or downgrade
SENTINEL and VECTRON meters and upgrade QUANTUM Q1000 meters. For more information refer to the
MeterKey help or the MeterKey User’s Manual.

For the Q1000 meter, the SLC (System Loss Compensation) Configuration editor is now
integrated into the Program Editor as a program component for Q1000 program files.

Starting the Program Editor


The Program Editor is the main application for the PC-PRO+ Advanced System.

Use the Program Editor application to perform the following PC-PRO+ Advanced functions:

• Create, edit, import, and export device program files.


• Communicate with metering devices to perform device control functions including initializing,
reconfiguring, and resetting devices.
• Communicate with metering devices to acquire meter data such as creating MV-90 HHF files and Meter
Image Files.
• Define optical probes and site-specific transformer options.
Specific information about program components for each device type is given in the User Manual for each
device type.

User's Manual 216


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

1. To create a new program, open up the Data Manager. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs |
PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager. The system Logon dialog is displayed.

Figure 108: System Logon Dialog


2. Enter your User ID and Password and then click OK.
When you enter a valid user ID and password, the Data Manager main window is displayed. Click on the
Meter Programs option on the left side of the screen.
Notes:
• To define system settings and options, see Defining Settings and Defaults in the System Manager
(see "Using the System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults" on page 9).
• To set up your PC-PRO+ Advanced to use your PC's COM ports and modems, see Configuring COM
Ports and Modems (on page 313).
3. To create a new program file, choose File | New, or choose File | Open to open an existing program file.
Once you choose to create a new program file or open an existing one, this screen changes to reflect the
information in the program file. For a description of the parts of this screen, refer to Using the Program
Editor Main Window (on page 217).
4. Once the program has been created, save the changes by going File | Save.
5. To exit the Program Editor, go to File | Exit.
To log on to a device, you must launch the Communications Manager. From the Windows
Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Communications Manager. Once this
application is launched, go to Communications | Logon. To open a Meter Image File, you
must also be logged into the Communications Manager and then go to File | Open Meter
Image.

Using the Program Editor Main Window


When you open a program, the program components are listed on the left side of the window. When you click
on a program component, the summary information for that component appears in the right side of the
window. To display the dialog for a program component, double-click on the item in the list of components.

The Program File components for the device are listed on the left side of the Program Editor window. The
Item Summary area (right side) shows the program configuration for the item selected on the left.

The example below shows the Program Editor Main Window with a SENTINEL Program File open.

User's Manual 217


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Figure 109: Program Editor User Interface


1 - Title Bar The title bar shows the application name and the name of the
program file that is currently open.
2 - Menu Bar Click on a menu item to display a drop-down list of options.
3 - Program File If a program file is open, the program components are listed in this
Components Area area. Click on an item to display summary information for the item in
the window on the right.
4 - Meter Online Items Node If you are online with a metering device, the online item nodes are
displayed with a meter graphic.
5 - Meter Online Items Click on an online item to display summary information for the item
in the window on the right.
6 - Vertical/Horizontal Scroll Click and drag to display items.
Bars
7 - Data Summary Window Summary information for program components and meter items is
displayed in this area. If a program file is open while you are online
with a metering device, the information for the program file is listed
with the meter value.
8 - Item The name of the item
9 - Program Value The value in the program
10 - Meter Value The value in the meter
11 - Online Indicator While you are online with a metering device, the online indicator is
displayed.

When you select any item in the navigation tree on the left, the information for the item is displayed in the
Item Summary Area on the right side of the window.

User's Manual 218


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Supported Meter Device Types


The PC-PRO+ Advanced system provides program file creation, programming meters, and other device
control operations as shown in the following table:
Device Type Program File Programming Viewing Data Exporting Data
Creation Functions
CENTRON® II Supported Initialize All data view functions EDL Files Export
(C12.19) Reconfigure
Reset
CENTRON Supported Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
CENTRON (C12.19) Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
CENTRON (V&I)
200 Series Registers Import Program Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
Files Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
FULCRUM® Import Program Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
Files Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
QUANTUM® Not Supported Not Supported All data view functions Meter Image File Export
MV-90 HHF Export
Q1000 Supported Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
SENTINEL® Supported Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
SQ400 Not Supported Not Supported All data view functions Meter Image File Export
MV-90 HHF Export
VECTRON® Supported Initialize All data view functions Meter Image File Export
Reconfigure MV-90 HHF Export
Reset

Calculated Quantities
The PC-PRO+ Advanced device servers can calculate demand, primary values, and quantities that are not
recorded by the meters. The sections below describe how the software calculates these values.

Demand Calculation

Demand is calculated as an estimate of how much energy will be used in an hour if the current consumption
rate is continued. The following equation is used:

Demand = Energy x Number of intervals per hour

User's Manual 219


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Calculated Quantities

The following device types support calculated quantities as indicated:

• CENTRON (V&I) – VAh, Varh, and PF


• FULCRUM – Power Factor (PF)
• QUANTUM – PF
• SENTINEL – VAh, Varh, and PF
• SQ400 – PF
• VECTRON – VAh, Varh, and PF

Using the Program Editor Menus


The Program Editor main window provides access to the File, Edit, Program, and Help menus. The menus
are described in the following sections.

File Menu
The File menu contains options related to creating, editing, printing, importing, and exporting program files,
as well as an option to exit from the Program Editor.
Menu Item Description
New Program Choose the New Program option to create a new program file.
Open Program Choose the Open Program option to open an existing program file.
Close Program Choose the Close Program option to close a program file.
Save Choose the Save option to save an existing program file. This option is only available when a program file is
open.
Save As Choose the Save As option to save an existing program file to a different name. This option is only available
when a program file is open.
Save As Default Choose the Save As Default Program option to save the current program file and use its parameters as the
Program default program. The information in the default program is used as the default program components when
you select File | New. This option is only available when a program file is open. For more information see
Saving a Program File as the Default Program.
Delete Choose the Delete option to delete the currently open program file. This option is only available when a
program file is open.
Print Choose the Print option to print the currently open program file or the data displayed in the Data Summary
area of the Program Editor window.
Print Preview Choose the Print Preview option to preview the way the currently open program file will print. This option is
only available when a program file is open.
Export Use the Export | Current View to HTML File option to save the information in the summary area
(information displayed on the right side) of the Program Editor window in an HTML file.
Exit Choose this option to close the Program Editor application.

User's Manual 220


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Edit Menu
The Edit menu is available while a program file is open, while you are online with a meter, and when you are
communicating with a Meter Image File.

The only option on the Edit menu is Copy to Clipboard. Use the Copy to Clipboard option to copy the data for
the selected component to the Windows® Clipboard. All data is copied; the headers for the data are not
copied. You can then access the Clipboard Viewer to view the data or paste the data to another application
such as Microsoft Word and Excel. For more information see your Microsoft® Windows® documentation.
Menu Item Description
Copy to Clipboard Use the Program Editor navigation tree to select the program component or the online item. Select Edit |
Copy to Clipboard. The data displayed in the summary area on the right is copied to the Windows
clipboard. You can then paste the data into another application.

Program Menu
The Program menu options are not available when you first access the Program Editor screen. They become
available when you have a program file open or are creating a new program file. The options available on the
Program menu are identical to the program components that display in the left side (Component side) of the
Program Editor screen.

The program components are different for each device type.

The items on the Program menu are discussed in the PC-PRO+ Advanced device user’s
manuals for each metering device type.

Help Menu
This menu contains options to access the online help and to get specific information on the version of the
Program Editor software currently installed as well as copyright information.
Menu Item Description
Help Topics Choose this option to access the online help containing the Contents, Index, and Search tabs to quickly
and easily find information related to the topic you need help using.
About the Program Editor Choose this option to display the version of the Program Editor software that is currently installed and
also copyright information.

Programming Support for Metering Devices


You can use PC-PRO+ Advanced to create program files, program meters, and perform device control
functions. The following table lists the device types and communication functions supported for each device
type.
Device Type Create/Edit Import Program Initialize Reconfigure Reset Devices
Program Files Files Devices Devices

User's Manual 221


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Device Type Create/Edit Import Program Initialize Reconfigure Reset Devices


Program Files Files Devices Devices
CENTRON
CENTRON (C12.19)
CENTRON II (C12.19) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CENTRON (V&I)
200 Series No Yes Yes Yes Yes
FULCRUM No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Q1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
QUANTUM No No No No Reset Demand
SENTINEL Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SQ400 No No No No Reset Demand
Reset Device Clock
VECTRON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Working with Program Files


This section describes how to use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor menu options to create and use
program files. It explains common tasks and provides suggestions for using the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.

Program Files are created and maintained using the Program Editor application in the PC-PRO+ Advanced
program group on the Windows Start menu. Use the Program Editor application to perform all the functions
described in this chapter.

Program files are based on the metering device-type. They define the standard and optional configurations for
the meter.

Before you begin creating program files, define system-wide options and default parameters
as described in Defining Settings and Defaults in the System Manager (see "Using the
System Manager to Define Settings and Defaults" on page 9).

Select Device Type


Choose the File | New option (or type the CTRL+N keyboard shortcut) to create a new program file. The
Select Device Type dialog is displayed.

Select the metering device type that the program will support. Device types are indicated by a unique code,
such as Q1000 for the Q1000 meter or VEC for the VECTRON meter. When you choose this option the
Select Device Type dialog is displayed for you to select the type of device your new program file will support.

Field Descriptions
Select Device Type
Select the device from the list and then click OK. If the device for which you want to create a program file is
not listed, the driver for that device is not currently installed on your system. You must install the device
driver before you can create a program file for a device type.

User's Manual 222


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

If you choose the CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), or SENTINEL device type, you are prompted to
select the measurement level for the meters that will be programmed using this program file.

The default program file for the selected device type is displayed in the active windows of the Program Editor.
For SENTINEL devices, a separate default program file is available for each meter measurement level.

Select a Program File


You can choose the File | Open option (or type the CTRL+O keyboard shortcut) to open and display an
existing program file for viewing, changing, copying, or printing. When you choose this option, the Browse
Programs dialog is displayed. Select the program file you want to open from the list and then click OK.

The program file you select is displayed. You can sort the list by Name, ID, or Device Type.

Field Descriptions
Name / ID / Type
This area displays a list of the program files currently defined in your system. Select the program file you
want to open, and then click OK. If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the
program file you want to open, use the Sort Options to display the program files in a specific order that will
make it easier for you to find the program.
Sort Options
If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the program file you want to open, use Sort
Options to display the program files in a specific order.

Click the appropriate button to sort the list of program files by Name, ID, or Device Type.

Saving a Program File to a New Name


You can choose the File | Save As option to name and save a new program file or copy and save an existing
program file under a different name. When you select this option, the Save Program File As dialog is
displayed.

Field Descriptions

Program File Name


Enter a maximum of 30 alpha-numeric characters for the name of this program file.
Program File ID
Enter a maximum of 4 digits to identify this program.
Existing Programs
This area displays a list of program files that currently exist on the system.

User's Manual 223


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Sorted By
Select a sort method. When you select a method, the files displayed in the Existing Programs area are sorted
according to your choice.

Deleting a Program File


If you no longer use a program file for PC-PRO+ Advanced or a client system, you can delete the program file
from the database.

• To delete a program file, select File | Delete. The Delete Programs dialog is displayed. You can delete an
individual program file or multiple program files.
• To delete a single program file, select the file name and then click OK.
• To delete multiple program files, use the Shift key to select consecutive files (select one file name, hold
down shift, select the range of files) or hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple files. When all the files
that you want to delete are highlighted, click OK to delete the files.
Field Descriptions
Name / ID / Type
This area displays a list of the program files currently defined in your system. Select the program file you
want to delete, and then click OK. If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the
program file you want to open, use the Sort Options to display the program files in a specific order that will
make it easier for you to find the program.
Sort Options
Click the appropriate button to sort the list of program files by Name, ID, or Device Type.

Creating a New Program File


A program file defines a specific meter configuration which controls the operation of the meter and the
meter’s display. You can program many meters using the same program file. Site-specific information, such
as a meter serial number and unit ID, are entered when you initialize the meter. For more information about
site-specific program options, see Defining Programming Options (on page 38).

This section provides general instructions for creating a program file. For specific instructions for creating a
program file for a particular device type, refer to the User Manual for the device type.

User's Manual 224


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

To Create a Program File


1. To create a new program, open up the Data Manager. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs |
PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager. The system Logon dialog is displayed.

Figure 110: System Logon Dialog


2. Enter your User ID and Password and then click OK.
When you enter a valid user ID and password, the Data Manager main window is displayed. Click on the
Meter Programs option on the left side of the screen.
3. To create a new program file, choose New under Program Options.
4. The following dialog will appear. Choose the type of device which will be configured using the program
file and then click OK.

Figure 111: Select Device Type

User's Manual 225


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

5. If you selected SENTINEL, CENTRON (C12.19), or CENTRON (V&I), then the Select Measurement
Level dialog is displayed. Select the measurement level for the meter that will be programmed with the
program file and then click OK. Click the Help button on the dialog for more information about
measurement levels.

Figure 112: Select Measurement Level


6. The Program Editor window opens the default program file for the device type selected. The program
components, listed on the left side of the window, vary depending on the device type.

Figure 113: Program Editor Main Window - SENTINEL Example


7. Double-click each component to open the dialog for the component or select the component from the
Program menu. Dialogs are pre-filled with default selections and settings based on the default program file
for the device type.
8. Change the information for each program component as needed. For detailed information about each
program component, refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced device user’s manual for the meter type or click the
Help button on each dialog.
9. After you complete all program component dialogs, select File | Save or File | Save As to update the file
in the database.

User's Manual 226


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

10. You are prompted to identify the file. The existing program files are listed as a reference.

Figure 114: Save As Dialog


11. Enter a maximum or 30 characters for the new Program File Name and a value from 1 to 9999 for the
Program File ID.
12. The program name and program ID must be unique in the system. Different devices can have the same
program ID, but not the same name.
13. Click OK to save the file. You are returned to the Program Editor main window.
14. To exit the Program Editor, click File | Exit. This returns you to the Data Manager.

Creating a Default Program File


You can create a default program file for each device type. For SENTINEL devices, you can also create a
default program file for each SENTINEL measurement level. Using the default program files as templates can
save time when you create a new program file.

To create a default program file, create a program file and select File | Save As Default. Then when you
create a new program file (File | New), the values that appear will be the values from the default program file.
You can make changes as desired, and use Save As to save and name the new program file.

To Open and Display an Existing Program File


You can open and display an existing program file to create or maintain a program, for viewing, changing,
copying, or printing. You have the option to select a program by name or by program ID and device type.
1. To create a new program, open up the Data Manager. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs |
PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager. The system Logon dialog is displayed. Enter your User ID and
Password and then click OK.
2. Once you enter a valid user ID and password, the Data Manager main window is displayed. Click on the
Meter Programs option on the left side of the screen.
3. To open an existing program file, simply click on the name of the program. The hyperlink will
automatically open the Program Editor.
4. Click a component to display the data for the component on the right side of the Program Editor window.

User's Manual 227


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

5. Double click a component to open the dialog for the component. Change the information for component as
needed.
For information about defining program components for a specific meter type, refer to the
PC-PRO+ Advanced online user’s manual for the meter type or click the Help button on
each dialog.
6. After you finish modifying program components as desired, select File | Save or File | Save As to
permanently update the file in the database.
Optionally, if the Program Editor is already open, you can open a program by doing the following:
1. From the Program Editor window, choose File | Open Program.
The Browse Programs dialog lists the program files currently in the database.

Figure 115: Browse Programs


2. To sort files to locate them more easily, choose an option:
• Use the Sort Options to sort the list by Name, ID, or Device Type.
• Under Show Programs of Type, click the down arrow and select the device type.
3. To open a file, either double-click it or select it and then click OK.
4. After you finish modifying program components as desired, select File | Save or File | Save As to
permanently update the file in the database.

Browse Programs
Select the program file you want to open and then click OK. To sort the list by Name, ID, or Device Type,
click Sort Options. After you click OK, the program file is displayed in the Program Editor active window.

User's Manual 228


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Field Descriptions
Name / ID / Type
This area displays a list of the program files currently defined in your system. Select the program file you
want to open, and then click OK. If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the
program file you want to open, use the Sort Options to display the program files in a specific order that will
make it easier for you to find the program.
Sort Options
Click the appropriate button to sort the list of program files by Name, ID, or Device Type.
Show Programs of Type
To display only program files for a certain device type, click the down arrow and select the type of device.

Viewing Program Components


Once a program file is opened, you can view the configuration items by selecting the desired component from
the navigation tree. The items and the values for the selected component are displayed in the right window.

Figure 116: Program Editor Main Window - SENTINEL Example

The individual program components can be edited, printed, and copied to the clipboard. The entire program
file can be printed, copied, and saved under a new name or deleted.

If the Program File component list is closed (+), double-click on the component to open the
list.

User's Manual 229


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Modifying and Saving Program Files


The program file information is grouped into program components that correspond to the items on the
program menu. You can enter or change field values in each component by double-clicking on the component
in the list or use the Program menu to select the component you want to modify. Either method displays the
dialog for the component.

The Save and Save As options use standard Windows functionality. To save your changes to a program file,
choose File | Save to update the current file. If you are overwriting an existing file, you will be prompted that
the file already exists. To save the file to the same name, you must confirm the overwrite action.

To save your changes as a new file, choose File | Save As. You are prompted to name the new file. The
original program file will exist without the modifications in addition to the new file.

Copying Information to the Clipboard


PC-PRO+ Advanced gives you the ability to copy the data in the current PC-PRO+ Advanced view (the data
on the right side of the window) to the Windows 2000/XP clipboard; this includes both the data from the
program database record and online device data.

The Edit menu option, Copy to Clipboard, provides you with an easy, one-step way to copy the information to
the clipboard.

• To copy information to the Clipboard, open the program file and display the device information that you
need to copy to another application and then select Edit | Copy to Clipboard.
The Windows 2000 and Windows XP clipboard can only contain one document at a time.
Therefore, once you copy the desired data to the clipboard, you will need to switch to a
spreadsheet or word processing program to paste the data, save it, and use the data as needed.
You do not need to disconnect from the device. Use Alt+Tab to sequence through the currently open
Windows 2000/XP programs (or start the target application) and then use the Paste command to paste in
the device data.
• To paste data to another application, such as Microsoft Excel, open the application and use the Edit |
Paste function.

The information copied to the Windows Clipboard remains there until you clear the Clipboard, cut or copy
another piece of information to it, or quit Windows.

To view, save, retrieve, or delete the contents of the Clipboard, open the Windows Clipboard Viewer.

Printing
This section describes how to print in the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor.

User's Manual 230


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Printing Program Content or Meter Data


You can print detailed information for a program file, summary information for all program files, and meter
data. To print meter data, you must be logged on to a device or have a Meter Image File open. The
information in the summary area (right side) is printed.
1. From the main window, do one of the following:
• If using MIF Viewer:
Select File |Open and choose the MIF file, and select File | Print.
The Print dialog is displayed.
• If using Program Files:
To print information for a single program file, select File | Open and choose the program file, and
select File | Print. To print summary information for all program files, select File | Print.

Figure 117: Print Dialog


2. Choose an option:
• If using MIF Viewer:
Current Display Only-Choose this option to print only the current displays
• If using Program Files:
Entire Program Contents–This option is available if a program file is open. Select this option to
print all components of the program file.
Summary of all Programs–Choose this option to print summary information for all program files.
If you choose this option, you can select the sort order for the report. If you selected Summary of
All Programs, for Sort By, select how the information on the report will be organized.
3. After you have made your selections, click OK to close the dialog.

User's Manual 231


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

Printing Dialog
You can print the contents of a program file that is open as well as a summary of all program files. Printing
can be done while online with a meter or when viewing a Meter Image File. Select File | Print to print a
report.

Before printing you can use the Print Preview option to view the information as it will be printed. The date
and page number are automatically inserted at the bottom of each page. The report is printed to the default
printer unless you use the Print Setup option to select a different printer and/or change the printer setup.

Field Descriptions

Select Report
Select the report to print:

If using MIF Viewer:

• Current Display Only - Select this option to print the current display.
If using Program Files:

• Entire Program Contents – This option is available if a program file is open. Select this option to print the
program file that is open.
• Summary of All Programs - Select this option to print a summary of all program files.
• Address Book – Select this option to print the contents of the Logon Address Book.
Sort By
If applicable, select the way you want to report to be organized:

The Sorting option is not available in the MIF Viewer.

• Program Name – Alpha order by program name.


• Program ID – Sort the report by program ID.
• Program Type – Sort the report by program type.

Selecting Printers and Options


The Print Setup dialog is a standard Windows dialog. For specific information on using this dialog, refer to
your Windows documentation. You can change the printer, the paper size, source, and orientation, and specify
other available printing options. The options available depend on the printer selected.

System Replication and Backup


PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.0 and higher provides a System Replication feature in the System Manager
application. You can use the System Replication feature to set up a Shop-Pro system or to set up additional
licensed PC-PRO+ Advanced systems using the settings and program files from a PC-PRO+ Advanced master
station.

User's Manual 232


Proprietary and Confidential
Creating and Using Program Files

You can also use the System Replication feature of the System Manager to back up system settings and
program files by creating a replica file.

The replica file can contain all settings and program files or only the items selected. For example a replica file
could include only device security codes. When the replica file is loaded, only the security codes are changed;
the other system settings are not affected.

Setting Up an Additional PC-PRO+ Advanced System


If you are setting up an additional PC-PRO+ Advanced system that will be used to program meters, you can
use the PC-PRO+ Advanced System Replication feature to expedite the process of setting up the system.

After default values and settings are defined on the original PC-PRO+ Advanced system, use the System
Manager application to create a Replica File that will be loaded to the new system. For example, include
program files, settings, security settings, DST configuration, and Address Book files from the original PC-
PRO+ Advanced system in the Replica File.

After you install the PC-PRO+ Advanced software on the additional system, use the Load Replica File feature
to set up the new system with the program files and settings from the source system.

For more information see Using System Replication (on page 77).

Quitting PC-PRO+ Advanced


To leave the Program Editor, choose File | Exit. The Program Editor closes and you return to the Data
Manager.

If you have made changes to a program file, be sure to save the file before you exit the
software. Select File | Save or File | Save As to save the program file.

User's Manual 233


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 7

Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Use the TOU Calendar Editor application to create Time of Use (TOU) schedules for supported metering
devices that have a Time of Use capability. Time of Use metering allows the energy provider to assign
different rates to different times of the day.

Using the TOU Calendar Editor you can define daily TOU schedules or TOU patterns that identify the rates
used and the time of day when each rate begins and ends. The daily patterns can be assigned to different days
of the week, seasons, and holidays. Once the schedules are created, you can modify and print using the TOU
Calendar Editor.

You can also create a default schedule which you can use as a template to expedite the process of creating
additional schedules. You can modify the default as needed and then save it as a new schedule.

When saving or closing a TOU Schedule file, the following dialog message may appear:

"TOU has been modified to reflect January 1st starting season dates."

This correction splits any season that spans the year end into two seasons: one that ends 31
December and another that begins 1 January. It is performed automatically to ensure that the
TOU Schedule is in the correct format for all meters.

The resulting TOU schedule is functionally identical to the original.

Implementing Time of Use


The Time of Use function allows different rates to be applied for power consumed at various times during the
day, week, and season(s). Use the TOU Calendar Editor to create a detailed TOU schedule, including daily
patterns that define when each rate begins and ends, season start and stop dates, and holidays. The daily
patterns can be assigned to different days of the week, seasons, and holidays.

After you create a TOU schedule, use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor to create a program file that
uses the TOU schedule and identifies the other TOU features. You can then log on to the device and initialize
it to use the parameters defined in the program file.

To Implement TOU
The following steps describe the basic process of implementing time of use.
1. Use the TOU Calendar Editor application to create the TOU schedule defining daily schedules and
patterns that identify the rates and the time of day when each rate begins and ends.
2. Use the Program Editor to create the program file as follows:
• Device Operation–Enable the TOU option.
• Time of Use Selection–Select the TOU schedule, select the Event Override options for TOU patterns
and rates, and if desired for Q1000 meters allocate memory to a latent TOU schedule.
• Quantity Selection–Select the TOU Energy and TOU Demand quantities that you want the meter to

User's Manual 234


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

store.
• Display Options–Select the TOU registers that you want to display on the meter.
• Load Profiles–Enable TOU statuses to display TOU rate codes to indicate the rate in effect for each
load profile interval.
• Output Configuration–Configure the digital state outputs that you want to trigger with TOU.
• Self Read–Select the desired TOU quantities.
3. Use the Program Editor Communications menu to log on to the device and initialize the meter using the
program file.
4. The device server checks the meter to see if the program file features are supported by the meter. If the
meter does not support Time of Use, or does not support the Calendar Schedule selected for the program
file, an error is generated.

Calendar Years
The years defined for TOU schedules in TOU Calendar Editor are calendar years. For example:

• If you create a TOU schedule with only one year and the current month is September, the schedule will
only contain the months of September, October, November, and December.
• If you make changes to a TOU schedule for only one year and the current month is September, the
changes will only apply to the remaining months in the calendar year–September, October, November,
and December.

TOU Schedule Features for Device Types


You can use TOU Calendar Editor to create Time of Use schedules for multiple meters. The schedule features
that are supported for each device type are listed below.
FULCRUM SENTINEL Basic CENTRON
TOU Maximums & CENTRON D/T/L SENTINEL
QUANTUM Q1000 CENTRON (C12.19) II
Features 200 Series Advanced
VECTRON CENTRON (V&I) (C12.19)
Rates 4 4 7 7 4 4 + CPP
Holiday Types 1 1 2 1 1 1
Outputs 4 4 16 4 4 4
Day Types 3 3 7 3 3 3
Seasons 8 8 255 8 8 8
Seasons per Year 8 8 8 8 8 8
Seasons per Schedule 8 8 255 8 8 8
Switch Points per TOU 24 24 unlimited 24 24 24
Pattern
Maximum holidays per unlimited unlimited 22 unlimited unlimited unlimited
Year

User's Manual 235


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

FULCRUM SENTINEL Basic CENTRON


TOU Maximums & CENTRON D/T/L SENTINEL
QUANTUM Q1000 CENTRON (C12.19) II
Features 200 Series Advanced
VECTRON CENTRON (V&I) (C12.19)
In a year, number of 42 42 N/A 42 42 42
season changes plus
number of holidays
Support Leap Year Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Overlapping rates and switch points are supported for the Q1000.

Menus and Options


The menu options for the TOU Calendar Editor application are described in the sections below.

Figure 118: TOU Calendar Editor

TOU File Menu


Use the File menu to create, open, copy, delete, save, and print new or existing time-of-use schedules, and set
printer options.
Option Description
New Open the default TOU schedule and use it to create a new time-of-use schedule or a new holiday list.
Open Open an existing time-of-use schedule, the default schedule, or an existing holiday list.
Close Close the schedule or holiday list that is currently open.
Save Save the schedule or holiday list that is currently open.
Save As Save the schedule that is currently open and give it a new name. The original schedule is not modified.

User's Manual 236


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Option Description
Save TOU for FCS Saves the TOU Schedule in the format required for use by the Itron Field Collection System (FCS) which is the
premier data collection engine for handheld and mobile AMR systems.
FCS collects data from multiple meter types, provides accurate, reliable meter data to customer billing
applications, and integrates with Itron’s powerful work force automation tools.
FCS is compatible with Itron collection devices currently on the market, including optical and water probes, and
integrates easily with third-party software applications for billing, meter data management and data analysis.
Properties Shows an overview of the open TOU Schedule.
Delete Delete the schedule or holiday list.
Print Preview While a schedule or holiday list is open, display the standard Windows Print Preview dialog.
Print Prints the open schedule or holiday list.
Exit Close the TOU Calendar application.

TOU Options Menu


Use the Options Menu to set two user options:

• To edit the color selections used in the program (refer to Time of Use Color Selections (on page 237))
• To select the supported devices for a TOU Schedule (refer to Meter Selections (on page 237))

Time of Use Color Selections


This dialog gives you the option to customize color selections. The colors for the both the background and
text can be chosen for each of the Rate, Output, and Season indexes. In addition, the two supported holiday
types can have the background color changed, but not the text color.

Meter Selections
This dialog shows you what devices are supported by the schedule and any restrictions or limits based on the
selection. By default, all devices are selected.

The features of the TOU Schedule are displayed down the first column. The remaining columns represent the
various device types and the numbers of these features that are supported. The last column displays the
current schedule limits based upon what devices have been selected.

Upon checking or un-checking the device types on the grid, the limits are set upon the schedule. If selecting a
device would cause a problem with the existing schedule (for example, if the device would not support the
current schedule) then the device cannot be selected. Any meter type not selected is not added to this list.
Therefore, those meter devices are not able to be programmed with the schedule.

Refer to TOU Schedule Features for Device Types (on page 235).

This option is only available when a Time of Use Schedule is open.

User's Manual 237


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 119: Meter Selection Dialog

TOU Edit Menu


Use the Edit menu to modify options in the TOU Calendar.
Option Description
Description Allows you to modify the description of the schedule.
Day Types Establishes the day types used in the schedule.
Rates and Outputs Establishes the rates and outputs that are used in the schedule.
Daily Patterns Establishes the daily patterns that are used in the schedule.
Season Definitions Establishes the season definitions that are used in the schedule.
Insert Season Allows you to insert a new season into the schedule.
Insert Holiday Allows you to insert a new holiday into the schedule.
Extend Calendar Extends the calendar additional years.
Roll Off Years Removes past years from selected schedules.
Apply Holiday List Applies a particular holiday list to the schedule.

TOU Help Menu


Use the Help Menu to display help topics for the TOU Calendar Editor application.

The Help menu options are as follows:


Menu Item Description
Contents Displays Contents tab for the TOU Calendar Editor help topics.
Search Displays Index tab for the TOU Calendar Editor help topics.
About Displays information about the TOU Calendar Editor software version and copyright information.

User's Manual 238


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Using a TOU Schedule


When creating a new TOU Schedule, the default schedule is used as a template. For more information on
default schedules, refer to Creating a Default Schedule (on page 261). The following section details the steps
needed to create a new TOU schedule.

Figure 120: Sample TOU Calendar Editor Screen


1 Tool bar
2 Navigates to the Previous Year
3 Navigates to the Next Year
4 Listing of Season Dates
5 Graphical Representation of Seasons
6 Holidays highlighted in purple
7 Schedule Description

Creating and Editing TOU Schedules


The schedule parameters define all aspects of the TOU schedule.
1. Select File | New | TOU Schedule.
The default TOU schedule is opened with the name New Schedule shown for the schedule name and a
blank TOU ID.
To modify an existing TOU Schedule, select File | Open | Time of Use Schedule.
2. The New Schedule (on page 241) Dialog opens if you are creating a new schedule. Here, enter in
Schedule Name, Schedule ID, Start Year (the default year is the current year), Schedule Length, Holiday
List (if any), and a Description.
User's Manual 239
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

If modifying an existing schedule, the Open TOU Schedule (on page 243) dialog appears. Here, highlight
the schedule in question and click Open.
In the default schedule the start year will always display 2001. However, upon creating a
new schedule the new schedule dialog will default to the current year. The duration in the
new schedule dialog will default to correspond to whatever the last year defined in the
default schedule is.

For example if the default schedule is from 2001-2010 (10 years), in the new schedule dialog
the duration will default to 4 years so that 2007-2010 will be defined. If you extend the
calendar past this date, the new years will not have any of the applied holidays or seasons
from the default schedule. Only the last inserted season will extend into the new years.
3. When creating a new schedule, the Meter Selections (on page 237) Dialog appears allowing you to
determine which meters will use this schedule. The available values will change depending on the meter
selection. By default, all meters are selected.
4. Using the Edit menu, modify the schedule as desired to create the new schedule. For information about
each tab, see the following topics:
• Schedule Description (on page 243)
• Available Day Types (on page 246)
• Rates and Outputs (on page 244)
• Season Definitions (on page 252)
• Insert Season (on page 252)
• Edit Season (on page 253)
• Insert Holiday (on page 257)
• Extend Calendar (on page 258)
• Roll Off Years (on page 255)
• Apply Holiday List (on page 257)
5. Once complete, Select File | Save. If you need to save it under a different name, select File | Save As.
6. Enter the Name of the new schedule. The following characters are not allowed in the name:
/:\*?"<>
7. Click Save to save the schedule.

Using Existing Custom Schedules


The time of use calendar editor in version 7.35 (or earlier) did not have any restrictions on the first season
start date for the first year of a time of use schedule. For example, it allowed you to create a schedule with the
following season start dates:

User's Manual 240


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

• Season 1 start - January 15, 2007


• Season 2 start - May 15, 2007
• Season 3 start - August 15, 2007
• Season 4 start - November 15, 2007
The schedule does not specify a season assignment for any of the dates between January 1st and January 15th.
Therefore PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.35 was enhanced to add and extra season start date to ensure that all
dates in the first year of a schedule had valid season and pattern assignments. If a meter was programmed
during this time with PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.35, an extra date was automatically added to ensure a
January 1st start as shown by the following:

• January 1, 2007
• January 15, 2007
• May 15, 2007
• August 15, 2007
• November 15, 2007
The calendar editor in PC-PRO+ Advanced version eliminates the ambiguous situation altogether. Any
scheduled created or modified with version 8.00 will automatically adjust the first season start date of the first
year to January 1, 2007. Therefore, after opening and saving the existing calendar, the following season start
dates will be stored:

• January 1, 2007
• May 15, 2007
• August 15, 2007
• November 15, 2007
In order for the calendar to appear with only the January 1st start date, you will have to open
and save the new calendar.

New Schedule
By going to File | New | TOU Schedule, you can create a new TOU Schedule. This identifies the TOU
schedule and defines the number of years, the start year, and the holiday list used for this schedule. To return
to the TOU Schedule main screen without saving changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 241


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 121: New Schedule Dialog

Field Descriptions
Schedule Name
The name of the schedule is displayed.

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Schedule ID
The schedule ID is displayed. The range is 0001 to 9999.
Start Year
Select the starting year for the schedule. The Start Year must be between 2001 or the current year. By default,
the start year is the current year.
Schedule Length
Select the length of the schedule. The range is 1 to 50.

If you add years to the schedule, you must define the Seasons and Holidays for the added
years. You can define the holidays for the added years on the Years tab, or reapply the
Holiday List to all years on the Description tab.
Holiday List
Click the down-arrow to select the Holiday List to be used for this schedule. The Holiday List that you select
here determines the holidays that are shown on the Years tab. If you have modified holidays for this schedule
and you click this button, all edits will be overwritten with the information in the Holiday List.
Description
Enter a description to identify this schedule. You can also use the description field to enter comments and
notes.

When you create a new schedule, the words "New Schedule" are used in the description.

User's Manual 242


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Open TOU Schedule


By going to File | Open | TOU Schedule, the following dialog appears. This will open an existing TOU
Schedule. To return to the TOU Schedule main screen without saving changes, click Cancel.

Figure 122: Open TOU Schedule Dialog

Field Descriptions
TOU ID
The ID of the TOU Schedule. A user can sort this field either by ascending or descending by clicking on the
header row.
Schedule Name
This name given to the schedule. A user can sort this field either ascending or descending by clicking on the
header row.

Schedule Description
To enter or modify the description of the schedule, go to Edit | Description. To return to the TOU Schedule
without saving changes, click Cancel.

Figure 123: Schedule Description Dialog

User's Manual 243


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

TOU Schedule Properties


The TOU Schedule Properties dialog gives you an easy way to view all the schedule properties in one
location. General schedule information is listed as well as the limits based upon the supported meters.

To return back to the schedule, click OK.

Adding Rates and Outputs


Each meter can have a specified number of rates in the system. A typical time of use system will have 4 rates
(Rate A, Rate B, Rate C, and Rate D). Each of these corresponds to a particular cost per kilowatt hour. For
example:
Rate A $0.12/kWatt hour
Rate B $0.14/kWatt hour
Rate C $0.16/kWatt hour
Rate D $0.18/kWatt hour

Meters that have an optional Input/Output board can have up to 4 Outputs that are physical connections out of
the meter that can connect to some sort of external equipment. For example, this could be a type of load
control device or another piece of hardware that needs to be turned on and off. Setting up the Outputs in the
TOU Schedule allows these outputs to be scheduled to come on and go off based on a specific time.

Rates and Outputs


To enter or modify the description of the schedule, go to Edit | Rates and Outputs.

From this dialog, rates and outputs can be added to be used in patterns, provided they fall within the supported
devices' limits. This is accomplished through enabling and disabling the add buttons based upon the limits.
When a rate or output is selected and it is not in use the corresponding delete button is enabled allowing for
the removal of that rate or output.

Deleting a rate or output can only be done in order of the last created rate or output to the first created rate or
output.

To return to the TOU Schedule without saving changes, click Cancel.

Rates and outputs cannot be renamed. However, if a previously created schedule is loaded
that has already modified the rate or output names those names are used. This has been done
to have consistency with how rates and outputs are viewed in the meters.

User's Manual 244


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 124: Rates and Outputs

Field Descriptions
Rates
The rates are listed.
Add Rate
To add a rate for use in this schedule, click the Add Rate button.
Delete Rate
To delete a rate from this schedule, select the rate and then click the Delete button.
Outputs
The outputs are listed.
Add Output
To add an output for use in this schedule, click the Add Output button.
Delete Output
To delete an output from this schedule, select the output and then click the Delete button. You are prompted to
confirm the deletion.

User's Manual 245


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Creating Day Types


Each week in a year is comprised of seven days. Because it would be too cumbersome to have a separate
schedule for each day of the week, these days are grouped into day types. For example, most meters support
up to three day types. For example:
Weekend Saturday and Sunday
Weekday Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday
Holiday A holiday as defined in holiday listing

Available Day Types


To enter or modify the description of the schedule, go to Edit | Day Types. The drop down menus for each
day of the typical week contain the day types that are currently defined allowing you to create a typical week.

Day types can be added based upon the restrictions of the supported meter devices. If the supported devices
can support additional normal days or holidays the corresponding Add Day Type button is enabled.
Otherwise, it is disabled. When a day type is selected, the Delete Day Type button is enabled provided the
supported meters permit the day type to be removed, that day type is not in use, and that day type was the
most recently added.

If a normal day type or a holiday type is not in use, a user can edit the name of the day type by single clicking
on the name.

To return to the TOU Schedule without saving changes, click Cancel.

Figure 125: Available Day Types Dialog

User's Manual 246


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Field Descriptions
Typical Week
This section determines the definition of a typical week.
Day of the Week
This is a listing of the days of the week.
Day Type
Use the drop down box to associate the day type to a day of the week. To add a day type, use the Add Day
Type button at the bottom of the screen.

Normal Day Types


This is a listing of the day types and if a particular day type is in use. To add a day type, use the Add Day
Type button at the bottom of the screen.

The number of day types depends on the devices selected for the schedule in question.

Add Day Type


Use this button to add a day type. To modify a day type name, double click on it.
Delete Day Type
If a day type is not in use, use this button to delete a particular day type.
Holiday Day Type
This is a listing of the holiday day types and if a particular day type is in use. To add a day type, use the Add
Day Type button at the bottom of the screen.

The number of day types depends on the devices selected for the schedule in question.

Using the Day Viewer


A day type can be changed by selecting the day on the calendar and changing the day type to holiday which
will prompt for a holiday name.

Day Viewer
Double clicking on a day will open the Day Viewer dialog from which information concerning the day can be
viewed and edited.

Click OK to accept the changes. To return to the TOU Schedule without saving changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 247


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 126: Day Viewer Dialog

Field Descriptions
Date Information
The date information displays the active season for the given date. It allows a user to select the day type for
the given date. The Day Type can be changed by using the drop down box.
Daily Pattern
A graphical representation of the rates based on the time of day. Refer to Time of Use Color Selections (on
page 237) for details on changing the colors of the rates.

Adding Daily Patterns


A daily pattern allows different rates to be assigned to different times of a day type. For example, for the
"Weekday" day type, the following pattern could be assigned:
00:00 - 08:00 Rate A
08:00 - 18:00 Rate B
18:00 - 24:00 Rate A

Daily Patterns
To add a daily pattern to a schedule, go to Edit | Daily Patterns. Highlight the pattern needed and click OK.
If a new pattern is needed, click the Add Pattern button. If you would like to edit an existing daily pattern,
highlight it and click Edit Pattern. Refer to Daily Pattern (on page 249) for more information on adding and
editing daily patterns. If a pattern is no longer needed, you can delete it by clicking Delete Pattern. You
cannot delete a pattern if it currently is in use.

User's Manual 248


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 127: Daily Patterns Dialog

Field Descriptions
Pattern Name
The name of the Daily Pattern.
In use
Determines if the daily pattern is currently in use. If it is being used by a schedule, this column will have a
"Yes".
Add Pattern
Use this button to add a new pattern to the schedule.
Edit Pattern
Highlight the pattern in question, and use this button to go in and modify the pattern.
Delete Pattern
If the daily pattern is not currently in use, use this button to delete the daily pattern.

Daily Pattern
This dialog is used when either adding or modifying daily patterns. Each daily pattern is defined by a switch
point which is a point in time where one rate changes to a different rate. To add switch points, click on the
Add Switchpoint button at the bottom of the dialog (refer to Add Switchpoint (on page 251)). Using the
Pattern Graph view, if switch points already exist, a user can put the cursor on the switch points and drag them
to a different point in time. Using the Switch point List view, a user can manually type in the new switch
point.

When editing a pattern, the switch points will be forced to 5 minute intervals if SCS devices
are supported. The switch points are automatically rounded to the previous 5 minute mark
(for example 12:32 will be rounded to 12:30) before the editing starts and the schedule is
marked as changed.

A switch point can be deleted by using the Delete Switchpoint button.

User's Manual 249


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Once complete, click OK to return to the schedule editor. To cancel this operation without saving changes,
click Cancel.

Equation 1: Adding or Modifying a Daily Pattern

Field Descriptions
Pattern Name
The name of the daily pattern used to identify it in schedules.
Graph Resolution
This value makes the switch point "snap" to the nearest time. For example, if you have it set to 60 minutes
you cannot set 10:30 as the end time on the graph. This feature only applies when looking at the data in graph
view.
Enforce 24 hour rate coverage
Checking this box will force a day to have rates assigned for all 24 hours. This option is enabled for Q1000
schedules only.
Allow overlapping rates
Checking this box allows tow or more rates to overlap in a particular time period. This option is enabled for
Q1000 schedules only.
Display Outputs
Use this check box to display outputs. If left unchecked, the outputs will not be displayed.
Pattern Graph
A graphical representation view of the rates based on the time of day.
Switchpoint List
A list of the rates and the switch points based on the time of day.

User's Manual 250


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Add Switchpoint
Use this button to add a switch point.
Delete Switchpoint
Use this button to delete a switch point. The highlighted rate will be deleted.

Add Switchpoint
A switch point is the point in time where one rate will change to a different rate. To add a switch point in a
daily pattern schedule, click the Add Switchpoint button on the Daily Pattern (on page 249) dialog. To
return to the daily pattern dialog without saving changes, click Cancel.

The switch points are automatically rounded to the previous 5 minute mark (for example
12:32 will be rounded to 12:30).

Figure 128: Add Switchpoint dialog

Field Descriptions
Switchpoint Type
Determine if the Switch point Type is going to be for a Rate Change or an Independent Output. The
Independent Output is enabled if Display Outputs has been checked.
State Time
The beginning time for the switch point.
Rate Time
The rate that will be applied during this period of time.

Creating a New Season


As with the standard calendar, a user can assign blocks of the year to a season. This allows different rates and
patterns to be assigned during different times of the year. For example:
Winter December 1 to March 1
Spring March 2 to May 31
Summer June 1 to September 1
User's Manual 251
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Fall September 2 to November 30

Season Definitions
The Season information defines the daily pattern for each day type for each season of this schedule. The
Season Definitions dialog shows the seasons that have been defined for this schedule. You can add seasons,
edit seasons, and delete seasons. The Season Definition dialog defines the daily patterns that are used for each
day type for each season.

A season definition can be added, edited or deleted by going to Edit | Season Definition . The "In Use"
column shows if a season is being used by the schedule.

Field Descriptions
Season Name
The name given to the season.
Add Season
To add a season, click the Add Season button. The Edit Season dialog is displayed.
Edit Season
To edit an existing season, highlight it and click Edit Season. The Edit Season dialog will appear. The day
types and daily patterns used for the selected season are displayed.
Delete Season
When selecting a season, it can be deleted by selecting the Delete Season button. A confirmation dialog will
appear when the season is in use in the schedule warning you that it will be deleted from all years in the
schedule.

Insert Season
To insert an existing season into a new schedule, go to Edit | Insert Season. Once a season is selected from
the list, the start date is chosen from the date object. You can determine if the season is to be added to only the
year selected or to every year. The OK button is only enabled once a season is selected from the list. To
return to the TOU Schedule without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 252


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 129: Insert Season Dialog

Field Descriptions
Select Season/Season Name
Select the season from the list that you are wanting to insert into the schedule.
Select Start Date
Using the calendar on the right hand side of the screen, select a starting date for the season. Use the arrows to
navigate to the appropriate month.
Add to
Determine if this season is for this year only or if it is for every year in the schedule.

Edit Season
Adding new seasons and editing existing seasons are done with the same dialog. Clicking either the Add
Season button or the Edit Season button on the Insert Season dialog will bring up a more detailed view of a
season. This dialog shows the season name as well as the Day Type Name and the Pattern Selection for each
day. In addition, the dialog shows what days are assigned the various day types. This enables you to have a
more comprehensive view of how the seasons are being defined and how they are used in the schedule.

The dialog shows the patterns that each day of the week will use giving the user more detailed information.
Only the season name and pattern selection for each day type can be changed.

To return to the Season Definition dialog without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 253


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 130: Edit Season Dialog

Field Descriptions
Season Name
This is the name of the season in the TOU Schedule.
Pattern Selections
Select a pattern from the drop down box to correspond with the Day Type Name. The Day of Week
Assignments are listed for reference.
Daily Patterns
The daily pattern section shows what rate applies to which times of day on a given day of the week.

Edit the Season Start Date


This dialog allows you to change a season start date. Highlight the new season start date and click OK. To
return to the TOU Schedule without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 254


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 131: Edit Season Start Date

Field Descriptions
Season Name
This is the name of the season in the TOU Schedule.
Season Start Date
Click on the date in which the season should start. Use the arrows to move from one month to another.

Rolling off Years


CENTRON, VECTRON, and FULCRUM meters start configuring TOU with the earliest year in the schedule.
Rolling off older years from the beginning of a schedule allows a schedule to have additional years at the end.

Roll Off Years


Use the Roll Off Old Years dialog (Edit | Roll Off Years) to remove past years from selected schedules.
Schedule information for years prior to the selected year will be deleted from the TOU Calendar Editor.

Calendars can only be rolled off up to the current calendar year.

To return to the TOU Schedule without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 255


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 132: Roll Off Years Dialog

Field Descriptions
New Calendar Start
The date highlighted is the date that the new calendar will begin.
Calendar End
The date highlighted is the date that the new calendar will end.
Number of Years Rolled Off:
This is the number of years that are being rolled off.
Number of Years Remaining:
This is the number of years remaining.
Roll Off Years Prior To
Using the arrow keys, select the year to begin rolling off.

Adding a Holiday List


A holiday list is comprised of a listing of holidays. These can include federal, state, and local holidays.
Holidays can be combined together in a Holiday List. A Holiday List defines the holiday names, dates, years,
and holiday types. TOU Calendar Editor allows you to define different holiday lists for use in different service
areas.

Each holiday list has two types of holidays:

User's Manual 256


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

• Fixed Holiday is a unique fixed date each year, since the actual date varies from one year to the next. An
example would be Thanksgiving which occurs on the fourth Thursday in November.
• Recurring Holiday happens on the same day every year regardless of the day of the week. For example,
New Year's Day is always on January 1.
The Q1000 meter can have up to two different holiday types (Type 1 and Type 2). All other
devices can only have one holiday type. Basically, holiday types are a second way to
categorize holidays.

Apply Holiday List


The Apply Holiday List dialog (Edit | Apply Holiday List) allows you to choose a holiday list to apply and
gives the option to keep existing holidays or to remove existing holidays. You can apply multiple holiday lists
to the schedule by applying lists and keeping the existing holidays.

The Apply List button is only enabled once a list has been selected.

To return to the TOU Schedule without making any changes, click Cancel.

Figure 133: Apply Holiday List Dialog

Field Descriptions
Holiday List To Apply
Highlight the Holiday List you are wanting to apply. Once selected, click the Apply List button.
Previous Holiday
Determine if this holiday list will keep existing holidays or if any existing holidays will be removed.

Insert Holiday
Inserting a holiday is accomplished through going to Edit | Insert Holiday. The dialog provides a date object
for you to select a date and provides a text box for naming the holiday. The OK button is disabled until a
name is provided. A drop down menu provides the holiday day types that can be used for the holiday and
radio button provide the option to add the holiday to this year or to every year.

User's Manual 257


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

If moving a holiday to a previous Friday or the following Monday causes the holiday to fall
in a different year, the year of the actual holiday is appended to the holiday that is moved.

Figure 134: Insert Holiday Dialog

Field Descriptions
Holiday Name
This is the name of the holiday in the TOU Schedule.
Day Type
Assign a day type to the holiday by selecting a value from the drop down box. Refer to Available Day Types
(on page 246) for more information on defining day types in the schedule.
Add To
Determine if this change is going to be for this year only or to this date every year.

Extending a TOU Calendar


The Extend Calendar Dialog enables you to add years to the calendar. There also is an option to apply a
holiday list to the new years as well as add seasons that have appeared in every year of the calendar to the new
years being added.

Extend Calendar
To extend a calendar, go to Edit | Extend Calendar. Select the number of years to add to the calendar by
using the arrows. A user can add up to 50 years depending on the length of the existing calendar. Secondly,
select a holiday list from the drop down box to apply to the new years being added. Finally, using the check
box, select the seasons that will apply to the new years. A user can select more than one season.

To return to the TOU Schedule without making any changes, click Cancel.

User's Manual 258


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 135: Extend Calendar Dialog

Field Descriptions
Years to add to calendar
Select the number of years to be added to the end of the calendar.
Select holiday list to apply to new years
From the dropdown box, select the appropriate holiday list. If a holiday list needs to be added, refer to
Adding a Holiday List (on page 256).
Select seasons to add to new years
Existing seasons in the schedule appear. Using the checkboxes, select the season(s) to apply to the new years
in the schedule.

Saving a TOU Schedule


Once complete, a TOU Schedule needs to be saved in order to be used in initializing a meter.

To save a TOU Schedule, go to File | Save.

Save As
You can open an existing schedule and save and rename the schedule using the File | Save As function to
create a new schedule. Once you have renamed and saved the new schedule, you can edit the schedule
parameters as needed for the new schedule and then save the schedule parameters.

To create a new schedule, enter a new TOU ID and a new Schedule Name, and click Save.

To return to the TOU schedule without saving, click Cancel.

User's Manual 259


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 136: Save As Dialog

Field Descriptions
TOU ID
To create a new schedule, enter a unique TOU ID.
Schedule Name
To create a new schedule, enter a unique name for the new schedule.

The following characters are invalid in the Service Point Name: &, \, ', < and >.

Save a TOU Schedule for FCS


A user can save a TOU Schedule for FCS.

To Save a TOU Schedule for FCS

1. Open up the TOU Schedule in question.


2. Go to File | Save TOU Schedule for FCS.
3. The Browse dialog will open. Locate the appropriate directory location. Click OK. Click Cancel to return
to the TOU Editor without saving.

Deleting a TOU Schedule


A TOU Schedule can be deleted by going File | Delete | TOU Schedule. Highlight the schedule needed to be
deleted and click Delete. A message will pop up saying "Are you sure you want to delete the selected
schedule(s)." Click OK.

Delete TOU Schedule


This dialog allows a user to delete an existing TOU Schedule.

User's Manual 260


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 137: Delete TOU Schedule Dialog

Field Descriptions
TOU ID
This is the TOU ID. You can sort this field (either ascending or descending) by clicking on the label.
Schedule Name
This is the Schedule Name. You can sort this field (either ascending or descending) by clicking on the label.

Printing TOU Schedule Reports


While a TOU schedule is open, you can print the schedule or the Holiday Lists. To print a schedule, go to File
| Print. You can obtain a print preview by going File | Print Preview.

Creating a Default Schedule


The default schedule is a template that you can use to define the schedule parameters that will be used most
often for your system. When you open a new file to create a new schedule, TOU Calendar Editor opens the
default schedule template. You change the schedule parameters as needed for the new schedule, close the
schedule, and save and name the new schedule file.

Using a default template expedites the process of creating schedules since you do not need to define every
feature each time you create a new schedule.

Editing Default Schedule Parameters


Use File | Open | Default Schedule to create a default schedule template that defines the basic TOU schedule
parameters that will be used most often for your system. The default TOU schedule is used as the starting
point for modifications when creating a set of TOU schedules for your system.

When you create a new schedule, TOU Calendar Editor uses the default schedule as a template, which you
can then modify as needed and save it to create the new schedule. Using a default template expedites the
process of creating schedules since you do not need to define every feature for each schedule.

User's Manual 261


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

To Edit the Default Schedule


To edit the default schedule, select File | Open | Default Schedule. The process of editing the Default
Schedule Parameters uses the same fields as the Schedule Parameters dialogs that you use to create a new
schedule. Once the Default Schedule is complete, select File | Save.

The schedule parameters define all aspects of the TOU schedule. They are as follows:

• Description – Identify this TOU schedule and define the number of years, the start year, and the holiday
list.
• Day Types – Define the day types and holiday types for this schedule.
• Typical Week – Define the day types that will be used for each day of the week.
• Rates and Outputs – Define the number of rates and outputs used for this schedule.
• Daily Patterns – Create and name patterns that define the switchpoints (start and stop times) for rates and
outputs.
• Seasons – Define the daily pattern for each day type for each season of this schedule. You must define a
season. If you do not define a season, an error will occur when you try to initialize a meter using a TOU
schedule that has no season defined. You must define daily patterns before you can define season
information.
• Years – Define season start dates and edit holidays for each year of this schedule. You must define season
information before you can define years information.

Creating Holiday Lists in Holiday List Editor


Use the Holiday List Editor to create a new holiday list. The default schedule is used as a template. The
following section details the steps needed to create a new holiday list for the TOU schedule.

User's Manual 262


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 138: Holiday List

Creating a New Holiday List


Lists can be renamed by right clicking in the Available Holiday Lists box once a list is selected and choosing
Rename Holiday List.

To create a new holiday list

1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). If
prompted, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Go to the TOU Schedules tab on the left side of the screen.
3. Click Edit Holiday Lists on the Holiday List Options menu on the left hand side.
4. The Holiday Editor will open.
5. Click File | New to create a new holiday list.

User's Manual 263


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

6. On the new Holiday Lists dialog, enter in a new holiday list name and click OK. The Edit Holiday List
dialog is displayed showing the holiday lists that have been defined for the system.

Figure 139: New Holiday List


7. To add a recurring or fixed holiday, double click on the row next to the asterisk (*) and type in the name
of the holiday. Determine if the holiday is to be of Type 1 or Type 2. Enter in the date of the holiday.
You can use the drop down arrow to view a calendar to pick the date or you can manually type in the date.
A new holiday can also be added by right clicking on an existing holiday and selecting the
"Add Holiday" option.
8. For recurring holidays, determine if Saturday and Sunday holidays should be set to "Do Not Move",
"Move to Friday", or "Move to Monday".
9. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add all holidays.
10. Save the holiday list by going to File | Save. You can close the holiday list and return to the TOU main
menu by going File | Close.
An empty holiday list can be saved. However, it will have no effect when applied to a TOU
Schedule.

The Holiday Lists dialog is updated to show the new list.

Add New Holiday List or Rename Holiday List


This dialog allows a user to create a new holiday list. Enter in a valid holiday list name and click OK.
Clicking Cancel will return you to the default holiday list screen.

User's Manual 264


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 140: Add New Holiday List Dialog

Field Descriptions
List Name
The name of the holiday list is displayed.

Inserting a Holiday
When a holiday list is open, inserting a holiday is accomplished by double clicking on the row next to the
asterisk (*) and typing in the name of the holiday. Determine if the holiday is to be of Type 1 or Type 2.
Enter in the date of the holiday. You can use the drop down arrow to view a calendar to pick the date or you
can manually type in the date.

For recurring holidays, determine if Saturday and Sunday holidays should be set to "Do Not Move", "Move to
Friday", or "Move to Monday".

February 29th cannot be considered a recurring holiday because it does not occur every year.

Deleting a Holiday
A holiday can be deleted by right clicking on the holiday in question and selecting "Delete Holiday". The
holiday will be deleted from the list.

If the holiday was not intended to be deleted, use Edit | Undo | Recurring Holiday Delete or Edit | Undo |
Fixed Holiday Delete. Saving the holiday list will disable these options.

Deleting a Holiday List


A holiday list can be deleted from the main Holiday List Editor screen. File | Delete brings up a message box
alerting you that deleting the list will not affect any current TOU Schedule using the list will prompt the user
for confirmation of the delete before the list is removed. To cancel out of this operation, click the Cancel
button.

The deletion will only affect future schedules. Existing schedules will not be affected by the
deletion of the holiday list.

User's Manual 265


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Figure 141: Delete Holiday List

TOU Calendar Editor Internal Errors


The following table lists possible internal errors for TOU Calendar Editor and describes the action you may
take to resolve the error.
Error Description
Write Protection Error This error is usually reported while exporting a schedule to a floppy disk. Check the write protection
tab on the disk.
Disk Full Error This error is usually reported while exporting a schedule to a full floppy disk. Check the free space
on the disk and replace the disk as necessary.
General Data Error This error usually occurs while importing a corrupt export file. Try exporting the file form the
originating system again. Other causes for this error are a corrupt data file and a missing application
file. Try saving the schedule or saving the schedule with a new name. You may also need to reinstall
the software.
Application Version Error This error indicates a version mismatch and requires reinstallation of the software.
Data Range Error This error usually occurs while importing a corrupt export file. It may also indicated an internal error
in the software. If this error occurs while saving a schedule, please contact your service
representative.
Data Type Error This error usually indicates a corrupt data file. Try saving the schedule or saving the schedule with a
new name. This error can also occur if a necessary file has been moved or deleted from the system.
Reinstalling the software will fix this problem. This error may also indicate an internal error in the
software.
File Not Found Error This error is reported by the operating system. It is usually a result of the state of the system changing
during a Calendar Editor import or export operation. Try canceling and retrying the operation. If this
does not work, try closing and restarting the Calendar Editor.
File Path Error This error is reported by the operating system. It is usually a result of the state of the system changing
during a Calendar Editor import or export operation. Try canceling and retrying the operation. If this
does not work, try closing and restarting the Calendar Editor.
Item Not Found Error This error usually indicates a corrupt data file. Try saving the schedule or saving the schedule with a
new name. This error may also indicate an internal error in the software.
Invalid Year Error This error usually indicates a corrupt data file. Try saving the schedule or saving the schedule with a
new name. This error can also occur if a necessary file has been moved or deleted from the system.
Reinstalling the software will fix this problem. This error may also indicate an internal error in the
software.

User's Manual 266


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the TOU Calendar Editor

Error Description
Unable to Save Schedule This error indicates an internal error in the software. If this error occurs, please contact your service
representative.
Unsupported Data Function This error usually indicates a corrupt data file. Try saving the schedule or saving the schedule with a
Error new name. This error can also occur if a necessary file has been moved or deleted from the system.
Reinstalling the software will resolved the issue. This error may also indicated an internal error in the
software.

User's Manual 267


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 8

Using the Display Editor

Use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Display Editor to configure meter display files for use with VECTRON and
CENTRON meters. A single display file can be used by multiple program files.

After you create the Display file, use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor to create the program file for
the meter. In the program file, you select the Display File in the Display program component.

Basic Tasks
The following is a listing of basic tasks done in the Display Editor:

• Starting the Display Editor (on page 268)


• Creating a Display File (on page 269)
• Opening a Display File (on page 273)
• Editing Display Files (on page 284)
• Deleting Display Files (on page 287)
• Saving a Display File As (on page 274)
• Printing Reports (on page 288)
• Report Options (on page 289)
• Print Format (on page 289)

Starting the Display Editor


Follow the instructions below to start the Display Editor.
1. To start the PC-PRO+ Advanced Display Editor application, from the Windows Start menu select
Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager. If necessary, enter in the User ID and Password.

User's Manual 268


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

2. Go to the Display Editor tab on the left hand side of the screen. You can then either click "New" to create
a new Display, or click on the hyperlink name of an existing Display.

Figure 142: Display Editor Main Window


3. Before you begin creating new display files, use the Options menu to set up the following Display Editor
options:
• Default display formats. For more information see Defining Default Display Formats (on page 274).
• Date format. For more information see Defining the Default Date Format (on page 277).
4. For information about creating Display files, see Creating a Display File (on page 269).

Creating a Display File


A display file is used to program a CENTRON or VECTRON liquid crystal display. Use the Display Editor to
create a new display file for register and non-register items that you want to display when the meter is in
Normal, Alternate, and Test display modes. A display file can be created for use with a specific device type or
for use with different device types.

User's Manual 269


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

1. From the Display Editor main window, select File | New. The Select Display Type dialog is displayed.

Figure 143: Select Display Type


2. Choose the type of meter for which you are creating this display file and then click OK. You are returned
to the Display Editor main window. The Normal Display tab is selected.

Figure 144: Display Editor Example


3. To define items for the Normal Display mode, double-click the Available Items category in the items tree
on the left. The available items are displayed below the item category.
4. To select an item for the display, double-click the item.
5. For register items, the Select Quantity dialog is displayed.

User's Manual 270


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Note: For non-register items, this dialog is not displayed. Continue with step 7.

Figure 145: Select Quantity


6. Specify the quantity’s parameters for the following:
• Direction
• Time of Use Rate
• Occurrence
• Phase
7. Click OK.

User's Manual 271


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

8. The Add Display Item dialog box is displayed.

Figure 146: Add Display Item


9. Specify the parameters for the display item:
• Add to Display List–Check this box to add the item to the display list. If an item is already in the
display list, un-check this box to remove it from the display list while retaining the display parameters
for the item.
• Display Order–Enter the sequence number for this item for this display mode.
• ID Code–Enter the ID code to be displayed for this item.
• Display Format–The default display format is shown. See Defining Default Display Formats (on
page 274) for more information.
• Enable Annunciator–Check this box to enable to display annunciator for this item.
10. When you have finished, click OK. The item is added to the active Display list.
11. Continue adding items to the list as described in steps 5 through 10.
12. When you have finished adding items for the Normal mode, select the Alternate and Test mode tabs and
add the display items for those modes.
13. After you have selected items for all display modes, select File | Save As to name and save the new
display file.
14. The name of the new display file is displayed on the main window title bar.

User's Manual 272


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Editing a Display File


Once created, a display schedule can easily be changed. Items can be added, changed, or removed from an
open display schedule.

To add an item to a display list

1. Select the correct Display tab (Normal, Alternate, or Test).


2. Select the new item from the Available Items list.
3. Double click on the item. A dialog box appears.
4. Specify the item's parameters.
5. Choose OK. The item is added to the list.
6. Select File | Save to save the change.
To change an item in a display list

1. Select the correct Display tab (Normal, Alternate, or Test).


2. Double-click on the item. The Edit Display Item dialog box appears.
3. Specify the item's parameters.
4. Choose OK. The item is updated.
5. Select File | Save to save the change.
To delete an item from a display list

1. Select the correct Display tab (Normal, Alternate, or Test).


2. Double click on the item. The Edit Display Item dialog box appears.
3. Click the Delete Display Item button. You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
4. Choose OK. The list is updated.
5. Select File | Save to save the change.

Opening a Display File


Open and display an existing Display file for viewing, changing, or printing.

To open a Display file:

1. If you know the Display file name, enter the name in the Display File Name box. Choose OK. The
Display file appears in the Display Editor active window.
2. If you are unsure of the name, choose the Browse button. The Select Display File dialog box appears
with a list of the current Display files.
• Select the Display file.
• Choose OK. The Open Display File dialog box is displayed.

User's Manual 273


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

• Choose OK. The Display file appears in the Display Editor active window.

Saving a Display File As


Name and save a new program file or copy and save an existing program file under a different name.

To save a Display file:

1. Enter the name of the new file or the name under which you want to copy and save an existing file.
2. Choose OK.
• A copy of this program file is saved under the new name and displayed in the Device Programmer
active window.
• If the name already exists, you are prompted to enter a new name.
• To view a listing of the current program files, use the Open... command from the File menu.

Setting Display Editor Options


Register Options

Use the Display Editor Options Menu commands to define the following Display Editor Options:

Default Formats...

Set the default display formats for energy, demand, cumulative demand, instantaneous, and power factor
display items. Formats specified include: total # of digits, number of decimal digits, display units, and use of
leading zeros, annunciators, and floating decimals. For more information see Default Display Formats (on
page 276).

Date Formats

Select the date formats. Formats include: mm/dd/yy, dd/mm/yy, yy/mm/dd, mm/dd, and dd-mm. For more
information see Date Formats (on page 277).

Annunciators Enabled

Click this menu item to toggle on/off the use of annunciators with display items.

Security

Define the security options for Display Editor functions or change the current user access for each function.
For more information see Setting Up Display Editor Security.

Defining Default Display Formats


Before you begin creating display files, define the default display format for energy, demand, cumulative
demand, and instantaneous values as well as for power factor items. The default display formats are used
when you add new items to a display file.

User's Manual 274


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Not all formats are used by all device types. For more information, refer to the Technical
Reference Guide for the meter.
1. From the Display Editor main window, select Options | Default Formats. The Default Display Formats
dialog is displayed.

Figure 147: Default Display Formats


2. Define the default display for each type of item as follows:
• Total # of Digits–Enter the total number of digits to be displayed. The decimal point is not included in
this number.
• # of Decimal Digits–Enter the number of digits (0, 1, 2, 3) to be displayed to the right of the decimal
point. For example, if total number of digits is set at six and three is selected here, then 110.99 is
displayed as 110.990. For power factor, if three is selected, unity power factor will be displayed as
1.000. If two is selected, unity power factor will be displayed as 1.00.
• Display Units–Select Units, megaunits (millions), or kilounits (thousands).
• Leading Zeros–Check to display leading zeros to the left of the decimal point. If unchecked, display
of leading zeros is suppressed. For example, if 5 digits total and 3 digits to the right of the decimal are
selected, then 5.595 will be displayed as 05.595, if displaying lead zeros is checked.
• Display Annunciator–Each register has its own annunciator which can be turned on or off as desired.
For example, the annunciator for delivered kilowatt-hours is display as kWh d. Check this box to
display an annunciator with every display item. If left blank, each register must have its own
annunciator turned on or off when the item is added or edited.
• Floating Decimals–Check to use floating decimals. Floating decimals allows a maximum number of
digits to the right of the decimal. If unchecked, use of floating decimals is not permitted.

User's Manual 275


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

3. When you have finished, click OK to save your selections. You are returned to the Display Editor main
window.

Default Display Formats


For each display format -- energy, demand, cumulative demand, instantaneous, and power factor items, define
the default format. The default display format is used to pre-fill the Add and Edit Display Item dialog boxes.

Field Descriptions

Total # of Digits
Specify the total number of digits to be displayed. The decimal point is not included in this number.
# of Decimal Digits
Specify the number of digits (0, 1, 2, 3) to be displayed to the right of the decimal point. For example, if total
number of digits is set at six and three is selected here, then 110.99 is displayed as 110.990.

For power factor, if three is selected, unity power factor will be displayed as 1.000. If two is selected, unity
power factor will be displayed as 1.00.
Display Units
Select the units for display of quantities:

• Units - Quantities are displayed in units.


• Kilo - Quantities are displayed in kilounits (thousands).
• Mega - Quantities are displayed in megaunits (millions).
Leading Zeros
Check to display leading zeros to the left of the decimal point. If unchecked, display of leading zeros is
suppressed.

For example, if 5 digits total and 3 digits to the right of the decimal are selected, then 5.595 will be displayed
as 05.595, if displaying lead zeros is checked.
Display Annunciator
Each register has its own annunciator which can be turned on or off as desired. For example, the annunciator
for delivered kilowatthours is display as kWh d.

Check this box to display an annunciator with every display item. If left blank, each register must have its
own annunciator turned on or off when the item is added or edited.
Floating Decimals
Check to use floating decimals. Floating decimals allows a maximum number of digits to the right of the
decimal. If unchecked, use of floating decimals is not permitted.

User's Manual 276


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Defining the Default Date Format


Before you begin creating display files, select the default date format to be used for all display files.
1. From the Display Editor main window, select Options | Date Formats. The Date Format dialog is
displayed.

Figure 148: Select Date Format


2. Select the date format to be used for all display files and then click OK. You are returned to the Display
Editor main window.

Date Formats
Select the default date format.

Field Descriptions

Date Format
Select the meter’s date format:

MM/DD/YY (example 10/16/95)

DD/MM/YY (example 16/10/95)

YY/MM/DD (example 95/10/16)

MM/DD (example 10/16)

DD-MM (example (16-10)

Display Editor Functions


The following is a listing of functions of the Display Editor.

User's Manual 277


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

• Display Description (on page 278)


• Adding an Item to a Display List (on page 278)
• Add Display Item (Register) (on page 279)
• Add Display Item (Non-Register) (on page 280)
• Add Coincident Register (on page 281)
• Add Time of Occurrence Item (on page 281)
• Add Peak Register (on page 281)
• Select Quantity (Register Item) (on page 282)
• Select Quantity (on page 283)
• Select Display Type (on page 283)
• Selecting a Display File (on page 283)
• Edit Display Item (Non-Register) (on page 286)
• Editing a Register (on page 286)
• Deleting Display Files (on page 287)

Display Description
Enter a brief description to help you identify this Display file.

Field Descriptions
Display Description
Enter a brief description of the purpose of this display schedule for information only.
Display Summary
This is a short status report that helps you track the file's current status.

Adding an Item to a Display List


1. Select the correct Display tab (Normal, Alternate, or Test).
2. Select the new item from the Available Items list.
3. Double click on the item. A dialog box appears.
4. Specify the item's parameters.
5. Choose OK. The item is added to the list.
6. Select File | Save to save the change.

User's Manual 278


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Add Display Item (Register)


Specify the item's display order, ID code, and display format. You can use the display default values that pre-
fill the data entry fields or enter values specific to this register display item.

To add a display item:

1. Verify that the item name is correct in the Quantity Name field.
2. If you do not want the item displayed, leave the Add to Display List check box blank.
3. Make any needed changes to the item's display order, ID code, and display format.
4. If this is a time of occurrence register, choose that button.
5. If maximum demand peak registers are used, choose the Peaks... button.
6. Once all selections are made, choose OK to add the item to the active display list.
Field Descriptions
Quantity Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list is displayed in this data entry field.
Add to Display List
Check this box to add the quantity to the display mode selected.
Display Order
Define the order in which items will be displayed on the meter. As you add items, the counter is incremented
by one.
ID Code
Each register can be programmed to have a corresponding two-digit identifier. If used, enter the appropriate
ID code to be displayed. Enter a value from 00 to 99.

Choose the OK button to add this item to the Normal, Alternate, or Test Display list. The number of items
selected for this display is incremented as shown the Display Summary available through the Display menu
Description command
Total # of Digits
Specify the total number of digits to be displayed. The decimal point is not included in this number.
# of Decimal Digits
Specify the number of digits (0, 1, 2, 3) to be displayed to the right of the decimal point. For example, if total
number of digits is set at six and three is selected here, then 110.99 is displayed as 110.990.

For power factor, if three is selected, unity power factor will be displayed as 1.000. If two is selected, unity
power factor will be displayed as 1.00.

User's Manual 279


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Display Units:
• Kilo - Quantities are displayed in kilo units (thousands).
• Mega - Quantities are displayed in mega units (millions).
• Units - Quantities are displayed in units.
Leading Zeros
Check to display leading zeros to the left of the decimal point. If unchecked, display of leading zeros is
suppressed.

For example, if 5 digits total and 3 digits to the right of the decimal are selected, then 5.595 will be displayed
as 05.595, if displaying lead zeros is checked.
Floating Decimals
Check to use floating decimals. Floating decimals allows a maximum number of digits to the right of the
decimal. If unchecked, use of floating decimals is not permitted.
Enable Annunciator
Each register has its own annunciator which can be turned on or off as desired. For example, the annunciator
for delivered kilowatthours is display as kWh d.

Check this box to display an annunciator with every display item. If left blank, each register must have its
own annunciator turned on or off when the item is added or edited.

For more information about defining the Display Format, see Default Formats

Add Display Item (Non-Register)


Add a non-register item to the selected display list for Normal or Alternate mode. You are prompted if the
item is not displayable in the selected mode or if the number of items displayable in that mode has been
exceeded.

Field Descriptions
Display Item Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list is displayed in this data entry field. This item will
be added to the active Display mode list
Display Order
Define the order in which items will be displayed on the meter. As you add items, the counter is incremented
by one.
ID Code
Each register can be programmed to have a corresponding two-digit identifier. If used, enter the appropriate
ID code to be displayed. Enter a value from 00 to 99.

User's Manual 280


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Choose the OK button to add this item to the Normal, Alternate, or Test Display list. The number of items
selected for this display is incremented as shown the Display Summary available through the Display menu
Description command

Add Coincident Register


You can add coincident registers to the selected base quantity shown in the Quantity Name field. The number
and type of coincident quantities available depend on the base quantity shown.

To add coincident registers

1. Check the boxes beside the Coincident Quantities to use with the selected base quantity.
2. Enter the ID Code for the selected coincident quantity.
3. Enter the Display Order for the selected coincident quantity.
4. If there is more than a single page of coincident quantities available for the selected quantity, you can do
one of the following:
• To view the next page of coincident quantities, click Next.
• To return to the previous page of coincident quantities, click Previous.
5. When you are done adding coincident quantities, do one of the following:
• Click OK to process your selections.
• Click Cancel to close the dialog without adding any coincident quantities.

Add Time of Occurrence Item


You can add a time of occurrence item to be displayed in the format you want. You can display the date, the
time, or both, and in the order you define.

To add an Item

1. Enter the quantity name of the item if it is not already displayed.


2. If you want to display the date, select the Display Date check box.
3. Type the order in which you want the date to appear. For instance, if you want the date to appear second,
but before the time, type 2.
4. If you want to display the time, select the Display Time check box.
5. Type the order in which you want the time to appear.
6. Select OK.

Add Peak Register


You can add peak register information to be displayed as an item. For each of five peaks, select the check box
for Display Peak, Display Date of Peak, and Display Time of Peak to display.

User's Manual 281


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Select Quantity (Register Item)


Select the register quantity to be added to the Normal, Alternate, or Test display.

The base quantity selected from the Available Items list is displayed in the Base Quantity Name field. You
define the register item by selecting from the available register options.

For example, if you selected Vh, specifying Received, Phase A, Rate B, Self Read 1 defines the following
quantity: Self Read 1 Vh (a) Rate B.

Field Descriptions
Base Quantity Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list
Direction
Display the direction that power flows to or from the meter with respect to the utility:

• Total (Net) - The sum total of the leading and lagging values.
• Leading (Delivered) - The power the utility delivers to the metering point.
• Lagging (Received) - The power the utility receives from the metering point.

For this release of PC-PRO+ Advanced, for VECTRON meter versions that support VA quantities, VAh Total
is available for selection as a display option. VAh Total is not supported in the VECTRON meter.
Time of Use Rates
Select the TOU rate. The annunciator Total, A, B, C, or D will flash when the applicable time-of-use rate is
active and is enabled to display the register values with their respective rate.
Occurrence
Specifies the season or time of occurrence of the register item.

• Current - The current season contains all the energy and demand registers selected for a user-defined
billing season. If a single rate schedule is in effect year round, then only current season registers are used.
If two or more seasons are used during the year, then last season registers are also used.
• Last Season - Last season registers are used, if two or more seasons are used during the year. For every
current season register (with the exception of the E rate continuous cumulative register) there is a last
season register for the same quantity. Last season registers can be displayed in Normal and Alternate
display modes.
• Self Read 1,2,3, or 4 - Some devices can automatically read and store in memory all energy, demand,
power factor, and coincident register values along with the time and date of the self read. A self read can
be performed at intervals of one to 65,535 minutes (about 45.5 days) in Normal mode. If used, select the
appropriate self read register.
Phase
Display the active voltage phases present

User's Manual 282


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Select Quantity
From the Available Items list, double-click to select the quantity you want to configure for the Normal,
Alternate, or Test display.

The quantity selected from the Available Items list is displayed in the Base Quantity Name field. You define
the register item by selecting from the available register options.

Field Descriptions
Base Quantity Name
This field displays the name of the item selected from the Available Items list.
Direction
Use the options in this area to select the direction that power flows to or from the meter with respect to the
utility. Options that are not available for the selected quantity are grayed out. Possible options are:

• Not Specified
• Net - The net of the leading and lagging values.
• Delivered - The power the utility delivers to the metering point.
• Received - The power the utility receives from the metering point
Time of Use Rate
Use this option to select the TOU rates to display for the selected quantity. Options that are not available for
the selected quantity are grayed out.
Occurrence
Use this option to select the occurrence period to use when displaying the selected quantity. Options that are
not available for the selected quantity are grayed out.
Phase
Use this option to select the active voltage phases to display for the selected quantity. Options that are not
available for the selected quantity are grayed out.
Aggregate
The item is measuring total voltage. The voltage phases present are not indicated.

Select Display Type


Select the type of meter for which you are creating the Display File.

Selecting a Display File


Select the desired Display file for viewing and editing.

User's Manual 283


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

To select a file

If the list is short, select the file name and click OK. The Open Display File dialog box appears.

If the list is long, use the scroll bars to browse the list of current Display files and make your selection. Click
OK. The Open Display File dialog box appears.

Editing Display Files


Edit an existing non-register item from the display list for Normal or Alternate mode. The selected item's
display order and ID code can be changed or the item can be deleted from the list.

To edit an item, double-click on the item or select the item and then select Display | Edit Item.
1. From the Display Editor main window, select File | Open. The Select Display File dialog is displayed.

Figure 149: Select Display File


2. Choose the file that you want to modify and then click OK. The Display Editor main window shows the
information for the file.
3. Select the tab for the display mode items that you want to edit.

User's Manual 284


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

4. To edit an item, double click on the item in the display list. The Edit Display Item dialog appears.

Figure 150: Edit Display Item


5. Make changes as desired and click OK.
6. To add an item, double click on an item in the available items list.
7. For register quantities, the Select Quantity dialog is displayed. Make changes as desired and click OK.
8. The Add Display Item Dialog is displayed. Make changes as desired and click OK.
9. To remove an item from the display list, click the Delete Display Item button. The item is deleted.
10. Choose File | Save to save your changes.
Field Descriptions
Display Item Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list is displayed in this data entry field. This item will
be added to the active Display mode list
Display Order
Define the order in which items will be displayed on the meter. As you add items, the counter is incremented
by one.
ID Code
Each register can be programmed to have a corresponding two-digit identifier. If used, enter the appropriate
ID code to be displayed. Enter a value from 00 to 99.

Choose the OK button to add this item to the Normal, Alternate, or Test Display list. The number of items
selected for this display is incremented as shown the Display Summary available through the Display menu
Description command

User's Manual 285


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Delete Display Item


Choose this button to remove the selected item from the display list.

The number of items selected for this display is reduced by one as shown in the Display Summary available
through the Display menu Description command

Edit Display Item (Non-Register)


Edit an existing non-register item from the display list for Normal or Alternate mode. The selected item's
display order and ID code can be changed or the item can be deleted from the list.

To edit an item, double-click on the item or select the item and then select Display | Edit Item.

Field Descriptions
Display Item Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list is displayed in this data entry field. This item will
be added to the active Display mode list
Display Order
Define the order in which items will be displayed on the meter. As you add items, the counter is incremented
by one.
ID Code
Each register can be programmed to have a corresponding two-digit identifier. If used, enter the appropriate
ID code to be displayed. Enter a value from 00 to 99.

Choose the OK button to add this item to the Normal, Alternate, or Test Display list. The number of items
selected for this display is incremented as shown the Display Summary available through the Display menu
Description command
Delete Display Item
Choose this button to remove the selected item from the display list.

The number of items selected for this display is reduced by one as shown in the Display Summary available
through the Display menu Description command

Editing a Register
Field Descriptions
Display Item Name
The name of the item selected from the Available Items list is displayed in this data entry field.
Display Order
Define the order in which items will be displayed on the meter. As you add items, the counter is incremented
by one.

User's Manual 286


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

ID Code
Each register can be programmed to have a corresponding two-digit identifier. If used, enter the appropriate
ID code to be displayed. Enter a value from 00 to 99.

Choose the OK button to add this item to the Normal, Alternate, or Test Display list. The number of items
selected for this display is incremented as shown the Display Summary available through the Display menu
Description command.
Total # Digits
Enter the total number of digits to be displayed.
Display Units
Using the drop-down box, enter in the unit value.
# Decimal Digits
Enter the total number of decimal digits to be displayed.
Leading Zeros
Use the check box if leading zeros are to be used.
Floating Decimal Point
Use the check box if la floating decimal point is to be used.
Enable Annunciator
Use the check box to enable the annunciator.
Enable Display
Use the check box to enable the display.
Delete Display Item
Click this button to delete the selected item.

Deleting Display Files


Use the File menu Delete command to permanently remove an existing Display file from the system.
1. From the Display Editor main window, select File | Open and select the file you want to delete. The
display file is opened.
2. To delete the file that is open, choose File | Delete.
3. You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete the file.

Printing and Viewing Reports


The following is a listing of the printing and viewing of the various report options.

User's Manual 287


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

• Printing Reports (on page 288)


• Report Options (on page 289)
• Print Format (on page 289)

Printing Reports
Use the Print Report option to print summary or detailed reports for Display files. To add headers and footers
to reports, use the Print Format (on page 289) option.

Use the Print Preview option to view reports without printing them. Select the report options as described
below

Reports are printed to the default printer for your PC. Use File | Print Setup to select a different printer and/or
change the printer setup.

To set up Display file reports

1. Choose File | Print Format to define the report headers and footers.
2. Choose File | Print Report or File | Print Preview.
3. Select the type of report you want to print or view: a Directory (summary) or a Detail report.
4. Select one or more Display files from the list. Click the Select All button to select all Display files or
Clear All to cancel your selections.
5. Click Options . . . button to choose the items you want on the report. For more information see Report
Options (on page 289).
6. After you have made your selections, click OK to print the report.
Field Descriptions
Select Report
Select the type of report:
Display Schedule Directory
A summary listing of the Display files that you select. Use the Options button to select the information for the
summary report.
Display Schedule Detail
A detailed report for the Display files that you select. Use the Options button to select the information for the
detailed report.
Select Schedule
Select the Display files to be included in the report. Use the Click the Select All button to select all Display
files or Clear All to cancel your selections.
Options
Click the Options button to select the information to be included in the report. For more information see
Report Options (on page 289).

User's Manual 288


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Report Options
Select the items you want to include in the report. You can also specify the width of certain data items.

Field Descriptions
Select Items to Print
Click to select individual items for the report or use the Select All and Clear All buttons to make your
selections. The items that are highlighted will be included in the report.
Select Item to Edit Width
To change the column width for an item, select the item. The current number of characters for the item is
displayed. Click the + or - button to change the width setting.

Print Format
Format your report with a title, headers, footers, the date, and page numbers.

Field Descriptions
Enable Header
Check this option to use report headers.
Report Title
Type the main report title. The title is centered on the page
Subtitle
Type a secondary title or the second line of a long title.
Enable Footers
Check this option to use report footers.
Print Date
Check to have today's date (month, day and year) printed left-justified in the footer. The date format is in
keeping with style selected in Windows.
Print Page Number
Check to have page numbers (Page #) printed right-justified in the footer at the bottom of each page.

Menus and Options


The following is a description of the menu topics:

User's Manual 289


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

• File Menu (on page 290)


• Display Menu (on page 291)
• Options Menu (on page 291)
• View Menu (on page 292)
• Help Menu (on page 292)

File Menu
Use the File commands to open, save, delete, and print new or existing Display files, and set print options.

Menu Options
New

Create a new Display file. You are prompted to select the type of meter for which you are creating the
Display file. After you create the new Display file, use the Save As command to save and name the file. For
more information see Creating a Display File (on page 269).

Open...

Open an existing Display file for viewing, changing, copying, or printing. For more information see Opening
a Display File (on page 273).

Save

Save changes to the open Display file. If saving a new Display file for the first time, the Save As dialog box is
displayed to let you name the file. To make a copy of the open Display file and save it with a different name,
use the Save As command.

Save As...

Name and save a new Display file or save a copy of an existing Display file and give it a different name. For
more information see Saving a Display File As (on page 274).

Delete

Delete the open Display file. You are prompted to confirm your request. The Delete command is only
available, if a file is open. For more information see Deleting Display Files (on page 287).

Print Report...

Print a report of the open Display file to the default printer. Before you print, use the Setup button to display
the Print Setup dialog box to select a different printer and/or change the printer setup. For more information
see Printing Reports (on page 288).

Print Preview

Display a report for an open Display file as a single page or two-pages (side-by-side). Use the Print Preview
command buttons to view the document close-up and to print the document.

User's Manual 290


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Print Setup...

Use the standard Windows dialog to change the destination printer, the paper size, source, and orientation, and
other available printer options. For more information, refer to the help for your printer or Windows help.

Print Format...

Enter the report title (up to 2 lines) and set up report headers and footers. For more information see Print
Format (on page 289).

Exit

Quit the Display Editor application. Prompts to save programs with unsaved changes.

Display Menu
Use the Display commands to view summary report on the active Display file and add, edit, or remove items
from the current display list.

Menu Options
Description...

Enter a brief description to identify this Display file. You can include the description on reports. Summary
information about the Display file is given on the dialog. For more information see Display Description.

Add Item

Add an item to the current register display list (Normal, Alternate, or Test). Selecting this option displays the
Select Quantity dialog (register items) or the Add Display Item dialog.

Edit Item

Edit an item from the current register display list (Normal, Alternate, or Test).

Remove Item

Delete an item from the current register display list (Normal, Alternate, or Test).

Options Menu
Use the Display Editor Options Menu commands to define the following Display Editor Options:

Default Formats...

Set the default display formats for energy, demand, cumulative demand, instantaneous, and power factor
display items. Formats specified include: total # of digits, number of decimal digits, display units, and use of
leading zeros, annunciators, and floating decimals. For more information see Default Display Formats.

Date Formats

User's Manual 291


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Display Editor

Select the date formats. Formats include: mm/dd/yy, dd/mm/yy, yy/mm/dd, mm/dd, and dd-mm. For more
information see Date Formats (on page 277).

Annunciators Enabled

Click this menu item to toggle on/off the use of annunciators with display items.

View Menu
Use the View menu options to select the view for which you want to define display options.

Menu Options
Normal Display

Use this option to select the Normal Display mode tab.

Alternate Display

Use this option to select the Alternate Display mode tab.

Test Display

Use this option to select the Test Display mode tab.

Help Menu
Use the Help menu options to access this online help file, to get information on using online help, and to view
version and copyright information for the Display Editor.

Menu Options
Contents

Use this option to display this online help file.

About Editor

Use this option to view Editor copyright and version information.

User's Manual 292


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 9

Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

This section provides information for defining custom schedules for use by the Self Read or Billing (Demand
Reset) program component for a CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), or SENTINEL metering device.

To start the PC-PRO+ Advanced Schedule Editor application, go to the Windows Start menu select
Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Custom Schedule Editor. Use the Custom Schedule Editor application
to create custom schedules that can be used for either Self Reads or Demand Resets.

Custom Schedules Overview


Custom schedules may be needed for irregular self-read schedules or billing schedules.

An irregular schedule is any schedule that cannot be configured using the Self Read Configuration or Billing
Schedule Configuration program components. Use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Schedule Editor application to
create a custom schedule.

This section also describes how to create custom schedules in the Schedule Editor and how to use the Program
Editor to select a custom schedule when you initialize a meter.

Only one custom schedule can be used in a program file. For example, if you use a custom schedule for the
Billing Schedule program component, you cannot select a custom schedule for Self Read.

Standard Self Read and demand reset (billing) schedules are defined within a program file. If you cannot
define the schedule that you need within the program component, use the Schedule Editor to create a custom
schedule.

You can create any number of custom schedules. Each custom schedule can contain a maximum of 300 dates
per calendar year. You can also add a description for the schedule and print a report of each schedule. You can
configure a custom schedule for a maximum or 25 years.

You can use the Schedule Editor to create custom schedules in two ways:

• Create a non-repeating pattern schedule – Manually select each day of the year for the schedule. For more
information see Non-Repeating Schedules (on page 295).
• Create a repeating pattern schedule – Define a frequency and the number of years for a schedule using the
Select Pattern dialog. For more information see Repeating Schedules (on page 294).

Schedule Description
You are prompted to enter in a Schedule Description when creating a new Custom Schedule (File | New). This
field is used to identify and to describe specific details about the custom schedule.

Select Edit | Schedule Description to edit the current description.

The description appears in the lower left hand corner of the screen. It also is displayed when you select Print
Preview. The description is included on printed reports.

User's Manual 293


Proprietary and Confidential
Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

Once complete, click OK. To return back to the main screen, click Cancel.

Figure 151: Schedule Description Dialog

Repeating Schedules
Use the Schedule Editor application to create the repeating custom schedule as follows:
1. On the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Schedule Editor.
2. Select Edit | Insert Repeating Pattern. The Select Pattern dialog is displayed.
3. Select the Frequency and Duration for the schedule and then click OK.
4. To add a schedule description, select View | Schedule Description.
5. Select File | Save or File | Save As to save and name the schedule.
6. Use the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor to create a program file and then initialize the meter
selecting the custom schedule.

Insert Repeating Pattern


You can create a schedule that has a repeating pattern by selecting Edit | Insert Repeating Date. The Select
Pattern dialog allows you to define the frequency for the schedule and define the years for the schedule.

When complete, click OK. To return to the schedule without making changes, click Cancel.

Figure 152: Insert Repeating Pattern Dialog

User's Manual 294


Proprietary and Confidential
Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

Field Descriptions
Frequency
Select one of the following options:

• First day of every month


• Last day of every month
• Week of month and Day of week. Select the Week of the month, for example the third week of the month.
Select the Day of the week.
Duration
Enter the first year of the schedule along with the number of years. Use the arrows to change the values.

Non-Repeating Schedules
You can manually define a schedule by selecting each day of each month. Create schedules for additional
years by clicking the arrow buttons at the bottom of the dialog to advance to the next year or return to a
previous year.

Creating a Non-Repeating Schedule


Use the Schedule Editor application to create the non-repeating custom schedule as follows:
1. On the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Schedule Editor.
2. Select File | New to create a new schedule. The calendar is displayed showing the current year.
3. Click to select each date for the schedule. To remove a date, click the date again.
4. To select the dates for the next year or a previous year, use the scroll bar or the arrow buttons below the
calendar. To modify a schedule description, select Edit | Description.

User's Manual 295


Proprietary and Confidential
Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

5. Select File | Save or File | Save As to save and name the schedule.

Figure 153: Schedule Editor - Select Dates Window

Editing an Existing Custom Schedule Dialog


When you select File | Open, the Select Schedule dialog is displayed. Select the schedule you want to open
and then click OK.

Follow the instructions below to edit an existing custom schedule.


1. From the Schedule Editor menu, select File |Open. The Select Schedule dialog is displayed.
2. Select the schedule you want to open and then click OK.
3. The Schedule calendar is displayed for the current year. The dates that have been selected for demand
reset are shaded in dark blue. The current date is highlighted in yellow.
4. Click to select each date for the schedule. To remove a date, click the date again. You also can right click
on the date listing on the left part of the screen to remove a date.
5. To select the dates for the next year or a previous year, use the scroll bar or the arrow buttons below the
calendar.
6. Select File | Save or File | Save As to save your changes to the schedule.

Saving a Custom Schedule


After you select the dates for each year of the schedule, select File | Save As to save and name the custom
schedule. The names of existing schedules are listed as a reference.

Enter a unique name for the new schedule and then click OK.
User's Manual 296
Proprietary and Confidential
Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

To save changes to an existing schedule, select File | Save.

If the custom schedule name will be used in the User Data 2 field on the meter’s display, do
not use the following characters in the schedule name. These characters are not available for
display on the meter’s LCD display:

Letters (upper and lower case): K, M, V, W, X, Z

Characters: ., /, \, *, ~

Printing Schedule Reports


You can print or display the dates for a custom schedule that is open.
1. Select File | Open and select the schedule.
2. Choose option:
• To print the schedule, select File | Print. The schedule is printed.
• To display the schedule, select File | Print Preview. The schedule is displayed.

Closing a Custom Schedule


To close a custom schedule, go to File | Close. If there are unsaved changes, you will be prompted to save.
Clicking Yes will save the changes.

If this is a new schedule, the Save As dialog will appear where you can enter in a valid file name. Click OK
to save the schedule. Clicking Cancel will close the schedule without saving any changes.

Initializing a Meter to Use a Custom Schedule


The following steps summarize the process of creating a custom schedule, configuring a custom schedule in
the program file, and initializing a meter to use the custom schedule.
1. On the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Schedule Editor.
2. Create the custom schedule, save, and name the schedule. For more information see Non-Repeating
Schedules (on page 295) or Repeating Schedules (on page 294).
3. On the Windows Start menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Program Editor.
4. Select File | New to create a new CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), or SENTINEL program file or
File | Open to use an existing program file.
5. Select Programs | Billing Schedule or Self Read Schedule.
6. Configure either the Billing Schedule component or the Self Read Component to use a custom schedule.
You can use a custom schedule one time in a program file.
7. Save the program file.
8. In the Communication Manager, select Communications | Logon to establish communication with the
meter.
User's Manual 297
Proprietary and Confidential
Defining Custom Schedules in the Schedule Editor

9. Select Communications | Initialize.


10. In the Initialization Prompt For Wizard, select the Custom Schedule Name.
Note: If a Custom Schedule is defined in the program file, you are prompted to select the Custom
Schedule at initialization.
11. Click Next to continue with any other Prompt For dialogs.
12. When all Prompt For dialogs are completed, click Finish to initialize the meter.
13. After the meter is initialized, select Communications | Logoff.

The clock needs to be enabled in order to go the Billing Schedule or Self Read Screen.

User's Manual 298


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 10

Using the Report Designer

The Report Designer is the tool used for creating and editing report definitions. These definitions allow the
customization of what data to display and how to display it in the report.

The majority of the screen of the report designer will be composed of the preview pane as shown below. It
shows a sample report based on the options selected in the report definition. As the report definition is
changed, the report in the preview pane will be updated to reflect those changes. Scroll bars on the right and
bottom of the preview pane will allow the report view to be moved up, down, left and right.

Refer to the following:

• Opening the Report Designer (on page 299)


• Report Designer Options (on page 300)
• Page Setup (on page 301)
• Data Selection (on page 302)
• Report Contents (on page 308)

Opening the Report Designer


To access the Report Designer:
1. Open the Data Manager application (Start | Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | Data Manager). You
might be asked for a User ID and Password.
User's Manual 299
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

2. Go to the Report Specifications tab on the left side of the screen.


3. Under Specification Options menu on the left side of the screen, click New.
4. The Report Designer window will open.

Report Designer Options


The Report Designer is the tool used for creating and editing report templates. The different templates allow
the customization of what data to display and how to display it in the report. PC-PRO+ Advanced takes
advantage of a ribbon control utilized in the Microsoft® Vista® operating system. The ribbon control, located
along the top of the window, provides the tools needed to create the report template. It is made up of a main
application button, tabs and a configuration tool bar.

Ribbon Control
The ribbon control, located along the top of the window, provides the tools needed to interact with the report
definition. It is made up of a main application button, tabs and a configuration tool bar. The application
button with the Itron logo opens the application menu with options for managing the report definition. The
tabs contain options for customizing the report. The configuration tool bar also contains the help button.

Application Menu
The application menu for the Report Designer is opened by clicking on the Itron button in the upper left part
of the screen.

New
The new option creates a new report definition. Selecting new enables the tabs for editing the report and
brings up a sample report in the preview pane.

Open
The open option opens an existing report definition. A sample report is displayed in the preview pane which
reflects the configuration of the report.

Save
The save option saves the configuration of the current report definition. If the report definition has not been
saved before, a save dialog will be displayed for selection of a report definition name. The save option will be
disabled if a report definition is not open.

Save As
The Save As option saves the configuration of the current report definition. A save dialog is displayed for
selection of a report definition name. The Save As option will be disabled if a report definition is not open.

User's Manual 300


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

Close
The Close option closes the report definition that is currently open. If changes have been made since the last
save, a save confirmation dialog will be displayed which will enable you to save the current report definition
before closing it.

Delete
The delete option deletes the report definition that is currently open. A dialog will be displayed to confirm the
deletion. The delete option will be disabled if a report definition is not open.

About
The About button displays a dialog box with information about the Report Designer.

Exit
The Exit button closes the application. If changes have been made since the last save, a save confirmation
dialog will be displayed which will enable you to save the current report definition before exiting.

Page Setup
The page setup tab has options for editing the header and footer information of the report.

Header Information

The header group contains options for entering a title, modifying the font of the title and selecting an image
for display on the report. The font type, style, size and color of the title can be adjusted using the drop down
boxes and the icons.

The Image button opens an open file dialog to select the appropriate image. Clicking on the icon will open a
browse window to locate the new image. The image will be scaled to fit on the report.

The No Image check box removes the image from the report header.

Body Information

The body information group contains options for modifying the body of the report. It contains one toolbar for
changing the font of the report body. Drop down lists are shown for changing the font name and size. A color
chart is displayed for choosing the color of the text.

Footer information

The footer group contains check boxes for selecting the information in the footer of the report. The items
available are Page Numbers, Date/Time, Specification Name, Unit ID, Caption, Font Name and Size. A color
chart is displayed for choosing the color of the text.

User's Manual 301


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

Orientation

The orientation group contains options for modifying the page orientation of the report. There are two buttons
for selecting either portrait or landscape orientation.

Data Selection
The data selection tab has options for setting the configuration items about the data that will be reported on.
The options shown will be based on the type of report definition. The load profile report definition has five
components to choose from.

• Channels (on page 302) (Clicking "Channel Data" will open the Channel Data dialog box.)
• Calculated Channels (on page 304)
• Demand Calculations (on page 305)
• Display Scale (on page 308)
• Display Digits (on page 308)
• Display Increments (on page 308)

Figure 154: Data Selection Tab in Report Designer

Channels
One of the first steps in creating a report specification is to correlate data from the MV-90 HHF file and/or the
MIF file to the information needed for the report output.

The channels group contains options for modifying the load profile channels that will be shown in the report.
There is a drop down list for selecting the number of channels to show. The range is from 1 to 16. The
channel definitions button is used to open the channel definitions dialog.

The Channel Definitions dialog is used to configure the quantity, pulse weight and multiplier to be used for
each channel of load profile. At the top of the dialog are options for showing primary values in the report. If
primary is checked then the CT and VT text boxes will be enabled.

The CT and VT text boxes are used for entering the CT and VT ratios. These ratios are used to determine the
multiplier that will be used to compute primary values.

Below the primary options is a grid that displays the channels that can be configured. Only the number of
channels selected will be shown. The quantity column consists of a drop down list for selection of a quantity
descriptor. If a suitable descriptor is not found in the drop down list, you can manually type in an identifier.
The pulse weight column is an editable text field for entering a pulse weight to apply to each load profile
channel. The multiplier column is an un-editable text field for displaying a calculated multiplier.

User's Manual 302


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

The multiplier is determined using the CT and VT ratios. Quantities selected through the drop down list
except the default "Channel <#>" and Power Factor will use the CT and VT ratios for computing the
multiplier. All Amp quantities will only use the CT ratio as the multiplier. All Volt quantities will only use
the VT ratio as the multiplier. All other drop down quantities except Power Factor will use the product of the
CT and VT ratios as the multiplier. Power Factor, all user defined quantities and the default quantity will
have a multiplier of 1.

Figure 155: Channel Data Dialog

Primary Values

A user can view load profile data as primary or secondary values. The viewer user the transformer ratio (TR
for Watts, Vars, VA, and Q), current transformer ratio (CT for Amps), and voltage transformer ratio (VT for
Volts) values stored in the data to calculate primary values. These values are defined when the service point is
configured.
Quantity Calculation
W, Wh, VA, VAh, VAR, Varh, Q, Qh Primary value = Secondary value X transformer ratio
V, Vh Primary value = Secondary value X Voltage (potential) transformer ratio
A, Ah, NA, NAh Primary value = Secondary value X Current transformer ratio

User's Manual 303


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

Calculated Channels
The calculated channels section consists of check boxes for PF, Var, and VA. If you selected the appropriate
recorded quantities in the channel definitions dialog, then some or all of these check boxes will be available
based on what can be calculated. If you select a recorded quantity from the drop down list in the channel
definitions dialog that can also be calculated, the check box for the calculated quantity will not be available.
The user can check the quantities that they would like calculated when the report is generated.

The following delivered or lag quantities are supported:

• Wh d
• Wh
• VAh vec d
• VAh Arith d
• VAh lag
• varh d
• varh
• varh lag
• Qh
You cannot remove channels from the middle of the load profile. All channels of data need
to be defined if the end channels are needed.

The following table shows the quantities that are calculated.


Load Profile Quantities Load Profile Quantities (Calculated)
Watt Var VA PF -
Watt VA Var PF -
Watt Q Var VA PF

The quantity types lead and lag will not affect the calculated quantities.
IF the following data exist for THEN the quantity is
Quantity Calculated
the service point: calculated as follows:
VA Watt and Var
VA = W 2 + Var 2

VA Watt and Q
(2Q − W ) 2
VA = W 2 +
3

Var Watt and VA


Var = VA2 − W 2

User's Manual 304


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

IF the following data exist for THEN the quantity is


Quantity Calculated
the service point: calculated as follows:
Var Watt and Q 2Q − W
Var =
3

Power Factor Watt and VA W


PF =
VA

Power Factor Watt and Q W


PF =
(2Q − W ) 2
W2 +
3

Note that PF=0 when W=0 and Var=0; PF=0 when W=0 and VA=0; PF=1 when W≠0 and VA=0.

Demand Calculations
Demand is calculated as an estimate of how much energy will be used in an hour if the current consumption
rate is continued.

( Pulse)( PulseWeight )( Multiplier )


Demand =
DemandLength / 60 min

Equation 2: Demand Calculation

Block demand is the demand based on user-defined interval lengths. The demand is simply the total energy
accumulated during the interval divided by the length of the interval as a fraction of the hour.

Rolling demand helps eliminate peak splitting. For example, a block demand of 30 minutes would be the
average power used in a 30 minute period. Rolling demand for a 30 minute interval would be one of the
following:

• (2) 15 minute intervals


• (3) 10 minute intervals
• (5) 6 minute intervals
• (6) 5 minute intervals
• (10) 3 minute intervals
• (15) 2 minute intervals

User's Manual 305


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

When displaying demand for combining intervals, the first interval's demand value equals the
total energy of all the available subintervals within the period normalized to the desired
interval length.

The load profile reports will mark the first combined interval as a short interval with a status
of “S” (indicating a short interval) when the combined interval is less than the desired interval
length. Intervals need to be combined when the number of desired intervals is not available
and usually only occurs during initial installation of a meter.

For example, assume that 15-minute demand intervals were requested. The first sub-interval
started at 1:10. Demand will be calculated by adding the energy value of the sub-intervals
ending at 1:10 and 1:15, and normalizing that to a full 15-minute interval.

Calculating Block Demand

As an example, use the following data from a 30 minute period taken in 5 minute intervals. We will assume a
pulse weight and pulse weight multiplier of 1. The demand length for each time period is 5 minutes.
Block Demand Block Demand
Time Period KWh Used
Calculation Value
0 5 5/(5/60) 60
5 10 10/(5/60) 120
10 10 10/(5/60) 120
15 0 0/(5/60) 0
20 5 5/(5/60) 60
25 10 10/(5/60) 120

Use the following data from a 30 minute period taken in 15 minute intervals. We will assume a pulse weight
and pulse weight multiplier of 1. The demand length for each time period is 15 minutes.
Block Demand Block Demand
Time Period KWh Used
Calculation Value
0 25 25/(15/60) 100

15 15 15/(15/60) 60

Calculating Rolling Demand

A rolling demand calculation is a method of measuring power that utilizes a interval comprised of
subintervals, in which the oldest subinterval is replaced by the newest subinterval number and the demand
computed. In this method, the demand is recomputed for the interval at the end of each new subinterval. The
interval length will remain constant (for example, 5 minutes).

When using rolling demand, the first interval is always the same. The interval is converted to demand based
on the original interval length.

User's Manual 306


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

The second interval is the first interval combined with the second interval. The first two intervals are
combined and are added up for the new demand interval length. The channel and interval statuses are added.
Demand is calculated based on the combined intervals and the new demand interval length.

The third interval is the first interval combined with the second and third intervals. The first three intervals are
combined and are added up for the new demand interval length. The channel and interval statuses are added.
Demand is calculated based on the combined intervals and the new demand interval length.

This continues until the new demand interval lengths adds up to the configured number of intervals.

Use the following data from a 30 minute period taken in 5 minute intervals. We will assume a pulse weight
and pulse weight multiplier of 1. The demand length for the first interval is 5 minutes; the demand length for
the second interval is 10 minutes; the demand length for all other intervals is 15 minutes.
Rolling Demand Rolling Demand
Time Period KWh Used
Calculation Value
0 5 5/(5/60) 60
5 10 (5+10)/(10/60) 90
10 10 (5+10+10)/(15/60) 100
15 0 (10+10+0)/(15/60) 80
20 5 (10+0+5)/(15/60) 90
25 10 (0+5+10)/(15/60) 90

Understanding the Status Occurrence

Using the same example, in time period 15, there was 0 KWh used. Therefore, an outage occurred.
Status Intervals with a
Time Period KWh Used
(Raw Data) Status
0 5
5 10
10 10
15 0 Outage Outage
20 5 Outage
25 10 Outage

The interval status count is based entirely on the raw data and is not affected by the rolling demand. Only one
status occurred.

The status for a rolling demand interval is a combination of all the statuses from each subinterval used in the
computation. There are three intervals that were affected by the status.

Using Demand Calculations in Reports

User's Manual 307


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

The demand calculation group contains options for calculating rolling demand. The check box is used to
indicate whether or not to calculate rolling demand. If checked, the intervals to combine drop down list will
be enabled. This allows the selection of the number of intervals to use to calculate rolling demand. The drop
down list will default to two intervals.

The rolling demand interval statuses will be shown only in the interval data section and will not be reflected in
the number of status interval counts shown in other sections of the report.

Checking the calculated rolling demand check box will also disable the interval length drop
down list in the display increments section.

Display Scale
The display scale section is used to set the scale that will be used when displaying the energy and demand
values. There are three buttons for selecting units, kilo or mega as the scale.

Display Digits
The decimal digits group controls the number of digits of decimal precision that the values in the report will
use. Use the drop down list to select the number of decimal digits. The default is 4 and the values range from
0 to 7.

Display Increments
The display increments group specifies the interval length for calculating demand. The Interval Length drop
down allows you to choose the interval length. The default option "(as recorded)" can be selected to calculate
demand using the recorded interval length.

The load profile reports will mark the first combined interval as a short interval with a status
of “S” (indicating a short interval) when the combined interval is less than the desired
interval length.

Intervals need to be combined when the number of desired intervals is not available and
usually only occurs during initial installation of a meter.

Checking the calculated rolling demand check box will disable the interval length drop down
list in the display increments section.

Report Contents
The report contents tab has options for selecting what will be included in the report. There are five options
available:

User's Manual 308


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

• Profile Summary (on page 309)


• Peak Data (on page 309)
• Daily Summaries (on page 309)
• TOU Summary (on page 309)
• Interval Data Listing (on page 310)

Figure 156: Report Contents Tab in Report Designer

Profile Summary
The profile summary section allows you to choose if minimum demand, maximum demand, average demand
and interval count items should be shown in the report. If minimum demand and maximum demand are
selected then their respective time of occurrences will also be added to the report. These selections apply to all
sections of the report.

Peak Data
The peak data section is used to select the number of peaks to be displayed. If one or more peaks are selected
then a Peak Summary section will be added to the report for each load profile channel. The values in the drop
down list range from 0 to 8.

Daily Summaries
This item is for displaying summary information per channel for each day of the report. If this is selected then
a Daily Summary section will be added to the report for each load profile channel.

TOU Summary
This option is for selecting a TOU schedule to associate with the report. There is a drop down list of available
TOU schedules. If a schedule is selected, a TOU Summary section will be added to the report for each load
profile channel.

User's Manual 309


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Report Designer

Interval Data Listing


This section is used to select whether or not to include interval data in the report. If interval data is selected
then an interval data section will be added to the display. The statuses check box is enabled only if the
interval data check box is selected. If the statuses check box is selected then status information will be
included in the interval data. If the interval data graph check box is selected then it will be included in the
report before the interval data listing. The drop down allows you to choose how the interval data should be
displayed. It is only enabled if interval data or interval data graph is selected. The drop down includes pulse,
energy, and demand.

User's Manual 310


Proprietary and Confidential
CHAPTER 11

Using the Communication Manager

The Meter Communication Manager is the tool for communicating with meters. It is used to logon and read
meters. Users can also diagnose meter issues as well as program and reconfigure meters.

With no program open and without being logged onto a device, the following options are available: Logon,
Batch Initialize, Meter Change Out, or Batch Billing Register Reset. Once logged onto a device, the
following options available: Logoff, Initialize Device, Reconfigure Device, Validate Program, Change
Display, Reset Demand, Reset Billing Registers, Reset Activity Status, Edit Registers, Clear Meter Data,
Create Meter Image File or Refresh Data Summary.

You are required to log on to the Communication Manager. The security dialog displayed requires the user
ID and password set up through System Manager. The user will not be required to log in to applications that
are launched through the Communication Manager.

Introduction to the Communication Manager


The Communication Manager application is described in the sections below.

Opening a Program File


To open an existing program file, go to File | Open Program. The Browse Program Dialog allows you to
select the program file from the list. Click Cancel to return to the main menu without making any changes.

Highlight the appropriate program and then click OK to open it.

Field Descriptions
Name / ID / Type
The program files currently configured in your system are listed. Select the program file and then click OK.
Sort Options
If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the program file you want to open, use Sort
Options to display the program files in a specific order.

Click the appropriate button to sort the list of program files by Name, ID, or Device Type.

File Menu
The following functions are available in the Communication Manager File Menu:
Menu Option Function
Open Program... Opens an existing program
Close Program Closes the current open program
Open Meter Image... Allows you to open an existing Meter Image File (MIF)
Close Meter Image Closes the currently opened Meter Image File

User's Manual 311


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Menu Option Function


Print... Allows you to print a summary of all programs or the address book
Print Preview Allows you to preview the summary of all programs or the address book
Export (Current View to HTML) Exports the current view to HTML. You will be prompted for the export file location
Exit Exits the Communication Manager

Edit Menu
The following functions are available in the Communication Manager Edit Menu:
Menu Option Function
Copy to Clipboard This option allows you to copy the content of the right side to the
clipboard to paste elsewhere (only available when there is a screen
being displayed on the right side).

Program Menu
The Program Menu is only active when a program is open. It is populated with the list of components for
device whose program is currently open. Clicking on one of the items will cause the summary screen to
change to that view. The options that are available in the Program Menu are also available on the left hand
side of the screen.

Communications Menu
The following functions are available in the Communication Manager Communications Menu. These options
are dependent on security settings in System Manager and a few based on the current state of the application.
Menu Option Requirement
Logon Offline
Batch Initialize Offline
Meter Change Out Offline and No Program Open
Batch Billing Register Reset Offline
Logoff Online
Initialize Online (Will prompt to open program if needed)
Reconfigure Device Online (Options vary if program is closed or open)
Validate Program Online and Program Open
Change Display Online
Reset Demand Online
Reset Billing Registers Online
Reset Activity Status Online
Edit Registers Online
Clear Meter Data Online
Create Meter Image File Online
Refresh Data Summary Online
User's Manual 312
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Options Menu
The Options Menu provides two options: Optical Probes and Transformer Options. These two options each
bring up their own screens to allow you to make choices about how they would like these options set up.

Refer to:

• Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog (on page 323)


• Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324)

Help Menu
The following functions are available in the Communication Manager Help Menu:
Menu Option Function
Help Topics Opens the online help file
About... Displays the version number of the software

Setup Requirements for Your Computer


This section describes how to select the PC COM ports and modems that PC-PRO+ Advanced will use to
communicate with metering devices, select the optical probe model, and set the default Transformer Options
for your system.

Configuring COM Ports and Modems


Communication with a meter requires that a serial port or modem be available on your PC. Typically, PC
COM ports and internal modems are pre-configured for new PCs.

Configuring New PCs


If your PC’s modem and COM ports have not been configured, use the Windows Control Panel to configure
them. If you need to configure your modem, use the Start | Control Panel | Modem option to configure the
modem, including identifying the serial port it will use under Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

For more information on configuring COM ports and modems, see your Windows documentation.

Port Configuration
Before you can log on to Itron metering devices, you must select the PC COM ports and modems that PC-
PRO+ Advanced will use to communicate with Itron electricity metering devices. You would normally
configure communication resources when you install the PC-PRO+ Advanced software. After you have
configured COM ports and modems, you do not need to change these resources unless you make changes to
your PC's physical ports or modems.

User's Manual 313


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

The Port Configuration dialog lists all communication resources currently used by the Resource Manager.
COM ports and modems previously configured for PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-Pro, Shop-Pro, EnergyAudit,
or other Itron electricity metering applications are listed on the Port Configuration dialog.

If other Itron metering software is installed on the same PC that you use for PC-PRO+
Advanced, you only need to configure ports once. The same ports and modems will be
available for all Itron metering software applications.

After you have configured the communication resources, you can log on to metering devices. Use the
Configure Ports button on the device Logon dialog to configure your PC's COM ports and modems.

The ports for your PC must exist in your system registry and must be available for use by PC-PRO+
Advanced (not in use by other devices) before you can configure them for use by the software. To see which
ports and modems are configured for your PC, right-click on the My Computer icon on your desktop and
select Properties. Click the Device Manager tab and select Modem or Port.

Some applications, such as PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants) may dedicate a COM port to their application.
If a COM port is dedicated to a PDA, it may appear on your Windows status bar in the active programs area.
Refer to Microsoft Windows online help for information about setting up your PC ports and modems.

To free a port for use by another application, close the Itron application or disconnect from
the metering device.

The Port Configuration dialog lists any COM ports and modems that are already configured for Itron metering
software applications.

Figure 157: Port Configuration Dialog

User's Manual 314


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Field Descriptions
Resources on Host
The communication resources (PC COM ports and modem TAPI channels) that are currently configured on
this PC for use by Itron electricity metering systems are listed.

For Itron electricity metering devices, COM channels are used for serial connection and
TAPI (Telephony Application Program Interface) channels are used for modem connection.

The Display Name is the name assigned on the Properties: General tab in the Display Name field. To view
properties, select the resource, then click the Properties button.

The Enabled column indicates whether this port is currently configured for use by Itron systems to
communicate with metering devices.
Add
Click this button to add a COM port or modem to the resource configuration for use by Itron metering
software communication.
Remove
Click this button to remove a COM port or modem from the resource configuration for use by Itron metering
software communication.
Properties
Click this button to configure the properties of the selected COM port or modem. For more information, click
the help button on the Properties dialog.

Selecting a COM Port


Follow the instructions below to select the PC COM Port PC-PRO+ Advanced or other Itron metering
applications will use to communicate with Itron metering devices. The serial port must exist on your PC and
in your PC's system registry before you add it for use by PC-PRO+ Advanced. Serial ports are preconfigured
in your PC’s system registry for most PCs.

COM channels are used for serial connections.

Itron recommends that you configure modems using the TAPI channel resource as discussed
in Selecting a Modem (on page 317).

To Choose a COM port for Communication with Itron Metering Devices

Follow the instructions below to configure a serial COM port for communication with metering devices.

To access the Port Configuration dialog, select Communications | Logon. The Logon dialog is displayed.

Click the Configure Ports button. Click the Add button. The Select Type dialog is displayed listing all
resource types supported by the Communications Resource Manager.

User's Manual 315


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 158: Select Type - COM Port

On the Select Type dialog, select COM Channel and then click the Select button.
1. The Add COM Port dialog is displayed listing all COM Ports that are available on your PC and not
currently configured. After a resource is configured for Itron Metering it is removed from this list.

Figure 159: Add COM Port

On the Add COM Port dialog, select the specific COM port you want Itron metering software to use and then
click the Add button. The COM Channel Properties dialog is displayed.

Select the COM Channel tab.

User's Manual 316


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 160: COM 1 Properties: COM Channel Tab

For Connection select Direct and click OK. The COM channel is added to the list of resources on the Port
Configuration dialog.

You normally do not need to make changes to the General and Raw Properties tabs.

Click OK to return to the Logon Dialog.


1. Repeat this process for each COM channel that will be used to communicate with Itron metering devices.

Selecting a Modem
Follow the instructions below to select the modem(s) PC-PRO+ Advanced or other Itron metering
applications will use to communicate with Itron metering devices. The modem must already be installed on
your PC and in your PC's system registry before you add it for use by Itron metering software.

Itron recommends that you use the TAPI channel resource type to configure a modem for Itron metering.
Adding a modem as a TAPI channel automatically sets up the correct modem initialization string.

If you have previously selected a COM Port for use by a modem, Itron recommends that you
delete the COM Port from the Port Configuration list and add the modem as a TAPI channel
as described below.

Follow the instructions below to configure a modem for communication with metering devices.

To access the Port Configuration dialog, select Communications | Logon. The Logon dialog is displayed.

Click the Configure Ports button. The Port Configuration dialog is displayed listing any COM ports and
modems that are already configured for communication with Itron metering devices.

User's Manual 317


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

On the Port Configuration dialog, click the Add button. The Select Type dialog is displayed listing all
resource types supported by the Communications Resource Manager.

Figure 161: Select Type - TAPI Channel

On the Select Type dialog, to add a modem, choose TAPI Channel, then click the Select button. TAPI
(Telephony Application Program Interface) channels are used for modem communications with meters. TAPI
is a Windows API that enables hardware-independent access to telephone-based communication.
1. The Add TAPI Device dialog is displayed listing all modems and other TAPI channels that are available
on your PC and not currently configured for Itron Metering. After a resource is configured for Itron
Metering it is removed from this list.

Figure 162: Add TAPI Device

In the example dialog above, the modem type shown is the one installed on the PC used for
this screen capture. Your dialog box will show the type of modem installed on your PC.

On the Add TAPI Device dialog, select the specific modem you want the Itron metering software to use and
then click the Add button. The modem Properties dialog is displayed.

Select the TAPI Channel tab.

User's Manual 318


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 163: Modem Properties - TAPI Channel Tab


1. For Direction, choose option:
For PC-PRO+ Advanced, PC-PRO+ Views, Field-Pro, and Shop-Pro, select Outbound.

For EnergyAudit, select Outbound for at least one modem. For systems with more than one modem, you can
designate one or more modems for Inbound calling, but at least one modem must be configured for Outbound
communication. For EnergyAudit, Outbound modems are used for both inbound and outbound calling;
Inbound modems are only used for inbound calling.

Click OK. The TAPI channel is added to the list of resources on the Port Configuration dialog.

You normally do not need to make changes to the General and Raw Properties tabs.

Click OK to return to the Logon Dialog.


1. Repeat this process for each modem that will be used to communicate with Itron metering devices.

Editing Port Configuration Properties


You can edit the properties of a COM port or modem by clicking on the Properties button on the Port
Configuration dialog. The Properties dialog contains three tabs which are used as follows:

• General–Define the display name and physical name for the COM port (serial port) or modem. Also
enables or disables the resource for use by Itron metering software.
• COM Channel–Define the type of connection and direction. For modems, define the modem initialization
string and the software call from the program.
• Raw Properties–The properties currently defined are listed. You can define another resource by clicking
the Add button or click Edit to change the Property Name or Property value.
Follow the instructions below to edit Port Configuration Properties.

User's Manual 319


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

1. On the Port Configuration dialog, select the resource you want to edit and then click the Properties
button.
The Properties dialog for the type of resource you selected is displayed. Refer to the online help for more
information.
2. Click the appropriate tab to select the properties you want to view or change.
3. Make changes as desired and then do one of the following:
• Click Apply to save your changes and remain on the same dialog.
• Click OK to save your changes and return to the Port Configuration dialog.

Removing a COM Port or Modem


Follow the instructions below to remove a communication resource from all Itron software on this PC.
Removing a port or modem for Itron metering software does not remove it from your PC or from your PC's
system registry.

If you remove a COM port or modem from the Port Configuration dialog, the COM port or
modem will no longer be available for use by any Itron metering software application on the
PC.
1. The Port Configuration dialog lists all Itron metering communication resources currently configured on
this PC.
2. On the Port Configuration dialog, select the resource you want to remove, and then click the Remove
button.

Channel Properties: COM Channel Tab


Use the Channel tab of the Properties dialog to set up the COM Port for direct connection with metering
devices.

If you have previously configured a COM Port for a modem, Itron recommends that you delete the COM Port
and add the modem as a TAPI channel as described in Selecting a Modem. Adding a modem as a TAPI
channel automatically sets up the correct modem initialization string.

User's Manual 320


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 164: COM 1 Properties: COM Channel Tab

Field Descriptions
Connection
Select Direct Connect for serial communication with a meter.

For Itron Metering communication, COM channels are used for direct serial connection and TAPI channels
are used for modem connection.
Direction
This field is not used for direct connection for COM channels.
Modem Initialization String
This field is not used for direct connection for COM channels.
Itron Metering Call Implementation
This field is not used for direct connection for COM channels.

Modem Properties: TAPI Channel Tab


Use the Channel tab of the Properties dialog to define how this TAPI channel communicates with metering
devices using a modem connection. For modem connections, you can define the direction of the call.

If you have previously configured a COM Port for a modem, Itron recommends that you
delete the Com Port and add the modem as a TAPI channel as described in Selecting a
Modem (on page 317). Adding a modem as a TAPI channel automatically sets up the correct
modem initialization string.

User's Manual 321


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 165: Modem Properties - TAPI Channel Tab

Field Descriptions
Direction
Choose option:

• For PC-PRO+ Advanced, PC-PRO+ Views, and Shop-Pro, select Outbound.


• For EnergyAudit, select Outbound for at least one modem. For systems with more than one modem, you
can designate one or more modems for Inbound calling, but at least one modem must be configured for
Outbound communication. Outbound modems are used for both inbound and outbound calling. Inbound
modems are only used for inbound calling.
Click OK. The TAPI channel is added to the list of resources on the Port Configuration dialog.

Channel Properties: General Tab


Use the General tab of the Properties dialog to define the display name and physical name for the resource.
You can also enable or disable the resource for Itron Metering resource management.

The title bar of the dialog shows the resource type for the resource you selected on the Port Configuration
dialog.

Field Descriptions
Display Name
Enter the port or modem name that will be displayed on the Port Configuration dialog. For example, COM 1
or Modem 1.
Physical Name
The physical name for the communications resource is displayed. This is the name of the port or modem as
listed in the System Properties | Device Manager for your PC. For example, the name may be COM 1 for a
COM port or Telepath 56K for Windows for a modem.

User's Manual 322


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Enabled
Check this box to enable the communication resource for use by Itron Metering systems.

If you disable a resource for Itron Metering, the resource is still listed on the Port Configuration dialog and
can be re- enabled later if needed.

Channel Properties: Raw Properties Tab


Itron recommends that you use the default raw properties for COM ports and modems. For COM ports, the
raw properties define the names used for the ports.

The Raw Properties tab allows you to view, add, or remove raw properties and to edit raw property values.

Field Descriptions
Property / Property Values Window
The properties currently defined for Itron Metering are listed.
Add
Click this button to add a raw property. When you click this button, the Property dialog is displayed and you
can enter the name for the new property and the property value.
Remove
Click this button to remove a property.
Edit
Click this button to edit the raw property values. When you click this button, the Property dialog is displayed
and you can change the Property Name and the Property Value.

Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog


Use this option to identify the optical probe model used at your utility. Some optical probe cables are powered
from the PC by turning on voltage to pins on the PC’s serial port. The model that you select here determines
the voltage on the PC’s RS-232 serial port connector pins to the optical port cable and determines how RTS
(Request-to-send) and DTR (Data Receive) are set for communications.

To select the Optical Probe, select Options | Optical Probe.

User's Manual 323


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 166: Default Optical Probe Selection Dialog

Field Descriptions
Optical Probe Model
Choose the model of the optical probe that will be used most often for direct-connect communication with
metering devices.

The following table shows the data values and optical port head types for the different optical probe models.

DTR Optical Port


Optical Probe Model RTS Value
Value Head Type
Generic 1 - Non-powered 0 (low) 0 (low)
Generic 2 - Powered 0 (low) 1 (high)
US Microtel 300 0 (low) 0 (low) DIN
US Microtel 500 0 (low) 0 (low) ANSI
US Microtel 600 0 (low) 0 (low) ANSI
GE SmartCoupler SC1 0 (low) 0 (low) ANSI
Schlumberger (no longer manufactured) 0 (low) 1 (high) ANSI
Schlumberger France 0 (low) 1 (high) DIN
Schlumberger Spain 0 (low) 1 (high) DIN

• For the Abacus Electrics A6Z cable, select Generic 2.


• For the Abacus Electrics A7Z cable, select Generic 1.

Transformer Options Dialog


Use the Transformer Options dialog to select the option to display electrical quantities as primary values for
the SiteScan Diagnostics Toolbox, Load Profile, and Power Circle data. The settings on this dialog affect the
view of data while online with a meter or while a Meter Image File is open. The register data in the device are
not affected.

If Display Primary Units is checked, you can change the values for Transformer Factor, CT ratio, and VT
ratio after you have logged on to a device or while a Meter Image File is open.

User's Manual 324


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To define Transformer Options, select Options | Transformer Options.

Figure 167: Transformer Options Dialog

• The Transformer Options values do not affect the data in the meter; only the values
displayed in the SiteScan Toolbox window are changed.
• For meters in the Logon Address Book, the default transformer values for each service
point are defined in the Address Book.
• If you log on to a device using a manual connection, the values in the device are used as
the default values.
Transformer Options Dialog Field Descriptions
Display Primary Units
Check this box to display electrical quantities as primary values for the SiteScan Diagnostic Toolbox. This
option also allows you to display primary values for load profile data and for the Power Circle. If you check
this box, the remaining fields on the dialog are made available when you log on to a device or open a Meter
Image File.
Transformer Factor
Enter the transformer ratio for energy quantities for the Toolbox display, load profile, and the Power Circle.
This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are connected to a device
or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
CT Ratio
Enter the current transformer ratio to use for current (amperage) quantities for the Toolbox display and load
profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are
connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum
of 7 digits).
VT Ratio
Enter the voltage transformer ratio to use for voltage quantities for the Toolbox display, and load profile data.
This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are connected to a device
or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).

User's Manual 325


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

System Manager Application


The System Manager application is provided for PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.0 and later. The System
Manager application is available to users with administrative security authorization. From the Windows Start
menu, select Programs | PC-PRO+ Advanced | System Manager.

For detailed information about the System Manager application, refer to Chapter 2 of the PC-PRO+ Advanced
System User’s Manual or start the System Manager application and click F1 on any System Manager window.
System Manager Setting Description
Default Values Define the system default values for Kh, Standard Kh, P/DR, pulse weight values, phone home
numbers, CT ratios, VT ratios, and SENTINEL display format.
Device Security Codes Define default device security codes for each device type that is programmed by PC-PRO+
Advanced.
Programming Options Define the default device programming options for each device type. Programming options
identify the site-specific values that you will be prompted to enter when a device is initialized.
DST Define Daylight Savings Time (DST) change dates and times for a defined number of future
years.
Field-Pro Settings Define user authorization for Field-Pro users including the functions that the Field-Pro User
will be authorized to perform. Define the actions that will take place when the Field-Pro PC is
synchronized with the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station.
Security Define the system features that each user access group will be allowed to use and set up user
authorization including passwords and user IDs.
Replica File Settings Define the system settings to be exported and used to set up another PC-PRO+ Advanced
system, a Shop-Pro system, or for system backup.
Meter Change Out Settings Define the actions that will take place during an automated meter change out process.
HH-Pro Settings Define the actions that will be available for HH-Pro.

Communicating With Meters


By connecting to the meter, you can view meter values, program or reconfigure the device, and save meter
values in a Meter Image File for use off-line. The following sections describe basic procedures for logging on
and off, programming a device, resetting registers, and viewing the information stored in a device.

Communication Functions for Devices


The following table lists the device types supported in PC-PRO+ Advanced. It also identifies the functions
supported for each device type.

Programming
Device Type Connection Type Viewing Data Exporting Data
Functions
CENTRON II (C12.19) Standalone Initialize All data view EDL File Export
Reconfigure functions
Reset

CENTRON Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
CENTRON (C12.19) Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
CENTRON (V&I) Reset
User's Manual 326
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Programming
Device Type Connection Type Viewing Data Exporting Data
Functions
200 Series Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
FULCRUM Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
Phone line sharing Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
Reset
QUANTUM Standalone Not supported in All data view Meter Image File Export
Multi-drop this release functions MV-90 HHF Export
Q1000 Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
Multi-drop Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
Ethernet (external device) Reset
SENTINEL Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
Multi-drop Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
Phone line sharing Reset
Ethernet (external device)
Ethernet (internal-FW
5.000 and higher)
SQ400 Standalone Not supported in All data view Meter Image File Export
Multi-drop this release functions MV-90 HHF Export
VECTRON Standalone Initialize All data view Meter Image File Export
Multi-drop Reconfigure functions MV-90 HHF Export
Phone line sharing Reset
Ethernet (external device)

For more detailed information for each meter type, refer to the online help for program components.

Connecting the PC and Meter


The metering device must be physically connected to the PC or connected by a phone line before you can
communicate using the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.

Connect the PC to the meter in one of the following ways:

• For direct connections, connect a serial port on your PC to one of the optical probe communications
cables. Connect to the device’s optical port or to a serial port, if available. A null modem may be
required.
• For modem connections, connect the PC to a modem (internal or external) and then connect the
modem to a phone line. Next, connect the device’s modem (internal or external) to a phone line. The
internal modem is pre-configured; an external modem will need to be properly set up.
For information about SENTINEL Ethernet connections (firmware version 5.000 and
higher), refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced SENTINEL Device User’s Manual. For information
about using Ethernet connections for Q1000 and VECTRON devices, refer to the
documentation for your external Ethernet communication device.

User's Manual 327


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Q1000 meters shipped from the factory are set to Customer Default Mode and all three meter
ports can be used to log on to the meter. If you have reset the meter to Factory Default Mode,
you must use COM Port 1 to log on to the meter and reprogram the meter.

Logging on to a Device
Use the Logon dialog to connect to and communicate with a metering device. You can logon manually by
entering the connection information each time you log on or save connection settings in the Logon Address
Book.

Logging on to a device opens the communication line and connects PC-PRO+ Advanced to the device;
logging off a device closes the communication line and disconnects the device.

The Logon dialog has a Manual Connection tab and an Address Book tab:

• Manual Connection–The Manual Connection tab allows you to log on to a meter by entering the site-
specific connection information for the device. The connection information is not saved. You must enter
the connection settings each time you log on to a device. For more information see the following topics:
• Logon Dialog - Manual Connection (on page 329)
• Logon Dialog - Manual Connection, Ethernet (on page 333)
• Address Book–The Address Book allows you to save connection settings for standalone and network
metering service points. A service point name identifies each device and its associated connection settings.
Once the connection settings are defined, you simply double-click on the service point name on the
Address Book tab to log on and connect to a meter. For more information see Logon Dialog - Address
Book Tab (on page 336).
For phone line sharing networks, you must connect to the Master device first and then select
Communications | Connect to Next to connect to a subordinate or slave device in the PLS network.

You must configure ports for use by PC-PRO+ Advanced before you can log on to a device. To configure
ports, click on the Configure Ports button. For detailed help, see Port Configuration (on page 313).

Notes:

• For Canadian installations using SENTINEL meters, your Employee ID must be greater than or equal to 2.
The Employee ID is set by the system administrator using the Security application.
• PC-PRO+ Advanced communicates with meters installed in a multi-drop network by logging on to each
meter individually. You must log off from a meter before you can log on to the next meter.
• For meters in stalled in a phone line sharing network, log on to the PLS Master and then select
Communications | Connect to Next.
• If power is removed from a meter during an initialization or reconfigure operation, the results may be
unpredictable. If this occurs, you should re-initialize the meter.

User's Manual 328


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Logon Dialog - Manual Connection


The Manual Connection tab is dynamically changed when you select the device type and the network type to
display the fields needed for each network type.

Figure 168: Logon Manual Connection Tab

Field Descriptions
Device Type
Select a device type from the drop-down list box. The drop-down list shows the device drivers currently
installed for your system.
Network Type
Choose the type of network connection to use to communicate with this device. The options available are
determined by the device type. Select the Device Type first to see the options available for the device.

User's Manual 329


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Standalone – Log on to a single meter.


• Multi-drop – Log on to a meter installed in a multi-drop network configuration. Choose multi-drop and
enter the meter’s address.
• Phone Line Sharing – Log on to a phone line sharing Master meter that is installed in a PLS network
configuration. After you log on to the Master, you can use Communication | Connect to Next to connect to
other meters in the network.
• Ethernet – For information about logging on using an Ethernet Connection, see Logon Dialog - Manual
Connection, Ethernet (on page 333).
• Firmware Loader Recovery – (Use only if a previous attempt to download firmware to a meter failed.)
Use a direct connection to log on to a meter to complete the firmware download process. If you log on and
the Communications menu is available, the previous firmware download was successful. If the firmware
download needs to be performed again, a message is displayed. Click OK to continue with the firmware
download.

Not all network types are supported for all devices.

Network Address
If you selected Multi-drop or phone line sharing for the Network Type, this field becomes available.

• For meters installed in a multi-drop network configuration, enter the network address for the meter you
want to log on to. Each meter in a multi-drop configuration must use a different address for log on.
Options are as follows:
• Q1000 – 1 through 253
• QUANTUM –1 through 255
• SENTINEL – 1 through 254
• SQ400 – 1 through 255
• VECTRON – 1 through 255
• For meters installed in a phone line sharing network configuration, you must connect to the network’s
Master meter before you can communicate with the subordinate meters. After you are connected to the
Master meter, select Communication | Connect to Next to communicate with a subordinate meter.
QDIP Settings
For Multi-drop QDIP network meters (QUANTUM and SQ400 meters), click this button to define the QDIP
Logon Settings. The QDIP Logon dialog is displayed. The fields are as follows:

User's Manual 330


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• RTS to Transmit Delay–(RTS to Transmit Delay) Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a
transition from the RTS On and the start of Transmit. This is the minimum time that the RTS signal is
asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid
entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
• End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay–Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS
Off. This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The
minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1
millisecond.
Direct/Modem Connection
Select either Direct or Modem for the type of connection you want. Select Direct when the PC is connected
directly to the meter; select Modem when you want to call the meter through a modem connection.

Notes:

• Use a direct connection to download firmware to SENTINEL meters.


• For Q1000 meters with firmware rev 2.x or earlier, 56K US Robotics modems are not supported.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used for both
receiving and transmitting data. Refer to Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on
page 338) for options for each device type.

Note: Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.
Port Number
Select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and
COM4 are supported.

If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button to
configure the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices. For more
information see Configuring COM Ports and Modems (on page 313).
Use Null Code
Check this box if you need to access the device and know that the device has no security code. The system
uses a null security code (all binary zeros) to log on to the device. If this option is grayed out (not available),
you can make it available by checking the Override Security Code option on this dialog.
Override Security Code
To log on to this device using an Override Security Code, check this box and enter the security code in the
field provided. If you check this box, the Security Code field and Use Null Code field are enabled. Click again
to toggle the setting to disabled.

If you enter an override security code, the system attempts to log on to the meter using security codes in the
following order:

User's Manual 331


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Security code entered on the Logon dialog (Communications | Logon)


• Previous security code used to log on to the specific meter
• A security code of all nulls
Security Code
Enter the device security code. The security code you enter is validated against the security codes already
programmed into the meter. If you choose not to enter a security code during the logon process, then PC-
PRO+ Advanced will check the default security code for the device type against the security code
programmed in the meter. Valid entries are as follows:

• CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL devices - 20 characters


• All other devices - 8 characters
Phone Number
Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by modem. This option
is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for the device phone
number.
Modem Answer Delay
Enter the number of seconds PC-PRO+ Advanced will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the
meter over a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.

The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem. Configure your PC’s modem
settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties | Connection and setting the Call
Preference for “Cancel if not connected.” Your PC modem setting for “Cancel if not connected” should be set
for longer than the modem time-out.
Configure Ports
Click this button to configure the ports on your PC that Itron metering software will use to communicate with
metering devices. For more information see Port Configuration (on page 313).

To Log On Using a Manual Connection


Follow the instructions below to log on to a meter using a manual connection.
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Select the Manual Connection tab.
3. Select the Device Type. The Network Type options that are available are determined by the device type
that you select.
4. Select the Network Type.
5. If you selected Multi-drop for Network Type, select the Meter Address.
6. Complete the Connection Information fields for this device.
7. Click OK. The system initiates communication with the device.

User's Manual 332


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

8. Once connected, the data available for this device type are listed in the left pane. Click on an item to view
the data.
9. All applicable Communications menu items are now available and the Logon command is grayed out
indicating you are online with the device.
10. To connect to a PLS subordinate or slave device, select Communications | Connect to Next and select
the address of the device.
11. To disconnect from the device, select Communications | Logoff.

Logon Dialog - Manual Connection, Ethernet


The Manual Connection tab is dynamically changed when you select the device type and the network type to
display the fields needed for each network type. When you select Ethernet for the Network Type, the
following fields are added to the dialog:

• IP Address or DNS Name


• Ethernet Port Number
• Encryption Key fields
Fields that are not used for the Ethernet network type are removed from the dialog.

Figure 169: Logon Manual Tab - Ethernet

User's Manual 333


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Logon Manual Connection - Ethernet Field Descriptions


Network Type
The options available for Network Type are determined by the device type selected. Select Ethernet to log on
to one of the following device types using an Ethernet connection:

• SENTINEL meter (firmware version 5.000 and higher) with optional, internal Ethernet communication
board
• SENTINEL meter using external Ethernet connection (Supported for SENTINEL meters with RS-232
capabilities)
• Q1000 meter using external Ethernet connection
• VECTRON meter using external Ethernet connection
If you select Ethernet, also enter the IP Address or DNS Name for the metering device, and the Ethernet Port
Number. For SENTINEL meters that support encryption, optionally enter the Encryption Key.
Device Type
Select a device type from the drop-down list box. The drop-down list shows the device drivers currently
installed for your system.
Network Address
The options are as follows for the SENTINEL meter:

• Standalone
• 1 - 254
IP Address or DNS Name
If you select Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the IP (Internet Protocol)
Address or DNS Name for this device. Also enter the Ethernet Port Number for the device.

• IP Address–If this device was programmed to use an IP address for Ethernet communication, enter the IP
address for the device (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn–Also called the dot-4 address).
• DNS (Domain Name Service) Name–If this device was programmed to use a DNS name for Ethernet
communication, enter the DNS name for the device.
Third party option boards can communicate with PC-PRO+ using the C12.19 protocol.
These boards use cellular or IP technology and tend to have greater delays as compared to
optical communication or a standard modem. This can cause timeouts when attempting to
communicate to a meter using PC-PRO+ Advanced.
Port Number
If you select Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the Ethernet port number for
this device. For SENTINEL meters that have internal Ethernet boards, the Ethernet port number is 10001.

User's Manual 334


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Override Security Code


To log on to this device using an Override Security Code, check this box and enter the security code in the
field provided. If you check this box, the Security Code field and Use Null Code field are enabled. Click again
to toggle the setting to disabled.

If you enter an override security code, the system attempts to log on to the meter using security codes in the
following order:

• Security code entered on the Logon dialog (Communications | Logon)


• Previous security code used to log on to the specific meter
• A security code of all nulls
For more information about device security codes, see Defining Default Device Security Codes.
Use Null Code
Check this box if you need to access the device and know that the device has no security code. The system
uses a null security code (all binary zeros) to log on to the device. If this option is grayed out (not available),
you can make it available by checking the Override Security Code option on this dialog.
Security Code
Enter the device security code. The security code you enter is validated against the security codes already
programmed into the meter. If you choose not to enter a security code during the logon process, the meter
checks the default security code for the device type against the security code programmed in the meter. Valid
entries are 20 characters for Q1000, CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I) and SENTINEL devices, and 8
characters for CENTRON, DATASTAR, 200 SERIES, FULCRUM, QUANTUM and VECTRON.
Encryption Key
For SENTINEL Ethernet meters with firmware version 5.000 and higher that are configured to use
encryption, enter the encryption key for this device. Web access and e-mail event messages from the device
are not encrypted.

Encryption is not supported for Q1000 and VECTRON Ethernet connections or for SENTINEL meters that
use external Ethernet boards.

• If this device is not configured for encryption, select None.


• If this device is configured for encryption, enter the encryption key that is configured in the device.
• Clear All–Click this button to clear the encryption keys that have been typed.
Configure Ports
Port Configuration is not required for Ethernet connections.

To Log on Using an Ethernet Manual Connection


Follow the instructions below to log on to a meter using a manual connection.
1. Select Communications | Logon.

User's Manual 335


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

2. Select the Manual Connection tab. For more information see Logon Dialog - Manual Connection,
Ethernet (on page 333).
3. Select the Device Type. The Network Type options that are available are determined by the device type
that you select.
4. For the Network Type, select Ethernet.
5. Enter the IP Address or DNS Name and the Ethernet Port Number for the device you want to log on to.
6. Complete the Connection Information fields for this device.
7. Click OK. The system initiates communication with the device.
• When connected, the data available for this device type are listed in the left pane. Click on an item to
view the data.
• All applicable Communications menu items are now available and the Logon command is grayed
out indicating you are online with the device. For detailed information on those options and fields, see
Viewing Meter Information.
8. To disconnect from the device, select Communications | Logoff.

Logon Dialog - Address Book Tab


The Logon Address Book provides a way for you to define and save connection settings for standalone and
network metering service points. When you create an Address Book entry, you name each service point and
network and define the communication parameters. You can also define Transformer Options for each service
point in the Address Book.

After service points and networks are defined in the Address Book, you can log on to meters by double-
clicking on the service point name on the Address Book tab or select the service point and then click the
Connect button.

The Logon Address Book in the Shop-Pro application is read-only.

The Address Book supports networks as follows:

• For multi-drop networks, you can log on to individual service points by selecting the service point name
on the Address Book tab.
• For phone line sharing (PLS) networks, you can use the Address book to define the Transformer Option
settings for the subordinate or slave devices. You cannot log on to the subordinate devices by selecting a
service point from the Address Book tab; Use the Communications menu to select Connect to Next and
log on to the other meters in the network.
• For Ethernet networks, you can log on to individual service points by selecting the service point name on
the Address Book tab.
The Address Book Create Service Point Wizard walks you through the process of creating a service point and
configuring the communication information for standalone and networked service points. For more
information see Saving Connection Settings in the Address Book (on page 340).

User's Manual 336


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 170: Address Book Tab

Field Descriptions
Address Book List
You can view the items in the Address Book in a tree view or in a list view:

• Sort by Network - To display service points grouped by network name, select Sort by Network. In this
view the service point network addresses are also displayed along with the service point names. This view
is useful when you are creating network service points.
• Sort by Service Point - To view service point names in alphabetic order, select Sort by Service Point.
Connect
To log on to a service point using the settings in the Address Book, select the service point and then click
Connect.

Configure Ports
Before you can log on to a meter, you must configure the ports PC-PRO+ Advanced will use to communicate
with meters. This only needs to be done once. For more information see Port Configuration (on page 313).

To Log On Using the Address Book


Follow the instructions below to log on to a meter using the connection settings defined in the Address Book.
1. Select Communications | Logon. The Logon dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Address Book tab.
3. On the Address Book tab, choose the service point list option:
• To list the service points grouped by network name, select Sort by Network. Click the plus sign for an
User's Manual 337
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

item in the network tree to display the service points for the network. This listing is helpful when you
are creating network service points.
• To list the service points in alphabetic order, select Sort by Service Point.
4. To connect to a service point, double-click on the service point name or select the service point and click
Connect.
For PLS networks, you can use the Address Book to connect to the PLS Master and then select
Communications | Connect to Next to connect with other meters in the network.
PC-PRO+ Advanced connects to the meter using the connection settings defined for the service point.
• Once connected, the data available for this device type are listed in the left pane. Click on an item to
view the data.
• All applicable Communications menu items are now available and the Logon command is grayed
out indicating you are online with the device.
5. To connect to a subordinate or slave device in a Phone Line Sharing network, select Communications |
Connect to Next and select the address of the device.
6. To disconnect from the meter, select Communications | Logoff.

Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing


The following table identifies the baud rates supported for each device type when Standalone, Multi-drop and
PLS connections are used.

Device Type Standalone Baud Rates Multi-Drop Baud Rates PLS Baud Rates
CENTRON Network Type: Standalone Not Applicable Not Applicable
Direct: 4800, 9600

CENTRON (C12.19) Network Type: Standalone Not Applicable Not Applicable


CENTRON II (C12.19) Direct (optical port): 9600–28,800
CENTRON (V&I)

200 Series Network Type: Standalone Not Applicable Not Applicable


Direct: 4800, 9600

FULCRUM Network Type: Standalone Internal Not Applicable Network Type: SLS PLS
Modem: 300– 2400 Internal Modem: 1200
Direct (optical port): 9600
Direct (RS232): 9600

Q1000 Network Type: Standalone Network Type: DLMS Not Applicable


Internal Modem: 1200–33,600 External Modem: 1200–
Direct (optical port): 9600–19,200 115,200
Direct (RS232/485): 1200–115,200 Direct: 1200–115,200
QUANTUM Network Type: Standalone Network Type: QDIP Not Applicable
Internal Modem: 300– 1200 External Modem: 300–9600
Direct (optical port): 9600 Direct: 300–9600
Direct (RS232): 300–9600

User's Manual 338


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Device Type Standalone Baud Rates Multi-Drop Baud Rates PLS Baud Rates
SENTINEL Network Type: Standalone Network Type: PSEM Network Type: PSEM
(See notes below) Internal Modem: 300 – 2400 External Modem: 300–28,800 PLS
Direct (optical port): 9600–28,800 Direct: 9600–28,800 Internal Modem: 1200
Direct (RS232/485): 9600–28,800
SQ400 Network Type: Standalone Network Type: QDIP Not Applicable
External Modem: 300– 9600 External Modem: 300–9600
Direct (optical port): 9600 Direct: 300–9600
Direct (RS232): 300–9600
VECTRON Network Type: Standalone Network Type: SCS Network Type: SCS PLS
Internal Modem: 300–2400 External Modem: 300–9600 Internal Modem: 1200
Direct (optical port): 9600 Direct: 1200–9600
Direct (RS232): 1200–9600
• For SENTINEL meters using an Ethernet connection, the baud rate is not configured.
• For the GE SC-1 SmartCoupler, the highest baud rate supported by the SmartCoupler is
19,200 baud.
• Check with your optical probe manufacturer to make sure your probe supports the baud
rates shown in the above table.

Connect to Next Dialog


While you are logged on to a multi-drop network device, select Communications | Connect to Next to
connect to another device in the network.

Figure 171: Connect to Next Dialog

Connect to Next Dialog Field Descriptions


Select Service Point
• If you logged on to this device using the Address Book, the next device in the network is highlighted.
Select the service point you want to connect to.
• If you logged on to this device using a Manual Connection, use the Address box to select the device you
want to connect to.
Address
Select the address of the device you want to connect to.
User's Manual 339
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Security Code
If this device requires a security code, enter the security code. For more information see Defining Default
Device Security Codes (on page 23).

QDIP Logon Settings Dialog


Use the QDIP Logon Settings dialog to define QDIP settings to log on to multi-drop QUANTUM and SQ400
meters.

Field Descriptions
RTS to Transmit Delay (Request To Send-to-Transmit Delay)
Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the RTS On and the start of Transmit. This is
the minimum time that the RTS signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The minimum delay
may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay
Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS Off. This is the minimum time that RTS
remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the meter.
Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.

Creating the Logon Address Book


This section describes how to create the logon address book. This is used to define metering device logon
settings, such as baud rates, for specific meter service points.

The Logon Address Book in the Shop-Pro application is read-only.

Saving Connection Settings in the Address Book


The Address Book Create Service Point Wizard walks you through the process of creating a service point and
configuring the communication information for standalone and networked service points.

Edit Service Point Dialog


Use the Edit button on the Address Book tab to change the settings for a service point or a network. The Edit
Service Point Dialog allows you to do the following:

• Edit Standalone Service Point (on page 341)


• Edit Network Service Point (on page 342)
• Edit Ethernet Service Point (on page 343)
• Edit Network (on page 346)

User's Manual 340


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Edit Standalone Service Point


Use this dialog to change the connection information for a standalone service point.

Modify the information on the Data Tab and the Transformer Options Tab as desired.

Field Descriptions: Service Point Data Tab


Service Point Name
Enter a unique service point name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. Service point names must be unique within each network.
Connection Type
For Connection Type, choose Direct or Modem.

• If you select Direct, also select the port and baud rate.
• If you select Modem, also select the baud rate, enter the modem answer delay, and enter the phone
number.
Port
For direct connections, select a Port from the drop-down list box.
Baud Rate
For modem connections, select the Baud Rate from the drop-down list. The same baud rate is used for both
receiving and transmitting data. For baud rate options see Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone
Line Sharing (on page 338).
Modem Answer Delay
Enter the number of seconds PC-PRO+ will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the meter over
a modem connection. Valid entries are between 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.
Security Code
Enter the security code the Address Book will use to log on to this device. Valid entries are 20 characters for
Q1000 and SENTINEL devices and 8 characters for all other devices.
Phone Number
For modem connections, enter up to 65 digits for the phone number of the device.
Description
Enter a description to identify this service point.

Field Descriptions: Transformer Options Tab

Use the following fields to define the default values to use while viewing Load Profile data, the Toolbox, and
real-time Power Circle data for this service point. Values in the device are not affected. If you select "Acquire
Values on Next Connect," the values in the meter are used for the CT, VT, and transformer ratios.

User's Manual 341


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Note: After you have logged on to a device, you can change the Transformer Options by selecting Options |
Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324).
CT Ratio
Optionally enter the current transformer ratio you want to use for viewing current (amperage) quantities for
this service point. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
VT Ratio
Optionally enter the voltage transformer ratio you want to use for viewing voltage quantities for this service
point. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
Transformer Ratio
Optionally enter the transformer factor you want to use for viewing energy quantities for this service point.
Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
Acquire Values on Next Connect
Check this box to download the transformer ratio, CT ratio, and VT ratio from the device and use the device
values to display Load Profile data, the Toolbox, and real-time Power Circle data. If you check this box, the
check mark is cleared each time you log off from the device. The values are kept as the transformer options
for this service point. To acquire values from the device again, use the Edit Standalone Service Point (on
page 341), or Edit Network Service Point (on page 342) dialog to check this box again before you log on to
the device.

Edit Network Service Point


Use the Edit Service Point dialog to modify the information for a network service point.

Modify the information on the Data Tab and the Transformer Options Tab as desired.

Field Descriptions: Service Point Data Tab


Service Point Name
Enter a unique Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. Service point names must be unique within each network.
Address
For multi-drop and phone line sharing networks, select the network address for this device.

• For Multi-drop networks, the options are as follows:


• Q1000 networks–1 through 253
• QUANTUM networks – 1 through 255
• SENTINEL networks–1 through 254
• SQ400 networks – 1 through 255
• VECTRON networks–1 through 255

User's Manual 342


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• For Phone Line Sharing networks, the options are as follows:


• SENTINEL - Master, Subordinate 1, Subordinate 2, Subordinate 3, and Subordinate 4.
• VECTRON – Master, Slave 0, Slave 1, Slave 2, and Slave 3
• FULCRUM – Master, Slave 0, Slave 1, Slave 2, and Slave 3
Security Code
Enter the security code the Address Book will use to log on to this device. Valid entries are 20 characters for
Q1000 and SENTINEL devices and 8 characters for all other devices.
Description
Enter a description to identify this service point.

Field Descriptions: Transformer Options Tab


Use the following fields to define the default values to use while viewing Load Profile data, the Toolbox, and
real-time Power Circle data for this service point. Values in the device are not affected. If you select "Acquire
Values on Next Connect," the values in the meter are used for the CT, VT, and transformer ratios.

After you have logged on to a device, you can change the Transformer Options by selecting
Options | Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324).
CT Ratio
Optionally enter the current transformer ratio you want to use for viewing current (amperage) quantities for
this service point. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
VT Ratio
Optionally enter the voltage transformer ratio you want to use for viewing voltage quantities for this service
point. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
Transformer Ratio
Optionally enter the transformer factor you want to use for viewing energy quantities for this service point.
Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999 (a maximum of 7 digits).
Acquire Values on Next Connect
Check this box to download the transformer ratio, CT ratio, and VT ratio from the device and use the device
values to display Load Profile data, the Toolbox, and real-time Power Circle data. If you check this box, the
check mark is cleared each time you log off from the device. The values are kept as the transformer options
for this service point. To acquire values from the device again, use the Edit Standalone Service Point (on
page 341), or Edit Network Service Point (on page 342) dialog to check this box again before you log on to
the device.

Edit Ethernet Service Point


Different items are shown on the Create Service Point dialog based on the selections that you make for Device
Type and Network Type. When you select the Ethernet Network type, the Edit Service Point dialog is
modified to provide the fields to define the Ethernet parameters.

User's Manual 343


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To create a service point for an Ethernet device, see Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet
(on page 359).

Figure 172: Edit Service Point Dialog

Field Descriptions
Service Point Name
Enter a unique Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. For networks, Service point names must be unique within each network.
Device Type
Select the device type. The network types that are available are based on the device type selected.
Security Code
If a security code was programmed into this device, enter the device security code. The Address Book will use
this security code to log on to the device.
IP Address or DNS Name
If you selected Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the IP (Internet Protocol)
Address or DNS Name for this device. Also enter the Ethernet Port Number for the device.

• IP Address–If this device was programmed to use an IP address for Ethernet communication, enter the IP
address for the device (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn–Also called the dot-4 address).
• DNS (Domain Name Service) Name–If this device was programmed to use a DNS name for Ethernet
communication, enter the DNS name for the device.
Ethernet Port Number
If you select Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the Ethernet port number for
this device. For SENTINEL meters that have internal Ethernet boards, the Ethernet port number is 10001.

User's Manual 344


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Security Code
Enter the security code the Address Book will use to log on to this device. Valid entries are 20 characters for
Q1000 and SENTINEL devices and 8 characters for all other devices.
Encryption Key
For SENTINEL Ethernet meters with firmware version 5.000 and higher that are configured to use
encryption, enter the encryption key for this device. Web access and e-mail event messages from the device
are not encrypted.

Note: Encryption is not supported for Q1000 and VECTRON Ethernet connections or for SENTINEL meters
that use external Ethernet boards.

• If this device is not configured for encryption, select None.


• If this device is configured for encryption, enter the encryption key that is configured in the device.
• Clear All–Click this button to clear the encryption keys that have been typed.
Transformer Options
Use the following fields to define the default values to use while viewing Load profile data, the Toolbox, and
Power Circle data for this service point. Register values in the device are not affected. If you select “Acquire
Values on Next Connect,” the values in the meter are used.

• CT Ratio–Enter the current transformer ratio for current (amperage) quantities for the Toolbox display
and load profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you
are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• VT Ratio–Enter the voltage transformer ratio for voltage quantities for the Toolbox display and load
profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are
connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• Transformer Ratio–Enter the transformer ratio for energy quantities for the Toolbox display, load profile
data, and the Power Circle. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and
while you are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to
9,999,999.
• Acquire Values on Next Connect–Check this box to download the transformer ratio, CT ratio, and VT
ratio from the device and use the device values to display Load Profile data, the SiteScan Toolbox, and
real-time Power Circle data.
Note: If you check this field, the check mark is cleared each time you log off from the device. To acquire
values from the device again, use the Edit Service Point dialog to check this box again before you log on to
the device.
Description
Enter a description to identify this service point.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point.

User's Manual 345


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Edit Network
Use the Edit Network dialog to change the communication information for a network.

Field Descriptions
Network Name
Enter a unique name for this network.
Network Type
The network type is displayed as a reference. You cannot change the network type for an existing network. If
you need to change the network type, you must delete the network and then create a new network.
Connection Type
Select the Connection Type for this network. Choose option:

• Direct–also select the port and baud rate.


• Modem–also select the baud rate, enter the modem answer delay, and enter the phone number.
Port
For direct connections, select the PC COM Port that the software will use to communicate with the device
from the drop-down list box. Note: The PC COM ports must first be defined using the Port Configuration (on
page 313) function.
Baud Rate
Select the Baud Rate from the drop-down list. The same baud rate is used for both receiving and transmitting
data. Refer to Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on page 338) for options for
each device type.
Modem Answer Delay
Enter the number of seconds PC-PRO+ will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the meter over
a modem connection. Valid entries are between 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.
Phone Number
For modem connections, enter up to 65 characters for the phone number of the device.
QDIP Settings
Define the QDIP settings for multi-drop QUANTUM and SQ400 meters.

User's Manual 346


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• RTS to Transmit Delay–(Request To Send-to-Transmit Delay) Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay
between a transition from the RTS On and the start of Transmit. This is the minimum time that the RTS
signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the
meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
• End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay–Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS
Off. This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The
minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1
millisecond.
Description
Enter a description to identify this network and then click OK. You are returned to the Select Network (see
"Selecting the Network" on page 352) dialog.

Multiple Custom Schedules Dialog


This Device Status item is available for CENTRON (V&I) devices that are configured to use multiple custom
schedules.

The Custom Schedules item displays schedule dates for the custom schedule that is active in the meter. The
Multiple Custom Schedules item allows you to view schedule dates for any of the custom schedules that are
configured in the device.

When you select the Multiple Custom Schedules item, a dialog is displayed listing all of the schedules
configured in the meter. To view the dates for a schedule, select the schedule and click OK.

Importing and Exporting an Address Book


The Address Book can be saved in a System Replica File using the System Manager application. Use the
Load Replica feature to import an Address Book file to another system.

Backing Up the Address Book


You can back up the Address Book files using the System Replication feature of the System Manager
application. For more information see Using System Replication (on page 77).

Connecting to Multi-Drop Network Meters


PC-PRO+ Advanced supports communication with the following multi-drop network configurations:

User's Manual 347


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Q1000 meter DLMS network


• SENTINEL meter PSEM network (supported for meters with an optional RS-232/485 board)
• SQ400 meter QDIP network
• QUANTUM meter QDIP network
• VECTRON meter SCS network
While you are logged on to one of the meters in a network, you can use the Communications | Connect to
Next function to log on to another meter on the same network.

An example of a radial multi-drop configuration is shown below.

Figure 173: Radical Multi-Drop Configuration

Also see Additional Multi-drop Network Configuration Diagrams (on page 349).

Comparison with Standalone Connection


To log on to a single meter using a standalone connection, choose Standalone. For standalone meters, the
software uses the Universal I command instead of a meter address. An example of a standalone connection is
shown below.

Figure 174: Standalone Connection

Loop Multi-Drop Configurations


Your Itron Sales Representative can provide you with technical solutions that will vary depending on your
particular installation. In loop multi-drop configurations, multiple meters are connected in a loop and the
signal is echoed back to the sender. Loop multi-drop configurations are not supported for this release of PC-
PRO+ Advanced.

The following diagram shows an example of a fiber optic loop configuration.

User's Manual 348


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 175: Fiber Optic Loop Network Configuration

Consult with your Itron Sales Representative for a solution that will meet your requirements.

Additional Multi-drop Network Configuration Diagrams


In the following diagrams, a direct connection is used to log on to the communication device (frame relay
device or fiber optic modem) for the network.

Direct Connection - Fiber Optic Loop With Echo


The following diagram shows a direct connection for a fiber optic loop with echo.

Figure 176: Direct Connection - Loop With Echo

Direct Connection - Star


The following diagram shows a direct connection using a frame relay cloud in a star configuration.

User's Manual 349


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 177: Direct Connection - Star Configuration

Modem Connection - Multiple Meters


The following diagram shows a modem connection for multiple meters.

Figure 178: Modem Connection - Multiple Meters

For more information about network configurations refer to the technical reference guide for the meter.

Creating a Service Point


The Create Service Point wizard in the Address Book function walks you through the process of creating a
metering service point. The diagram below illustrates the sequence of dialogs in the Create Service Point
wizard.

User's Manual 350


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 179: Creating a Service Point

Use the wizard to create the following types of service points:

• A standalone service point. For more information see the following topics:
• To Create a Standalone Service Point (on page 352)
• Create Service Point Dialog (on page 353)
• Add Standalone Dialog (on page 356)
• An ethernet network service point. For more information see the following topics:
• To Create an Ethernet Service Point (on page 358)
• Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet (on page 359)
• A multi-drop network service point. For more information see the following topics:
• To Create a Multi-drop Network Service Point (on page 362)
• Create Service Point Dialog (on page 353)
• Select Network (Multi-drop) Dialog (on page 363)
• Create New Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog (on page 364)

User's Manual 351


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• A phone-line sharing network service point. For more information see the following topics:
• To Create a Phone Line Sharing Service Point (on page 366)
• Create Service Point Dialog (on page 353)
• Communication Parameters (PLS Network) Dialog (on page 366)
The dialogs that comprise the Create Service Point wizard and the procedures for creating the service points
are described in the following sections.

Selecting the Network


When you create a new service point for a multi-drop or phone line sharing network, the Select Network
dialog is displayed. This dialog lists the networks that have been defined in the Address Book.

To assign this service point to an existing network, select the network that this service point belongs to and
click Finish.

Choose an option:

• For Multi-drop networks, if the network for this service point has not been defined, click Create New
Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog (on page 364).
• For Phone Line Sharing (PLS) networks, if the network for this service point is not listed, create the PLS
Master service point first. The PLS Connection Parameters are defined when you create the PLS Master
service point. For more information see To Create a Phone Line Sharing Service Point (on page 366).

To Create a Standalone Service Point


For service points that you will connect to using a standalone connection, create a standalone service point in
the Address Book.
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Select the Address Book tab.
3. To add a service point, click the Add button. The Address Book wizard is started and the Create Service
Point Dialog (on page 353) is displayed.
4. Enter a Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. Service point names must be unique within each network.
5. Select the Device Type.
6. For Network Type, select Standalone to create an address book entry that will connect to a single meter
using a standalone modem or direct connection.
7. Enter the device Security Code the Address Book will use to log on to the meter.
8. Enter a Description to identify this service point.
9. Click Next to continue. The Add Standalone dialog is displayed.
10. Complete the Add Standalone Dialog (on page 356) to define the connection information for the
standalone service point.

User's Manual 352


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

11. Click Finish. The service point is added to the list on the Address Book tab.

Create Service Point Dialog


Use the Create Service Point dialog to identify the service point and select the network type. The service
point name that you assign on this dialog will be added to the Address Book tab.

Different items are shown on the Create Service Point dialog based on the selections that you make for Device
Type and Network Type. The fields described below appear on the Create Service Point dialog when you
select one of the following Network Types:

• Standalone
• Multi-Drop
• Phone Line Sharing
• Ethernet
The service point name that you assign on this dialog is added to the Address Book tab.

To create a service point for an Ethernet device, see Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet
(on page 359).

User's Manual 353


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 180: Create Service Point Dialog

Create Service Point Dialog Field Descriptions


Service Point Name
Enter a unique Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. For networks, Service point names must be unique within each network.
Device Type
Select the device type. The network types that are available are based on the device type selected.
Network Type
Select the network type:

• Standalone–Create an address book entry that will connect to a single meter using a standalone modem
or direct connection.
• Multi-Drop–Create an address book entry that will connect to devices using a multi-drop connection.
• Q1000 meter (DLMS)
User's Manual 354
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• QUANTUM meter (QDIP)


• SENTINEL meter (PSEM)
• SQ400 meter (QDIP)
• VECTRON meter (SCS)
• Phone Line Sharing (PLS)–Use the Address book to define the connection settings for the PLS master
and the Transformer Option settings for the PLS master as well as subordinate meters. Phone line sharing
networks are supported for the following devices: SENTINEL, VECTRON, and FULCRUM.
• Ethernet–Create an address book entry that will connect to a SENTINEL (firmware version 5.000 and
higher), Q1000, or VECTRON meter using an Ethernet network connection. See Create Service Point
Dialog - Ethernet (on page 359) for detailed instructions for creating an Ethernet service point.
Network Address
For multi-drop and phone line sharing networks, select the network address for this device.

• For Multi-drop networks, the options are as follows:


• Q1000 – 1 through 253
• QUANTUM –1 through 255
• SENTINEL – 1 through 254
• SQ400 – 1 through 255
• VECTRON – 1 through 255
• For Phone Line Sharing networks, the options are as follows:
• SENTINEL–Master, Subordinate 1, Subordinate 2 through Subordinate 4
• VECTRON and FULCRUM–Master, Slave 0, Slave 1 through Slave 3
Note: You can create Address Book entries for subordinate devices in a PLS network for record keeping
purposes, however, you cannot connect to subordinate devices through the Address Book. You must
connect to the Master device first and then from the main window menu select Communications | Connect
to Next.
Security Code
If a security code was programmed into this device, enter the device security code. The Address Book will use
this security code to log on to the device.
Transformer Options
Use the following fields to define the default values to use while viewing Load profile data, the Toolbox, and
Power Circle data for this service point. Register values in the device are not affected. If you select “Acquire
Values on Next Connect,” the values in the meter are used.

User's Manual 355


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• CT Ratio–Enter the current transformer ratio for current (amperage) quantities for the Toolbox display
and load profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you
are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open.Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• VT Ratio–Enter the voltage transformer ratio for voltage quantities for the Toolbox display and load
profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are
connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open.Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• Transformer Ratio–Enter the transformer ratio for energy quantities for the Toolbox display, load profile
data, and the Power Circle. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and
while you are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to
9,999,999.
• Acquire Values on Next Connect–Check this box to download the transformer ratio, CT ratio, and VT
ratio from the device and use the device values to display Load Profile data, the SiteScan Toolbox, and
real-time Power Circle data.
Note: If you check this field, the check mark is cleared each time you log off from the device. To acquire
values from the device again, use the Edit Service Point dialog to check this box again before you log on
to the device.
Description
Enter a description to identify this service point.
Next
Click Next to go to the next dialog in the Create Service Point wizard.

Add Standalone Dialog


Use the Add Standalone dialog to define the communication parameters for a standalone service point.

User's Manual 356


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 181: Add Standalone Dialog

Add Standalone Dialog Field Descriptions


Connection Type
For connection type, choose an option. Select either Direct or Modem for the type of connection you want.
Select Direct when the PC is connected directly to the meter; select Modem when you want to call the meter
through a modem connection.

• Direct–also select the port and baud rate.


• Modem–also select the baud rate, enter the modem answer delay, and enter the phone number.
Notes:
• Use a direct connection to download firmware to SENTINEL meters.
• For Q1000 meters with firmware rev 2.x or earlier, 56K US Robotics modems are not supported.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used for both
receiving and transmitting data. Refer to Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on
page 338) for options for each device type.

Note: Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.
Port Number
Select the PC port to use for communication with this meter. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and COM4 are
supported.

User's Manual 357


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Modem Answer Delay


Enter the number of seconds the system will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the meter over
a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.

The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem. Configure your PC’s modem
settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties | Connection and setting the Call
Preference for “Cancel if not connected…” Your PC modem setting for “Cancel if not connected” should be
set for longer than the modem time-out.
Phone Number
Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by modem. This option
is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for the device phone
number.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous dialog. You can make changes as needed.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point. You are returned to the Address Book tab.

To Create an Ethernet Service Point


For service points that you will connect to using an Ethernet connection, create an Ethernet service point in
the Address Book. You can use an Ethernet connection for the following device types when the device
supports Ethernet communication:

• SENTINEL meters with firmware version 5.000 and higher that have an Ethernet option board
• Q1000 meters with external Ethernet support
• VECTRON meters with external Ethernet support
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Select the Address Book tab.
3. To add a service point, click the Add button. The Address Book wizard is started and the Create Service
Point dialog is displayed. For more information see Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet (on page
359).
4. Enter a Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. Service point names must be unique within each network.
5. Select the Device Type.
6. For Network Type, select Ethernet to create an address book entry that will connect to a single meter
using an Ethernet connection.
7. Enter one of the following addresses for this Ethernet device:
• IP Address (Internet Protocol Address) for this device
• DNS (Domain Name Service) Name for this device

User's Manual 358


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

8. Enter the Ethernet Port Number for this device. For Ethernet SENTINEL meters, the Ethernet port
number is 10001.
Note that a valid port number should be entered. A valid port number will be between 1025 -
65535. Contact your IT Department if you are unsure of this value.
9. Enter the device Security Code the Address Book will use to log on to the meter.
10. If this device is an Ethernet SENTINEL meter configured to use encryption, enter the Encryption Key for
this device. For information about configuring Ethernet SENTINEL meters to use encryption, see Option
Board Configuration in the PC-PRO+ Advanced SENTINEL Device User’s Manual.
11. Enter the Transformer Option information for this device.
12. Enter a Description to identify this service point.
13. Click Finish. The service point is added to the list on the Address Book tab.

Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet


Different items are shown on the Create Service Point dialog based on the selections that you make for Device
Type and Network Type. When you select the Ethernet Network type, the Create Service Point dialog is
modified to provide the fields to define the Ethernet parameters.

User's Manual 359


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 182: Create Service Point Dialog - Ethernet

Create Service Point - Ethernet Dialog Field Descriptions


Service Point Name
Enter a unique Service Point Name. Itron recommends that you use unique service point names in the Address
Book. For networks, Service point names must be unique within each network.
Device Type
Select the device type. The network types that are available are based on the device type selected.
Network Type
The options available for Network Type are determined by the device type selected above. Select Ethernet to
log on to one of the following device types:

User's Manual 360


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• SENTINEL (firmware version 5.000 and higher) with optional internal Ethernet communication board
• SENTINEL meter using external Ethernet connection (supported for SENTINEL meters with RS-232
capabilities)
• Q1000 meter using external Ethernet connection
• VECTRON meter using external Ethernet connection
If you select Ethernet, also enter the IP Address or DNS Name for the metering device, and the Ethernet Port
Number. For SENTINEL meters that support encryption, optionally enter Encryption Key.

Note: For more information refer to the PC-PRO+ Advanced SENTINEL Device User’s Manual, Appendix
A, Using the Ethernet Option Board.
Network Address
The options are as follows for the SENTINEL meter:

• Standalone
• 1 - 254
IP Address or DNS Name
If you selected Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the IP (Internet Protocol)
Address or DNS Name for this device. Also enter the Ethernet Port Number for the device.

• IP Address–If this device was programmed to use an IP address for Ethernet communication, enter the IP
address for the device (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn–Also called the dot-4 address).
• DNS (Domain Name Service) Name–If this device was programmed to use a DNS name for Ethernet
communication, enter the DNS name for the device.
Port Number
If you select Ethernet for the Network Type, this field becomes available. Enter the Ethernet port number for
this device. For SENTINEL meters that have internal Ethernet boards, the Ethernet port number is 10001.
Security Code
Enter the security code the Address Book will use to log on to this device. Valid entries are 20 characters for
Q1000 and SENTINEL devices and 8 characters for all other devices.
Encryption Key
For SENTINEL Ethernet meters with firmware version 5.000 and higher that are configured to use
encryption, enter the encryption key for this device. Web access and e-mail event messages from the device
are not encrypted.

Note: Encryption is not supported for Q1000 and VECTRON Ethernet connections or for SENTINEL meters
that use external Ethernet boards.

User's Manual 361


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• If this device is not configured for encryption, select None.


• If this device is configured for encryption, enter the encryption key that is configured in the device.
• Clear All–Click this button to clear the encryption keys that have been typed.
Transformer Options
Use the following fields to define the default values to use while viewing Load profile data, the Toolbox, and
Power Circle data for this service point. Register values in the device are not affected. If you select “Acquire
Values on Next Connect,” the values in the meter are used.

• CT Ratio–Enter the current transformer ratio for current (amperage) quantities for the Toolbox display
and load profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you
are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• VT Ratio–Enter the voltage transformer ratio for voltage quantities for the Toolbox display and load
profile data. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and while you are
connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to 9,999,999.
• Transformer Ratio–Enter the transformer ratio for energy quantities for the Toolbox display, load profile
data, and the Power Circle. This field becomes available when Display Primary Units is checked and
while you are connected to a device or while a Meter Image File is open. Valid entries are 0.001 to
9,999,999.
• Acquire Values on Next Connect–Check this box to download the transformer ratio, CT ratio, and VT
ratio from the device and use the device values to display Load Profile data, the SiteScan Toolbox, and
real-time Power Circle data.
Note: If you check this field, the check mark is cleared each time you log off from the device. To acquire
values from the device again, use the Edit Service Point dialog to check this box again before you log on to
the device.
Description
Enter a description to identify this service point.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point.

To Create a Multi-drop Network Service Point


For service points that you will connect to using a multi-drop network connection, follow the instructions
below to create a service point in the Address Book. For more information see Connecting to Multi-Drop
Network Meters (on page 347).

Select a device type from the drop-down list box. The drop-down list shows the device drivers currently
installed for your system.
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Select the Address Book tab.
3. To add a service point, click the Add button. The Address Book wizard is started and the Create Service
Point dialog is displayed.
User's Manual 362
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

4. Complete the Create Service Point Dialog (on page 353) identifying the appropriate network type and
then click Next. The Select Network (see "Selecting the Network" on page 352) dialog is displayed.
5. Choose an option:
• If the multi-drop network has already been created, select the network and then click Finish.
• If the multi-drop network has not been created yet, click Create New Network. The Create New
(Multi-drop) Network Dialog (see "Create New Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog" on page 364) is
displayed.
6. Enter the communication information for the network and then click OK. The Select (Multi-drop)
Network Dialog (see "Select Network (Multi-drop) Dialog" on page 363) is displayed.
7. Select the network and then click Finish.

Select Network (Multi-drop) Dialog


If you selected Multi-drop for the Network Type on the Create Service Point dialog, the Select Network
dialog is displayed. The Select Network dialog lists the networks that have been created.

Figure 183: Select Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog

Select Multi-drop Network Dialog Field Descriptions


Select a Network
Select the multi-drop network to which this service point belongs. If the network is not listed, click Create
New Network.

Create New Network


To define the parameters for a new network, click this button. For more information see Create New Network
(Multi-Drop) Dialog (on page 364).

User's Manual 363


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Back
Click Back to return to the previous dialog. You can make changes as needed.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point. You are returned to the Address Book tab.

Create New Network (Multi-Drop) Dialog


Complete the Create New Network dialog to define the communication parameters for a multi-drop network.

Figure 184: Create New Multi-Drop Network Dialog

Create New Network (Multi-drop) Dialog Field Descriptions


Network Name
Enter a unique name to identify this network.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used for both
receiving and transmitting data. Refer to Baud Rates Supported for Devices for options for each device type.

Note: Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.

User's Manual 364


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Direct/Modem Connection
Select Direct when the PC is connected directly to the meter; select Modem when you want to call the meter
through a modem connection.

Notes:

• Use a direct connection to download firmware to SENTINEL meters.


• For Q1000 meters with firmware rev 2.x or earlier, 56K US Robotics modems are not supported.
Port
Select the PC port to use for communication with this meter. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and COM4 are
supported.
Modem Answer Delay
Enter the number of seconds the system will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the meter over
a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.

The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem. Configure your PC’s modem
settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties | Connection and setting the Call
Preference for “Cancel if not connected…” Your PC modem setting for “Cancel if not connected” should be
set for longer than the modem time-out.
Phone Number
Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by modem. This option
is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for the device phone
number.
QDIP Settings
For Multi-drop QDIP network meters (QUANTUM and SQ400), define the QDIP Logon Settings:

• RTS to Transmit Delay–(RTS to Transmit Delay) Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a
transition from the RTS On and the start of Transmit. This is the minimum time that the RTS signal is
asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid
entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1 millisecond.
• End Transmit to Drop RTS Delay–Set the time (in milliseconds) to delay between Transmit and RTS
Off. This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The
minimum delay may be increased by the meter. Valid entries are 1 to 255 milliseconds. The default is 1
millisecond.)
Network Description
Enter a description as desired.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous dialog. You can make changes as needed.

User's Manual 365


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Finish
Click Finish to create the service point. You are returned to the Address Book tab.

To Create a Phone Line Sharing Service Point


For SENTINEL PLS Master service points that you will connect to using a phone line sharing (PLS) network
connection, you can create a service point in the Address Book. You can use the Address Book to connect to
phone line sharing Master service points and then use the Communications menu item Connect to Next to
connect to other meters in the PLS network.

Note: You can add the SENTINEL PLS Subordinate meters to the Address Book for record keeping purposes,
however for the current release of PC-PRO+ Advanced, you cannot use the Address Book to connect to a
Subordinate meter.
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Select the Address Book tab.
3. To add a service point, click the Add button. The Address Book wizard is started and the Create Service
Point dialog is displayed.
4. Complete the Create Service Point Dialog (on page 353) identifying the PLS network type and PLS
network address for this service point and then click Next.
5. Choose an option:
• If you selected Master Device for the network address, the Communication Parameters (PLS
Network) Dialog (on page 366) is displayed for you to define the communication information for the
PLS network.
• If you selected a Subordinate for the network address, the Select Network (see "Selecting the
Network" on page 352) Dialog is displayed for you to select the PLS network for this service point.
Select the network.
6. Click Finish.

Communication Parameters (PLS Network) Dialog


If you selected PLS for the Network Type and Master for the Network Address on the Create Service Point
dialog, the Communication Parameters dialog is displayed. Use the Communication Parameters dialog to
define the parameters the system will use to log on to the PLS Master.

User's Manual 366


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 185: Communication Parameters (PLS Network) Dialog

PLS Communication Parameters Dialog Field Descriptions


Network Name
Enter a name to identify this network.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used for both receiving
and transmitting data. Refer to Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on page 338)
for options for each device type.

Note: Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.
Modem Answer Delay
Enter the number of seconds the system will wait for the meter to answer when you are calling the meter over
a modem connection. Valid entries are from 30-179 seconds. The default is 45.

The modem answer delay does not control the time-out on your PC’s modem. Configure your PC’s modem
settings in Windows by going to Control Panel | Modems | Properties | Connection and setting the Call
Preference for “Cancel if not connected…” Your PC modem setting for “Cancel if not connected” should be
set for longer than the modem time-out.

User's Manual 367


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Phone Number
Enter the telephone number of the device to call when communicating with the device by modem. This option
is enabled when the Modem button is selected. You can enter a maximum of 65 digits for the device phone
number.
Network Description
Enter a description as desired.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous dialog. You can make changes as needed.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point. You are returned to the Address Book tab.

Select PLS Network


If you selected Phone Line Sharing for the Network Type on the Create Service Point dialog, the Select
Network dialog is displayed. The Select Network dialog lists the networks that have been created.

Figure 186: Select PLS Network Dialog

Select PLS Network Dialog Field Descriptions


Select a Network
Select the phone line sharing network to which this service point belongs. If the network for this service point
is not listed, create the PLS Master service point first. The PLS Connection Parameters are defined when you
create the PLS Master service point. For more information see To Create a Phone Line Sharing Service
Point (on page 366).

User's Manual 368


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Back
Click Back to return to the previous dialog. You can make changes as needed.
Finish
Click Finish to create the service point. You are returned to the Address Book tab.

Controlling Metering Device Information


The following describes the PC-PRO+ Advanced functions that control the operation of a metering device.

Initializing a Device
The initialization process programs the device with all the configuration data in the selected program file,
erasing and writing over all register data and existing program information. You must open a program file to
initialize a device.

Before initializing a device that has been in operation, be sure the data have been uploaded.
Data will be erased when you initialize the meter. For more information see Creating a
Meter Image File (on page 429) and Exporting MV-90 HHF Load Profile Data (on page
428).

If you are initializing a meter that will be networked in a phone line sharing network, see Initializing Phone
Line Sharing Devices (on page 378).

Initializing a device programs the device with all the configuration data in the selected program file. When
you initialize a device, the existing program information in the meter is written over and, optionally, all billing
register data is erased. You can use the Initialization function to program a device for the first time or to
completely reprogram a device that has been in operation, for example, a device that has been moved to a new
location.

PC-PRO+ Advanced supports three ways to initialize meters:

• Initialize one meter–For more information see To Initialize a Single Meter (on page 370).
• Batch Initialization–Batch initialization simplifies the process of initializing more than one meter using
the same program file. For more information see To Use Batch Initialization (on page 371).
• Meter Change Out–The Meter Change Out process automates the process of swapping out one meter for
another meter of the same device type and using the same program file. For more information see To Use
Meter Change Out (on page 375).
If you have defined programming options that allow you to change site-specific information, such as unit ID,
during the initialization process you are prompted to enter the site-specific values.

When you initialize a meter, a message is displayed asking if you want to clear (reset) billing registers. For
SENTINEL meters, if you select No (do not clear billing registers), in some cases billing registers are still
cleared.

User's Manual 369


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

For example, if the energy registers are changed in the configuration (added or subtracted), all billing registers
including energy, demand, energy TOU rate data, and demand TOU rate data are cleared.

Secondly, if the demand registers are changed in the configuration (added or subtracted), all demand billing
registers, including demand TOU rate data are cleared. Additionally, for meters with firmware version 2.040
or earlier, energy TOU registers are cleared as well when demand registers are cleared.

• To avoid problems, Itron recommends that you not initialize meters within 2 hours before
and 2 hours after a Daylight Savings Time change (the Spring or Fall DST time change).
• Canadian installations of the SENTINEL meter do not permit re-initialization of the meter
after it is placed in service.
• For Q1000 meters, if you try to initialize or reconfigure a meter with a program file that
will overload the meter's CPU, a message is displayed. You can click the Show Details
button to display the program components that are consuming a large percentage of the
CPU. The initialization or reconfigure will fail until the CPU burden is reduced to an
acceptable level. You must change the program file as needed to reduce the CPU usage.

To Initialize a Single Meter


After you have created the program file, follow the instructions below to initialize a meter.
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On/Off the
Meter.
2. Select File | Open and open the program file you want to use to initialize the device.
3. Choose Communications | Initialize Device.
A warning is displayed, “Initializing a device will reset all data. Continue?” You must click Yes to
initialize the device.
4. Do one of the following:
• Click Yes to continue with the initialization. Go to the next step.
• Click No to cancel the initialization process.

User's Manual 370


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

5. If Programming Options are defined for your system, you are prompted to enter the site-specific values for
this meter. Click the Help button on each dialog for more information.

Figure 187: Example Prompt-For Dialog


6. Complete each prompt-for dialog as desired for this meter and then click Next or Finish.
The initialization begins and progress dialogs are displayed.

Figure 188: Initialization Progress Window


7. The meter is initialized.
8. After successfully initializing the device, the device server logs off from the meter.
If you try to initialize or reconfigure a Q1000 meter using a program file that will overload
the meter’s CPU, a message is displayed. You can click the Show Details button on the
message to display the registers that are consuming a large percentage of the meter’s CPU.
The initialization or reconfigure will fail until you modify the program to reduce the CPU
burden to an acceptable level.

To Use Batch Initialization


This option is available on the Communications menu before you log on to a device.

User's Manual 371


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

The Batch Initialization feature simplifies the process of initializing several devices in the meter shop using
the same program file and using an optical probe connection. This feature allows you to select the program
file one time and program multiple meters in sequence.

To initialize more than one device using the same program file, log on to the first device using the Batch
Initialization option on the Communications menu. For more information about initializing devices see
Initializing a Device (on page 369).

The Batch Initialization option is only available on the Communications menu before you log on to a device.

Before initializing a device that has been in operation, be sure the data have been uploaded.
Data will be erased when you initialize the meter. For more information see Creating a
Meter Image File (on page 429) and Exporting MV-90 HHF Load Profile Data (on page
428).

After you have created the program file, follow the instructions below to initialize more than one meter using
the same program file.
1. Connect the optical probe to the optical port of the first meter you want to initialize.
2. Open the program file that contains the configuration that you want to use to initialize the meters.
3. Select Communications | Batch Initialization.
4. Select the baud rate for communication with the device. For more information see Baud Rates -
Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on page 338).
5. Select the PC COM Port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 is the default. COM 2, COM3,
and COM 4 are also supported.
Note: If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button to
configure the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices. For more information see
Configuring COM Ports and Modems (on page 313).
6. Click OK to proceed with initializing the first meter.
7. You are prompted to enter or select any site-specific values for this meter. Complete each prompt-for
dialog as desired for this meter and then click Next or Finish.

User's Manual 372


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

8. The initialization begins and progress dialogs are displayed. When the initialization is competed, the
device server logs off from the meter and the Batch Initialization-Continue dialog is displayed.

Figure 189: Batch Initialization - Continue


9. Connect the optical probe to the next meter to be programmed using this program file and then click OK.
The prompt-for dialogs are displayed and the initialization sequence proceeds as described in the previous
step.
10. When you have finished programming meters using this program file, on the Batch Initialization-Continue
dialog, click Cancel to close the dialog and end the Batch Initialization process.

Batch Initialization Dialog


To initialize more than one meter using the program file that is currently open, do the following:

• Connect the optical probe to the meter.


• Select the communication settings and then click OK.

Figure 190: Batch Initialization

User's Manual 373


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Field Descriptions
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate for communication with this device. For more information see Baud Rates - Standalone,
Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on page 338).
Port Number
Select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and
COM4 are supported.

Note: If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button to configure
the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices. For more information see Port Configuration
(on page 313).

Select a Program for Initialization


Select the program file from the list and then click OK. To return to the main screen without making any
changes, click Cancel.

Figure 191: Select a Program for Initialization Dialog

Field Descriptions
Name / ID / Type
The program files currently configured in your system are listed. Select the program file and then click OK.
Sort Options
If the list of program files is long and you have difficulty finding the program file you want to open, use Sort
Options to display the program files in a specific order.

Click the appropriate button to sort the list of program files by Name, ID, or Device Type.

User's Manual 374


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To Use Meter Change Out


This option is available on the Communications menu before you log on to a device.

The Meter Change Out feature automates the process of switching out one meter for another meter of the
same device type and using the same program file. The program file currently in the meter must exist on the
PC. You can set up the Meter Change Out process in the System Manager to perform the following functions:

• Create a data file (MV-90 HHF, Meter Image File, or both) before the old meter is changed out
• Copy the editable registers from the old meter to the new meter
• Allow you to Edit Registers
After the Meter Change Out Settings are defined in the System Manager, the settings are used for the Meter
Change functions in Field-Pro, Shop-Pro, and PC-PRO+ Advanced.

The automated Meter Change Out process is described in the steps below.
1. Select Communications | Meter Change Out. The Meter Change Out - Logon dialog is displayed. For
more information see Meter Change Out Logon Dialog (on page 376).
2. Connect the optical probe to the optical port of the old meter.
3. Select the Device Type, Baud Rate and Port Number and then click OK.
The Meter Change Out process connects to the old meter. A status window lists the action taking place.
4. The Meter Change Out Process checks to be sure the Program ID is present in the database. If the Program
ID is not found, an error message is generated and the process is stopped.
5. If Create Data File was selected in the Meter Change Out settings in the System Manager application, the
data file is created and stored to the location selected in the Meter Change Out Settings. The name of the
data file is listed in the Meter Change Out Status window.
Note: This step is skipped if the System Manager setting was set to Do Not Perform This Step.
6. The Meter Change Out process gathers the following information from the meter:
• Program ID and Unit ID
• Register values
• Editable Register list
Notes:
• Register values for registers that are editable for the device type are retrieved.
• For SENTINEL meters with firmware version 2.067 and earlier, TOU demand rated quantities are not
retrieved from the old meter. (These registers were not editable for this version of firmware.) After the
new meter is installed and initialized (a SENTINEL meter with firmware version 5.000 or later), TOU
demand rated quantities will show values of zero. For these meters, define Meter Change Out Settings
(System Manager application) to perform the Edit Registers step and manually enter these values
during Meter Change Out.

User's Manual 375


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

7. The Meter Change Out - Continue dialog is displayed. An example is shown below.

Figure 192: Meter Change Out - Continue


8. Choose an option:
• Physically uninstall the old meter, install the new meter, connect the optical probe to the new meter
and then click OK.
• Click Cancel to discontinue the Meter Change Out process.
If you choose OK, the initialization process is started and the initialization prompt-for dialogs for the
device type are displayed.
9. Complete the initialization prompt-for dialogs as desired. For information about the prompt-for dialogs,
click the help button on the dialog or refer to the user’s manual for the device type.
10. Values for registers that were editable in the old meter are copied to the new meter based on the Meter
Change Out settings in the System Manager application.
Notes:
• This step is skipped if the System Manager setting was set to Do Not Perform This Step.
• For CENTRON and VECTRON meters, the Demand Reset Count and Minutes on Battery are also
copied to the new meter.
11. If the Edit Registers option was selected in the Meter Change Out settings, the Edit Registers dialog is
displayed. Enter new register values as desired and then click Save. For more information about editing
registers, see Editing Register Values (on page 390).
12. Register values are updated in the new meter, you are logged off from the meter, and the Meter Change
Out Status window shows Meter Change Out Complete.
13. Click Close to close the window.

Meter Change Out Logon Dialog


Use the Meter Change Out Logon dialog to define the communication settings for logging on to a meter using
the Meter Change Out function.

User's Manual 376


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 193: Meter Change Out - Logon

Field Descriptions
Device Type
Select a device type from the drop-down list box.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate that the system will use to log on to the meter. The same baud rate is used for both
receiving and transmitting data. Refer to Baud Rates - Standalone, Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on
page 338) for options for each device type.

Note: Use the baud rate programmed into the meter unless the meter uses autobaud sensing.
(COM) Port Number
For direct connections, select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default),
COM2, COM3, and COM4 are supported.

Note: If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button on the Logon
dialog to configure the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices. For more information see
Configuring COM Ports and Modems (on page 313).

Initialization Prompt For Dialogs


If programming options were defined in the System Manager application for the device type, you are
prompted to enter certain site-specific information for individual meters when you initialize them. The Prompt
For dialogs and the items available on each dialog vary depending on the type of meter and the programming
options selected in the System Manager application.

For more information about the Prompt-For dialogs for each device type, refer to the user’s manual for the
device type.

User's Manual 377


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Initializing Phone Line Sharing Devices


To initialize phone line sharing subordinate meters, you must log on to each subordinate device using a
Standalone connection. When you initialize each meter, you are prompted to select the phone line sharing
address for the individual device. After meters are initialized you can use PC-PRO+ Advanced to log on to the
phone line sharing Master and then use Communication | Connect to Next to connect to subordinate meters in
the network in a single phone call.

You must initialize each meter using a Standalone connection before you can connect to meters using a Phone
Line Sharing network connection. Follow the steps below to initialize a meter that will be installed in a phone
line sharing network configuration.
1. Create the program file for the meter configuring the modem for phone line sharing.
2. On the Communication | Logon dialog, use Network Type Standalone and use a direct or modem
connection to communicate with the device.
3. Select Communications | Initialize and then select the program file to use to configure the meter.
4. When prompted during the initialization process, select the phone line sharing address for this meter.
5. If prompted, enter other device-specific information for the meter. The device is initialized based on the
configuration in the program file and the device-specific information entered in the prompt-for
initialization dialogs.
6. Select Communications | Log Off.
7. Initialize the other devices for the network as described in steps 2 through 7.
Note: After you have initialized the devices and installed the network, connect to the Master device first, then
use Communication | Connect to Next to communicate with subordinate meters in the network.

Reconfiguring a Device
The Reconfigure option allows you to reconfigure certain meter program components without initializing the
meter, which would result in a loss of meter data. When you reconfigure a meter, each component that you
select to reconfigure is impacted, but the other non-related components are not affected.

When you reconfigure a device, you select individual program components to be reconfigured; no other
program components or registers are affected. The program components that are available to be reconfigured
are determined by the type of device to which you are logged on and the meter’s firmware.

The reconfigure options vary for each device type. Detailed information about reconfiguring devices is given
in the User Manual for each device type or click the Help button on each Reconfigure dialog.

Controlling Meter Operation


This section describes how to use PC-PRO+ Advanced program files. It explains common tasks and provides
suggestions for using the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.

It also describes the PC-PRO+ Advanced functions that control the operation of a metering device.

User's Manual 378


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

The device control functions are available while you are communicating with a device. You can initialize
devices, change the meter display mode, reconfigure, and perform various reset functions.

Validating a Program
While you are logged on to a device and while a program file is open, the Validate Program option is
available on the Communications menu. The Validation Results window displays the program value and
meter value so you can identify and resolve any inconsistencies.

To Validate a Program
While you are logged on to a meter you can compare the program in the meter with a program file that is
open.
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Select File | Open and open the program file you want to compare.
3. Choose Communications | Validate Program. The Program File values and Meter values that are
different are listed.

Validation Results Dialog


On the Validation Results dialog, a listed inconsistency indicates an unusable value present in your program.
You must resolve any inconsistency before using your program. Failure to resolve inconsistencies before
using the program can lead to data loss.

A listed inconsistency indicates an unusable value present in your program. There are two exceptions to this
rule. Under the following circumstances, meter data may be different from program file data and still be
correct:

• When you initialize a meter (Communications | Initialize Device) on the prompt-for dialogs you can
enter different site-specific data for individual meters using the same program file.
• When you reconfigure a meter, you can change limited program components leaving the other program
components (and related data) unchanged.
Both of these methods will result in the meter configuration being different from the program file. These
differences are displayed when you use the Validate function while communicating with a meter.

User's Manual 379


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 194: Validation Results Dialog

Field Descriptions
Statistics
This area lists both the number of items validated and the number of inconsistencies found in your program.
Inconsistencies Window
If any inconsistencies exist in your program, this window displays a detailed list of them. When an
inconsistency occurs, it may be because the device does not support the component for which it has been
programmed.

To resolve an inconsistency, you must change the setting on the listed component. After making the changes,
save the program, and then perform another program validation.

To correct an inconsistency in your program


1. From the Program Menu, choose the program component in which the inconsistency exists.
2. Change the setting for the item listed in the Validation Results window.
3. Click OK, and then choose Save from the File Menu. Your new setting is saved.
4. From the Communications menu, choose Validate Meter. Your program is evaluated, and the Validation
Results window is displayed.
You can also double-click an item to open its associated configuration window, and then make your changes.

User's Manual 380


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Changing Display Modes


Use the Change Display Modes option to remotely change the device's display modes while online with the
meter. You can switch to Alternate Mode or Test Mode from Normal Mode. While in Alternate Mode or Test
Mode, the display scrolls through the programmed Alternate or Test Mode display sequence until the Mode
Timeout has expired.

For SENTINEL meters, while you are in Test Mode, you can enter Test Alternate Mode.

To Change Display Modes


By default, the meter display shows the Normal mode information. While you are logged on to a meter you
can change the meter’s display mode to Alternate or Test.
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Choose Communications | Change Display Mode.
The Change Display Mode dialog is displayed.
3. Select the display mode you want to use. Test Mode display will put the meter in test mode for the
specified number of minutes.
4. Continue with other online functions or select Communications | Logoff to log off the device.

Change Display Modes Dialog


The Change Display Modes option is available on the Communications menu while you are logged on to a
device.

Figure 195: Change Display Modes Dialog

User's Manual 381


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Field Descriptions
Select Display Mode
Select the display mode. Your choices are:

• Normal-This option changes the display to the Normal operating mode. Normal mode is not available
from Alternate mode.
• Alternate-This option changes the display from Normal mode to Alternate mode. If the meter is
programmed for auto scroll, the alternate display list cycles through the registers once and returns to
normal mode. If the meter is programmed for manual advance, selecting Alternate moves to the next
register in the display list.
• Test-This option changes the meter to Test mode. When you are in Test mode, you can return to Normal
mode at any time by selecting Normal. For Q1000 meters, modify the Test mode operation in the Test
Mode Parameters section below. You can return to Normal mode at any time by selecting Normal.
• Test Alternate-This field is available for certain device types while the meter is in Test mode. This mode
changes the display to Test Alternate mode.
Note: This field is not available for Q1000 meters.
Test Mode Parameters
For Q1000 meters, while the meter is in Test mode you can set the following test mode parameters:

• Duration of the test in minutes


• Demand interval length in minutes
• Kh value you want to use in your test
When these values are specified, the meter uses these parameters instead of the meter's programmed values
for this Test mode session only. Placing the meter in Test mode from the switch on the meter face at a later
time will use the meter's programmed test mode parameters.

Note: These fields are not available for SENTINEL meters.


Advance
This button is available for Q1000 meters while the meter is in Test mode. When you click this button in Test
mode, the display list advances by one register if manual scroll is enabled.

Note: This field is not available for SENTINEL meters.

Setting the Device Clock


While you are logged on to a device, the Set Device Clock option is available on the Communications menu.
Use this option to remotely set the device clock to match the PC clock time. This change can be made without
affecting any other meter values.

User's Manual 382


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To Set the Device Clock


Use the date and time of the PC to set the date and time of the device clock or offset the time from the PC
time.
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Choose the Communications | Set Device Clock option.
3. The Set Device Clock dialog is displayed showing the current system date and time, the date and time in
the meter, and the difference between the two.
4. Choose a method of setting the clock:
• Set device time to system time–The meter time will be synchronized with the PC clock’s system
time.
• Offset device time from system time–The device time will be adjusted to the system time with an
offset of the number of minutes entered.
5. If you selected Offset device time above, enter the Minutes to Offset. Enter the amount of time in minutes
that you want the time on the device to be offset from the time on your computer. You can use either
positive or negative numbers in this field. The range is -1440 to 1440 minutes (-24 hours to +24 hours).
6. Click OK.
You are returned to the main window.
7. Continue with other online functions or select Communications | Logoff to log off the device.

Set Device Clock Dialog


The current system PC time and the meter time are shown on the Set Device Clock dialog. The maximum
time change allowed for one adjustment for each device type is shown in the following table.
Device Type Maximum Adjustment- Maximum Adjustment-
Load Profile No Load Profile
CENTRON Within the interval 1 hour

CENTRON (C12.19) 24 hours 24 hours


CENTRON (V&I)

200 Series Within the interval 1 hour

FULCRUM Within the interval 1 hour

Q1000 Within the interval 1 hour

SENTINEL 24 hours 24 hours

VECTRON Within the interval 1 hour

User's Manual 383


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

If a device clock adjustment of more than the time change shown above is needed, you must perform a full
initialization.

For users whose computers use Daylight Savings Time (DST) settings, but the meter does
not, during the DST months the system time will be adjusted to standard time when doing a
clock adjust.

For example, if the computer time was 4:00 PM EDT, the adjusted system time for clock
adjust will be 3:00 PM EST.

You should not configure DST or change the device clock during the hour of a DST change
or from one hour before until one hour following the hour of a DST change. For more
information, see Avoiding DST Clock Reset Problems.

Figure 196: Set Device Clock

Field Descriptions
Set device time to system time
Choose this option if you want the time on the meter to be the same as the time on your computer, which is
displayed above.
Offset device time from system time
Choose this option if you want the time on the meter to be different from the time on your computer. In the
field below, type the amount of time in minutes that you want the time on the meter to be offset from the time
on your computer.
Minutes to offset device time
If you selected the offset option above, type the amount of time in minutes that you want the time on the meter
to be offset from the time on your computer. You can use either positive or negative numbers in this field.

Resetting Device Values


The Communications menu provides several commands that allow you to reset specific counter values to
zero. Resetting a device's counters does not change the device's program information. Items which are grayed
out on the screen are not supported by the current device type.

Function Description

User's Manual 384


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Function Description
Batch Billing Register Reset This function is available on the Communications menu before you log on to a device. Use this
function to quickly logon, reset billing registers, and log off the device for a series meters. Use this
function when Billing Register Reset is the only function you need to perform while logged on to
the device. For more information see Resetting Billing Registers (on page 385).
Reset Demand This function is available on the Communications menu after you have logged on to a device. Use
this function to perform a remote reset of demand values in the meter.
Reset Billing Registers This function is available on the Communications menu after you have logged on to a device. Use
this function to reset billing values in the meter to zero. For more information see Resetting Billing
Registers (on page 385).
Note: This function is not available for Canada installations.
Reset Activity Status This function is available on the Communications menu after you have logged on to a device. Use
this function to select the activity counters to reset.
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Choose Communications | and select one of the following Reset commands.
• Reset Demand
• Reset Billing Registers
• Reset Activity Status
3. Depending on the selection you make, you may be prompted to make other selections. When prompted,
choose Yes to reset the selected value.
4. Continue with other online functions or select Communications | Logoff to log off the device.

Resetting Demand
While you are logged on to a meter this item is available on the Communications menu.

Use this option to remotely reset the device demand registers to zero. You are prompted to confirm the reset.

If there are no errors, a message will be displayed indicating that the demand reset was successful.

For the Q1000 meter, if you trigger a Demand Reset from the Communications Menu, you
must also select the Refresh Self Read option (also from the Communications Menu) before
the Self Read registers will display.

Resetting Billing Registers


PC-PRO+ Advanced provides two ways to reset billing registers:

User's Manual 385


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Reset Billing Registers from Communications menu - After you have logged on to a device, the Reset
Billing Registers function is available on the Communications menu. Use this option to reset all billing
registers to zero. You are prompted to confirm the reset. If there are no errors, a message will be displayed
indicating that the billing registers were reset successfully and you are returned to the main window while
still logged on to the device.
• Batch Billing Register Reset - Use this function to quickly reset billing registers for several meters when
you do not need to perform any other functions while logged on to the device. This function is ideal for a
meter shop setting when you want to quickly reset billing registers to zero for several meters. For more
information see Using Batch Billing Register Reset (on page 387).

You cannot reset billing registers for a Canada meter installation.

CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL

The following registers are reset for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL meters when
you reset billing registers:

• All energy and demand registers (including TOU rate registers)


• Load Profile registers
Q1000

The following registers are reset for a Q1000 meter when you reset billing registers:

User's Manual 386


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• For Q1000 meters with firmware version 4.00 or earlier, the device server will reset all available registers.
• For Q1000 meters with firmware version 4.01 or later, you can select the set of registers to be reset: all
registers or billing registers. If you choose to reset Billing Registers, the following registers in the meter
are reset:
• Watts delivered aggregate
• Watts received aggregate
• VAR delivered aggregate
• VAR received aggregate
• VA arithmetic delivered aggregate
• VA arithmetic received aggregate
• VA vectorial delivered aggregate
• VA vectorial received aggregate
• Watts delivered aggregate SLC
• Watts received aggregate SLC
• VAR delivered aggregate SLC
• VAR received aggregate SLC
• VA arithmetic delivered aggregate SLC
• VA arithmetic received aggregate SLC
• VA vectorial delivered aggregate SLC
• VA vectorial received aggregate SLC

Using Batch Billing Register Reset


The Batch Billing Register Reset option is available on the Communications menu before you log on to a
device.

Use this function to quickly reset billing registers for several meters when you do not need to perform any
other functions while logged on to the device. This function is ideal for a meter shop setting. Select this
function to log on to a device, reset the billing registers, and then log off.

For related information see Resetting Billing Registers (on page 385).

To reset billing registers using the batch function, do the following:


1. From the Communications menu, select Batch Billing Register Reset. The Billing Register Reset dialog
is displayed.
2. Connect the optical probe to the meter.
3. Select the device type, baud rate, and port number.
4. Click OK. Billing registers are reset and you are returned to the Batch Billing Register Reset dialog.
User's Manual 387
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

5. Connect the optical probe to the next device and continue resetting billing registers for the next device.

Figure 197: Billing Register Reset

Field Descriptions
Device Type
Select the device type from the drop-down list.
Baud Rate
Select the baud rate for communication with this device. For more information see Baud Rates - Standalone,
Multi-drop, and Phone Line Sharing (on page 338).
Port Number
Select the PC COM port to which the optical probe is connected. COM 1 (default), COM2, COM3, and
COM4 are supported.

Note: If there are no COM ports in the drop-down selection list, click the Configure Ports button to configure
the PC COM ports used to communicate with metering devices. For more information see Port Configuration
(on page 313).

Resetting Activity Status


While you are logged on to a device, the Reset Activity Status option is available on the Communications
menu. Use this option to select the device activity counters to be reset to zero and the meter logs to be cleared.

Reset Activity Counters Dialog


This dialog is displayed when you select Reset Activity Status on the Communications Menu while you are
online with a device.

User's Manual 388


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 198: Reset Activity Counters Dialog

Field Descriptions
Select Items to Reset
Check the box for each activity counter you want to reset to zero. To remove the check, click the box again.
After you have selected the options to reset, click OK to perform the reset. The options are as follows:

• Number Times Programmed


• Number Demand Resets
• Number Times Tested
• Number Power Outages
• Number Phase Outages
• Time Without Load
• Diagnostic Counters
• SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshots
• Voltage Quality (log and counters)
• Time on Battery
• Event Log (CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL – Canada)
• Self Reads (Q1000)
Battery Information
If you selected to reset the Time on Battery activity counter, these items are displayed for you to set the
following Time on Battery reset options:

User's Manual 389


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Clear time on Battery - Choose this option to reset the Time on Battery counter to zero.
• Set Minutes on Battery - Choose this option to specify the number of minutes remaining on the Time on
Battery counter.
Minutes on Battery
This field is displayed when the Set Minutes on Battery option is chosen. Enter the number of minutes you
want to set on the Time on Battery counter.

Editing Register Values


While you are logged on to a meter, you can edit the current register values. A list of all editable registers is
displayed. Select the values you want to change.

The Edit Register Values function is not available for Canada installations.

1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter.


2. Choose Communications | Edit Register Values. The Edit Registers dialog is displayed listing the
current value for each register.
3. To edit a register, type the new value in the New Value column.
4. Continue editing registers as needed or click Save to return to the Program Editor main window.
5. Continue using online communications or choose Communications | Logoff to log off the meter.

Edit Registers Dialog


Use this option to edit current register values. A list of all the registers you can edit is displayed.

Note: The Edit Register Values function is not available for Canadian installations.

Figure 199: Edit Registers

User's Manual 390


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Field Descriptions
Register
The editable registers for this device are listed.
Current Value
The current register values are listed.
New Value
To change a value, click in the new value field and type the new value and then click Save.

Clearing Meter Data


This function is available on the Communications menu while you are logged on to a device. Select this
function to clear all registers for Energy, Demand, Self-Read, Status, and Load Profile. For the SENTINEL,
CENTRON (C12.19), and CENTRON (V&I) devices all cached values are cleared.

Using the Canadian Event Log


This feature is available for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and SENTINEL meters. The Canadian
Event Log is a preconfigured ANSI event log which records the following kinds of events for Canadian
installations:

• Meter seal event


• Event Log related events
• Device clock reset
• Enter/exit Test Mode
• Device reconfigure events
The Canadian Event Log can contain a maximum of 79 event records in the circular log file. A log pointer
indicates the oldest entry in the log that has not been read. The meter will not overwrite the unread entries.
When the log becomes full of unread entries, the meter cannot perform a new action that would result in an
entry into the log. To free up slots in the log for new event entries, the pointer must be advanced using the
Update Event Log Pointer feature.

The Update Event Log Pointer marks the records as read. After a record is marked as read, the slot is available
to be overwritten with new event data. Existing event records in the log will be overwritten as new events
occur.

• Canadian meters must be sealed to enable logging for the Canadian Event Log.
Initialization seals a meter.
• Any meter action that would result in an entry in the Canadian Event Log will not occur if
the log becomes full of unread events; an error will be generated when the meter action is
attempted. Update the Event Log Pointer to enable the overwriting of old log entries.

User's Manual 391


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Creating the Event Log


This feature is available for Canadian installations only for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and
SENTINEL meters that support the Event Log. While you are online with a meter, the Create Event Log File
option is available on the Communications menu.

Select Communications | Create Event Log.

The Event Log file is generated for meters that support the Event Log feature.

The Event Log Files use the following naming convention:

Meter xxxxxxxx Log on dd-mm-yy at hh.mm.ss.xml

Where:

xxxxxxxx is the device serial number

dd-mm-yy is the date the file was created

hh.mm.ss is the time the file was created

The Event Log is stored on the C: drive in the following directory:

C:\Program Files\Itron\PC-PRO+ Advanced\Event Log Files\Meter

Updating the Event Log Pointer


This feature is available for Canadian installations only for CENTRON (C12.19) , CENTRON (V&I), and
SENTINEL meters that support the Event Log. While you are online with a meter, the Update Event Log
Pointer option is available on the Communications menu.

Use the Update Event Log Pointer feature to advance the oldest unread entry pointer to allow existing log
records to be overwritten.

You can create a Canadian Event Log and open the file to view the Number of Unread Entries to determine
when you need to update the Event Log pointer. Before the Canadian Event Log reaches the maximum of 79
records, update the Event Log pointer.

• To retain the information in a Canadian Event Log, save and rename the file. The log
records are available to be overwritten with new records after you update the Event Log
pointer.
• Any meter action that would result in an entry in the Canadian Event Log will not occur if
the log becomes full of unread events; an error will be generated when the meter action is
attempted. Update the Event Log Pointer to enable the overwriting of old log entries.

User's Manual 392


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To Update the Event Log Pointer


1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Select Communications | Update Event Log Pointer.

Figure 200: Update Event Log Pointer


3. On the Update Event Log Pointer dialog, choose an option:
• To reset the Event Log Pointer to allow the existing events to be overwritten, click Yes.
• To cancel this dialog without resetting the Event Log Pointer, click No.

Upgrading Metering Device Firmware


PC-PRO+ Advanced supports upgrading firmware for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and
SENTINEL meters. Firmware upgrade erases all data in the meter. After a meter's firmware is upgraded, you
must re-initialize the meter.

You must first install the device firmware on your PC and then you can use PC-PRO+ Advanced to
communicate with a meter and download the firmware to the meter. A communication speed of 9600 baud is
recommended for firmware upgrades. A baud rate of 19,200 can be used for appropriate probes. At 9600 baud
the firmware download will take approximately 10 to 15 minutes.

Upgrading Firmware is a two step process as described in the following topics:

• To Install Meter Firmware on Your Computer (on page 394)


• To Upgrade Firmware in the Meter (on page 396)
Note: This feature is not available for meters that have been initialized for Canada installations. If a meter at a
Canada site has not been initialized, the firmware can be upgraded.

Firmware Upgrade Overview


You must first install the meter firmware on your PC and then you can use PC-PRO+ Advanced to
communicate with a meter and download the new firmware to the meter. After a meter’s firmware is
upgraded, you must re-initialize the meter.

Upgrading the meter firmware erases all data in the meter. Be sure to retrieve data before
upgrading firmware.

User's Manual 393


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

You can only install one version of firmware for a device type on a PC. For example, if device firmware
version 3.020 is currently installed on your PC, installing a later version such as firmware version 3.050 will
overwrite the version 3.020 firmware. The version that is installed on your PC is the version that PC-PRO+
Advanced will use to upgrade the meter firmware.

You can determine which version of meter firmware is installed on your PC by looking at Add/Remove
Programs in the Control Panel (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Add/Remove Programs) and reading the
Support Information for the meter firmware. The firmware version is also displayed each time you begin a
firmware upgrade while logged on to a meter.

After you have installed the latest firmware on your PC, if you attempt to initialize a meter that has a different
version of firmware than the version installed on your PC, a message is displayed stating that the firmware in
the meter is different and asking if you want to change the meter firmware. If this occurs, cancel the
initialization, upgrade the meter firmware, and then initialize the meter.

This feature is not available for meters that have been initialized (sealed) for Canadian
installations. If a Canadian meter has not been sealed, the meter firmware can be upgraded.

To Install Meter Firmware on Your Computer


You must install the firmware on your PC to make it available to PC-PRO+ Advanced. You can obtain
firmware upgrades from your Itron Sales Representative.

The firmware installation file is an executable file (.exe) that is automatically installed to the correct location
for use by PC-PRO+ Advanced. If you need to un-install the firmware from your PC later, you can use the
Windows Add/Remove Programs feature to un-install the firmware.

Follow the instructions below to install the firmware on your PC.

User's Manual 394


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

1. Double-click on the Firmware Setup.exe file to open the firmware installation software.

Figure 201: Firmware Installer Welcome


2. Click Next to continue.

Figure 202: Ready to Install Firmware

User's Manual 395


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

3. Click Install to start the installation. The firmware is installed to your PC and then Installation Complete
dialog is displayed.

Figure 203: Firmware Installation Complete


4. Click Finish to close the installation software.
5. To upgrade meter firmware, continue with “Upgrading Firmware in a <device type> Meter”.
You can un-install the firmware from your PC at any time using the Windows Add/Remove
programs function (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Add/Remove Programs).

To Upgrade Firmware in the Meter


This procedure upgrades a meter’s firmware to the version of firmware that is currently installed on your PC.

Before you can upgrade the firmware in a meter, you must install the firmware on the PC.
For more information see Installing Meter Firmware on the PC.

Use a network type Standalone and connection type Direct. A baud rate of 9600 baud, or higher, is
recommended for firmware upgrades. At 9600 baud the firmware download will take approximately 10 to 15
minutes. A baud rate of up to 19,200 can be used for appropriate optical probes, reducing the download time.
1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Log on to the meter using a Standalone Network Type and a Direct connection and a communication
speed of at least 9600 baud. A baud rate of 19,200 can be used for appropriate optical probes. For more
information about logging on to meters, see Logging On to a Device (on page 328).
If the meter uses a Primary/Firmware Download device security code, you must enter the
security code when you log on to the meter to have authorization to change the firmware.

User's Manual 396


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

3. Select Communications | Upgrade Firmware. A message is displayed showing the level of firmware in
the meter and the level it will be changed to. An example is shown below.

Figure 204: About to Change Firmware


4. Click Yes to continue with the firmware upgrade. If you do not want to change the firmware, click No to
cancel without making any changes.

If you cancel at this time, no changes are made in the meter.

The firmware upgrade takes about 16 minutes with communication at 9600 baud.
5. When the firmware upgrade is complete, a message is displayed and you are prompted to log off and
initialize the meter.

Figure 205: Firmware Has Been Changed


6. Click OK to logoff the meter. The PC-PRO+ Advanced main window is displayed.
7. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter.
8. Select Communications | Initialize to initialize the meter. For more information see Initializing a Device
(on page 369).

To Resolve an Unsuccessful Firmware Upgrade


If the firmware upgrade is not successful for some reason, for example if the optical probe became
disconnected while writing the new firmware to the meter, the meter will remain in firmware loader mode
until you complete the firmware upgrade.

User's Manual 397


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• If you log on to a meter and the online functions such as device status are available, the previous firmware
download was successful and no further action is needed.
• If a previous firmware upgrade attempt was not successful, the next time you attempt to log on to the
meter a message is displayed indicating that the meter does not have any firmware. An example of such a
message for a SENTINEL device is shown below.

Figure 206: Meter Has No Firmware

Follow the instructions below to complete the firmware upgrade.

Do not use a modem connection for downloading firmware in a recovery.

To Complete the Firmware Upgrade


1. Select Communications | Logon.
2. Log back on to the meter using a direct connection and using the Network Type Firmware Loader
Recovery.
3. Click OK to continue with the firmware download.
4. The firmware upgrade takes place as described in To Upgrade Firmware in the Meter (on page 396).

Viewing and Saving Meter Device Information


When you are communicating with a device or while a Meter Image File is open, you can view register
values, export data to an MV-90 HHF format or to an HTML file, and save meter values in a Meter Image
File. You can also print the data in the data summary window.

When you log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File, the Data Summary area of the window displays
meter items based on the configuration of the meter. These components allow you to upload and view
specific data from the meter. These components include:

• Registers - View the data from all the registers in the meter or select individual registers.
• Load Profile Data - View Pulse Data, Energy Data, or Demand Data.
• Device Status − View several categories of device status information.
• Voltage Quality Data − For meters that support voltage quality, view Sag, Swell, Imbalance, or
Interruption data.
• Harmonics Data − For SENTINEL meters you can view instantaneous harmonic values in the SiteScan
Toolbox. For Q1000 meters you can view per phase harmonics data.

User's Manual 398


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To View Device Data


To view metering device data, log on to a device or open a Meter Image File.
1. Choose option:
• To log on to a meter, select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information
see Logging On to a Device (on page 328).
• To open a meter image file, select File | Open Meter Image, and select the file you want to view.
After you are logged on, the component window (on the left) lists the meter items that are available.
The online items that are available are determined by the device type and the configuration
of the individual device.
The following example shows the online items that are available for a SENTINEL meter.

Figure 207: Device Status Values (SENTINEL Meter)


2. In the component window, click the plus (+) located to the left of the desired item. To view the data for an
item, select an item in the column on the left
A list of available items is displayed.
3. From the list on the left, select the item of interest.
4. You are prompted to select the specific registers or items you want to view.
Information is displayed in the Data Summary area on the right.
5. Choose an option:
• To print the information in the Data Summary area, select File | Print.
User's Manual 399
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• To export the data in the Data Summary area, select File | Export | Current View to HTML File.

To View Meter Image File Data


Meter Image files contain meter data that has been saved to a file. A Meter Image File can be opened to
enable you to view meter data as if you were online with the meter. If available, the data can be exported in an
MV-90 HHF format for use by a third-party system. Meter Image Files can also be used for data analysis.

You can open a Meter Image File from a Windows Explorer window by double-clicking on the file or open
the file in the Meter Viewer application as described below.
1. From the main window, choose File | Open Meter Image File.
The Open Meter Image File dialog is displayed.

Figure 208: Open Meter Image File


2. For Look In, click the down arrow and browse to select the directory location of the Meter Image File.
3. Select the file and double-click or click Open.
The Meter Image File is opened.
4. Select an item from the list on the left to display the values.
Values are displayed in the summary area on the right.
5. You can print, copy, or save to HTML the information displayed in the data summary window. For more
information see To Print or Save Device Data (on page 400).
6. To close the Meter Image File, select File | Close Meter Image.

To Print or Save Device Data


While you are communicating with a meter or while a Meter Image File is open, you can print or save the data
displayed in the Data Summary are of the data view window.

To print a report of selected meter data while you are logged on to a meter or while a Meter Image File is
open, select File | Print.
User's Manual 400
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

You can save the displayed data in two ways:

• To copy data from the Summary window to the Windows Clipboard, select Edit | Copy to Clipboard (or
Ctrl + C). You can then paste the data into another application such as a spreadsheet application.
• To save the data as an HTML file, select File | Export Current View to HTML.

To Refresh the Data Summary


While you are logged on to a metering device, the Refresh Data Summary option is available on the
Communications menu. Click Refresh Data Summary and then select the meter item you want to view. You
can also press F5 to perform this function.

Viewing Device Status


While you are communicating with a meter or while a Meter Image File is open, one of the meter components
that is added to the list of program components is Device Status. There are no dialogs associated with any of
the Device Status options. When you choose one of these items in the meter items list in the left pane,
specific information relating to the status of that item is displayed in the Data Summary area on the right side
of the window.

Figure 209: Device Status Values (SENTINEL Meter)

Viewing Register Data


To view register data, select one of the register items. You are prompted to select the registers. Select the
registers you want to upload and then click OK.

User's Manual 401


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

After you select the registers and click OK, the Data Summary area on the right side of the screen provides the
following information:

• Register
• Value
• Time of Occurrence
• ID Code

Figure 210: Register Data Summary (SENTINEL Meter)

For SENTINEL devices, register values may be rounded for PSEM protocol communication
and other applications due to the limits of the float data type. For example, the meter might
display 1234.99 for a max value, All Registers could show 1235.000, and Display Registers
could show 1235.00.

Select Registers Dialog


Use this dialog to select the registers you want to upload from the device or to view from a Meter Image File.
When you select the registers and click OK, the Data Summary area on the right side of the screen provides
the following information:

User's Manual 402


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Register
• Value
• Time of Occurrence
• ID Code

Figure 211: Select Registers

Field Descriptions
Select the Registers to Upload and Display
This area displays the registers available for selection. You can select one or more registers. To change a
selection, click the register again. When you have selected all the registers you want to upload, click OK.

For SENTINEL meters, register values may be rounded for PSEM protocol communication
and other applications due to the limits of the float data type. For example, the meter might
display 1234.99 for a max value, All Registers could show 1235.000, and Display Registers
could show 1235.00.
Select All
Click this button to select all registers the device has available for uploading and viewing.

Viewing Load Profile Data


When you select a load profile item from the meter items area of the main window, the Load Profile View
Selection dialog is displayed. Use the Load Profile View Selection dialog to select the range of data to view.

Load profile pulse, energy, demand, peak, and summary data are presented in graph and spreadsheet format.
Also, you can display primary values for the data. To display primary values, use the Options | Transformer
Options dialog to define the transformer, CT, and VT ratios before you select data on the Load Profile View
Selection dialog.

User's Manual 403


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

You can export the load profile data or graph displayed in the Data Summary window to an HTML file by
selecting File | Export | Current View to HTML File.

You can view load profile status summary information by selecting the item in the Device Status items list.

To enhance the performance of load profile retrieval for CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON
(V&I), and SENTINEL meters, load profile data are cached when you log on to the device.
To view load profile intervals that have been accumulated since logging on to the meter, you
must log off and then log back on.

To View Load Profile Data


1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File.
2. When you are logged on to a meter or when a Meter Image File is open, the meter items are listed on the
left and the summary information for each item is displayed on the right. Click the + sign to expand the
items.
3. To display primary values, use the Options | Transformer Options dialog to define the transformer, CT,
and VT ratios before you select the load profile data. For more information see Transformer Options
Dialog (on page 324).
4. Click the + sign to expand the meter items and select the load profile data you want to view.
The Load Profile View Selection dialog is displayed. Refer to Load Profile View Selection Dialog (on
page 405) for field descriptions.
5. Complete the dialog to define the data you want to view.
6. After you complete the dialog, click OK.
The graphical view is displayed.
7. To toggle back and forth between the graph view and the table view of the data, double-click on the graph
or table.
To view chart properties, right-click on the graph. Click the Help button on the properties
dialog to get help for the chart properties functions.
8. Choose option:
• To print the Data Summary table or graph, select File | Print.
• To save the Data Summary table or graph to an HTML file, select File | Export | Current View to
HTML.
• To copy the Data Summary table or graph to the Windows Clipboard, select Edit | Copy to Clipboard
(or Ctrl + C).
9. When you are finished, choose option:
• To logoff the meter, select Communications | Logoff.
• To close the Meter Image File, select File | Close Meter Image File.
User's Manual 404
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Load Profile View Selection Dialog


Use the Load Profile View Selection dialog to indicate the starting date for device or Meter Image File data
and the load profile channels you want to upload and view. You can also select the display increments, peaks,
and scale.

When you select the starting dates and channels and click OK, the data is displayed in the Data Summary area
on the right side of the window as described below.

Figure 212: Load Profile View Selection Dialog

Load Profile View Selection Dialog Field Descriptions


Select Start Date
Select the data range option to identify the data you want to upload and view.
Start Date/Week Starting/Month Starting
The label for this field is determined by the selection you make for the view–day, week, or month. Select the
starting date, week, or month for the range of data you want to view. The date of the earliest data available is
displayed as the default.
Select View
Select Day, Week, Month, or Custom view.
End Date
The date of the latest data available is displayed. You can change this date if you select the custom view.

User's Manual 405


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

# Peaks
For Peak reports, the number of peaks field appears on the dialog. Select the number of peaks to be shown.
Also see the Load Profile Options dialog.

Peaks are listed in chronological order. If you have multiple peaks at the same value, the
earliest peak will be displayed first followed by the next peak in order of occurrence.
Display Increments Every
This field appears on the dialog when you select energy, demand, or pulse data. To accommodate the display
of a large set of data, for example, three months of fifteen-minute interval data, you can combine intervals and
then graph the larger intervals. Select the number of intervals each graph increment will represent. Selection
options are determined by the data interval length. For Energy and Pulse data the intervals are added. For
Demand data the intervals are averaged. The graph display begins with the end time of the first full interval
and ends with the last full interval for the increment selected.
Select Channels to Display
The channels recorded for this meter are displayed. Check the boxes beside the load profile channels you want
to upload and view. A check mark is displayed for each channel you select. If you decide not to include a
channel, click the box again to remove the check mark.
Select Calculated Channels to Display
Additional quantities are calculated from the recorded quantities. Check the boxes beside the calculated
quantities you want to view. Click again to remove a check mark.

VAh, Varh, and PF can be calculated for certain device types based on the recorded load profile quantities.
Power factor is displayed on the Y-2 axis. For more information about the quantities that can be calculated for
each device type, refer to Calculated Load Profile Quantities (on page 406).
Options Button
Click this button to display peaks for the range selected or to change the scale of the data. The Load Profile
Options dialog is displayed.

Calculated Load Profile Quantities


The PC-PRO+ Advanced device servers can calculate demand, primary values, and quantities that are not
recorded by the meters. The sections below describe how the software calculates these values.

Demand Calculation

Demand is calculated as an estimate of how much energy will be used in an hour if the current consumption
rate is continued. The following equation is used:

Demand = Energy x Number of intervals per hour

Calculated Quantities

The following device types support calculated quantities as indicated:

User's Manual 406


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• CENTRON (V&I) – VAh, Varh, and PF


• FULCRUM – Power Factor (PF)
• QUANTUM – PF
• SENTINEL – VAh, Varh, and PF
• SQ400 – PF
• VECTRON – VAh, Varh, and PF

Load Profile Options Dialog


Click the Options button on the Load Profile View Selection dialog to display the Load Profile Options
dialog. Use this dialog to display peaks or change the scale for the profiles selected.

Figure 213: Load Profile Options Dialog

Load Profile Options Dialog Field Descriptions


Show Peak Labels
Check this box to display the value for the peak for the range of data selected.
Scale
For electrical quantities, select the scale for display of the data. Data in the device (or meter image file) is not
affected. The following equations are used to scale the displayed quantities for graph and spreadsheet data:

• Units = Kilo-units * 1,000


• Units = Mega-units * 1,000,000
• Kilo-units = Units / 1,000
• Kilo-units = Mega-units * 1,000
• Mega-units = Units / 1,000
• Mega-units - Kilo-units / 1,000
Note: Only the electrical quantities are scaled; other values, such as totalized quantities and power factor, are
not affected.

User's Manual 407


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Using the Load Profile Data Graph


The graphical view of load profile data makes it easier for you to quickly spot irregularities. Load Profile data
is displayed as a graph. An example of a graphical view of Load Profile Data is shown below. If you select
power factor as a calculated channel, power factor is displayed on the Y-2 axis.

To view chart properties, right-click on the graph. Click the Help button on the chart properties dialog to get
help for the chart display functions, for example, changing the title.

To view the data in the spreadsheet format, double-click on the graph.

Figure 214: Load Profile Data - Graph View


1 Go to beginning of recorded data
2 Go back one period
3 Go forward one period
4 Go to end of recorded data
5 Peak indicators
6 Mouse vertical line (point in time). To zoom in on an area of the graph, click and drag.
7 Data values at vertical line

While the graph is displayed in the Data Summary window, you can perform the following functions:

User's Manual 408


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Zoom In on Data–Click and drag to select a portion of the graph to enlarge. Click again to return to the
original view of the graph.
• Skip to Next/Previous Period–Use the arrow buttons above the graph to skip to another increment of the
data using the channels and interval increments selected on the Load Profile View Selection dialog:
• View the beginning of the available data.
• View the previous period of data. For example, if you selected to view a week of data, clicking this
button will display the previous week of data.
• View the next period of data.
• View the last period of data.
• Display Data Values for Interval at Mouse Pointer–Move the mouse over the graph to display values at
the vertical line.
• Display Peak Indicators–Display peak values and point to peaks for the range shown.
• Display Combined Intervals–For pulse, energy, and demand data you can display combined load profile
intervals. For more information see Load Profile View Selection Dialog (on page 405).
• Change Scale for Graph–Display data as units, kilo, or mega.
• Print–To print the graph, select File | Print.
• Copy–To copy the graph image to the Windows Clipboard, select Edit | Copy to Clipboard (or Ctrl + C).
• Save–To save the graph view to an HTML file, select File | Export | Current View to HTML.

Using the Load Profile Data Spreadsheet


In addition to the load profile values for each channel, the load profile interval status is displayed.

User's Manual 409


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 215: Load Profile Data - Spreadsheet View

While data is displayed in the Data Summary window, you can do the following functions:

• To print the Data Summary table, select File | Print.


• To save the Data Summary table to an HTML file, select File | Export | Current View to HTML.
• To copy the Data Summary table to the Windows Clipboard, select Edit | Copy to Clipboard (or Ctrl +
C).

Using the SiteScan Diagnostic Toolbox and Power Circle


While you are communicating with a meter or while a Meter Image File is open, the Toolbox Display and
Power Circle Display options are available. These items are listed under Device Status.

User's Manual 410


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• The Toolbox window provides per-phase information, instantaneous data, and for CENTRON (V&I),
SENTINEL and VECTRON devices, diagnostic status counters. This information enhances your ability to
diagnose and resolve metering and tampering problems.
• For CENTRON (V&I) devices and for SENTINEL devices with firmware version 5.000 and higher, the
SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot provides a recorded snapshot of the meter values at the time a diagnostic
event occurred. The meter must be configured to monitor the diagnostic event and to record the snapshot.
For information about configuring meters to record the SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshots, refer to the Device
User’s Manual. Also see SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots (on page 416).
• The Power Circle view displays watt, var, VA, and power factor data as a power circle graphic. Also see
Viewing the Power Circle Window (see "Viewing Toolbox and Power Circle Data" on page 418).
The meter continues to perform all normal metering operations while the Toolbox or Power Circle mode is
active. While you are online with a meter, the SiteScan Toolbox and Power Circle data, click Refresh to
obtain the latest meter data. For Meter Image Files, the Toolbox and Power Circle provide snapshots of the
meter conditions when the Meter Image File was created.

You can display data for the Toolbox or the Power Circle as primary values by defining the transformer
options on the Options | Transformer Options dialog. For more information see Defining Transformer
Options. For devices that are defined in the Address Book, you can set default transformer options.

For SENTINEL meters that have the optional Harmonics MeterKey enabled, but which have
not been programmed to support Harmonics, the counters for THD and TDD for SiteScan
Status and SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshot will show values of 0 while online with a meter or
when a Meter Image File is open.

Automatic Refresh of Toolbox and Power Circle Data


While you are online with a meter and viewing the SiteScan Toolbox or Power Circle dialog from the
Communications menu, the Toolbox and Power Circle data are automatically refreshed with the current meter
data. Data are refreshed in groups. Current values for a group are obtained from the meter and then displayed
on the dialog while the next group of values are obtained. Meter time is updated with each group.

The following Toolbox data are refreshed as groups:

• Va Angle, Vb Angle, Vc Angle, Va, Vb, Vc


• Ia Angle, Ib Angle, Ic Angle, Ia, Ib, Ic
• kW, kVA, kVar, PF
• All diagnostic counters
The following Power Circle data are refreshed as groups:

User's Manual 411


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• kW
• kVar
• kVA
• PF
You can pause the automatic refresh by clicking the Stop button. Resume automatic refresh by clicking the
Start button.

To View the Toolbox Dialog


1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File. For more information see Logging On to a Device (on page
328) and To View Meter Image File Data (on page 400).
2. Choose Communications | Show Toolbox.
The Toolbox dialog is displayed. Wait a few moments for the data to appear. The latest meter readings are
preserved on the Toolbox window.
3. To display primary values or change the transformer ratio, CT ratio, or VT ratio, select Options |
Transformer Options. For more information see Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324).
4. Choose option:
• To export the data and graphic to an HTML file, select Save to File. You are prompted to select the
location for the files and to name the folder. An html file and a jpg graphic file are created in a folder
with the name you assigned.
• To stop the automatic refresh of data from the meter, click Stop. To resume the automatic refresh of
data, click Start.
5. When you are finished using the Toolbox, click Exit.
6. Continue using online communications or choose Communications | Logoff.

Toolbox and Power Circle Dialog


Toolbox Dialog

The SiteScan Diagnostic Toolbox displays all the metering information used by the meter for individual phase
measurements including per phase items and diagnostic counters. The information in the Toolbox represents
the actual electrical signals seen by the meter. The per-phase Volt and Amp readings are Root-Mean-Square
(RMS) values. The combination of a diagnostics and other information in the Toolbox display enhance your
utility's ability to diagnose and resolve metering and tampering problems.

In the Communication Manager, you can update the Toolbox display window with current meter data by
clicking the Refresh button.

Notes:

User's Manual 412


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• You can display data for the Toolbox as primary values by selecting primary values on the Options |
Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324) or in the Logon Address Book.
• Diagnostic checks and counters are not available for all meters.

Figure 216: Toolbox Dialog

The areas of the Toolbox window are described in the following table.

Field Descriptions
Meter Configuration
The top portion of the window gives information about the program file and the meter.
Toolbox Information - Vector Diagram
Meter Image Files

For Meter Image File files, the diagram is a snapshot of the conditions when the Meter Image File was
created. The phasor diagram shows amplitude, direction, and angle of both voltage and current for each of the
three phases.
Online Communication

While online with a meter, the phasor diagram shows amplitude and the direction and angle of both voltage
and current for each of the three phases. The lengths of the voltage and current vectors are proportional to
their values.

For information about plotting a phasor diagram directly from the meter display’s Toolbox data, refer to the
Technical Reference Guide for the meter.

User's Manual 413


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Measurements
The per-phase volt and amp readings, along with voltage and current angle readings, let you check the site’s
phase sequencing performance. The diagnostic counters alert you to the frequency of a metering or tampering
problem.

Instantaneous readings for kW, kvar, kVA, and power factor are displayed for each phase.

The combination of a diagnostic error and the information in the Toolbox display enhance your utility's ability
to diagnose and resolve metering and tampering problems.

The phase notation used in the Toolbox identifies each meter element as phases A, B, or C as shown in the
following table:

Element in Meter Defined Phase

Left Element Phase A

Center (or rear) element Phase B

Right-hand element Phase C


Diagnostic Counters
For CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL, and VECTRON meters, if diagnostics are configured in the meter, the
counters will show the occurrence of diagnostic events.
Instantaneous Harmonic Values
For SENTINEL meters with firmware version 5.00 and higher, if Harmonic detection is configured in the
meter, the % THD voltage and % THD current for each phase will be displayed.
Stop/Start Button
If you are viewing the Toolbox by selecting the item from the Communications menu, the Stop/Start button is
available. Click this button to pause or resume the automatic refresh of data from the meter.

This item is not applicable when viewing Meter Image File data.

Save to File
To save the Toolbox view to an HTML file:

• If you are viewing the Toolbox from the Communications menu item, the Save to File button is available.
Click this button to save the text and graphic to an HTML file. You are prompted to select the location for
the file and to name the file. An html file and a .jpg graphics file containing the vector diagram are created
and saved to a folder with the name you assigned. The automatic refresh of data stops while the export is
done.
• If you are viewing the Device Status item, select File | Export | Current View to HTML.
Exit
Click this button to exit the Toolbox mode.

User's Manual 414


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

For more detailed information about using the Toolbox, refer to the technical reference guide
for the meter.

Power Circle Dialog

You can display primary values for the Power Circle data by selecting primary values on the Transformer
Options Dialog (on page 324) or in the Address Book (if applicable) before you select to view the Power
Circle data.

Figure 217: Power Circle Dialog

Areas of the Power Circle Display


Area of Power Circle
Description
Window
Meter Configuration The top portion of the window identifies the meter site and gives the transformer factor and register
multipliers as well as hardware options.
Power Circle Information If you are logged on to a meter, the Power Circle view displays the current meter values for watt, var,
and VA as a power circle graphic. Watts are displayed on the X axis with vars on the Y axis. VA is
displayed as an angle between vars and watts.
For a Meter Image File, the Power Circle reflects the meter values at the time the MIF was created.
Measurements The measurements represented in the power circle are listed as well as power factor.
Start/Stop When you view the Toolbox by selecting the Show Power Circle item from the Communications
menu, the Stop/Start button is available on the dialog. Click this button to pause or resume the
automatic refresh of data from the meter.
Note: This button has no function if you are viewing a Meter Image File.
Save to File To save the Power Circle view to an HTML file:
If you are viewing the Power Circle by selecting the item from the Communications menu, the Save
to File button is available. Click this button to save the view to an HTML file.
If you are viewing the Device Status item, select File | Export | Current View to HTML.
Note: The automatic refresh of data stops while a save to file or export to HTML is done.

User's Manual 415


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To View the Device Status Toolbox Summary


You can display the Device Status Toolbox window from the navigation tree while you are communicating
with a metering device or while a Meter Image File is open.
1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File. For more information see Logging On to a Device (on page
328) and To View Meter Image File Data (on page 400).
While you are connected to the meter or when the Meter Image File is open, the meter items are displayed
in the navigation pane on the left.
2. To display primary values, select Options | Transformer Options. For more information see Defining
Transformer Options.
3. In the meter items navigation tree, select Device Status | Toolbox Display.
The data summary Toolbox window is displayed. Wait a few moments for the data to appear. The current
meter information is displayed on the Toolbox window.
4. Choose option:
• To export the data and graphic to an HTML file, select File | Export Current View to HTML. You are
prompted to select the location for the file and to name the file. An html file and a JPG graphics file
containing the vector diagram are created and saved to a folder with the name you assigned. The
automatic refresh of data stops while the export is done.
• To copy the Toolbox text and graphic to the Windows clipboard, select Edit | Copy or select the.
5. Continue using device communications or choose Communications | Logoff.

SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots


For CENTRON (V&I) devices and for SENTINEL devices with firmware version 5.000 and higher, you can
enable the SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshot feature. Each snapshot stores the Toolbox data from one diagnostic
event. The meter can store a maximum of eight snapshots. When communicating directly to the meter, you
can enable the SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot feature for each diagnostic condition on the SiteScan
Diagnostics dialogs in the SiteScan program configuration component.

The information stored in the snapshot is the same type of information given in the SiteScan Toolbox, but
saved for the time of the diagnostic event. The header information identifies the meter and service
information. Each snapshot identifies the diagnostic event which triggered the snapshot and gives the date and
time of the event.

For SENTINEL meters that have the optional Harmonics MeterKey enabled, but which have
not been programmed to support Harmonics, the Toolbox, SiteScan Status, and SiteScan
Diagnostics Snapshot will show counters with values of 0 for THD, TDD, and Diagnostic 6.

For more information see the following topics:

• To View SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data


• To Clear SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data (on page 417)

User's Manual 416


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

To View SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data


Follow the instructions below to view SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data.
1. Log on to a CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), or SENTINEL device or open a Meter Image File.
The meter data items are listed in the navigation window.
2. In the navigation window, select Device Status | SiteScan Snapshots. The SiteScan Diagnostics
Snapshots dialog is displayed listing all snapshots recorded by the device.
3. Select the snapshot you want to view and click OK. The snapshot data is displayed. See Transformer
Options Dialog (on page 324).
4. To export the snapshot data to an HTML file, select File | Export Current View to HTML.
5. To copy the displayed data to the Windows Clipboard, select Edit | Copy to Clipboard
6. When you are finished, select another online meter data item or select Communications | Logoff or File |
Close Meter Image File.

SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots Dialog


Use the SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots dialog to select the snapshots you want to view.

Figure 218: SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Dialog

Select the snapshot you want to view and then click OK.

To Clear SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data


You can delete all stored SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data from the meter while you are online with the
meter using the Reset Activity Status feature. To clear the snapshots, select Communications | Reset
Activity Status | SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots. This function clears all SiteScan Diagnostics
Snapshots.

The MIF Viewer does not support clearing SiteScan diagnostic snapshot data.

User's Manual 417


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Viewing Toolbox and Power Circle Data


The Power Circle is available on the Communications menu (in Communication Manager only) as well as
under the Device Status meter items while you are connected to a meter or while a Meter Image File is open.

The Power Circle view displays watt, var, VA, and power factor data as a power circle graphic. You can get
current meter data for the power circle by clicking the Refresh (not available when not connected to meter).
Watts are displayed on the X axis with vars on the Y axis. VA is displayed as an angle between vars and
watts.

To View the Power Circle Dialog


You can display the Power Circle dialog from the Communications menu while you are online or while a
Meter Image File is open.
1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File. For more information see Logging On to a Device (on page
328) and To View Meter Image File Data (on page 400).
2. To display primary values, select Options | Transformer Options from the menu bar. For more
information see Defining Transformer Options.
3. Choose Communications | Show Power Circle.
The Power Circle dialog is displayed. Wait a few moments for the data to appear.
4. Choose an option:
• To export the data and graphic to an HTML file, select Save to File. You are prompted to select the
location for the files and to name the folder. An html file and a JPG graphics file are created in a
folder with the name you assigned. The automatic refresh of data stops while a save to file is done.
• To stop the automatic refresh of data from the meter, click Stop; To resume the automatic refresh of
data, click Start.
5. When you are finished using the Power Circle, click Exit.
6. Continue using online communications or choose Communications | Logoff.

To View the Device Status Power Circle Summary


You can display the Device Status Power Circle window from the navigation tree while you are online or
while a Meter Image File is open.
1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File. For more information see Logging On to a Device (on page
328) and To View Meter Image File Data (on page 400).
2. When you are connected to the meter or when the Meter Image File is open, the meter items are displayed
in the navigation pane on the left.
3. To display primary values or change the transformer ratio, CT ratio, or VT ratio, select Options |
Transformer Options. For more information see Transformer Options Dialog (on page 324).
4. In the meter items navigation tree, select Device Status | Power Circle Display.

User's Manual 418


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

The Power Circle window is displayed. Wait a few moments for the data to appear.
5. Choose an option:
• To export the data and graphic to an HTML file, select File | Export Current View to HTML. You are
prompted to select the location for the file and to name the file. An html file and a JPG graphics file
containing the vector diagram are created and saved to a folder with the name you assigned. The
automatic refresh of data stops while the export is done.
• To copy the Power Circle text and graphic to the Windows clipboard, select Edit | Copy.
6. Continue viewing online items or choose Communications | Logoff.

Viewing Voltage Quality Data (Q1000, SENTINEL, SQ400 Meters)


While online with a Q1000, SENTINEL, or SQ400 meter or while a Meter Image File is open, you can
display Voltage Quality data including sags, swells, imbalances, and interruptions.

To display the data in the Data Summary window, select the voltage quality item from the navigation tree in
the left pane.

SENTINEL Voltage Quality Data


Examples of the Voltage Quality data for a SENTINEL meter are shown in this section. An example of the
Voltage Quality Sags data summary for a SENTINEL meter is shown below.

Figure 219: Voltage Quality Sags (SENTINEL)

User's Manual 419


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

An example of the Voltage Quality Swells data summary for a SENTINEL meter is shown below.

Figure 220: Voltage Quality Swells (SENTINEL)

An example of the Voltage Quality Voltage Imbalances data summary for a SENTINEL meter is shown
below.

Figure 221: Voltage Quality Voltage Imbalances (SENTINEL)

User's Manual 420


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

An example of the Voltage Quality Current Imbalances data summary for a SENTINEL meter is shown
below.

Figure 222: Voltage Quality Current Imbalances (SENTINEL)

Q1000 Voltage Quality Data


For Q1000 meters, you can select the specific levels, phases, and classes that you want to view. When you
select a VQ data item for a Q1000 meter, you are prompted to enter additional selection information as
described in the following sections.

An example of a Voltage Quality Data Display for voltage swells is shown below.

User's Manual 421


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 223: Voltage Quality Data Display - Swells Example (Q1000)

An example of a Voltage Quality Data Display for voltage interruptions is shown below.

Figure 224: Voltage Quality Data Display - Interruptions (Q1000)

Voltage Sag and Swell Selection Dialog (Q1000)


For Q1000 meters, use these dialogs to select the Sag and Swell levels to display. For your Sag or Swell
selection, you can then select the Phases to display. When you provide this information and click OK, the Data
Summary area on the right side of the screen displays columns containing the following information:

User's Manual 422


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Sag or Swell Start Time


• Status
• Duration (in seconds)
• Phase
• Level
• Minimum Volts

Figure 225: Voltage Sag Selection Figure 226: Voltage Swell Selection (Q1000)
(Q1000)

Field Descriptions
Sags/Swells to Display
Check the appropriate box(es) to select the Level(s) of Sags or Swells to display.
Phases to Display
Check the appropriate box(es) to select the Phase(s) to display for the selected Sag or Swell levels.

Voltage Imbalance Selection Dialog (Q1000)


For Q1000 meters, use this dialog to select the Voltage Imbalances you want to display. You can select any
combination of the 3 phases. When you provide this information and click OK, the Data Summary area on the
right side of the screen displays columns containing the following information:

User's Manual 423


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Imbalance Start Time


• Status
• Duration (in seconds)
• Phase
• Average % Imbalance

Figure 227: Voltage Imbalance Selection Dialog (Q1000)

Field Descriptions
Phases to Display
Check the appropriate box(es) to select the Phase(s) for which you want to display imbalances.

Voltage Interruption Selection Dialog (Q1000)


For Q1000 meters, use this dialog to select the Voltage Interruption Classes you want to display. You can
select any combination of the 3 classes. When you provide this information and click OK, the Data Summary
area on the right side of the screen displays columns containing the following information:

• Interruption Start Time


• Status
• Duration (in seconds)
• Class

Figure 228: Voltage Interruption Selection Dialog (Q1000)

User's Manual 424


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Field Descriptions
Interruptions to Display
Check the appropriate box(es) to select the Voltage Interruption Class(es) you want to display.

Viewing Harmonic Data


Q1000 meters and SENTINEL meters can be configured to display and record harmonic data as described in
the following sections. A harmonic is an effect that causes the true sine wave of alternating voltages and
currents to be distorted.

• To view harmonic data for SENTINEL devices, select Device Status | Toolbox Display from the
navigation tree. Instantaneous harmonic values are shown in the SiteScan Toolbox window. For more
information see SENTINEL Meter Harmonic Data (on page 425).
• To display harmonic data for Q1000 devices in the Data Summary window, select the item under
Harmonic Data in the navigation tree. For more information see Q1000 Meter Harmonic Data (on page
426).

SENTINEL Meter Harmonic Data


The harmonic monitoring feature is an optional SENTINEL feature that is provided with the Power Quality
MeterKey. This feature is supported for meters with firmware version 5.000 and higher and SENTINEL
Measurement Level 1 or higher. You can configure the SENTINEL meter to display instantaneous per phase
percent THD and percent TDD values on the SENTINEL meter. These values are also available in the
Toolbox window while you are online with a meter or when a Meter Image File is open.

You can also configure SiteScan Diagnostic 6 to monitor harmonic distortions. Instantaneous harmonic values
are shown in the SiteScan Toolbox window.

User's Manual 425


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 229: Harmonic Data in Toolbox (SENTINEL)

For information about viewing the SiteScan diagnostics, see Toolbox Dialog.

Q1000 Meter Harmonic Data


While you are online with a Q1000 meter (or when a Meter Image File is open), in the data summary
navigation tree, select Harmonic Data and select the phase. The Harmonics View Selection dialog is displayed
for you to select the block of data you want to view.

When you provide this information and click OK, the Data Summary area on the right side of the screen
displays the current interval time, the interval number, and a Harmonics Player that allows you to step forward
and backward through the harmonic intervals.

This area also displays columns containing the following information:

User's Manual 426


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• Harmonic
• Voltage Amplitude
• Voltage Phase Angle
• Current Amplitude
• Current Phase Angle

Figure 230: Harmonics Data Summary (Q1000)

Harmonics View Selection Dialog (Q1000)


Use the Harmonics View Selection dialog to select the starting date for harmonic information to upload from
the meter (if applicable) and to indicate the number of intervals you want to retrieve.

When you provide this information and click OK, the Data Summary area on the right side of the screen
displays the current interval time, the interval number, and a Harmonics Player that allows you to step forward
and backward through the harmonic intervals.

User's Manual 427


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Figure 231: Harmonics View Selection Dialog (Q1000)

Field Descriptions
Select Start Date
Click an option to select a starting date for the harmonics register information you want to view.
Other
Choose Other to enter a specific month, day, year, hour and minute. Enter the selections in the fields provided.
Intervals to Retrieve
Enter the number of intervals you want to retrieve.

Exporting MV-90 HHF Load Profile Data


While you are logged on to a load profile meter this item is available on the Communications menu. This
function is available when the meter has recorded at least two intervals of load profile data.

The MV-90 HHF Export feature allows you to export load profile data in the MV-90 HHF format for use by a
third-party system. The following load profile data can be exported:

• Active load profile channels


• Channels with load profile intervals of one minute or longer
• From 1 to 16 channels of the same interval length

MV-90 HHF Export Files


PC-PRO+ Advanced exports the data as 16-bit pulse counts. A separate MV-90 HHF file is created in the
Itron HHF format for each meter's data. The MV-90 HHF export file maps load profile data to contiguous
channel identification numbers. The MV-90 channel IDs are used to identify the load profile quantities.

The MV-90 HHF Export files use the following default naming convention:

<Unit ID>_<Date of export>.hhf

User's Manual 428


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Where:

<Unit ID> is the unit ID of the meter as returned by the device. If a unit ID is not available, then the device
type name (CENTRON, Q1000, and so forth) is used.

<Date of Export> is generated using YYYYMMDD format. For example, July 15th, 2002 is represented as
20020715.

When you create an MV-90 HHF Export file, you are prompted to select the location to store the export file.

The default location is C:\.

To Create an MV-90 HHF Export File


Follow the instructions below to create an MV-90 HHF Export file.
1. Log on to the device. Refer to Logging On to a Device (on page 328) for more information.
If load profile data is available in the device, the MV-90 HHF Export item is added to the
Communications menu.
2. Select MV-90 HHF Export.
The Save As dialog is displayed.
3. Browse to select the location to store the file.
4. The default export file name is shown. Change the name as desired.
5. Click Save to export the file.
The Load Profile Export Progress window is displayed. You can cancel the export if desired.

Creating a Meter Image File


A Meter Image File represents a meter’s configuration as well as the data in the meter.

While you are logged on to a meter, you can save the values in the meter by creating a Meter Image File. The
file name extension indicates the device type for the Meter Image File.
Meter Image File
Device Type
Name Extension
CENTRON CEN
CENTRON (C12.19) CMA
CENTRON (V&I) CVI
200 Series MT2
FULCRUM X20
Q1000 Q1K
QUANTUM QTM

User's Manual 429


Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

Meter Image File


Device Type
Name Extension
SENTINEL SEN
SQ400 SQ4
VECTRON VEC

After you create the Meter Image File, you can view the contents of the file by selecting File | Open Meter
Image. Meter Image Files can be opened in PC-PRO+ Advanced, Shop-Pro, and EnergyAudit to view and
analyze meter data. For more information see To View Meter Image File Data (on page 400).
1. Select Communications | Logon to log on to the meter. For more information see Logging On to a
Device (on page 328).
2. Select Communications | Create Meter Image File.
The Create Meter Image File dialog is displayed.

Figure 232: Create Meter Image File


3. Name the new Meter Image file you are creating, select the directory for the new file, and click OK.
4. For some device types, you are prompted to select the type of data to include in the Meter Image File.
Make your selection and then click OK.
5. Progress windows are displayed during the file creation process.
The file creation takes a few minutes. Do not disconnect or log off the meter until the process
is finished.
6. After the Meter Image File is created, a message indicates that the file was created successfully.
7. Continue using online communications or choose Communications | Logoff to log off the meter.

Exporting to HTML
The Export Current View to HTML function is available on the File menu. You can export the information in
the Program Editor Data Summary window to an HTML file. You can then open and view the file using a
web browser or other applications.
User's Manual 430
Proprietary and Confidential
Using the Communication Manager

• If you are viewing online device data, the device information in the summary window is saved to the
HTML file.
• If you are viewing a program component, the program information in the summary window is saved to the
HTML file.
To Export to HTML

1. Log on to a meter or open a Meter Image File.


2. If desired, open a program file.
3. In the navigation tree, select the program component or meter item you want to view.
4. While the information you want to export to HTML is displayed in the Data Summary window, select File
| Export Current View to HTML.
5. Name and save the file.

User's Manual 431


Proprietary and Confidential
APPENDIX A

PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization

Itron offers several specialized systems that are clients of a PC-PRO+ Advanced master station. The client
systems offer simplified user interfaces and provide specialized functionality for selected users.

The operation of client systems and settings for the client systems are controlled in the PC-PRO+ Advanced
master station. Settings for client systems are defined in the PC-PRO+ Advanced System Manager
application.

Information about defining settings for client systems is given in Defining Settings and
Defaults in the System Manager (see "Using the System Manager to Define Settings and
Defaults" on page 9).

This section describes the functionality of the client systems and discusses the processes for transferring data
and settings between the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station and the client systems. The following client
systems are discussed:

• Field-Pro Client (on page 433)


• Shop-Pro Client (on page 434)
• HH-Pro Client (on page 435)
• PC-PRO+ Views Client (on page 436)

PC-PRO+ Advanced Master Station and Clients Diagram


The following diagram summarizes the support functions provided by the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station
for client systems. It also shows the synchronization processes used to update the client systems and transfer
files between the master station and the client.

Figure 233: PC-PRO+ Advanced and Client Systems

User's Manual 432


Proprietary and Confidential
PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization

Field-Pro Client
The Field-Pro system is a software tool for programming and reading CENTRON, CENTRON (C12.19),
CENTRON (V&I), SENTINEL, and VECTRON meters at the metering site. For Q1000 devices, Field-Pro
can be used to display status information, read registers, reset registers, and export data.

Field-Pro is used in conjunction with a PC-PRO+ Advanced master station which provides the program files,
system defaults, and other configuration information. Settings and program files are transferred to the Field-
Pro using a replica file.

Detailed instructions for using Field-Pro are given in the Field-Pro User's Manual. This manual is available in
the Start Programs menu in the Field-Pro program group on any PC where Field-Pro is installed.

Field-Pro Settings
Field-Pro settings are defined on the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station in the System Manager application
(Options | Field-Pro). The Field-Pro settings are used to set up a Field-Pro system and they provide the
security for Field-Pro.

The Field-Pro settings control the following features for the Field-Pro PC:

• User password login requirements


• The Field-Pro programming and reading operations permitted for each device type
• The data file format (MV-90 and/or Meter Image File)
• The option to reset billing registers after devices are initialized
• Automatic logoff after device initialization
• Whether data export files and the activity log are deleted from the Field-Pro PC after files are uploaded to
the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station
• File Synchronization options
You can create a different Field-Pro settings file for each Field-Pro user and store each Field-Pro settings file
in a different directory. Use the Windows file sharing features to control user access to the different settings
directories.

For more information about setting user options, in the PC-PRO+ Advanced System Manager, see Options |
Field-Pro.

Exporting Program Files for Field-Pro


On the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station, use the Program Editor application to export the program files for
each Field-Pro user. You can create a different PC- PRO+ Advanced master station Program Directory for
each Field-Pro user and/or each Field-Pro PC as needed. Use the Windows file sharing features to control user
access to the different program directories on the master station.

User's Manual 433


Proprietary and Confidential
PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization

Programming options, system default values, TOU schedules, and custom schedules are included with the
program files when you export program files for Field-Pro.

For more information about exporting program files, in the PC-PRO+ Advanced Program Editor see File |
Export | Program Files and click the help button.

Loading a Replica File for Field-Pro


Before you can use Field-Pro to log on to meters, load the Replica File to copy PC-PRO+ Advanced master
station settings to the Field-Pro system. Field-Pro settings are installed in one easy step by loading a Replica
File.

The settings contained in a Replica File will replace the existing settings of the same type in Field-Pro when
you load a new Replica File. Settings in Field-Pro are updated for only the items included in the Replica File.

Shop-Pro Client
The Shop-Pro system is designed for programming Itron's electricity metering devices in a meter shop or
similar environment. Shop-Pro uses program files, programming options, default values, security settings, and
other settings defined on a PC-PRO+ Advanced master station.

Detailed instructions for using Shop-Pro are given in the Shop-Pro User's Manual. This manual is available
in the Start Programs menu in the Shop-Pro program group on any PC where Shop-Pro is installed.

Settings for Shop-Pro


Settings for Shop-Pro are defined in the PC-PRO+ Advanced System Manager. Shop-Pro settings include the
following:

• Program files
• System settings (default values, device security codes, programming options)
• DST dates
• User login security options
• Address Book settings
• HH-Pro settings
• Meter Change Out settings
Shop-Pro Settings in the System Manager are saved in a Replica File and transferred to the Shop-Pro system
by loading a Replica File. When you create the Replica File, you select the items to be included in the Replica
File.

User's Manual 434


Proprietary and Confidential
PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization

Replica File Settings


The system administrator uses the System Manager application to create the Replica File for Shop-Pro and
makes the file available for the Shop-Pro user. The system administrator selects the System Manager settings
to be included in each Replica File. The settings included in the Replica File determine which settings will be
loaded to the Shop-Pro system when you load the Replica File. Consult your PC-PRO+ Advanced system
administrator for the directory location of the Replica File for setting up Shop-Pro.

Loading a Replica File for Shop-Pro


Before you can use Shop-Pro to log on to meters, load the Replica File to copy PC-PRO+ Advanced master
station settings to the Shop-Pro system. Shop-Pro settings are installed in one easy step by loading a Replica
File.

The settings contained in a Replica File will replace the existing settings of the same type in Shop-Pro when
you load a new Replica File. Settings in Shop-Pro are updated for only the items included in the Replica File.

HH-Pro Client
The HH-Pro application, available with PC-PRO+ Advanced 7.30, is used to perform certain meter
installation and maintenance functions. The HH-Pro software runs on an Itron FC200 or FC200R handheld
computer as a client of a PC-PRO+ Advanced system or a Shop-Pro system.

The HH-Pro application on the handheld is synchronized with the PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-Pro system
using the HH-Pro Synchronization application. For more information refer to the HH-Pro User's Manual.
This manual is available in the Start Programs menu in the PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-Pro program group
on any PC where PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-Pro is installed.

HH-Pro Settings
HH-Pro settings are defined in the PC-PRO+ Advanced System Manager application. When the HH-Pro
Synchronization application is run from the PC-PRO+ Advanced or Shop-Pro master station, the HH-Pro
settings are used to configure the HH-Pro application in the FC200 or FC200R handheld.

For more information about HH-Pro settings, see Defining HH-Pro Settings (on page 86).

HH-Pro Synchronization
You must synchronize the HH-Pro application on the handheld with the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station or
a Shop-Pro master station.

The HH-Pro Synchronization application runs on a PC-PRO+ Advanced version 7.30 or higher system or a
Shop-Pro version 7.30 or higher system. The HH-Pro Synchronization application uses the Microsoft
ActiveSync software to transfer System Manager HH-Pro settings to the HH-Pro application on the handheld.

Run the HH-Pro Synchronization application after you have defined or changed the HH-Pro settings in the
System Manager and any time you need to update the Custom Schedule files on the handheld.
User's Manual 435
Proprietary and Confidential
PC-PRO+ Advanced Clients and Synchronization

PC-PRO+ Views Client


The PC-PRO+ Views software lets you log on to Itron metering devices and view register data, load profile
data, status information, and SiteScan® Toolbox data. The PC-PRO+ Views software provides read-only
access to meter data and Meter Image Files (MIF). No programming functions are available and no
synchronization with the PC-PRO+ Advanced master station is required.

While you are online with a meter or while a Meter Image File is open, you can view meter data, print the
current data summary, copy the current data summary to the Windows clipboard, or save the data summary as
an HTML file. Views can also create a Meter Image File or export data in the MV-90® HHF format.

For more information refer to the PC-PRO+ Views User’s Manual. This manual is available on the Start
Programs menu in the PC-PRO+ Views program group on any PC where PC-PRO+ Views is installed.

User's Manual 436


Proprietary and Confidential
APPENDIX B

Status Codes

PC-PRO+ Advanced provides the following types of status codes for supported devices:

• Load Profile Status Codes (on page 437) – all device types
• Extended Load Profile Status Codes (on page 438) - Q1000
• Harmonic Status Codes (on page 441) - Q1000
• Voltage Quality Status Codes (on page 440) - Q1000

Load Profile Status Codes


The status codes in the table below are used for Load Profiles and Extended Load Profiles. Extended load
profiles are available for some Q1000 meters. The status codes provide additional information about the
interval and may not indicate an error condition. Also see Extended Load Profile Status Codes (on page 438).
Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions
Code
A Time Adjust The meter's clock was adjusted by No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time
time synchronization during this was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user
interval. through the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval while Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-
a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring. initialization may be necessary.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval while No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Time in Daylight Savings Time (DST).
E External EOI The meter closed this interval because No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
of a received external EOI signal. Note: This function is not currently supported.
K Skipped This interval acquired no data due to a No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
common status, such as a time adjust.
L Long Interval The meter's time was adjusted No action necessary. Normal meter operation. The time
backward during this interval, was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user
increasing the amount of time actually through the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.
spent in the interval.
O Outage The meter experienced an outage to its No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
power supply during this interval. Investigate outage if necessary.
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line
properly recorded by the meter. Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set.
S Short Interval (1) The meter completed a power-up No action necessary.
sequence in the middle of this interval. (1) Normal meter operation.
(2) The meter's time was adjusted (2) User changed meter time.
forward during or over this interval,
reducing the amount of time actually
spent in the interval.
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode No action necessary. User put meter in Test Mode.
during this interval.

User's Manual 437


Proprietary and Confidential
Status Codes

Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions


Code
V Overflow The meter's Load Profile pulse count The pulse count per interval needs to be reduced. This
for this interval overflowed the upper can be accomplished either by increasing the pulse
limit of 65,535 pulses. weight for this channel or by increasing the interval
length for this set of load profile channels.
X Diagnostics This option is for the VECTRON No action necessary.
meter only. It occurs when one or
more SiteScan Diagnostics are active
during the interval.

Extended Load Profile Status Codes


The status codes in the table below are used for Extended Load Profiles. Extended load profiles are available
for some Q1000 meters. The status codes provide additional information about the interval and may not
indicate an error condition.
Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions
Code
A Time Adjust The meter's clock was adjusted by time No action necessary; normal meter operation. The
synchronization during this interval time was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a
user through the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval while a Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-
non-fatal Clock Error was occurring. initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval while in No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Time Daylight Savings Time (DST).
E External EOI The meter closed this interval because of a No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
received external EOI signal. Note: This function is not currently supported.
L Long Interval The meter's time was adjusted backward No action necessary. No action necessary; normal
during this interval, increasing the amount meter operation. The time was adjusted either by
of time actually spent in the interval. the GPS receiver or a user through the PC-PRO+
Advanced software.
O Outage The meter experienced an outage to its No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
power supply during this interval. Investigate outage if necessary.
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not properly Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-
recorded by the meter. line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been
set.
S Short Interval (1) The meter completed a power-up No action necessary.
sequence in the middle of this interval. (1) Normal meter operation.
(2) The meter's time was adjusted forward (2) User changed meter time.
during or over this interval, reducing the
amount of time actually spent in the
interval.
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode during No action necessary; user put meter in Test mode.
this interval.

User's Manual 438


Proprietary and Confidential
Status Codes

Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions


Code
V Overflow The meter's Load Profile pulse count for The pulse count per interval needs to be reduced.
this interval overflowed the upper limit of This can be accomplished either by increasing the
65,535 pulses. pulse weight for this channel or by increasing the
interval length for this set of load profile channels.
J Rollover Minimum Total Rolled Over Minimum No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
K Reconfigure Indicates a parameter modification for the No action necessary; user programmed a IEC
IEC-60870-5-102 protocols. 60870-5-102 change in meter.
W Access violation An IEC 60870-5-102 protocol logon No action necessary; user used bad IEC 60870-5-
attempt failed. 102 password.
^ Loss of Phase A Phase A voltage dropped below the limit No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Investigate low voltage if necessary.
> Loss of Phase B Phase B voltage dropped below limit No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Investigate low voltage if necessary.
< Loss of Phase C Phase C voltage dropped below limit No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Investigate low voltage if necessary.
B Total Reset Value was reset to zero based on the reset No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
schedule
P Loss of Potential Voltage for Phase A, B, or C dropped No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
below the limit. Investigate low voltage if necessary.
Y Loss of Time The meter detected that its clock was not Check time synchronization.
Synchronization synchronized with the time in the GPS
device.
Q Time Adjustment Time Adjustment was less than or equal to No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
<= to threshold the Large Adjustment threshold

M Rollover Total Rolled Over Maximum No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
6 Time Adjustment Used by IEC-60870-5-102 protocols. Time No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
> threshold adjustment was greater than the Large
Adjustment threshold.
7 Time Adjust Time Adjustment Makeup Interval. Set No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Makeup when the time is adjusted forward out of
the current interval into an interval more
that one interval in the future. All
intervening intervals are flagged.
8 Backward Time Time Adjustment Backward out of No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Adjustment interval. The time of the time adjustment
was before the start of the current interval.
For example, with a one minute interval, if
at 1:03:15 the time was adjusted to 1:02:58,
this status would be set.
9 Interval Overlap If a backward time adjustment out of No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
interval is done, this status is set in all
already recorded intervals that ended after
the new time.

User's Manual 439


Proprietary and Confidential
Status Codes

Voltage Quality Status Codes


The status codes that display for Voltage Quality and Voltage Interruption Resets are given in the following
tables.

Voltage Quality Reasons:


Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions
Code
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-
while a non-fatal Clock Error was initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line
occurring. Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set.
ED End in Daylight This interval was recorded at the end No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Savings Time of Daylight Savings Time (DST).
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-
properly recorded by the meter. line Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been
set.
SD Start in Daylight This interval was recorded at the start No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Savings Time of Daylight Savings Time (DST).
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode No action necessary. User placed meter in Test
during this interval. Mode.

Voltage Interruption Reset Reasons:


Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions
Code
DBF Double Bus Fault An internal error has occurred – Recover as much data as possible. Reset the meter
possibly due to bad memory in the to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If error
meter. repeats then return to Itron.
HR External Hard Reset The meter received a hard reset due to No action necessary. Normal meter operation for
a loss of supplied power. intervals immediately following most outages.
Investigate if necessary.
LC Loss of Processor Clock The meter failed to receive messages Ignore the data for this interval. Look at
from the crystal used for processor Diagnostics for other errors. If the error persists,
speeds. contact Customer Support.
PU Power Up The meter completed its power-up No action necessary. Normal meter operation for
routine during this interval. intervals immediately following most outages.
Investigate if necessary.
SR or SRI Soft Reset or Soft Reset The processor was reset due to a jump Retrieve any valid data from the meter, then
Instruction to an invalid instruction in the contact Customer Support for assistance.
firmware code – possibly due to
transients.
W Watchdog Timeout The meter missed an interval message Ignore the data for this interval. Look at
between processors. Can be caused by Diagnostics for other errors. If the error persists,
anomalies on the supply voltage. contact Customer Support.

User's Manual 440


Proprietary and Confidential
Status Codes

Harmonic Status Codes


The status codes that display for Harmonics are listed in the following table.
Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions
Code
A Time Adjust The meter's clock was adjusted by No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time
time synchronization during this was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user
interval. through the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval while Correct the condition causing the Clock Error. Re-
a non-fatal Clock Error was occurring. initialization may be necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval while No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
Time in Daylight Savings Time (DST).
E External EOI The meter closed this interval because No action necessary. Normal meter operation.
of a received external EOI signal. Note: This function is not currently supported.
I Invalid No data for this interval; no message Harmonics possibly disabled or the MeterKey for
received. harmonics is not set. Also, if harmonics is reconfigured
or initialized and restarts close to the interval boundary,
the first interval might have invalid status; a time
adjustment might also cause an interval to be invalid.
L Long Interval The meter's time was adjusted No action necessary; normal meter operation. The time
backward during this interval, was adjusted either by the GPS receiver or a user
increasing the amount of time actually through the PC-PRO+ Advanced software.
spent in the interval.
O Outage The meter experienced an outage to its No action necessary; normal meter operation.
power supply during this interval. Investigate outage if necessary.
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not Ignore the meter data for this interval. Look at on-line
properly recorded by the meter. Diagnostics to see if any other flags have been set.
S Short Interval (1) The meter completed a power-up No action necessary.
sequence in the middle of this 1. Normal meter operation.
interval.(2) The meter's time was
adjusted forward during or over this 2. User changed meter time.
interval, reducing the amount of time
actually spent in the interval.
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode No action necessary. User placed meter in Test mode.
during this interval.

User's Manual 441


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

active power Alternate Mode


The time average of the instantaneous power over a display mode typically used to display quantities
one period of the wave. For sinusoidal quantities that are not needed on a regular basis; the meter
in a two-wire circuit, active power is the product continues operating normally while in alternate
of the voltage, the current, and the cosine of the mode.
phase angle between them. In a polyphase circuit,
active power is the sum of the active powers of the ampere (A)
individual phases.
The practical unit of electric current. One ampere
is the current caused to flow through a resistance
active quantities
of one ohm when one volt is impressed across the
Quantities such as watt demand and watthours. resistor.

Activity Logs ampere-hour (Ah)


The Activity Logs are files generated by the A current of one ampere flowing for one hour.
applications while actions are performed. Field-
Pro and HH-Pro generated events for specified annunciator
actions to a meter during a communication session.
A label or symbol on the meter display that
identifies particular quantities displayed for a
Address Book
register.
The Logon Address Book provides a way for you
to define and save connection settings for apparent power
standalone and network metering service points.
After connection information is defined, you can The product of the root-mean-square current and
logon to devices by selecting the service point the root-mean-square voltage for any waveform.
name. For sinusoidal quantities, apparent power is the
square root of the sum of the squares of the active
It contains the information to successfully connect and reactive powers.
and communicate with a service point. This
address book can be replicated by the System apparent quantities
Manager and moved to another system.
Quantities such as VA-demand and VA-hours.
advanced protocol
arithmetic operation
Highly configurable protocols such as DNP 3.0
Operations in which numerical quantities form the
and IEC 60807-5-102 supported in PC-PRO+
elements of the calculation.
Advanced. Advanced protocols must be
configured using the Protocol Editor for Q1000
software. After they are configured, PC-PRO+ EEPROM
Advanced is used to program the advanced Nonvolatile memory. Electrically Erasable
protocols into the meter. Programmable Read Only Memory that retains its
data during a power outage without the need for a
aggregate (AGGR) battery.
The sum of the per phase values.

User's Manual 442


Proprietary and Confidential
battery carryover Data Files
The amount of time that the register is energized The data files are the MV-90 HHF and Meter
by the battery to maintain the accuracy of the Image Files created by the Communication
clock within the microprocessor. All program and Manager, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro. They are either
billing data are transferred to nonvolatile memory created directly on the master station or uploaded
when battery carryover operation is activated. to the master station, as is the case for Field-Pro
and HH-Pro. These data files can be used by the
baud rate Communications Manager to view the contents or
they can be consumed by the Data Manager when
The speed at which data is transmitted, expressed creating reports.
in bits per second (bps).
days on battery
block interval demand
A counter identifying the cumulative number of
Demand based on intervals from 1 to 60 minutes. days the meter has been in the battery carryover
All calculations of demand are based on rolling mode.
demand. To calculate block interval demand,
program the register to have one subinterval of the
default
same length as the demand interval.
A standard value that a field contains unless it is
cold load pickup (CLPU) modified by the user.

The programmable amount of time required before


delivered (DEL)
demand calculations are restarted after a
recognized power outage occurs. Defining this The energy flows from the utility to the end user.
value as zero will cause the meter to execute The measured quantity is positive. A register
demand calculations after any power outage. A accumulating a delivered quantity is always
delay allows the utility’s customer to turn positive and keeps incrementing as energy flows in
equipment on after a power outage and not be this direction.
penalized. See Also demand delay (on page 443).
demand
communication timeout
The average value of power or a related quantity
The number of seconds that the meter will wait for over a specified interval of time. Demand is
a valid command. If there is a time out, the meter expressed as kilowatts (kW), kilovolt-amperes
will terminate the communication session. (kVA), kilovars (kvar), and so forth. There are
different types of demand such as maximum,
CT ratio block, or rolling. See also interval length (on page
445).
Current Transformer ratio. The ratio required to
reduce primary current to a secondary current
demand delay
compatible with transformer rated meters. See Also
VT ratio (on page 452). Cold Load Pickup (CLPU). The programmable
amount of time required before demand
cumulative demand calculations are restarted after a power outage.

A register that accumulates all maximum demands


demand interval
at demand reset. When a demand reset takes place,
maximum demand value is added to this value to The specified time over which demand is
obtain a running sum of maximum demands at calculated.
reset.

User's Manual 443


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

demand interval length Display Editor


The duration of the demand interval, such as 1 The PC-PRO+ Advanced Display Editor is used to
minute, 15 minutes, 60 minutes, and so forth. configure meter display files for the VECTRON
and CENTRON meters. A single display file can
demand reset be used by multiple program files.

The function that sets demand registers in the


DNP 3.0 protocol
meter to zero.
A read/write protocol used by a wide variety of
demand reset count systems including SCADA systems.

A counter identifying the number of times a


end-of-interval (EOI)
demand reset has occurred.
A delimiter indicating the end of an interval of
demand subinterval time. Used for demand calculation.

The smaller blocks of time that are used in rolling


end-of-interval annunciator
demand calculations.
An annunciator that is displayed at the end of
device every interval or subinterval

A metering device (i.e. meter, recorder, or


end-of-interval output
register).
For some devices, a contact closure output that can
device ID be generated at the end of each interval or
subinterval.
The ID that is programmed into a device and used
by the device to identify itself to a system.
energy

diagnostic error An electrical load expressed in watts multiplied by


an interval of time, such as hours for kilowatt
An error for which the meter has been hours. The integral of active power with respect to
programmed to generate a diagnostic error code time.
(such as loss of phase or register full scale).
FCS
display
Abbreviation for Field Collection System
Provides a visual indication of the data
accumulated by the register.
Field-Pro system

display duration A software tool for programming and reading


meters at the metering site. The Field-Pro system
A programmed number of seconds during which a is used in conjunction with a PC-PRO+ Advanced
quantity displays on the LCD before scrolling to master station which provides the program files,
the next quantity. system defaults, and other configuration
information. See also master station (on page
446).

User's Manual 444


Proprietary and Confidential
firmware IEC-60870-5-102 Plus protocol
A set of instructions stored in the meter’s EPROM The IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol includes
(erasable programmable read-only memory). additional features not available with the IEC
60870-5-102 protocol. In addition to load profile
fixed decimal retrieval, the IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol can
retrieve 4 energy registers, 4 last self-reads, 16
A programmable format that always displays the event summaries, CT and VT pulse weights, the
same number of digits to the right of the decimal. meter status and meter messages.

floating decimal IEC-60870-5-102 protocol


A programmable format that allows a maximum A read-only protocol common in Europe. The IEC
number of digits to the right of the decimal to 60870-5-102 protocol is used for load profile and
change based on the calculated value. event data retrieval. This protocol was previously
called the IEC 870-5-102 protocol.
flow type
Refers to the position of the vectors in the power initialize
circle. There are eight types of flows: Delivered The process of programming a metering device.
(DEL), Received (REC), Total (TOT), Net (NET), Initialization of a meter will overwrite all current
Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 (quadrants 1 through 4). values in the meter.

harmonic interruption
An effect that causes the true sine wave of See voltage interruption (on page 451).
alternating voltages and currents to be distorted.
interval length
HH-Pro application
The duration of the interval. The time that each
The HH-Pro application is used to perform certain interval lasts before a new interval begins. Used
meter installation and maintenance functions at the for demand calculation.
meter site. The HH-Pro software runs on an Itron
FC200 or FC200R handheld computer as a client
KYZ output
of the PC-PRO+ Advanced system.
Pulse initiator outputs. A Form C contact closure
hysteresis loss output that generates pulses per the programmed
Ke value.
The energy lost in a magnetic core due to the
variation of magnetic flux within the core.
KYZ pulse weights

ID code The secondary unit per pulse constant used for a


KYZ output. Each KYZ output may have a
A code that identifies an electrical quantity. This different pulse weight. For example, watthours per
code displays on the register along with the value. pulse.
ID codes are assigned by the user at program time.
lagging current
IEC-1107 protocol
An alternating current which, in each half-cycle,
A read-only protocol used for data retrieval reaches its maximum value a fraction of a cycle
later than the maximum value of the voltage which
produces it.

User's Manual 445


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

LCD Meter Communication Manager


Liquid Crystal Display. The Meter Communication Manager is the tool for
communicating with meters and is used to read
leading current and diagnose meters. It is also used to program and
reconfigure meters.
An alternating current which, in each half-cycle,
reaches its maximum value a fraction of a cycle
Meter ID
sooner than the maximum value of the voltage
which produces it. A unique number that identifies a meter. For some
device types, the meter ID is the first nine
LED characters of the meter serial number and meter
ID2 is the last nine characters of the serial number.
Light Emitting Diode.
Note: For SENTINEL meters, the meter ID is the
load profile data same as the user-entered Unit ID.
Also called interval pulse data or mass memory
data. Pulse data accumulated in user-specified Meter Image File
discrete blocks of time (interval lengths). A file that represents the meter’s configuration as
well as the data in the meter. While you are online
Loader protocol with a meter, you can save the meter data as a
Meter Image File. You can open the Meter Image
A read/write protocol used for downloading new
File in PC-PRO+ Advanced and view the data or
firmware to a meter
export MV-90 HHF data for use by a third-party
system. Meter Image Files can also be used by
mass memory EnergyAudit for data analysis.
The meter function that accumulate pulses in
proportion to accumulated energy in programmed Meter Work List
intervals.
A work list spreadsheet file used by the used by
the HH-Pro application to automate meter
master station installation and maintenance functions for a meter
The PC-PRO+ Advanced master station for a route. For more information see HH-Pro
Field-Pro, Shop-Pro, or HH-Pro client system. See application (on page 445).
also System Manager application. (see "System
Manager application" on page 450) MeterKey
A software application used with a MeterKey Card
maximum demand and smartcard reader which allows users to change
The highest demand calculated during any interval the features of supported meters without returning
over a selected period of time. The Maximum the meter to the factory. MeterKey allows users to
Demand quantity displayed in Test Mode is that upgrade or downgrade SENTINEL™ and
value calculated over the test interval only. (This VECTRON® meters and upgrade QUANTUM®
can differ from the Normal Mode demand Q1000 meters.
interval.)
Customers purchase basic meters and then order
the MeterKey upgrades from their sales
representative. The MeterKey upgrades are
shipped to customers on a MeterKey Card.

User's Manual 446


Proprietary and Confidential
Mini-DLMS protocol optical port
The read/write protocol used by metering devices. The communication medium used when
This protocol must be programmed on at least one programming through the meter cover.
port. After the meter is initialized, data can be
retrieved by other protocols. optical tower
Tower located on the face of the meter. The meter
mode
can be programmed and communicated with
A set of features controlling the meter’s operation, through the optical tower.
the items displayed on the meter LCD, and other
related device functions. See also Normal Mode peak demand
(on page 447), Test Mode (on page 450), Alternate
Mode (on page 442), and Test Alternate Mode (on See maximum demand (on page 446).
page 450).
phase angle
multi-drop The phase angle (phase difference between a
A meter installation configuration where more sinusoidal voltage and a sinusoidal current) is the
than one meter is connected to a communication number of electrical degrees between the
device such as a line sharing device, data switch, beginning of the cycle of voltage and the
or modem splitter in a radial configuration. PC- beginning of the cycle of current.
PRO+ Advanced supports multi-drop
configurations in which signal echo is not used for phase imbalance
Q1000, SENTINEL, and VECTRON meters.
A condition whereby one-phase voltage fails a
Communication takes place via RS-232, RS-485,
user-programmed percentage out-of-tolerance
or the optical port connection.
compared to the average three-phase voltage. A
balanced condition exists when the voltage
net (NET) imbalance is zero. For the imbalance condition to
Accounts for net energy (energy in both be met, the percent imbalance must exceed a
directions). programmed threshold and last longer than 1
Net (NET)=Delivered (DEL)-Received (REC) second.
A register accumulating a net quantity can be
incrementing or decrementing depending on the phone line sharing
energy flow.
A meter installation configuration which allows
auto-answer meters to be connected to a single
network connection analog telephone line for remote interrogation. PC-
Log on to a meter using a multi-drop or phone line PRO+ Advanced supports phone line sharing for
sharing network connection. SENTINEL meters for a master meter and a
maximum of four subordinate meters.
nonvolatile memory
Power Circle
See EEPROM (on page 442).
A graphical display of meter data in which watts is
represented on the X-axis, var is represented on
Normal Mode
the Y-axis, and VA is represented as an angle
A meter operation and display mode which between watts and var. Also see Q1, Q2, Q3, and
includes all routine meter operations. Q4.

User's Manual 447


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

power down protocol data server (PDS)


To de-energize or remove energy from the meter. A file that defines a maximum of 100 meter
elements that an advanced protocol can retrieve
power factor from a meter. This file is configured using the
Protocol Editor for Q1000 software
The ratio of the active power to the apparent
power.
PSEM protocol

power up Protocol Standards for Electricity Meters. An


ANSI standard protocol for electricity meters
To energize or apply power to the meter. (ANSI C12.18)

primary rated Q1 Power Circle Quadrant


Quantities that are multiplied by any transformer The first energy flow quadrant. A register
and/or custom ratio. These quantities reflect the accumulating a Q1 quantity increments only when
values measured at the primary of a step-down the vectors are in Q1. The value is always
transformer. See also secondary rated (on page positive.
449).
Q2 Power Circle Quadrant
primary/direct reading register
The second energy flow quadrant. A register
A register in which the readings take into account accumulating a Q2 quantity increments only when
the register multiplier. the vectors are in Q2. The value is always
positive.
Program Files
The program files are created by the applications Q3 Power Circle Quadrant
within the Data Manager. They consist of TOU The third energy flow quadrant. A register
Schedules, Custom Schedules, Display Schedules, accumulating a Q3 quantity increments only when
and Protocol Files. These files are used by the the vectors are in Q3. The value is always
Communication Manager, Field-Pro, and HH-Pro positive.
to program and reconfigure meters.
Communication Manager and Field-Pro get the
Q4 Power Circle Quadrant
program files through replication by the System
Manager. HH-Pro gets the program files through The fourth energy flow quadrant. A register
synchronization. accumulating a Q4 quantity increments only when
the vectors are in Q4. The value is always
protocol configuration file positive.

A file that defines the set of meter items exposed,


QDIP protocol
their types, and the conversion services that will be
applied by an advanced protocol. This file is A read-only protocol which emulates the 26
configured using the Protocol Editor for Q1000 quantities available in a QUANTUM meter. This
software. allows you to directly connect the Q1000 or
SENTINEL meter to existing RTUs.

User's Manual 448


Proprietary and Confidential
Q-hour register multiplier
A register that measures the quantity obtained by A programmable value which is used in
lagging the applied voltage to a watthour meter by calculations of displayed energy and demand
60 degrees, or for electronic meters, by delaying readings. The Register Multiplier can be changed
the digitized voltage samples by a time equivalent if a Custom Multiplier type is selected on the
to 60 electrical degrees. Device Multipliers dialog.

RAM disk storage class rolling demand interval


The data is stored in a virtual disk that is A method of measuring power or other quantities
maintained with a battery over outages. by taking measurements within fixed intervals of
the demand period.
reactive power
Schedule Editor
For sinusoidal quantities in a two-wire circuit,
reactive power is the product of the voltage, the The Schedule Editor application is used to create
current, and the sine of the phase angle between custom billing or self-read schedules for
them with the current taken as reverence. In a CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON (V&I), and
polyphase circuit, it is the sum of the reactive SENTINEL meters. You can select each demand
powers of the individual phases. reset date individually and save the set of dates as
a schedule.
reactive quantities
SCS protocol
Quantities such as var demand and varh-hours.
A read-only protocol used in the factory for
reactive volt-amperes calibration and repair. Applies to CENTRON
meters, MT200 meters, FULCRUM meters,
See var (on page 451). VECTRON meters, QUANTUM meters, and
SQ400 meters.
received (REC)
The energy flows from the end user to the utility. secondary rated
The measured quantity is negative. A register Quantities that are not multiplied by any
accumulating a received quantity makes the transformer and/or custom ratio. These quantities
measured quantity positive so that the register is reflect the values measured at the secondary of a
always positive and keeps incrementing as energy step-down transformer. See also primary rated (on
flows. page 448).

reconfigure device security code


An option on the Communications menu that A code that permits access to a device, a set of
allows you to modify certain meter program data, or a program.
components without re-initializing the whole
meter. Only the data for the reconfigured
Service Point
components is erased.
A service point is an end point on a system. For
register full scale example, it could be the actual meter and its
location. A user can connect to a service point
A kW demand value that defines the maximum either directly (probe), multi-drop, phone line,
rated demand for a particular meter installation. ethernet, or network.

User's Manual 449


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

Settings Files System Manager application


The settings files are managed by System Manager The PC-PRO+ Advanced 7.0 or later System
but are used by all of the applications within the Manager application is used to define the system-
system. They consist of default values, device wide parameters for PC-PRO+ Advanced, Field-
security codes, programming options, DST dates, Pro, Shop-Pro, and HH-Pro. See also master
Field-Pro settings, security, replica file settings, station (on page 446).
meter change out settings, and HH-Pro settings.
These settings are moved through the system by test alternate Kh
synchronization for HH-Pro and replica files for
the other applications. The energy represented by the equivalent of one
disk revolution. Test Alternate Mode Kh is
independent from the Kh specified for Normal
Shop-Pro System
Mode. Test Mode values do not affect meter
A system designed for programming Itron’s registers.
electricity metering devices in a meter shop or
similar environment. The Shop-Pro system is a Test Alternate Mode
client of the PC-PRO+ Advanced system. Shop-
Pro uses program files, programming options, A meter operation and display mode for
default values, security settings, and other settings SENTINEL meters which allows testing of the
defined on a PC-PRO+ Advanced master station. register without altering billing data.
Shop-Pro settings are installed in one easy step by
loading a Replica File created on the PC-PRO+ test Kh
Advanced master station. See also master station
The energy represented by the equivalent of one
(on page 446).
disk revolution. Test Mode Kh is independent
from the Kh specified for Normal Mode. Test
SiteScan Mode values do not affect meter registers.
SiteScan On-Site Monitoring System. A set of
tools used to diagnose and resolve meter Test Mode
installation or tampering problems. SiteScan
a meter operation and display mode which allows
consists of meter self-diagnostics, Toolbox Mode
testing of the register without altering billing data.
on-site or on-line display, system and installation
diagnostic checks, and diagnostic output alarms.
time of use (TOU)
standalone connection A metering configuration that allows the energy
provider to assign different rates to different times
Log on to a single meter.
of the day. Daily TOU patterns can be assigned to
different days of the week, seasons, and holidays.
storage class
The type of storage used for preserving data over time synchronization
outages. Typical classes are: RAM disk, Flash
Synchronizing a meter’s clock to an external
disk, Ferro RAM disk, or NONE. NONE indicates
device such as a Global Positioning System (GPS)
that the data is not preserved over outages; the data
for Q1000 meters or to a pulse input for
exists only when the meter is powered. As an
SENTINEL meters.
example, instantaneous values are not preserved
and are calculated when the meter starts metering.

User's Manual 450


Proprietary and Confidential
Toolbox Mode var-hours delivered
A meter operation and display mode that displays The total (integral+fractional) of the aggregate var-
information used for individual phase hours delivered.
measurement and system and installation
diagnostic checks on the meter display panel. See var-hours received
also SiteScan (on page 450).
The total (integral+fractional) of the aggregate var-
hours received.
total (TOT)
Regardless of the direction of the flow, the vectorial quantity
measured quantity is always positive. (Energy
delivered plus energy received.) Any physical quantity whose specification
involves both magnitude and direction and that
obeys the parallelogram law of addition. The
totalization
product of vectors A and B has a magnitude
The aggregation of two or more registers. obtained by multiplying the magnitudes of A and
B by the sine of the angle between them.
unit ID
volatile storage class
A number that uniquely identifies a meter. The
unit ID can be entered when you initialize a The data is lost over an outage. An example of this
device. Programming Options must be set up to class is the instantaneous readings. The values are
prompt to enter the unit ID at initialization. For lost over an outage, but are updated every second
more information, see Defining Programming and are set to new values when the meter powers
Options (on page 38). up. See also storage class (on page 450).

Note: For CENTRON (C12.19), CENTRON volt (V)


(V&I), and SENTINEL meters, the user-entered
unit ID is also used as the meter ID. The practical unit of electromotive force, or
potential difference. One volt will cause one
ampere to flow when impressed across a one ohm
unit type
resistor.
A set of unique identifiers for the types of
metering devices PC-PRO+ Advanced software voltage interruption
can program and communicate with.
A complete loss of power that may last from
several milliseconds to several hours. Interruptions
user data
with duration less than two minutes are called
Fields available to display user-defined data on the momentary interruptions. Interruptions of duration
meter. longer than two minutes are called sustained
interruptions.
var
Volt-amperes reactive. The out-of-phase voltage quality
component of the total volt-amperes in a circuit Information about events such as voltage sags,
which includes inductive or capacitive reactance. swells, interruptions, and imbalances based on a
In an AC circuit, reactive volt-amperes are the programmable magnitude, hysteresis or threshold,
product of the total volt-amperes and the sine of and duration.
the angle between the current and voltage.

User's Manual 451


Proprietary and Confidential
Glossary of Terms

voltage quality threshold watthours uni-directional


A programmable limit that, if exceeded, triggers a The sum of watthours delivered and watthours
response, either the recording of a voltage quality received.
event or the pulsing of an output or other
programmable action.

volt-ampere (VA)
The unit of electrical measurement equal to the
product of voltage and current.

volt-hour (Vh)
The average voltage or potential difference
measured over a one hour period. One volt-hour is
equal to one amp flowing through a one ohm
resistor for one hour.

VT ratio
Voltage Transformer ratio. The ratio required to
reduce primary voltages for transformer rated
meters. See Also CT ratio (on page 443).

watt (W)
The practical unit of active power which is defined
as the rate at which energy is delivered to a circuit.
It is the power expended when a current of one
ampere flows through a resistance of one ohm.

watthour (Wh)
The practical unit of electric energy which is
expended in one hour when the average power
during the hour is one watt.

watthours delivered
The total of the aggregate watt-hours delivered. It
is primary or secondary rated depending on the
multiplier chosen.

watthours received
The total (integral+fractional) of the aggregate
watt-hours received. It is primary or secondary
rated depending on the multiplier chosen.

User's Manual 452


Proprietary and Confidential
Index

Components Available for Reconfigure • 379


A Configure Ports • 329
Access Groups Connect to network devices • 339
security • 73 Connect to Next • 339
Activity Status • 389 Connecting the PC and Meter • 327
Reset • 389 Connecting to Multi-Drop Network Meters • 348
reset counters • 386 Create Service Point • 354
Add Multi-drop Network Service Point • 363 Create Service Point Wizard • 351
Add New User • 74, 75, 77 creating a meter data file • 326
Add PLS Network Service Point • 367 creating a program file • 222
Add Standalone Service Point • 353 CT ratio • 324, 354
Address Book • 336 CT Ratios • 20
add PLS service point • 367 SENTINEL • 20
create service point • 354
Edit Network • 342, 346 D
export • 220 Daylight Saving Time • 61
import • 220, 347 default device security codes • 23
multidrop network service point • 363 Default Program • 220
select network • 353 default values • 9, 13
Standalone Service Point • 341 Default Values • 13
CENTRON P/DR • 16
B Kh values • 14
Batch Initialization • 372, 374 phone home numbers • 19
baud rate table • 338 pulse weight • 17
baud rates • 338 SENTINEL CT ratios • 20
billing registers • 387 SENTINEL Kh • 15
Billing registers SENTINEL VT ratios • 21
reset • 386 defaults
system • 9
C defining communication ports • 313
defining default values • 13
calendar • 234
defining security • 71
Calendar Editor • 234
Delete Program File • 220
CENTRON • 1
demand • 386
CENTRON baud rates • 338
remote reset • 386
CENTRON Display Editor • 268
device • 384
CENTRON P/DR values • 16
device activity counters • 386
CENTRON Programming Options • 38
resetting • 386
CENTRON Security Codes • 24
Device Logon Options
Change Display Mode • 382
Field-Pro • 68
Clearing SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data • 418
Device Programmer screen
Clock • 384
description • 216
Close Meter Image File • 220
Device security codes
Close Program • 220
default • 23
COM Ports • 313
device status • 402
communication ports • 313
Device Types Supported • 326
Communications • 400
devices supported • 1
component window • 400
User's Manual 453
Proprietary and Confidential
Index

diagnostic snapshots
Clearing data from meter • 418 G
Selecting Data to View • 418 graph
Diagnostic Status load profile • 409
SiteScan Toolbox • 413
Diagnostics Snapshots SENTINEL Meters • 417 H
Display Editor • 268
Harmonic Data
Default Date Format • 277
Q1000 meter • 426
Display File • 269
SENTINEL meter • 426
Display Format
viewing • 425
SENTINEL • 22
Harmonic values (SENTINEL) • 413
Display Mode • 382
Harmonics Status Codes • 441
Displaying a Program File • 227, 228
help
Documentation Set • 4
using help • 5
DST Change Dates • 61
HHF files • 429
E
I
Edit Menu • 221
icon • 215
Edit Network • 346
Import
Edit Register Values • 391
Address Book • 220, 347
Edit service point
Program • 220
network • 342
Initialization
standalone • 341
batch • 372
Edit Standalone Service Point • 341
Initialize Device • 370, 371
Editing Registers • 391
Instantaneous Harmonic Values (SENTINEL) •
Event Log • 393
413
Event Log Pointer • 393
Instantaneous Readings
exiting PC-PRO+ • 233
SiteScan Toolbox • 413
export • 220, 431
Export
Address Book • 220 K
Field-Pro Settings • 220 Kh values • 15
Load profile data • 428 Kh Values • 14
MV-90 HHF data • 428 SENTINEL • 15
Program • 220
to HTML • 220, 431 L
Extended Load Profile Status Codes • 438 load profile data • 404
Load Profile data • 405
F load profile data summary • 411
factor • 324, 354 Load profile export • 428
Field-Pro load profile graph • 409
export • 220 Load Profile View Selection • 405
Field-Pro Settings • 64 Load Replica File • 82
Device Logon Options • 68 logging off • 326
overview • 65 logging on • 326
File Menu • 220, 236 logging on to the meter • 327
Firmware Loader Recovery • 329 Logon Address Book • 336
FULCRUM SQ400 Logon Manual Connection • 329
SQ400 • 1 logon options • 68
Logon Options
User's Manual 454
Proprietary and Confidential
Index

Field-Pro • 68
loop configuration • 349 P
Loop Multi-Drop Configuration • 349 P/DR Values
Loop Multi-Drop Configurations • 349 CENTRON • 16
passwords
M device security codes • 23
manager • 9 users • 75
Manual Connection logon • 329 PC-PRO+ Advanced • 215
manual override option • 327 PC-PRO+ Advanced help • 5
MAPS Port Configuration • 313 Phase Readings
Master Station Data Directory • 65 SiteScan Toolbox • 413
menu • 222, 238 Phone Home Numbers • 19
Meter ID • 38 phone line sharing • 329, 354
Meter Image File • 220 baud rates • 338
create • 429 Port Configuration
meter image file data • 401 edit • 319
meter values • 326 Ports • 313
Mode • 382 Power Circle • 413, 419
Display • 382 power factor • 409
Modem Answer Delay • 329 Power Quality data
modems • 313 viewing • 420
modifying a program file • 230 primary values • 324
Multi-drop • 329, 354 print • 220
Multi-drop Configuration Diagrams • 348, 349 Print Preview • 220
multi-drop networks Print Setup • 220
baud rates • 338 program • 220, 227, 228
MV-90 HHF Export • 428 Program
export • 220
N import • 220
name • 354 Program Editor • 215, 221
Network defining default values • 23
Multi-Drop configuration • 348, 349 File Menu • 220
Network Address • 329, 354 Help Menu • 222
Network Type • 329, 354 menu options • 215
New Program • 220 menus • 220
Null Code program file • 229
device security code • 329 displaying • 227
opening • 227, 228
O saving • 230
viewing • 229
optical port • 327
Program Validation • 380
head type • 323
programming a meter • 326
Optical Probe
programming options • 51, 56, 59
model • 68, 323
Programming Options
options
CENTRON • 38
system • 9
Q1000 • 51
override security codes • 24
SENTINEL • 56
overview • 437
VECTRON • 59
Pulse Weight default values • 17

User's Manual 455


Proprietary and Confidential
Index

settings
Q Field-Pro • 64
QDIP settings • 329 SiteScan Diagnostic Snapshot Data • 418
QUANTUM • 1 SiteScan Diagnostics Snapshots • 417
QUANTUM Q1000 • 1 SiteScan Toolbox • 412
SL300 • 1
R Snapshot
SiteScan Diagnostics • 417
reconfigure device • 326
source • 51
registers • 326, 404
Standalone Service Point • 329, 341
Replica File
adding • 353
creating • 81
Start menu • 215
loading • 82
Status Codes • 437
settings • 79
System Resources • 313
Replica File Settings • 79
replication • 77
T
resources • 313
type • 329, 354
S
U
sample files • 5
Save • 220 Unit ID • 38, 51
Save As • 220 user interface
saving a program file Program Editor • 218
modify program file • 230 User passwords • 75
Schedule Features for Device Types • 235 users manuals • 5
security • 71
Security V
Access Groups • 73 Validation Results • 380
defining • 71 values • 391
Features • 72 Vector Diagram
Users • 75 SiteScan Toolbox • 413
security code VECTRON • 1
devices • 329 Voltage Imbalance Selection • 424
security codes • 33, 35, 37 Voltage Interruption Selection • 425
Security Codes Voltage Quality Data
CENTRON • 24 Q1000 meter • 422
override • 24 SENTINEL • 420
Q1000 • 33 viewing • 420
SENTINEL • 35 Voltage Quality Status Codes • 440
VECTRON • 37 Voltage Sag and Swell Selection • 423
Select Network • 353 VT ratio • 324, 354
SENTINEL • 1 VT ratios • 21
SENTINEL display format
default values W
display format • 22 Welcome • 234
SENTINEL Event Log Pointer • 393 window • 413
SENTINEL Firmware • 394
serial number • 38, 51
serial port • 313, 327
setting the date and time • 384
Setting the Device Clock • 384
User's Manual 456
Proprietary and Confidential

You might also like